Home

HP NW280AAABA User's Manual

1. Add a Tap and select Point On constrained Choosing Point On rather than Point means that the point point will be constrained to whatever it is placed on Tap anywhere on the y graph press z 2 and then press B3 f k gt Notice that a point is a V J hi added to the graph and F H 2 Ra given a name B in this L 4 4 inter GA G example Tapa blank area of the screen to deselect everything Objects colored cyan are selected 136 Geometry Add a tangent Geometry 8 10 T 12 13 14 15 We will now add a tangent to the curve making point B the point of tangency gt More gt Tangent Tap on point B press and then press B3 A tangent is drawn y through point B Depending on where LAT you placed point B your illustration might be different from the one at 7 the right 5 4 2 Pointer 3 32 We ll now make the tangent stand out by giving it a bright color If the curve is selected tap a blank area of the screen to deselect and then tap on the tangent to select it Press and select Change Color Pick a color from the color picker press and then tap on a blank area of the screen Your tangent should now be colored Press to select point B If there is only one point on the screen pressing automatically selects it If there is more than one point a
2. B c D E roe if i i i i HP logo in it at the top b 5 16 B2 rz 3 27 B1 243 729 left corner Alternatively ffi lea ps6 hoz4 4096 5 p5 a25 le25 b125 f5625 you can use the cursor 6 i 216 1296 7776 446656 7 49 B43 f401 f16807 11764 keys to move to that cell B lea 512 4096 b2768 26214 3 J87 729 6561 59049 53144 just as you can to select a 10 100 1000 10000 100000 10000 11h21 1331 14641 f161051 17715 i ROWN Col 1 column or row heading gegen qos eer aS GD 2 On the entry line type Bm Rowl s Col lat JI Note that Row and Col are built in variables They are placeholders for the row number and column number of the cell that has a formula containing them 3 Tap or Press _ fr Note that each column gives the nth power of the row number starting with the squares Thus 95 is 59 049 Import data You can import data from the Statistics 1 Var and Statistics 2Var apps and from any app customized from a statistics app In the procedure immediately below dataset D1 from the Statistics 1Var app is being imported 1 Select a cell 2 Enter Statistics 1Var D1 3 Press _ _ 202 Spreadsheet External functions You can use in a formula any function available on the Math um f i F CAS App User or Catlg menus see chapter 21 Functions and commands on page 307 For example to find the root of 3 x closest to x The column is filled w
3. Example fcooeff 1 2 0 1 3 1 returns x 1 2 x x 3 T Functions and commands 341 Random Minimum Algebra Quotient Remainder Returns a vector of the coefficients of a polynomial of degree Integer and where the coefficients are random integers in the range 99 through 99 with uniform distribution or in an interval specified by Interval Use with poly2symbol to create a random polynomial in any variable randpoly Integer Interval Dist where Interval is of the form Reall Real2 Example randpoly t 8 1 1 returns a vector of 9 random integers all of them between 1 and 1 With only a matrix as argument returns the minimal polynomial in x of a matrix written as a list of its coefficients With a matrix and a variable as arguments returns the minimum polynomial of the matrix written in symbolic form with respect to the variable pmin Mtrx Var Example pmin 1 0 0 1 x gives x 1 Returns a vector containing the coefficients of the Euclidean quotient of two polynomials The polynomials may be written as a list of coefficients or in symbolic form quo Listl List2 Var or quo Polyl Poly2 Var Example quo 1l 2 3 4 1 2 returns 1 4 11 Returns a vector containing the coefficients of the remainder of the Euclidean quotient of two polynomials The polynomials may be written as a list of coefficients or in symbolic form rem Listl List2 Var or
4. Getting started with the Sequence app The following example explores the well known Fibonacci sequence where each term from the third term on is the sum of the preceding two terms In this example we specify three sequence fields the first term the second term and a rule for generating all subsequent terms Sequence app 281 Open the Open the Sequence Sequence Symbolic View app ui Sequence app Ne mas Select me Sequence u2 1 E u22 U2 N The app opens in u3 Symbolic view COEREREDTIHET Define the Define the Fibonacci sequence expression U 1 U 1 U U U for n gt 2 In the U1 1 field specify the first term of the sequence 1 In the U1 2 field specify the second term of the sequence 1 In the UI N field Sequence Symbolic View specify the formula eeu nee E u21 for finding the nth Ae ETA term of the sequence eo L from the previous Jt U2 N two terms using the u3 1 buttons at the bottom qaqa EDS ETRE of the screen to help with some entries Optionally choose a color for your graph see Choose a color for plots on page 85 Set up the plot A Open the Plot Setup view p p Setup 5 Reset all settings to their default values Clear 282 Sequence app Plot the sequence Explore the graph Select Stairstep from the Seq Plot menu Set the X Rng maximum and the Y Rng maximum to 8 as shown at the right Plot the Fi
5. If the Exam Mode Exam Mode 802 screen is not Configuration Defaut am Timeout 15 Minutes showing press Password EA tap Erase memory and Blink LED top CZ Choose exam mode configuration If a configuration other than Default Exam is required choose it from the Configuration list Select a time out period from the Timeout list Note that 8 hours is the maximum period If you are preparing to supervise a student examination make sure that the time out period chosen is greater than the duration of the examination Enter a password of between 1 and 10 characters The password must be entered if you or another user wants to cancel exam mode before the time out period has elapsed If you want to erase the memory of the calculator select Erase memory This will erase all user entries and return the calculator to its factory default settings If you want the exam mode indicator to flash periodically while the calculator is in exam mode select Blink LED Using the supplied USB cable connect a student s calculator Insert the micro A connector the one with the rectangular end into the USB port on the sending calculator and the other connector into the USB port on the receiving calculator To activate the configuration on an attached calculator tap BEB The Exam Mode screen closes The connected calculator is now in exam Exam Mode 65 mode with the specified disabled featu
6. Syntax EDITMAT name Starts the Matrix Editor and displays the specified matrix If used in programming returns to the program when user presses g Even though this command returns the matrix that was edited EDITMAT cannot be used as an argument in other matrix commands Syntax REDIM name size Redimensions the specified matrix name or vector to size For a matrix size is a list of two integers n1 n2 For a vector size is a list containing one integer n Existing values in the matrix are preserved Fill values will be 0 Syntax REPLACE name start object Replaces portion of a matrix or vector stored in name with an object starting at position start Start for a matrix is a list containing two numbers for a vector it is a single number REPLACE also works with lists graphics and strings For example REPLACE 123456 2 GRM gt 1GRM56 Syntax SCALE name value rownumber Multiplies the specified row_number of the specified matrix by value Syntax SCALEADD name value row row2 Multiplies the specified row1 of the matrix name by value then adds this result to the second specified row2 of the matrix name and replaces row1 with the result Syntax SUB name start end Extracts a sub object a portion of a list matrix or graphic and stores it in name Start and end are each specified using a list with two numbers for a matrix a number for vecto
7. When optional arguments are provided in a command with multiple optional parameters like RECT the arguments provided correspond to the leftmost parameters first For example in the program below the arguments 40 and 90 in the RECT_P command correspond to x1 and y1 The argument 000000 corresponds to edgecolor since there is only the one additional argument If there had been two additional arguments they would have referred to x2 and y2 rather than edgecolor and fillcolor The program produces a rectangle with a black edge and black fill Programming in HP PPL 541 SUBGROB_P SUBGROB EXPORT BOX BEGIN ECT R RECT_P 40 90 0 00000 W AIT zal ND The program below also uses the RECT_P command In this case the pair of arguments 320 and 240 correspond to x2 and y2 The program produces are rectangle with a black edge and a red fill EXPORT BOX BEGIN RECT RECT P 40 90 32 0 240 000000 FF0000 WAIT END Syntax SUBGROB srcGRB x1 yl x2 y2 trgtGRB SUBGROB_P srcGRB x1l yl x2 y2 trgtGRB Sets trgtGRB to be a copy of the area of srcGRB between points x y 1 and x2 y2 srcGRB can be any of the graphics variables and is optional The default is GO trgtGRB can be any of the graphics variables except GO x2 y2 are optional and if not specitied will be the bottom right of srcGRB xl yl ar
8. Returns a trigonometric expression linearized and with any sine and cosine terms of the same angle collected together tcollect Expr Example tcollect sin x cos x returns J2 cos x 4 n 336 Functions and commands trigexpand trig2exp Integer Divisors Factors Factor List Returns a trigonometric expression in expanded form trigexpand Expr Example trigexpand sin 3 x gives 4 cos x 2 1 sin x Returns an expression with trigonometric functions rewritten as complex exponentials without linearization trig2exp Expr Example trig2exp sin x returns z CE Returns the list of divisors of an integer or a list of integers idivis Integer or idivis Intgrl Intgr2 Example idivis 12 returns 1 2 3 4 6 12 Returns the prime factor decomposition of an integer ifactor Integer Example With the CAS setting Simplify set to None ifactor 150 returns 2 3 5 2 Returns a vector containing the prime factors of an integer or a list of integers with each factor followed by its multiplicity ifactors Integer or ifactors Intgrl Intgr2 Example ifactors 150 returns 2 1 3 1 5 2 Functions and commands 337 GCD LCM Prime Test if Prime Nth Prime Next Prime Previous Prime Euler Returns the greatest common divisor of two or more integers gcd Intgrl Intgr2 Example gcd 32 120 636 returns 4 Re
9. and then the actual variable name For example the qualified variable Function Xmin refers to the value of Xmin within the Function app Similarly the qualified variable Parametric Xmin refers to the value of Xmin in the Parametric app Despite having the same name Xmin the variables could have different values You do likewise to use a local variable in a program specify the name of the program followed by the dot and then the variable name You can define your own functions in a program and data can be passed to a function using parameters Functions can return a value using the RETURN statement or not When a program is executed from Home view the program will return the value returned by the last statement that was executed Furthermore functions can be defined in a program and exported for use by other programs in much the same way that variables can be defined and used elsewhere In this section we will create a small set of programs each illustrating some aspect of programming in the HP Prime Each program will be used as a building block for a custom app described in the next section App Programs Programming in HP PPL 513 Program ROLLDIE Program ROLLMANY We ll first create a program called ROLLDIE It simulates the rolling of a single die returning a random integer between 1 and whatever number is passed into the function In the Program Catalog create a new program named ROLLDIE F
10. 411 reduced_conic ref remove reorder Takes a conic expression and returns a vector with the following items The origin of the conic The matrix of a basis in which the conic is reduced e Oor 1 0 if the conic is degenerate The reduced equation of the conic e A vector of the conic s parametric equations reduced_conic Expr Vector Example reduced conic x 2 2 x 2 y 1 returns Hi al parafii passia 4401 s22 aoa Returns the solution to a system of linear equations written in matrix form ref Matrix Example 31 2 12 ref 4 returns 33 3 2 2 12 Given an element and a list or vector removes any occurrence of that element in the list or vector and returns the result remove Element Vector or remove Element List Example remove 6 1 2 6 7 returns 1 2 7 Given an expression and a vector of variables reorders the variables in the expression according to the order given in the vector reorder Expr Vector Example reorder x 4 2 x y2 y x gives y2 x242 x 412 Functions and commands residue restart resultant revlist romberg row Returns the residue of an expression at a value residue Expr Var Value Example residue 1 z z 0 returns 1 Purges all the variables restart NULL Returns the resultant i e the determinant of the Sylvester matrix of two polynomials resultant Polyl Poly2 Var Example resultant x 3 x 1
11. Annunciator Meaning Continued W Yellow The user keyboard is active The next key press will enter the custom ized object associated with the key See The User Keyboard Customiz ing key presses on page 516 for more information Time Current time The default is 24 hour format but you can choose AM PM format See Home settings on page 30 for more information Green with Battery charge indicator gray border The HP Prime offers two modes of navigation touch and keys In many cases you can tap on an icon field menu or object to select or deselect it For example you can open the Function app by tapping once on its icon in the Application Library However to open the Application Library you will need to press a key Ga Instead of tapping an icon in the Application Library you can also press the cursor keys until the app you want to open is highlighted and then press Ete In the Application Library you can also type the first one or two letters of an app s name to highlight the app Then either tap the app s icon or press to open it Sometimes a touch or key touch combination is available For example you can deselect a toggle option either by tapping twice on it or by using the arrow keys to move to the field and then tapping a touch button along the bottom of the screen in this case RA Note that you must use your finger or a capacitive stylus to select
12. Enters a space during text entry o 4 Page i Moves from page to page ina multi page note Shift Shows options for copying text in a note See below Begin Copy option Mark where to begin a text selection End Copy option Mark where to end a text selection mm Copy option Select the entire note Copy option Cut the selected text Copy Copy option Copy the selected text z6 z D E 5 Deletes the character to the left of the cursor 492 Notes and Info Entering uppercase and lowercase characters Button or Key Purpose Continued e E Clear F H Starts a new line Erases the entire note Menu for entering variable names and the contents of variables Menu for entering math commands Chars Displays a palette of special characters To type one highlight it and tap or press __ To copy a character without closing the Chars menu select it and tap Es The following table below describes how to quickly enter uppercase and lowercase characters Keys Purpose C aipha ALPHA C aipha alpha era oon Make the next character upper case Lock mode make all characters uppercase until the mode is reset With uppercase locked make next character lowercase With uppercase locked make alll characters lowercase until the mode is reset Reset uppercase lock mode Make the next character lower case Lock mode make all characters low
13. Tap on a point A and press L_ _ Tap on a segment and press _ _ A line is drawn through the point A and the midpoint of the segment Tap on a point A and press L_ _ Tap on a segment and press _ _ A line is drawn through the point A perpendicular to the segment or its extension The Polygon menu provides tools for drawing various polygons Tap at each vertex pressing after each tap Keyboard shortcut Tap at each vertex pressing after each tap Produces a pentagon Tap at each vertex pressing after each tap Produces a hexagon Tap at each vertex pressing after each tap Produces a regular hexagon that is one with sides of equal length and angles of equal measure Tap on a point and press _ _ Tap on a second point to define the length of one side of the regular hexagon and press _ _ The other 157 Special Eq triangle 1 Equilateral 4 Square Parallelogram Curve Circle Ellipse Hyperbola Parabola four vertices are automatically calculated and the regular hexagon is drawn Produces an equilateral triangle Tap at one vertex and press ft Tap at another vertex and press _ _ The location of the third vertex is automatically calculated and the triangle is drawn Tap at one vertex and press Ce Tap at another vertex and press __ The location of the third and fourth vertices are automatically calculated and the square is drawn Tap at one ve
14. Var2 Example linsolve xty z 1 x y 2 2 x z 3 x y Z returns 3 2 1 2 0 Rewrites an expression with the logarithms collected Applies In a n In b In a b n for an integer n incollect Expr Example Incollect 1n x 2 1n y returns 1n x y 2 Rewrites an expression containing a power that is a sum or product as a product of powers Applies a btc a b a c powexpand Expr Example powexpand 2 x y yields 24x 24y 332 Functions and commands texpand Exp amp Ln ey Inx _ xY xY gt ey Inx exp2trig expexpand Sine asinx gt acosx Expands a transcendental expression texpand Expr Example texpand sin 2 x exp x y returns exp x exp y 2 cos x sin x Returns an expression of the form e rewritten as a power of x Applies er nh x exp2pow Expr Example exp2pow exp 3 1n x gives x 3 Returns an expression with powers rewritten as an exponential Essentially the inverse of exp2pow pow2exp Expr Example pow2exp a b gives exp b 1n a Returns an expression with complex exponentials rewritten in terms of sine and cosine exp2trig Expr Example exp2trig exp i x gives cos x i sin x Returns an expression with exponentials in expanded form expexpand Expr Example expexpand exp 3 x gives exp x 3 Returns an expression with asin x rewritten as 7 2 acos
15. X intercepts Y intercepts horizontal extrema Ea v Intercepts Horizontal Extrema 2Edge 4Vertical Extrema 3Pol oiSInflections vertical extrema inflections The values shown using the Trace options depend on the Plot view window that is the values shown in the table are restricted to points visible in Plot view Zoom in or out in Plot view to get the values you want to see in the table in Numeric view 132 Advanced Graphing app Trace Edge 16 Tap and select Edge Now the table shows if possible pairs of values that make the relation true By default the first column is the Y column and there are multiple X columns in case more than one X value can be paired with the Y value to make the relation true Tap to make the first column an X column followed by a set of Y columns In the figure above for Y 0 there are 10 values of X in the default Plot view that make the relation Y SIN X true These are shown in the first row of the table It can be clearly seen that the sequence of X values have a common difference of r 1 570796 1 1 256637 1 9 42477796 1 580813 1 1 246620 1 9 52494538 1 236501 1 9 62613588 6 08182739 1 226168 1 9 72947061 5 97849265 1 215485 1 9 83629481 S 87166846 1 204277 1 9 94837674 5 75958653 11922871 1 006828E1 5 63968420 1 179097 1 1 0200181 5 50778781 1 163908 1 1 035207 1 5 35
16. are expressed in scientific notation that is in terms of powers of ten This is simpler to work with than 50 000 or 0 000 000 321 To enter numbers like these use the functionality This is easier than using L J10473 Example Suppose you want to calculate 4x 10 6 x 10 3x 10 First select Scientific as the number format 1 Open the Home Settings window 2 SelectScientific from the Number Format menu 3 Return home A Enter 462 05 13 edok Nal ce Home Settings Angle Measure Radians Number Format V Standard Fixed Scientific Engineering Complex a b Entry Me Integers Language English Decimal Mark Dot Choose format for numbers Getting started 27 Menus To select from a menu 5 Press The result is 8 0000815 This is equivalent to 8 x 10 4 0000E 13 6 0000E23 3 0000E 5 8 0000 15 A menu offers you a Geometry choice of items As in the F 1 Numbers case shown at the right zarithmetic _Jimaximum 3Trigonometry 2 Minimum 4Hyperbolic gt Modulus 1Argument SProbability 4Find Root 2Conjugate some menus have sub menus and sub sub List SPercentage 3Real Part menus Matrix 1 Complex 4Imaginary Part 8Special gt Exponential gt 5 Unit Vector Marn CTI There are two techniques for selecting an item from a menu e direct tapping and e using
17. uppercase until the mode is reset Reset uppercase lock alpha J mode Reset lowercase lock alpha _ alpha _ nee ter lowercase Lock mode makes all characters lowercase until the mode is reset With lowercase locked makes the next character uppercase Makes the next charac fer uppercase Lock mode makes all characters uppercase until the mode is reset With uppercase locked makes the next character lowercase With uppercase locked makes all characters low ercase until the mode is reset Reset lowercase lock mode Reset uppercase lock mode You can also enter text and other characters by displaying the characters palette vers Getting started 23 Math keys The most common math functions have their own keys on the keyboard or a key in combination with the key Example 1 To calculate SIN 10 press LSN 10 and press _f _ The answer displayed is 0 544 if your angle measure setting is radians Example 2 To find the square root of 256 press 256 and press _ _ The answer displayed is 16 Notice that the key initiates the operator represented in blue on the next key pressed in this case V on the key The mathematical functions not represented on the keyboard are on the Math CAS and Catlg menus see chapter 21 Functions and commands starting on page 307 Note that the order in which you enter operands and operators is determined by the entry m
18. 1 returns _ _41l This indicates that there are two intersections e 6 2 9 5 5 166 Geometry isobarycenter midpoint orthocenter point Geometry Returns the hypothetical center of mass of a set of points Works like barycenter but assumes that all points have equal weight isobarycenter pointl point2 pointn Example isobarycenter 3 3 3 V3 i returns point 3 V3 i 3 which is equivalent to 0 V3 Returns the midpoint of a segment The argument can be either the name of a segment or two points that define a segment In the latter case the segment need not actually be drawn midpoint segment or midpoint pointl point2 Example midpoint 0 6 6i returns point 3 3 Returns the orthocenter of a triangle that is the intersection of the three altitudes of a triangle The argument can be either the name of a triangle or three non collinear points that define a triangle In the latter case the triangle does not need to be drawn orthocenter triangle or orthocenter pointl point2 point3 Example orthocenter 0 4i 4 returns 0 0 Creates a point given the coordinates of the point Each coordinate may be a value or an expression involving variables or measurements on other objects in the geometric construction point reall real2 or point exprl expr2 Examples point 3 4 creates a point whose coordinates are 3 4 This point may be selected and moved later point
19. 2 Tap one corner of the area you want to zoom in on and then top CB 3 Tap the diagonally opposite corner of the area you want to zoom in on and then tap GB The screen fills with the area you specified To return to the default view tap and select Decimal You can also use the cursor keys to specify the area you want to zoom in on 90 An introduction to HP apps Views menu Testing a zoom with split screen viewing Zoom examples The most commonly used zoom options are also available on the Views menu These are ee Split Screen Plot Table Autoscale Decimal Integer e Trig These options which can be applied whatever view you are currently working in are explained in the table immediately above A useful way of testing a zoom is to divide the screen into two halves with each half showing the plot and then to apply a zoom only to one side of the screen The illustration at the right is a plot of y 3sin x To split the screen into two halves F1 X 0 1 Open the Views menu Press 2 Select Split Screen Plot Detail The result is shown at the right Any zoom operation you undertake will be applied only to the copy of the plot in the righthand half of the screen This will help you test and then choose an appropriate zoom Note that you can replace the original plot on the left with the zoomed plot on the right by tapping GEARS To un split
20. Note that a reference to a spreadsheet name is case sensitive 204 Spreadsheet Referencing variables Any variable can be inserted in a cell This includes Home variables App variables CAS variables and user variables Variables can be referenced or entered For example if you have assigned 10 to P in Home view you could enter P 5 in a spreadsheet cell press and get 50 If you subsequently changed the value of P the value in that cell automatically changes to reflect the new value This is an example of a referenced variable If you just wanted the current value of P and not have the value change if P changes just enter P and press __ _ This is an example of an entered variable Variables given values in other apps can also be referenced in a spreadsheet In chapter 13 we see how the Solve app can be used to solve equations An example used is V U 2AD You could have four cells in a spreadsheet with v U A and D as formulas As you experiment with different values for these variables in the Solve app the entered and the calculated values are copied to the spreadsheet where further manipulation could be done The variables from other apps includes the results of certain calculations For example if you have plotted a function in the Function app and calculated the signed area between two x values you can reference that value in a spreadsheet by pressing E25 tapping EEE and then selecting Functi
21. POISSON CDF 4 2 returns 0 238103305554 Inverse cumulative normal distribution function Retums the cumulative normal distribution value associated with the lower tail probability p given the mean u and standard deviation o of a normal distribution If only one argument is supplied it is taken as p and the assumption is that 1 0 and o 1 NORMALD_ICDF p 0o p Example NORMALD_ICDF 0 1 0 841344746069 returns 1 Functions and commands 321 Binomial Poisson List Inverse cumulative Student s t distribution function Returns the value x such that the Student s t lower tail probability of x with n degrees of freedom is p STUDENT_ICDF n p Example STUDENT_ICDF 3 0 0246659214814 returns 3 2 Inverse cumulative x distribution function Returns the value x such that the x lower tail probability of x with n degrees of freedom is p CHISQUARE_ICDF n p Example CHISQUARE ICDF 2 0 957147873133 returns 6 3 Inverse cumulative Fisher distribution function Returns the value x such that the Fisher lower tail probability of x with numerator n and denominator d degrees of freedom is p FISHER _ICDF n d p Example FISHER_ICDF 5 5 0 76748868087 returns 2 Inverse cumulative binomial distribution function Returns the number of successes k out of n trials each with a probability of p such that the probability of k or fewer successes is q BINOMIAL ICDF n p q Example BINOMIAL
22. Plot Setup Numeric Numeric Setup Symbolic and Symbolic Setup Glossary 589 590 Glossary Appendix B Troubleshooting Calculator not responding To reset If the calculator does not respond you should first try to reset it This is much like restarting a PC It cancels certain operations restores certain conditions and clears temporary memory locations However it does not clear stored data variables apps programs etc Turn the calculator over and insert a paper clip into the Reset hole just above the battery compartment cover The calculator will reboot and return to Home view If the calculator does not turn on If the HP Prime does not turn on follow the steps below until the calculator turns on You may find that the calculator turns on before you have completed the procedure If the calculator still does not turn on contact Customer Support for further information 1 Charge the calculator for at least one hour 2 After an hour of charging turn the calculator on 3 If it does not turn on reset the calculator as per the preceding section Troubleshooting 591 Operating limits Operating temperature 0 to 45 C 32 to 113 F Storage temperature 20 to 65 C 4 to 149 F Operating and storage humidity 90 relative humidity at 40 C 104 F maximum Avoid getting the calculator wet The battery operates at 3 7V with a capacity of 1500mAh 5 55Wh S
23. Settings Parametric Symbolic Setup zew Angle Measure System ia a a ils ae Measure field Complex ee and select Degrees You could also have set the angle Choose angle measure measure on the Home Settings screen However Home settings are system wide By setting the angle measure in an app rather than Home view you are limiting the setting just to that app Open the Plot Setup view Setup Parametric Plot Setup specifying TRogp_ B60 appropriate ee PuS hi ti X Rng 15 9 15 9 graphing OPHons Y Rng 10 9 10 9 In this example set yti the T Rng and T YTick 1 Step fields so that _ enter minimum time value T steps from 0 to 360 in 5 steps Select the 2nd T Rng field and enter 360 SME 5 Plot the functions Plot Setup T O 0 08 Parametric app 273 Explore the The menu button gives you access to common tools for graph exploring plots EZ displays a range of zoom options The and keys can also be used to zoom in and out five when active enables a tracing cursor to be moved along the contour of the plot with the coordinates of the cursor displayed at the bottom of the screen EI specify a T value and the cursor moves to the corresponding x and y coordinates EBIB display the functions responsible for the plot Detailed information about these tools is provided in Common operations in Plot view on page 88 Typically you w
24. The button is a toggle button The lengths of the sides are labeled a b and and the angles are labeled A B and C It is important that you enter the known values in the appropriate fields In our example we know the length of two sides and the angle at which those sides meet Hence if we specify the lengths of sides a and b we must enter the angle as since is the angle where A and B meet If instead we entered the lengths as b and we would need to specify the angle as A The illustration on the screen will help you determine where to enter the known values 3 Go to a field whose value you know enter the value and either tap Sg or press 1 _ Repeat for each known value Triangle Solver a Ina type 4 Enter 3 out of 6 values and press aff b In b type 6 j and press p T Le Enter length of side a c InCtype 30 BGP DES eTs and press _ Fer 296 Triangle Solver app Solve for the 4 Tap EA The unknown values app displays the values of the unknown variables As the illustration at the right shows the length of the unknown side in Triangle Solver Solution found ab _ d s CA 38 2619661998 b 6 B 111 7380338 c 3 22967190568 C 30 A b Enter length of side a Pest __Joegreey Rect __ sove our example is 3 22967 The other two angles have also been calculated Choosing triangle types
25. The general procedure for sharing objects is as follows 1 Navigate to the screen that lists the object you want to send This will be the Application Library for apps the List Catalog for lists the Matrix Catalog for matrices the Program Catalog for programs and the Notes Catalog for notes 2 Connect the USB cable between the two calculators The micro A connector with the rectangular end must be inserted into the USB port on the sending calculator 3 On the sending calculator highlight the object you want fo send and tap EB In the illustration at NE 03 22 H Sequence OKB the right neo TriangleCalcs lt 1KB named Scores OKB SimpleCounter lt 1KB TriangleCalcs has been selected in the Program Catalog and will be sent to the Cone aed ulgior when is tapped Getting started 45 Online Help Press to open the online help The help initially provided is context sensitive that is it is always about the current view and its menu items For example to get help on the Function app press W select Function and press a From within the help system tapping displays a hierarchical directory of all the help topics You can navigate through the directory to other help topics or use the search facility to quickly find a topic You can find help on any key view or command 46 Getting started Reverse Polish Notation RPN The HP Prime provides you with three ways of enterin
26. To clear the app of all geometric objects press E3 You will be asked to confirm your intention to do so Tap to clear all objects defined in Symbolic view or EARE to keep the app as it is You can clear all measurements and calculations in Numeric view in the same way You can pan by dragging a finger across the screen either up down left or right You can also use the cursor keys to pan once the cursor is at the edge of the screen You can zoom by tapping and choosing a zoom option The zoom options are the same as you find in the Plot view of many apps in the calculator see Zoom on page 88 145 Plot view buttons and keys Button or key Purpose Zoom Various scaling options See Zoom on page 88 Point Tools for creating various types of points See Points on page 153 Tools for creating various types of lines See Line on page 156 Tools for creating various types of poly gons See Polygon on page 157 Curves Tools for creating various types of curves and plots See Curve on page 158 a w Z E w oo E cy 5 A L Tools for geometric transformations of vari ous kinds See Geometric transforma tions on page 161 2 Deletes a selected object or the character to the left of the cursor if the entry line is active De activate the current drawing tool Clears the Plot view of all geometric objects or the Numeric view of all mea suremen
27. To find the area under the graph of 5x 6 between x 1 and x 3 1 With the CAS menu open select Calculus and then Integrate The function int appears on the entry line 2 Between the parentheses enter 5 ar J6 eer 2 3 A eee 3 3 Press _fer_ Various settings allow you to CAS Settings aa configure how the CAS Angle Measure Radians r Number Fi t Standard 127 works To display the ame nee A Shift E CAS Integers Decimal y settings press E The modes are spread across Bact y Complex two pages Use V Yy Use i Principal Increasing Choose angle measure Computer algebra system CAS 55 Page 1 Setting Purpose Angle Measure Number Format first drop down list Number Format second drop down list Integers drop down list Integers check box Simplity Exact Select the units for angle measure ments Radians or Degrees Select the number format for dis played solutions Standard or Scientific or Engineering Select the number of digits to dis play in approximate mode man tissa exponent Select the integer base Decimal base 10 Hex base 16 Octal base 8 If checked any real number equiv alent to an integer in a non CAS environment will be converted to an integer in the CAS Real num bers not equivalent to integers are treated as real numbers in CAS whether or not this option is selec
28. To turn off Press to turn on the calculator Esc When the calculator is on pressing the key cancels the current operation For example it will clear whatever you have entered on the entry line It will also close a menu and a screen Press 2 Off turn the calculator off To save power the calculator turns itself off atter several minutes of inactivity All stored and displayed information is saved Getting started The Home View The CAS View Protective cover The display To adjust the brightness To clear the display Home view is the starting point for many calculations Most mathematical functions are available in the Home view Some additional functions are available in the computer algebra system CAS A history of your previous calculations is retained and you can re use a previous calculation or its result To display Home view press EM CAS view enables you to perform symbolic calculations It is largely identical to Home view it even has its own history of past calculations but the CAS view offers some additional functions To display CAS view press Gg The calculator is provided with a slide cover to protect the display and keyboard Remove the cover by grasping both sides of it and pulling down You can reverse the slide cover and slide it onto the back of the calculator This will ensure that you do not misplace the cover while you are using the calculator To prolong the life
29. X In Divides the horizontal scale only using the X Zoom setting X Out Multiplies the horizontal scale only using the X Zoom setting Y In Divides the vertical scale only using the Y Zoom setting Y Out Multiplies the vertical scale only using the Y Zoom setting An introduction to HP apps 89 Box zoom Option Result Cont Square Autoscale Decimal Integer Trig Undo Zoom Changes the vertical scale to match the horizontal scale This is useful after you have done a box zoom X zoom or Y zoom Rescales the vertical axis so that the display shows a representative piece of the plot given the supplied x axis settings For Sequence Polar parametric and Statistics apps autoscaling rescales both axes The autoscale process uses the first selected function to determine the best scale to use Rescales both axes so each pixel is 0 1 units This is equivalent to resetting the default values for XRNG and YRNG Rescales the horizontal axis only making each pixel equal to 1 unit Rescales the horizontal axis so that 1 pixel equals 27 24 radians or 7 5 degrees rescales the vertical axis so that 1 pixel equals 0 1 units Returns the display to the previous zoom or if there has been only one zoom displays the graph with the original plot settings A box zoom enables you to zoom in on an area of the screen that you specify 1 With the Plot view menu open tap and select Box
30. a Sample 1 success count Sample 2 success count Sample 1 size Sample 2 size Significance level Inference app 249 Results The results are Result Description Test Z Test A p Critical Z Critical A p ZTest statistic Difference between the proportions of successes in the two samples that is associated with the test Zvalue Probability associated with the ZTest statistic Boundary value s of Z associated with the a level that you supplied Difference in the proportion of successes in the two samples associated with the a level you supplied One Sample T Test Menu name T Test 1 u This test is used when the population standard deviation is not known On the basis of statistics from a single sample this test measures the strength of the evidence for a selected hypothesis against the null hypothesis The null hypothesis is that the sample mean has some assumed value Hg u uo You select one of the following alternative hypotheses against which to test the null hypothesis Ho u lt po Ho u gt Ho Ho u po 250 Inference app Inputs The inputs are Field name Definition x Sample mean s Sample standard deviation n Sample size Ho Hypothetical population mean a Significance level Results The results are Result Description Test T T Test statistic Test 3 Value of 3 associated with the test t value P Probability associated with the T Test st
31. gt Uo e 3 Ho Configuration a string that controls what results are shown and the order in which they appear An empty string displays the default all results including headers The options in the configuration string are separated by spaces h header cells will be created e acc the test result O or 1 to reject or fail to reject the null hypothesis e 4T the test T value e tM the input x value e prob the lower tail probability df the degrees of freedom cT the critical T value associated with the input a level e cx the lower critical value of the mean associated with the critical T value e x2 the upper critical value of the mean associated with the critical T value Example HypTlmean 0 461368 0 2776 50 0 5 0 05 1 my Functions and commands 359 HypT2mean ConfZ1mean The two sample T test for the difference of two means HypT2mean X1 X2 S17 S2 N17 N2 Q pooled mode configuration Pooled Specifies whether or not the samples are pooled 0 not pooled e T pooled Mode Specifies which alternative hypothesis to use e OT py lt He 2 b gt be lt e 3 by be Configuration a string that controls what results are shown and the order in which they appear An empty string displays the default all results including headers The options in the configuration string are separated by spaces h header cells will be created e acc the test res
32. is called A prefix to a key name when creating a user keyboard See The User Keyboard Customizing key presses on page 516 Programming in HP PPL 533 Commands under the Cmds menu Strings ASC CHAR DIM A string is a sequence of characters enclosed in double quotes To put a double quote in a string use two consecutive double quotes The character starts an escape sequence and the character s immediately following are interpreted specially n inserts a new line and two backslashes insert a single backslash To put a new line into the string press to wrap the text at that point Syntax ASC string Returns a list containing the ASCII codes of string Example Asc AB returns 65 66 Syntax CHAR vector or CHAR integer Returns the string corresponding to the character codes in vector or the single code of integer Examples CHAR 65 returns A CHAR 82 77 72 returns RMH Syntax DIM string Returns the number of characters in string Example DIM 12345 returns 5 DIM and DIM n return 1 Notice the use of the two double quotes and the escape sequence 534 Programming in HP PPL STRING INSTRING LEFT RIGHT Syntax STRING object Returns a string representation of object The result varies depending on the type of object Examples String Result string F1 when F1 X COS X COS X STRING 2 3 0 666666666667 str
33. the NUMsTEP setting in the Numeric Setup view see page 105 Zooming in decreases the increment zooming out increases the increment The row that was highlighted before the zoom remains unchanged For the ordinary zoom in and zoom out options the degree of zooming is determined by the zoom factor In Numeric view this is the Numzoon field in the Numeric Setup view The default value is 4 Thus if the current increment that is the NUMSTEP value is 0 4 zooming in will further divide that interval by four smaller intervals So instead of x values of 10 10 4 10 8 11 2 etc the 100 An introduction to HP apps Zoom options Zoom keys Zoom menu x values will be 10 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 etc Zooming out does the opposite 10 10 4 10 8 11 2 etc becomes 10 11 6 13 2 14 8 16 4 etc X FI X FI 10 78 10 78 10 4 85 36 10 1 79 81 10 8 93 04 10 2 81 64 11 2 101 04 10 3 83 49 11 6 109 36 10 4 85 36 12 118 10 5 87 25 12 4 126 96 10 6 89 16 12 8 136 24 10 7 91 09 13 2 145 84 10 8 93 04 13 6 155 76 10 9 95 01 14 166 n 97 10 w Zoom Big Defn Width J Zoom Big Defn Width Before zooming After zooming In Numeric view zoom options are available from two sources the keyboard e the menu in Numeric view Note that any zooming you do in Numeric view does not affect Plot view and vice versa However if you choose a zoom option from the Views
34. this point is Solve s best approximation of an actual solution Extremum Solve found a point where the value of the expression approximates a local minimum for positive values or maximum for negative values This point may or may not be a solution Or Solve stopped searching at 9 99999999999EA99 the largest number the calculator can represent Note that the Ext remum message indicates that it is highly likely that there is no solution Use Numeric view to verify this and note that any values shown are suspect Solve app 265 Message Meaning Continued Cannot find No values satisfy the selected equation or solution expression Bad The initial guess lies outside the domain of Guess es the equation Therefore the solution was not a real number or it caused an error Constant The value of the equation is the same at every point sampled 266 Solve app 14 Linear Solver app The Linear Solver app enables you to solve a set of linear equations The set can contain two or three linear equations In a two equation set each equation must be in the form ax by k In a three equation set each equation must be in the form ax by cz k You provide values for a b and k and c in three equation sets for each equation and the app will attempt to solve for x and y and z in three equation sets The HP Prime will alert you if no solution can be found or if there is an
35. 1 2 3 4 1 2 returns 1 4 11 26 Returns an expression unevaluated quote Expr Given a positive real number returns a random real according to the exponential distribution randexp Real Example randexp 1 gives 1 17118631006 410 Functions and commands randperm ratnormal reciprocation rectangular_ coordinate red Given a positive integer returns a random permutation of 0 1 2 n 1 randperm Intg n Example randperm 4 returns a random permutation of the elements of the vector 0 1 2 3 Rewrites an expression as an irreducible rational fraction ratnormal Expr Example x ys x ratnorai returns x xt Given a circle and a vector containing points and lines returns a vector containing the polar line of each point and the pole of each line with respect to the circle reciprocation Crcle Lst Pnt Line Example reciprocation circle 0 1 line 1 i 2 point 1 i 2 returns foim 3 line y Je Given a vector containing the polar coordinates of a point returns a vector containing the rectangular coordinates of the point rectangular_coordinates Vector Example 2 N rectangular_coordinates 1 m 4 returns 2 Used in the Symbolic view of the Geometry app In the definition of a geometric object including the statement display red specifies that the object defined will be drawn in red Functions and commands
36. 12345 6 returns 12345 Syntax STRINGFROMID integer Returns in the current language the built in string associated in the internal string table with the specified integer Examples STRINGFROMID 56 returns Complex STRINGFROMID 202 returns Real Syntax REPLACE object start object Replaces part of object with object beginning at start The objects can be matrices vectors or stings Example REPLACE 12345 3 99 returns 12995 There are 10 built in graphics variables in the HP Prime called GO G9 GO is always the current screen graphic G1 to G9 can be used to store temporary graphic objects called GROBs for short when programming applications that use graphics They are temporary and thus cleared when the calculator turns off Twenty six functions can be used to modify graphics variables Thirteen of them work with Cartesian 536 Programming in HP PPL coordinates using the Cartesian plane defined in the current app by the variables Xmin Xmax Ymin and Ymax The remaining thirteen work with pixel coordinates where the pixel 0 0 is the top left pixel of the GROB and 320 240 is the bottom right Functions in this second set have a _P suffix to the function name C PX Converts from Cartesian coordinates to screen coordinates Syntax C gt PX x y or C gt PX x y DRAWMENU Syntax DRAWMENU stringl string2 string6 Draws string
37. 153 placed on a circle will remain on that circle regardless of how you move the point If there is no object where you tap a point is created if you then press _ er Midpoint Tap where you want one point to be and press _ _ Tap where you want the other point to be and press _ J A point is automatically created midway between those two points If you choose an object first such as a segment choosing the Midpoint tool and pressing adds a point midway between the ends of that object In the case of a circle the midpoint is created at the circle s center Intersection Tap the desired intersection and press L _ A point is created at one of the points of intersection Keyboard shortcut More Trace Displays a list of points for 7 you to choose the one you k f want to trace If you Sx Li subsequently move that Jo point a trace line is drawn e a on the screen to show its L 3 path In the example at the 4 Pointer GB right point B was chosen to Zoom Point Line Polygo Curve Transfo be traced When that point was moved up and to the left a path of its movement was created Trace creates an entry in Symbolic view In the example above the entry is Trace GB Stop Trace Turns off tracing and deletes the definition of the trace point from Symbolic view If more than one point is being traced a menu of trace points appears so that you can choose which one to untrace S
38. 1dr wind tures cause vaaeranarmstianien tute 67 5 An introduction to HP apps Application library 3 wivisanyecaasigsegholuin lectus cccslnuacecesecuesaemudrvane 71 APP VIEWS i e a a a a N anaes 73 Symbolic VIEW censtuasssaspesoagsselun siini stmt a a 73 Symbolic Setup view sige scda sda vAtiancieasceracra nie awison 74 Plot VIEW rac Sedan ce dete tated acta Behe tales ul ahah aati 75 Plot Setup View naien sale sda i a e 76 N merie Viewin aai iniaa aden cdi desde REE 77 Numeric Setup Vie Winen n E E 78 Quick examples viiia da iii a E E R 79 Common operations in Symbolic View ccccseeeeeeeeeeeteteeees 81 Symbolic view Summary of menu buttons ceeeeeeeeees 86 Common operations in Symbolic Setup VieW ccccceeeeeeeees 87 Common operations in Plot view sxcpnccersadecnsdeaevogeasneioervsdsnssiens 88 LOOM aien a a E TE AAE A A AAE GEE RE E EnS 88 PACE a E A AEA AE ET 94 Plot view Summary of menu bulttons 0ccceesseeceesteeeeeees 96 Common operations in Plot Setup VieW cccceseseeeeeeeeeeeteeeees 96 Configure Plot view i cnseensnremmltnsnents dextsdantonisediaucimone tere 96 Common operations in Numeric view ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 100 ZOOM hin ce ge ai EA ops ante Maicu AET EE E E ues 100 Evaluating costeo a Soaks A A E 102 Gusiomta les nunnia na e E 103 Numeric view Summary of menu buttons cccceeeeees 104 Common operations in Numeric Setup View 105 Combining Plot and N
39. 2 and so on to choose 4 between one of five types of sinusoidal equations Now press the cursor keys to select each parameter and set its value When you are ready tap to see if you have correctly matched your equation to the given graph Tap to see the correct answer and tap to exit Test mode 306 The Explorer apps 21 Functions and commands Many mathematical functions are available from the calculator s keyboard These are described in Keyboard functions on page 309 Other functions and commands are collected together in the Toolbox menus There are five Toolbox menus Math A collection of non symbolic mathematical functions see Math menu on page 313 CAS A collection of symbolic mathematical functions see CAS menu on page 324 App A collection of app functions that can be called from elsewhere in the calculator such as Home view CAS view the Spreadsheet app and in a program see App menu on page 347 Note that the Geometry app functions can be called from elsewhere in the calculator but they are designed to be used in the Geometry app For that reason the Geometry functions are not described in this chapter They are described in the Geometry chapter User The functions that you have created see Creating your own functions on page 421 and the programs you have created that contain functions that have been exported Catlg All
40. 2 Tap the object onto which points are to be projected and press fuer 3 Tap the point that is to be projected and press fe _ J Note the new point added to the target object An inversion is a mapping involving a center point and a scale factor Specifically the inversion of point A through center C with scale factor k maps A onto A such that A is on line CA and CA CA k where CA and CA denote the 163 lengths of the corresponding segments If k 1 then the lengths CA and CA are reciprocals Suppose you wish to find the inversion of a circle GC with a point on the circle GD as center 1 Tap and select More gt Inversion 2 Tap the point that is to be the center GD of the inversion circle and press _ er_ 3 Enter the inversion ratio use the default value of 1 and press 4 Tap on the circle GC and press _ You will see that the inversion is a line ee ly sa AX yo r 5 f 10 Pointer 12 7 8 1 Reciprocation A reciprocation is a special case of inversion involving circles A reciprocation with respect to a circle transforms each point in the plane into its polar line Conversely the reciprocation with respect to a circle maps each line in the plane into its pole 1 Tap and select More gt Reciprocation 2 Tap the circle and press _ _ 3 Tap a poin
41. 26 With the new calculation highlighted in Numeric view Selecting a calculation in Numeric view means that it will also be displayed in Plot view Plot view Notice the calculation lslope GC 0 452 that you have just created in Numeric view is displayed at the top left of the screen Let s now add two more 8 6 4 Pointer 2 91 3 58 calculations to Numeric view and have them displayed in Plot view 28 Press to return to Numeric view 29 Tap GEMM enter cB and tap SE Entering just the name of a point will show its coordinates 30 Tap MEB enter cc and tap SB Entering just the name of a line will show its equation 31 Make sure both of these new equations are selected by choosing each one and pressing MB 32 Press to return to Plot view Notice that your new calculations are displayed 33 Press and choose point GB lslope GC 1 813 F f4 GB point 2 220 2 390 GC linety on Lo Y 1 0 8 6 4 Pointer 5 59 4 03 34 Use the cursor keys to move point B along the graph Note that with each move the results of the calculations shown at the top left of the screen change 140 Geometry Trace the derivative Plot view in Geometry Point D is the point whose ordinate value matches the derivative of the curve at point B It is easier to see how the derivative
42. 4 O in order with straight line segments Press to open the Statistics 1Var Toolbox menus one of which is the App menu App functions are used in HP apps to perform common calculations For example in _ cewneces Graphing the Function app the Plot Solve view Fen menu has a aop DETSE function called SLOPE that calculates the slope of a given function at a given point The SLOPE function can also be used from the Home view or a program to give the same results The app functions described in this section are grouped by app 1 Statistics 1Var 2Function Functions and commands 347 Function app functions The Function app functions provide the same functionality found in the Function app s Plot view under the FCN menu All these operations work on functions The functions may be expressions in X or the names of the Function app variables FO through F9 AREA Area under a curve or between curves Finds the signed area under a function or between two functions Finds the area under the function Fn or below Fn and above the function Fm from lower X value to upper X value AREA Fn Fm lower upper Example AREA X X 2 2 1 returns 4 5 EXTREMUM Extremum of a function Finds the extremum if one exists of the function Fn that is closest to the X value guess EXTREMUM Fn guess Example EXTREMUM X2 X 2 0 returns 0 5 ISECT Intersection of tw
43. 41 121 gives 2 3 Returns a vector containing the roots and poles of a rational polynomial Each root or pole is followed by its multiplicity froot RatPoly Example edit froot aan ae returns 0 3 1 2 3 1 392 Functions and commands fsolve function_diff gauss GF Returns the numerical solution of an equation or a system of equations With the optional third argument you can specify a guess for the solution or an interval within which it is expected that the solution will occur With the optional fourth argument you can name the iterative algorithm to be used by the solver fsolve Expr Var Guess or Interval Method Example fsolve cos x x x 1 1 bisection_solver gives 0 739085133215 Returns the derivative function of a function as a mapping function_diff Fnc Example function _diff sin gives _x gt cos _x Given an expression followed by a vector of variables uses the Gauss algorithm to return the quadratic form of the expression written as a sum or difference of squares of the variables given in the vector gauss Expr VectVar Example gauss x 2 2 a x y x y gives a yt x 2 y 2y a 2 Creates a Galois Field of characteristic p with p n elements GF Integerp Integern Example F 5 9 gives GF 5 k 9 k 8 2 k 7 2 k 5 k 2 2 k 2 k K g undef Functions and commands 393 gramschmidt green halftan2hypexp halt hamdist has Given a b
44. 549 Returns true not zero if the user selects an object otherwise return false 0 Example Function CHOOSE N PickHero PickHero Ruler Gauss Eisg W W Gauss Newton r Newton IF N 1 THEN CHOOSE_TEST PRINT You CHOOSE TEST picked eas aa alaaa faa laa Oa Euler ELSE IF N 2 THEN PRINT You picked Gauss ELSE PRINT You picked Newton END END After execution of CHOOSE the value of N will be updated to contain O 1 2 or 3 The IF THEN ELSE command causes the name of the selected person to be printed to the terminal EDITLIST Syntax EDITLIST listvar Starts the List Editor loading listvar and displays the specified list If used in programming returns to the program when user taps SEJA Example EDITLIST L1 edits list L1 EDITMAT Syntax EDITMAT matrixvar Starts the Matrix Editor and displays the specified matrix If used in programming returns to the program when user tops a Example EDITMAT M1 edits matrix M1 GETKEY Syntax GETKEY Returns the ID of the first key in the keyboard buffer or 1 if no key was pressed since the last call to GETKEY Key IDs are integers from O to 50 numbered from top left key 0 to bottom right key 50 as shown in figure 27 1 550 Programming in HP PPL INPUT Hel f
45. Button or Key Purpose E3 Clear BBE OO Copies the highlighted element to the entry line Inserts a row of zeros above or a column of zeros to the left of the highlighted cell You are prompted to choose row or column Displays a menu for you to choose the small font medium font or large font A three way toggle that controls how the cursor will move after an element has been entered moves the cursor to the right moves it downward and does not move it at all Displays a menu for you to choose 1 2 3 or 4 columns to be displayed at a time Deletes the highlighted row or column or the entire matrix You are prompted to make a choice Moves the cursor to the first row last row first column or last column respectively Matrices 465 To create a matrix in the Matrix Editor Open the Matrix Catalog het Matrix If you want to create a vector press or until the matrix you want to use is highlighted tap ME and then press __ Continue from step 4 below If you want to create a matrix either tap on the name of the matrix MO M9 or press or until the matrix you want to use is highlighted and then press Note that an empty matrix will be shown with a size of 1 1 beside its name For each element in the matrix type a number or an expression and then tap or press _ J You can enter complex numbers in complex form that is a b where a is
46. Home view and the result of adding those numbers will still be represented as 71 However if you entered 27b you would get a syntax error as 2 and 7 are not integers found in binary arithmetic You would have to enter 27 as 11011b since 27 110113 Setting a default base means that you do not always have to specify a base marker for numbers when doing integer arithmetic The exception is if you want to include a number from the non default base it will have to include the base marker Thus if your default base is 2 and you want to enter 27 for an integer arithmetic operation you could enter just 11011 without the b suffix But if you wanted to enter E4 you need to enter it with the suffix E4h The HP Prime adds any omitted base markers when the calculation is displayed in history 582 Basic integer arithmetic Note that if you change the Function mae default base any calculation in history that involves integer arithmetic for which you did not explicitly add a base marker will be resisplayed in the new base 1o0b 111b 10116 In the example at the right the 0 zeh first calculation explicitly re ee ee included base markers b for each operand The second calculation was a copy of the first but without the base markers The default base was then changed to hex The first calculation remained as it was while the second without base markers being explicitly added to the operands was redisp
47. HypZlprop x n a mode Functions and commands 367 HypZ2prop HypT1mean Mode Specifies which alternative hypothesis to use e t lt 1 2 1 gt To e 3 24 Example HypZlprop 21 50 0 5 0 05 1 returns 1 1 1313 0 42 0 8710 1 6448 0 6148 The two sample Z test for proportions Returns a list containing in order e Oor 1 to reject or fail to reject the null hypothesis The test Zvalue The test Ar value e The upper tail probability The upper critical Zvalue associated with the input a level The critical value of An associated with the critical Z value HypZ2prop x1 X27 N1 N20 mode Mode Specifies which alternative hypothesis to use e 0 lt 1 2 my gt e 3 2 4m Example HypZ2prop 21 26 50 50 0 05 1 returns 1 1 0018 O 1 0 8417 1 6448 0 0633 The one sample t test for a mean Returns a list containing in order e Oor 1 to reject or fail to reject the null hypothesis The test T value The input x value e The upper tail probability The degrees of freedom The upper critical T value associated with the input a level e The critical value of the statistic associated with the critical tvalue HypTlmean X S n Up amp mode 368 Functions and commands HypT2mean Mode Specifies which alternative hypothesis to use e TE Bb lt Lo 2p hilly e 3 Wb Ho Example HypTimean 0 461368 0 2776 50 0 5 0
48. On Cancel and Off key List matrix program and note catalogs Last Answer key Ans Enter key Backspace and Delete key Menu and Paste key CAS and CAS preferences key View and Copy key Escape and Clear key Help key Rocker wheel for cursor movement Getting started Context sensitive menu A context sensitive menu occupies the bottom line of the screen The options available depend on the context that is the view you are in Note that the menu items are activated by touch Getting started There are two types of buttons on the context sensitive menu e menu button tap to display a pop up menu These buttons have square corners along their top such as in the illustration above command button tap to initiate a command These buttons have rounded corners such as in the illustration above Entry and edit keys The primary entry and edit keys are Keys Purpose to Enter numbers or Es Cancels the current operation or clears the entry line Enters an input or executes an operation In calculations acts like When or is present as a menu key acts the same as pressing For entering a negative number For example to enter 25 press 25 Note this is not the same operation that is performed by the subtraction key lJ Math template Displays a palette of pre formatted templates repre senting common arithmetic expres sions Enters t
49. PMT PMT Future value a negative FY number Equal payments Finance app 289 The following cash flow diagram shows a loan from the lender s point of view Equal payments ers VV PMT PMT PMT PMT ee ee ee ee T Equal periods PV Cash flow diagrams m also specify when PONE payments occur rela apitalize value of tive to me Compound ing periods The E op i o diagram to the right Jile a afs shows lease pay ments at the begin ning of the period lease PMT PMT PMT PMT PMT FV This diagram shows deposits PMT into an Fv account at the end of each period ee ee ee Time value of money TVM Time value of money TVM calculations make use of the notion that a dollar today will be worth more than a dollar sometime in the future A dollar today can be invested at a certain interest rate and generate a return that the same dollar in the future cannot This TVM principle underlies the notion of interest rates compound interest and rates of return 290 Finance app There are seven TVM variables Variable Description PV P YR PMT C YR FV The total number of compounding periods or payments The nominal annual interest rate or investment rate This rate is divided by the number of payments per year P YR to compute the nominal interest rate per compounding period This is the interest rate actually used in TVM calculations The present value of the initial
50. Poly2 Example em a 2 2 et RAAL gives x 1 x 3 1 340 Functions and commands Create Poly to Coef Coef to Poly Roots to Coef Roots to Poly Given a polynomial returns a vector containing the coefficients of the polynomial With a variable as second argument returns the coefficients of a polynomial with respect to the variable With a list of variables as the second argument returns the internal format of the polynomial symb2poly Expr Var or symb2poly Expr Varl Var2 Example symb2poly x 3 2 1 returns 3 2 1 With one vector as argument returns a polynomial in x with coefficients in decreasing order obtained from the argument vector With a variable as second argument returns a similar polynomial in that variable poly2symb Vector Var Example poly2symb 1 2 3 x returns x 2 x 3 Returns a vector containing the coefficients in decreasing order of the univariate polynomial whose roots are specified in the argument vector pcoef Vect Example pcoeff 1 0 0 0 1 returns 1 2 1 0 0 0 Takes as argument a vector The vector contains each root or pole of a rational function Each root or pole is followed by its order with poles having negative order Returns the rational function in x that has the roots and poles with their orders specified in the argument vector fcoeff Vector where Vector hasthe form Root1 Oderl Root2 Order2
51. Press a Polar Symbolic Setup el Angle Measure System 5 Seleamadians tomhe aas iii Angle Measure menu Complex De Choose Angle Measure Plot view 6 Press a A graph of the equation is plotted However as the illustration at the right shows only a part of the petals is visible To see the rest you will need to change 6 0 R1 8 12 5663706144 the plot setup parameters Plot Setup View 7 Press EB Polar Plot Setup fil 8 Setthe second ORNG field to gre 1308906930 4r by entering XRNG 15 9 15 9 Shift YRNG 10 9 10 9 4E 3 x ma YTICK 1 Enter maximum angle value 9 Press to return to Plot view and see the complete plot R1 8 12 5663706144 80 An introduction to HP apps Numeric View The values generated by the equation can be seen in Numeric view 10 Press B Suppose you want to see just whole numbers for 0 in other words you want the increment between consecutive values in the 0 column to be 1 You set this Numeric Setup View 11 Press 3 ig 12 Change the NumsteP field to 1 13 Press to return to Numeric view You will see that the 0 column now contains 12 4255770 12 0100805 11 3401382 10 4482179 19 37713908 18 17762897 16 90544187 5 61821351 4 37224016 13 21937443 baUuoauRWro So Seeesescoy Zoom Big Defn Width up in the Numeric Setup view Polar Num Setup NUMSTART 0 NUMTYPE Automatic NUMZOOM 4 Enter table
52. Program program takes parameters enter a pair of parentheses after the program name with the parameters inside them each separated by a comma To run the program press From the Program Catalog highlight the program you want to run and tap EME When a program is executed from the catalog the system looks for a function named START no parameters You can also run a Function program from the USER menu one of the Toolbox menus 1 Press and tap User usen 1MYPROGRAM L MYPROGRAM 2 Tap MYPROGRAM gt Users to expand the menu and select MY PROGRAM MYPROGRAM appears on the entry line 3 Tap and the program executes displaying a message box 506 Programming in HP PPL Multi function programs Debug a Program 4 Tap three Function times to step through the FOR loop Notice that the number shown increments by 1 each time f h MYPROGRAM After the program MYPROGRAM prog ems amann aman Jamnan amannan Ciian terminates you can resume any other activity with the HP Prime If a program has arguments when you press a screen appears prompting you to enter the program parameters If there is more than one EXPORT function in a program when is tapped a list appears for you to choose which function to run To see this feature create a program with the text EXPORT NAME1 BEGIN END EXPORT NAME2 _ BEGIN END Now note that when you select your program from the Progr
53. Recenter Ytick Xmax Yzoom Numeric umXStart Numlndep umYStart NumType umXStep NumXZoom umYStep NumYZoom Modes AAngle ADigits AComplex AFormat 432 Variables Statistics 1Var app variables Category Names Results Nbltem SX explained MinVal 2X2 below Ql MeanxX MedVal sX Q3 oX MaxVal serrX Symbolic H1 H1Type H2 Hyos H3 H3Type H4 H4Type H5 H5Type Plot Axes Xmax Cursor Xmin GridDots Xtick GridLines Xzoom Hmin Ymax Hmax Ymin Hwidth Ytick Labels Yzoom Recenter Numeric D1 D6 D2 D7 D3 D8 D4 D9 D5 DO Modes AAngle ADigits AComplex AFormat Variables 433 Results Nbltem MinVal Q1 MedVal Q3 MaxVal X X2 MeanX sX oX serrX Contains the number of data points in the current 1 variable analysis H1 H5 Contains the minimum value of the data set in the current variable analysis H1 H5 Contains the value of the first quartile in the current 1 variable analysis H1 H5 Contains the median in the current 1 variable analysis H1 H5 Contains the value of the third quartile in the current 1 variable analysis H1 H5 Contains the maximum value in the current 1 variable analysis H1 H5 Contains the sum of the data set in the current 1 variable analysis H1 H5 Contains the sum of the squares of the data set in the current 1 variable analysis H1 H5 Contains the mean of the data set in the current 1 variable analysis H1 H5 Contain
54. Select Finance 2 Return all fields to their default values 3 Enter the known TVM Time Value of Money variables as shown p60 ee e5 n h fi PV 150000 P YR 12 in the tigure mp o FV 0 End Group Size 12 Enter payment amount or solve 4 Highlight ear end _ CTT VTS tap The pmt field shows 984 10 In other words the monthly payments are 948 10 5 To determine the balloon payment or future value FV for the mortgage after 10 years enter 120 for N highlight FV and tap ESN The Fv field shows 127 164 19 indicating that the future value of the loan that is how much is still owing as 127 164 19 292 Finance app Calculating amortizations Amortization calculations determine the amounts applied towards the principal and interest in a payment or series of payments They also use TVM variables To calculate amortizations Example Amortization for a home mortgage l 2 3 Start the Finance app Specify the number of payments per year P YR Specify whether payments are made at the beginning or end of periods Enter values for IS YR PV PMT and FV 5 Enter the number of payments per amortization period in the Group Size field By default the group size is 12 to reflect annual amortization Tap MA The calculator displays an amortization table For each amortization period the table shows the amounts applied to interest and principal as well as the remain
55. Sequence Tap ES select Plot and then the type of expression you want to plot The entry line is enabled for you to define the expression Note that the variables you specify for an expression must be in lowercase In this example Function has been selected as the plot type and the graph of y 1 x is plotted 160 Geometry Geometric transformations The Transform menu displayed by tapping NSE provides numerous tools for you to perform transformations on geometric objects in Plot view You can also define transformations in Symbolic view Translation Geometry A translation is a transformation of a set of points that moves each point the same distance in the same direction T x y gt x a y b You must create a vector to indicate the distance and direction of the translation You then choose the vector and the object to be translated Suppose you want to translate circle B at the right down a little and to the right l Tap and select Vector Draw a vector in the direction you want to translate the circle and of the same length as move you intend If you need help see Vector on page 156 8 6 4 Pointer GD E Line Polygo Curve Transfo Tap and select Translation 4 Tap the vector and press _ _ J 5 Tap the object to be moved and press The object is moved the same length as the vector and in the same dire
56. Setting up the plot Plot Setup view Histogram width Histogram range The Plot Setup view E1 EB enables you to specify many of the same plotting parameters as other apps such as X Rng and Y Rng There are two settings unique to the Statistics 1Var app H Width enables you to specify the width of a histogram bin This determines how many bins will fit in the display as well as how the data is distributed that is how many data points each bin contains H Rng enables you to specify the range of values for a set of histogram bins The range runs from the left edge of the leftmost bin to the right edge of the rightmost bin Exploring the graph The Plot view E has zooming and tracing options as well as coordinate display The Autoscale option is available from the View menu ER as well as the menu The View menu also enables you to view graphs in splitscreen mode as explained on page 91 For all plot types you can tap and drag to scroll the Plot view You can also zoom in or out on the cursor by pressing and respectively Statistics 1Var app 221 Plot view menu items The menu items you can tap on in Plot view are Button Purpose Displays the Zoom menu Turns trace mode on or off See Zoom on page 100 Displays the definition of the current statistical plot Shows or hides the menu 222 Statistics 1Var app 11 Statistics 2Var app The Statistics 2Var app can store up to
57. Sort data values You can sort up to three columns of data at a time based on a selected independent column l In Numeric view place the highlight in the column you want to sort and tap SERS Specify the Sort Order Ascending or Descending Specify the independent and dependent data columns Sorting is by the independent column For instance if ages are in C1 and incomes in C2 and you want to sort by Income then you make C2 the independent column and C1 the dependent column A Specify any Frequency data column Top MA The independent column is sorted as specified and any other columns are sorted to match the independent column To sort just one column choose None for the Dependent and Frequency columns 230 Statistics 2Var app Defining a regression model Choose a fit Fit types You define a regression model in Symbolic view There are three ways to do so e Accept the default option to fit the data to a straight line Choose a pre defined fit type logarithmic exponential and so on Enter your own mathematical expression The expression will be plotted so that you can see how closely it fits the data points 1 Press Bto display the Symbolic view 2 For the analysis you are interested in S1 through S5 select the Type field 3 Tap the field again to see the menu of fit types 4 Select your preferred fit type from the menu See Fit types on page 231 Twelve fit typ
58. To delete the dummy values select cell a1 tap GEES press until all the dummy values are selected and then press i Select cell c1 Enter a label for your takings ma AO TAKINGS _ E Notice that text strings but not names need to be enclosed within quotation marks Select cell D1 Enter a formula to add up your takings mM SUM 2 PRICE You could have specified a range such as A1 AL100 but by specifying the name of the column you can be sure that the sum will include all the entries in the column Select cell c3 Enter a label for your total commission m AB 2 TOTAL COMMIS E Note that the column is not wide enough for you to see the entire label in c3 We need to widen column C Select the heading cell for column C tap and select Column An input form appears for you to specify the required width of the column Enter 100 and tap QE You may have to experiment until you get the column width exactly as you want it The value you enter will be the width of the column in pixels 20 Select cell D3 21 Enter a formula to add up your commission eTa JSUM L COMMIS Note that instead of entering SUM by hand you could have chosen it from the Apps menu one of the Toolbox menus 22 Select cell c5 Spreadsheet 197 23 Enter a label for your fixed costs 24 In cell D5 enter 100 This is what you have to pay 2P RCE goum
59. Working Example 1 Assign 7 to the Home variable A and then with Home calculate 5 A variables 1 Press to display Home view 2 Assign x to A The result is written Triangle Solver to history 3 Multiply A by 5 5 mA 9 86960440109 5 A 49 3480220054 This example illustrates es a the process for storing and using any Home variable not just the Real Home variables A Z It is important to match the object you want to store to the correct type of Home variable See Home variables on page 428 for details 424 Variables Working with user variables Working with app variables Example 2 Create a variable called ME and assign 7 to it 1 Press to display Home view Fl 2 Assign 7 to MI aa LS ee 3 A message appears asking if you want to create a variable called ME Tap or press to confirm your intention You can now use that variable in subsequent calculations ME 3 will yield 29 6 for example Example 3 You can also store objects in variables using the assignment operator Name Object In this example we ll store 1 2 3 in the user variable you 1 Assign the list to the variable using the assignment operator FE EE L mmmn eme 12 3 2 a a3 CE 2 A message appears asking if you want to create a variable called you Tap or press to confirm your intention 1 l Ix 4 Program _ Y J Eval O Matrix _U The variable YOU is created and contains the li
60. abscissa A ordinate B creates a point whose x coordinate is the same as that of a point A and whose y coordinate is the same as that of a point B This point will change to reflect the movements of point A or point B 167 point2d trace stop trace erase trace Randomly re distributes a set of points such that for each point x 5 5 andy e 5 5 Any further movement of one of the points will randomly re distribute all of the points with each tap or direction key press point2d pointl point2 pointn Begins tracing of a specified point trace point Stops tracing of a specified point but does not erase the current trace This command is only available in Plot view In Symbolic view uncheck the trace object to erase the trace and stop further tracing Erases the trace of a point but does not stop tracing Any further movement of the point will be traced In Symbolic view uncheck the trace object to erase the trace and stop further tracing Line DrawSlp Given three real numbers m a b draws a line with slope m that passes through the point a b DrawSlp a b m Example DrawSlp 2 1 3 draws the line given by y 3x 5 altitude Given three non collinear points draws the altitude of the triangle defined by the three points that passes through the first point The triangle does not have to be drawn altitude pointl point2 point3 Example altitude A B C draws a line passing through point
61. and may differ in other apps The number of a special view corresponds to its position in the View menu for that app The first special view is launched by STARTVIEW 8 the second with STARTVIEW 9 and so on 546 Programming in HP PPL You can also launch views that are not specific to an app by specifying a value for n that is less than O Home Screen 1 Home Settings 2 emory Manager 3 Applications Library 4 atrix Catalog 5 List Catalog 6 Program Catalog 7 otes Catalog 8 VIEW Syntax VIEW string program_ name BEGIN Commands END Adds a custom option to the View menu When string is selected runs program name See The DiceSimulation program on page 524 Integer BITAND Syntax BITAND int1 int2 intn Returns the bitwise logical AND of the specified integers Example BITAND 20 13 returns 4 BITNOT Syntax BITNOT int Returns the bitwise logical NOT of the specified integer Example BITNOT 47 returns 549755813840 BITOR Syntax BITOR int1 int2 intn Returns the bitwise logical OR of the specified integers Example BITOR 9 26 returns 27 Programming in HP PPL 547 BITSL BITSR BITXOR BR GETBASE Syntax BITSL intl int2 Bitwise Shift Left Takes one or two integers as input and returns the result of shifting the bits in the first integer to the left by the number places indicated by the second integer If there i
62. complex 428 cross app 110 definition of 589 Finance app 440 Function app 122 429 Geometry 430 global 512 graphics 428 Home 428 Home settings 428 in programming 556 Inference app 437 key 25 Linear Solver 441 list 428 local 512 matrix 428 Numeric view 566 Parametric app 439 Plot view 558 Polar app 440 qualifying 110 513 real 428 Sequence apps 442 Solve app 431 Spreadsheet app 205 431 Statistics 1Var 433 Statistics 2Var 435 Symbolic view 562 565 Triangle Solver 441 types of in programming 556 vectors definition of 463 589 See Also matrices Index 609 views definition of 589 in apps 73 Numeric 77 Numeric Setup 78 Plot 75 Plot Setup 76 Symbolic 73 Symbolic Setup 74 Views menu 91 521 W wireless network 34 wordsize 583 Z Z Intervals 253 255 zoom examples of 91 94 factors 88 in Numeric view 100 102 in Plot view 88 94 keys for 89 101 types of 89 90 102 610 Index
63. etc Zooming out does the opposite 10 10 4 10 8 11 2 etc become 10 11 6 13 2 14 8 16 4 etc As explained on page page 104 you can also change the size of the font small medium or large display the definition responsible for generating a column of values choose to show 1 2 3 or 4 columns of function values You can also combine Plot and Numeric view See Custom tables on page 103 Function app 117 Analyzing functions Display the Plot view menu To find a root of the quadratic function The Function menu img in Plot view enables you to find roots intersections slopes signed areas and extrema for any function defined in the Function app If you have more than one function plotted you may need to choose the function of interest beforehand The Function menu is a sub menu of the Plot view menu First display the Plot view menu Suppose you want to find the root of the quadratic equation defined earlier Since a quadratic equation can have more than one root you will need to move the cursor closer to the root you are interested in than to any other root In this example you will find the root of the quadratic close to where x 3 1 If it is not already selected select the quadratic equation Dor 2 Press oO or to move the cursor near to where x 3 3 Tap and select Root Zoom Trace Goto Menu The root is displayed at the bottom of the screen
64. gt GridDots to turn the grid dots on default 1 gt GridDots to turn the grid dots off 558 Programming in HP PPL GridLines Hmin Hmax Statistics 1 Var Hwidth Statistics 1 Var Labels Method Function Solve Parametric Polar Statistics 2Var Turns the background line grid in Plot View on or off In Plot Setup view check or uncheck GRID LINES In a program type 0 gt GridLines to turn the grid lines on default 1 gt GridLines to turn the grid lines off Defines the minimum and maximum values for histogram bars In Plot Setup view for one variable statistics set values for HRNG In a program type n gt Hmin n gt Hmax wheren lt n Sets the width of histogram bars In Plot Setup view for one variable statistics set a value for Hwidth In a program type n gt Hwidth where n gt 0 Draws labels in Plot View showing X and Y ranges In Plot Setup View check or uncheck Labels In a program type 1 gt Labels to turn labels on default 0 gt Labels to turn labels off Defines the graphing method adaptive fixed step segments or fixed step dots See Graphing methods on page 99 for an explanation of the difference between these methods In a program type 0 gt Method select adaptive 1 gt Method select fixed step segments 2 gt Method select fixed step dots Programming in HP PPL 559 Nmin Nmax Sequence Re
65. has any geometric significance is also named If for example you create a hexagon the hexagon is given a name as is each point at each vertex In the example at the right the pentagon is named C the points used to define the hexagon are named A and B and the remaining 142 Geometry Selecting an object Hiding names Moving objects Geometry four vertices are named D E G and H Moreover each of the six segments is also given a name J K L M and N These names are not displayed in Plot view but you can see them if you go to Symbolic view see Symbolic view in detail on page 148 Naming objects and parts of objects enables you to refer to them in calculations This is explained in Numeric view in detail on page 150 You can rename an object See Symbolic Setup view on page 150 To select an object just tap on it The color of a selected item changes to cyan To select a point in Plot view just press _ _ A list of all the points appears Select the one you want You can choose to hide the name of an object in Plot view 1 Select the object whose label that is caption you want to hide 2 Press B9 3 Select Toggle Caption 4 Press Ea Redisplay a hidden name by repeating this procedure Points To move a point press _ _ A list of all the points appears Select the one you want to move then tap on the new location for it and press __er_ You can also sel
66. multiple values Lists can be created and manipulated by the List Editor and stored in the List Catalog 588 Glossary matrix menu note open sentence program variable vector views A two dimensional array of real or complex numbers enclosed by square brackets Matrices can be created and manipulated by the Matrix Editor and stored in the Matrix Catalog Vectors are also handled by the Matrix Catalog and Editor A choice of options given in the display It can appear as a list or as a set of touch buttons across the bottom of the display Text that you write in the Note Editor It can be a general standalone note or a note specific to an app An open sentence consists of two expressions algebraic or arithmetic separated by a relational operator such as lt etc Examples of open sentences include y2 lt x and x y2 34 x A reusable set of instructions that you record using the Program Editor A name given to an object such as a number list matrix graphic and so on to assist in later retrieving it The command assigns a variable and the object can be retrieved by selecting the associated variable from the variables menu 5 A one dimensional array of real or complex numbers enclosed in single square brackets Vectors can be created and manipulated by the Matrix Editor and stored in the Matrix Catalog The primary environments of HP apps Examples of app views include Plot
67. needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH Regulation EC No 1907 2006 of the European Parliament and the Council A chemical information report for this product can be found at http www hp com go reach Perchlorate Material special handling may apply This calculator s Memory Backup battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed in California PFAPHEASSERTEHAARSR REPA CRFESPT aS RPMI BEREBERTE Pb R Hg Cd AME SPER SAIR Crvi PBB PBDE o o o O RARBREREMRERSEM BARA ATS 2 REST 11363 2006 FRAZHRRBRAT X RRRRSRSMRSLERSASR BRAAPH SRE SIT 1 1363 2006 FRATSRRER ROR SHAEBFRRSRBRHSER RARS WK BSSS2003 1 F27ERFSFSRUS TRA RARE AS MR E2002 95 EC SE FRRAMBHSSHRMATFARERLEHSSA SRSA Product regulatory information 599 600 Product regulatory information Index A adapter 12 adaptive graphing 99 Advanced Graphing app 69 125 134 Plot Gallery 134 trace options 129 variables summary of 432 algebra functions 324 325 algebraic entry 32 36 47 algebraic precedence 39 alternative hypothesis 240 amortization 293 294 angle measure 31 56 annunciators 14 Ans last answer 41 antilogarithm common 310 natural 310 app commands 546 creating 107 134 522 customizing See app creating definition of 587 deleting 72 functions See functions HP apps See apps HP library 71 notes 106 open 71 programs 520 reset 7 1 sorting 71 72 variabl
68. on page 118 Displays the definition responsible for generating the selected plot A toggle button that shows and hides the other buttons across the bottom of the screen Common operations in Plot Setup view This section covers only operations common to the apps mentioned See the chapter dedicated to an app for the app specific operations done in Plot Setup view Press to open Plot Setup view Configure Plot view Scope Advanced Graphing Function Parametric Polar Sequence Statistics 1 Var Function Plot Setup Statistics 2Var ce 188 The Plot Setup view is used to mos YTICK 1 configure the appearance of Plot view and to set the method by which graphs are plotted The Enter minimum horizontal value 96 An introduction to HP apps configuration options are spread across two pages Tap to move from the first to the second page and to return to the first page Tip When you go to Plot view to see the graph of a definition selected in Symbolic view there may be no graph shown The likely cause of this is that the spread of plotted values is outside the range settings in Plot Setup view A quick way to bring the graph into view is to press reer and select Autoscale This also changes the range settings in Plot Setup view Page 1 Setup field Purpose TRNG Sets the range of T values to be plotted Parametric Note that here are two fields one for the only minimum and
69. or if there has been only one zoom displays the graph with the original plot settings You can step through the table of evaluations in Numeric view by pressing or You can also quickly jump to an evaluation by entering the independent variable of interest in the independent variable column and tapping Gg For example suppose in the Symbolic view of the Function app you have defined F1 X as X 1 3 Suppose further that you want to know what the value of that function is when X is 625 1 Open Numeric view EB 2 Anywhere in the independent column the left most column enter 625 102 An introduction to HP apps F1 389373 389497 81 389622 64 389747 49 389872 36 389997 25 390122 16 390247 09 390372 04 390497 01 390622 3 Tap Numeric view is refreshed with the value you entered in the first row and the result of the evaluation in a cell to the right In this example the result is 389373 Big Defn Width Custom tables If you choose Automatic for the NUMTYPE setting the table of evaluations in Numeric view will follow the settings in the Numeric Setup view That is the independent variable will start with the NUMSTART setting and increment by the NUMSTEP setting These settings are explained in Common operations in Numeric Setup view on page 105 However you can choose to build your own table where just the values you enter appear as independent var
70. plot Plot the selected definitions Explore the graph You can change the range of the x and y axes and the spacing of the interval marks along the axes 4 Display Plot Setup view Setup For this example you can leave the plot settings at their default values If your settings do not match those in the illustration at the right press Clear to restore the default values 15 28 Advanced Graphing Plot Setup xrg iss pss Y Rng 10 9 10 9 X Tick 1 Y Tick 1 Enter minimum horizontal value See Common operations in Plot Setup view on page 96 for more information about setting the appearance of plots 5 Plot the selected definitions Plot Setup K159 yX 0 6 Display the Plot view menu items Note that you have options to zoom trace go to a specified point and display the definition of the selected graph You can use the zoom and split screen functionality discussed in chapter 6 You can tap and drag to scroll the Plot view or use and to zoom in and out on the cursor position respectively 7 Tap and select In A special feature of the Advanced Graphing app enables you to edit the definition of a graph from within the Plot view Zoom Traces GoTo T Defn Menu 128 Advanced Graphing app Trace in Plot view 8 Tap ERD The definition as you entered it in Symbolic view appears at the bottom of the screen 9 Tap
71. polygon 193 194 Geometry Spreadsheet The Spreadsheet app provides Spreadsheet IC a grid of cells for you to enter content such as numbers text expressions and so on and to perform certain operations on BRENERIEN what you enter To open the Spreadsheet app MAMET press and select Spreadsheet You can create any number of customized spreadsheets each with its own name see Creating an app on page 107 You open a customized spreadsheet in the same way by pressing and selecting the particular spreadsheet The maximum size of any one spreadsheet is 10 000 rows by 676 columns The app opens in Numeric view There is no Plot or Symbolic view There is a Symbolic Setup view E1 E8 that enables you to override certain system wide settings See Common operations in Symbolic Setup view on page 87 Getting started with the Spreadsheet app Suppose you have a stall at a weekend market You sell furniture on consignment for their owners taking a 10 commission for yourself You have to pay the landowner 100 a day to set up your stall and you will keep the stall open until you have made 250 for yourself 1 Open the Spreadsheet app Press Press and select Spreadsheet 2 Select column A Either tap on A or use the cursor keys to highlight the A cell that is the heading of the A column Spreadsheet 195 3 Enter PRI
72. rss Esc Keys 0 13 fT View a mer 5 Menu 10 Keys 14 19 E fc xton KE Chars AJ Mem_B nits CJ DefineD fern EJ Del J pees SIN LA ASIN G AcOSH ATAN le J LO E Keys 26 30 x EFi Enter j Ey EN Keys 31 35 EEX am ltor is SI Keys 36 40 ALPHA Es wW 4_x Keys 41 45 Shift menam Gas BL keys 46 50 On oJ Ce Co fee Gee Gey E_y Figure 27 1 Numbers of the keys Syntax INPUT var title label help reset Opens a dialog box with the title text title with one field named label displaying help at the bottom and using the reset value if is pressed Updates the variable var if the user taps Eag and returns 1 If the user taps f variable and returns O Example EXPORT SIDES EXPORT GETSIDES BEGIN INPUT SIDES D Enter num sides ie Sides N SMPSEDEEDEEBCIIETID Enter num sides 2 END Programming in HP PPL 551 ISKEYDOWN Syntax ISKEYDOWN key_id Returns true non zero if the key whose key_id is provided is currently pressed and false 0 if it is not MOUSE Syntax MOUSE index Returns two lists describing the current location of each potential pointer or empty lists if the pointers are not used The output is x y original z original y type where type is O for new 1 for completed 2 for drag 3 for stretch 4 for rotate and 5 for long click The optional parameter in
73. s s aes30021 1 4 02421804 values for and 7 R1 If you had specified and selected more than one polar function in Symbolic view a column of evaluations would appear for each one R2 R3 R4 and so on 12 With the cursor in the 6 column type a new value and tap The table scrolls to the value you entered You can also zoom in or out on the independent variable thereby decreasing or increasing the increment between consecutive values This and other options are explained in Common operations in Numeric view on page 100 You can see the Plot and Numeric views side by side See Combining Plot and Numeric Views on page 106 280 Polar app 17 Sequence app The Sequence app provides you with various ways to explore sequences You can define a sequence named for example U1 e interms of n e in terms of U1 n 1 e in terms of U1 n 2 e in terms of another sequence for example U2 n or e in any combination of the above You can define a sequence by specifying just the first term and the rule for generating all subsequent terms However you will have to enter the second term if the HP Prime is unable to calculate it automatically Typically if the nth term in the sequence depends on n 2 then you must enter the second term The app enables you to create two types of graphs e a Stairsteps graph which plots points of the form n Un a Cobweb graph which plots points of the form Un 1 Un
74. standard deviation you 2 would enter STAT1 A25 A37 h n amp x o What the ATASAT hna oT configuration string is indicating here is that row headings are required h but just return the number of data points n the mean x and the standard deviation c See page 352 for details on the configuration string for this command SUM Calculates the sum of a range of numbers SUM input For example SUM B7 B23 returns the sum of the numbers in the range B7 to B23 You can also specify a block of cells as in SUM B7 C23 An error is returned if a cell in the specified range contains a non numeric object 350 Functions and commands AVERAGE AMORT Calculates the arithmetic mean of a range of numbers AVERAGE input For example AVERAGE B7 B23 returns the arithmetic mean of the numbers in the range B7 to B23 You can also specify a block of cells as in AVERAG B7 C23 An error is returned if a cell in the specified range contains a non numeric object Amortization Calculates the principal interest and balance of a loan over a specified period Corresponds to pressing in the Finance app AMORT Range NbPmt IPYR PV PMTV PPYR 12 CPYR PPYR GSize PPYR BEG 0 fix current configuration Range the cell range where the results are to be placed If only one cell is specified then the range is automatically calculated starting from that cell Configuration a
75. the full syntax for the PIXON command is PIXON G xposition yposition color Programming in HP PPL 497 Program Structure Comments Some built in commands employ an alternative syntax whereby function arguments do not appear in parentheses Examples include RETURN and RANDOM Programs can contain any number of subroutines each of which is a function or procedure Subroutines start with a heading consisting of the name followed by parentheses that contain a list of parameters or arguments separated by commas The body of a subroutine is a sequence of statements enclosed within a BEGIN END pair For example the body of a simple program called MYPROGRAM could look like this EXPORT MYPROGAM BEGIN IXON 1 1 END oy When a line of a program begins with two forward slashes the rest of the line will be ignored This enables you to insert comments in the program EXPORT MYPROGAM BEGIN PIXON 1 1 This line is just a comment END The Program Catalog The Program Catalog is where you run and debug programs and send programs to another HP Prime You can also rename and remove programs and it is where you start the Program Editor The Program Editor is where you create and edit programs Programs can also be run from Home view or from other programs 498 Programming in HP PPL Open the Press Program Catalog i Program Program to open the aak ma Ca
76. the statistics Min eo Iculated from the Mea f70 e calculated from the Mea 179 sample data in D1 M pg The mean x is 170 K h sX 17 905694150 There are more oX 7 071067812 rae 5 statistics than can be aaaea displayed on one Statistics 1Var Numeric View screen Thus you may need to scroll to see the statistic you are after Note that the title of the column of statistics is H1 There are 5 data set definitions available for one variable statistics H1 H5 If data is entered in D1 H1 is automatically set to use D1 for data and the frequency of each data point is set to 1 You can select other columns of data from the Symbolic view of the app 4 Tap to close the statistics window Press to see the pete ve SOE View E data set definitions B frea W Plott Histogram The first field in each 2 bags A W Plot2 Hi set of definitions is sat sogan where you specify EE Plot3 Histogram the column of data Lal Enter independent column that is to be Legit vp _ show Eval analyzed the second field is where you specify the column that has the frequencies of each data point and the third field Plotn is where you choose the type of plot that will 212 Statistics 1Var app represent the data in Plot view Histogram Box and Whisker Normal Probability Line Bar or Pareto Symbolic view menu items The menu items you can tap on in
77. through string for n lt 6 on the menu buttons FREEZE Syntax FREEZE Pauses program execution until a key is pressed This prevents the screen from being redrawn after the end of the program execution leaving the modified display on the screen for the user to see PX C Converts from screen coordinates to Cartesian coordinates RGB Syntax RGB R G B A Returns an integer number that can be used as the color parameter for a drawing function based on Red Green and Blue component values each O to 255 If Alpha is greater than 128 returns the color flagged as transparent There is no alpha channel blending on Prime Examples RGB 255 0 128 returns 16711808 RECT RGB 0 0 255 makes a blue screen LINE 0 0 8 8 RGB 0 255 0 draws a green line Programming in HP PPL 537 Pixels and Cartesian ARC_P ARC Syntax ARC G x y r al a2 c ARC_P G x y r al a2 c Draws an arc or circle on G centered on point x y with radius r and color c starting at angle a7 and ending on angle a2 G can be any of the graphics variables and is optional The default is GO r is given in pixels c is optional and if not specified black is used It should be specified in this way RRGGBB in the same way as a color is specified in HTML al and a2 follow the current angle mode and are optional The default is a full circle Example ARC 0 0 60 0 n RGB 255 0 0 draws a red s
78. tracer x values Num Type Automatic Xmin and pixel width in Plot view Top EEB ETA For example if you have zoomed in on the plot in Plot view so that the visible x range is now 4 to 4 this option will set Num Start to 4 and Num Step to 0 025 EA Clear to reset all the settings to their Num Zoom 4 Enter table start value Explore 15 Re display Numeric Function Numeric View 2 te X F1 F2 Numeric view 45 z e 3 97484 4 97484277 2 174906E1 view 3 94969 4 94968553 2 149939 1 E 3 92453 4 92452830 2 125098E1 3 89937 4 89937107 2 100384 1 3 87421 4 87421384 2 075796E1 3 84906 4 84905660 2 05133561 3 82390 4 82389937 2 027001E1 3 79874 4 79874214 2 002793E1 ji 4 Zoom __ ___ _size_ Defn column To navigate around 16 Using the cursor Function Numeric View 12 X F1 F2 a table keys scroll through 5 A 3 97484 4 97484277 2 174906E1 the values in the 3 94969 4 94968553 2 149939 1 i 3 92453 4 92452830 2 125098e1 independent column 3 89937 4 89937107 2 100384 1 3 87421 4 87421384 2 075796E1 column x Note 3 84906 4 84905660 2 051335E1 that the values in the 3 82390 4 82389937 2 027001e1 d 3 79874 4 79874214 2 002793 1 3 77358 4 77358491 1 978711F1 F1 and F2 columns 3 79874213836 match what you Zoom __ __ _size_ _Defn_ Column would get if you substit
79. value for x Tap and press J 1 _2_ 3 Ce 3 Top ME 4 Select the other function as the boundary for the integral If F1 X is the currently selected function you would choose F2 X here and vice versa Below F F2 X X 1 3 Axis 4 above 5 Specify the end value for x Tap and press 2 J3 _J The cursor jumps to x 2 3 and the area between the two functions is shaded 6 To display the numerical value of the integral tap a 7 Tap M to return to the Plot menu Note that the sign of the area calculated eoo eee eoo Area 7 812 ok depends both on which function you are tracing and whether you enter the endpoints from left to right or right to left Function app 121 To find the extremum of the quadratic Note Shortcut When the Goto option is available you can display the Go To screen simply by typing a number The number you type appears on the entry line Just tap to accept it 1 To calculate the coordinates of the extremum of the quadratic equation move the tracing cursor near the extremum of interest if necessa ry tap No minimum or maximum found OK and select Extremum The coordinates of the extremum are displayed at the bottom of the screen The ROOT INTERSECTION and EXTREMUM operations return only one value even if the function in question has more than on
80. versa catalog A collection of items such as matrices lists programs and the like New items you create are saved to a catalog and you choose a specific item from a catalog to work on it A special catalog that lists the apps is called the Application Library Glossary 587 command expression function Home view input form key Library list An operation for use in programs Commands can store results in variables but do not display results A number variable or algebraic expression numbers plus functions that produces a value An operation possibly with arguments that returns a result It does not store results in variables The arguments must be enclosed in parentheses and separated with commas The basic starting point of the calculator Most calculations can be done in Home view However such calculations only return numeric approximations For exact results you can use the CAS You can share results and variables between the CAS and Home view and vice versa A screen where you can set values or choose options Another name for a dialog box A key on the keypad as opposed to a button which appears on the screen and needs to be tapped to be activated A collection of items more specifically the apps See also catalog A set of objects separated by commas and enclosed in curly braces Lists are commonly used to contain statistical data and to evaluate a function with
81. x y 2 xty 2 x y 2 384 Functions and commands companion compare complexroot Returns the companion matrix of a polynomial companion Poly Var Example companion x 2 5x 7 x returns f 7 Compares objects and returns 1 if type arg1 lt type arg2 or if type arg1 type arg2 and arg lt arg2 and returns O otherwise compare Object1 Object2 Example compare 1 2 gives 1 With a polynomial and a real as its two arguments returns a matrix Each row of the matrix contains either a complex root of the polynomial with its multiplicity or an interval containing such a root and its multiplicity The interval defines a possibly rectangular region in the complex plane where a complex root lies With two additional complex numbers as third and fourth arguments returns a matrix as described for two arguments but only for those roots lying in the rectangular region defined by the diagonal created by the two complex numbers complexroot Poly Real Complexl Complex2 Example complexroot x 3 8 0 01 returns 2 1 1017 1782 i 1026 1773 i 1 1024 1024 1395 378 i 189 702 il 512 512 i 256 256 i This matrix indicates there is 1 complex root at x 2 with another root between the two values in the second row vector and a third root between the two values in the third row vector Functions and commands 385 contains CopyVar correlation count covariance Given a l
82. z a LO feat Delete send _ 88 Feat ins Delete T sie Tuss L1 1 88 2 90 3 4 5 65 89 Feat ins Delete J Sze_ _usts_ that it has a value of 5 5 Ea To insert an element Suppose you want to i in a list insert a new value 9 in 3 bo L1 2 in the list L1 shown aoo D y 5 to the right 65 Edit Ins Delete Size Lists__ 454 Lists Select L1 2 that is a the second element in the list gt DuEWNS W 90 f tait ins Delete size uists Deleting lists To delete a list In the List Catalog use the cursor keys to highlight the list and press You are prompted to confirm your decision Tap or press _ If the list is one of the reserved lists LO L9 then only the contents of the list are deleted The list is simply stripped of its contents If the list is one you have named other than LO L9 then it is deleted entirely To delete all lists In the List Catalog press Clear The contents of the lists LO L9 are deleted and any other named lists are deleted entirely Lists in Home view You can enter and operate on lists directly in Home view The lists can be named or unnamed To createa list 1 Press A pair of braces appears on the entry line All lists must be enclosed in braces 2 Enter the first element in the list followed by a comma element 3 Continue adding elements separa
83. 1 482 Matrices Factorize LQ LSQ LU LQ Factorization Factorizes a m x n matrix into three matrices L Q and P where L m x n lowertrapezoidal Q n x n orthogonal P m x m permutation and P A L Q LO matrix Example LQ 12 returns 34 l 2 2360 0 0 4472 0 8944 10 l 4 9193 0 8944 0 8944 0 4472 0 1 Least Squares Displays the minimum norm least squares matrix or vector corresponding to the system matrix l X matrix2 LSQ matrixl matrix2 Example ae LU Decomposition Factorizes a square matrix into three matrices L U and P where L lowertriangular U uppertriangular P permutation H and P A L U LU matrix Example elie EE Matrices 483 QR SCHUR SVD QR Factorization Factorizes an mxn matrix A numerically as Q R where Q is an orthogonal matrix and R is an upper triangular matrix and returns R R is stored in var2 and Q A inv R is stored in var QR matrix A var1 var2 Example QR 12 returns 34 0 3612 0 9486 3 1622 4 4271 10 0 9486 0 3162 0 0 6324 O01 Schur Decomposition Factorizes a square matrix into two matrices If matrix is real then the result is orthogonall upper quasi triangular If matrix is complex then the result is unitary upper triangular SCHUR matrix Example SCHUR 12 returns 34 ieee ae 5 3722 1 5 17 DOO Soe Me
84. 23 indicates that operations are to begin on the second list and with the third element To that element is added the first element in the first list The process continues until there are no more pairs Syntax HMS value Converts a decimal value to hexagesimal format that is in units subdivided into groups of 60 This includes degrees minutes and seconds as well as hours minutes and seconds Example HMS 54 8763 returns 54 52 34 68 Syntax HMS value Converts a value expressed hexagesimal format to decimal format Example HMS 54 52 34 68 returns 54 8763 Syntax ITERATE expr var ivalue times For times recursively evaluates expr in terms of var beginning with var ivalue Example ITERATE X 2 X 2 3 returns 256 Syntax TICKS Returns the internal clock value in milliseconds Syntax TIME program_name Returns the time in milliseconds required to execute the program program_name The results are stored in the variable TIME The variable TICKS is similar It contains the number of milliseconds since boot up Programming in HP PPL 555 TYPE Syntax TYPE object Returns the type of the object O Real 1 Integer 2 String 3 Complex 4 Matrix 5 Error 6 List 8 Function 9 Unit 14 cas object The fractional part is the cas type Variables and Programs The HP Prime has four types of variables Home variables App variables CA
85. 3 12 sqrt 33 e Cesqre 3 ne n 6 lavage 331 64 eget 2 eas ana 12 sqrt 33 6 sqrt 3 a a es atare 33n 6 sqrt 33 2 sqrt 33 3 Pope ted Returns the maximum real number that the HP Prime is capable of representing 1 79769313486 10308 Returns the arithmetic mean of a list with an optional list as a list of weights With a matrix as argument returns the mean of the columns mean List1 List2 or mean Matrix Example mean 1 2 3 1 2 3 gives 7 3 Returns the median of a list with an optional list as a list of weights With a matrix as argument returns the median of the columns median List1 List2 or median Matrix Example median 1 2 3 5 10 4 gives 3 0 Given a list or vector and an element returns the index of the first occurrence of the element in the list or vector if the element does not appear in the list or vector returns O Similar to contains except that the element comes first in the argument order member Element List or contains Element Vector Example member 2 0 1 2 3 returns 3 Returns the minimum real number that the HP Prime is capable of representing 2 2250738585 1 10 308 Functions and commands 401 modged mRow mult_c_conjugate mult_conjugate Uses the modular algorithm to return the greatest common divisor of two polynomials modgcd Polyl Poly2 Example modgced x 4 1 x 1 2 gives
86. 5 parallelogram syntax for each command is feine slepolygon 5 in Polygon gt quadrilateral given in Geometry 4Curve erectangle functions and commands Transform 2rhombus on page 165 Cmds ffx _y _Jcancei _oK_ Re ordering You can re order the entries in Symbolic view Objects are entries drawn in Plot view in the order in which they are defined in Symbolic view To change the position of an entry highlight it and tap either to move it down the list or HEB to move it up Hiding an object To prevent an object displaying in Plot view deselect it in Symbolic view 1 Highlight the item to be hidden 2 Tap EEB Repeat the procedure to make the object visible again Geometry 149 Deleting an object As well as deleting an object in Plot view see page 145 you can delete an object in Symbolic view 1 Highlight the definition of the object you want to delete 2 Tap GEE or press 8 To delete all objects press Ea Symbolic Setup view The Symbolic view of the Geometry app is common with many apps It is used to override certain system wide settings For details see Symbolic Setup view on page 74 Numeric view in detail Numeric view EB enables you to do calculations in the Geometry app The results displayed are dynamic if you manipulate an object in Plot view or Symbolic view any calculations in Numeric view that refer to that object are automatically updated t
87. A that is perpendicular to BC 168 Geometry bisector exbisector half_line line Geometry Given three points creates the bisector of the angle defined by the three points whose vertex is at the first point The angle does not have to be drawn in the Plot view bisector pointl point2 point3 Examples bisector A B C draws the bisector of lt BAC bisector 0 4i 4 draws the line given by y x Given three points that define a triangle creates the bisector of the exterior angles of the triangle whose common vertex is at the first point The triangle does not have to be drawn in the Plot view exbisector pointl point2 point3 Examples exbisector A B C draws the bisector of the exterior angles of AABC whose common vertex is at point A exbisector 0 4i 4 draws the line given by y x Given 2 points draws a ray from the first point through the second point half _line pointl point2 Draws a line The arguments can be two points a linear expression of the form a x b y c or a point and a slope as shown in the examples line pointl point2 or line a x b ytc or line pointl slope realm Examples line 2 i 3 2i draws the line whose equation is y x 1 that is the line through the points 2 1 and 3 2 line 2x 3y 8 draws the line whose equation is 2x 3y 8 line 3 2i slope 1 2 draws the line whose equation is x 2y 7 that is the line through 3 2 with slope m 1 2 169 media
88. All you need do is fill in the missing information 4 Using the cursor keys and keyboard fill in the missing parts of the command In this case make the statement match the following FOR N FROM 1 TO 3 DO MYPROGRAM EXPORT MYPROGRAM BEGIN END EEES FOR DOWN 1Block gt 4FOR DOWN STEP 2Branch gt 5 WHILE 3Loop gt Variable gt BREAK 5 Function gt CONTINUE op a CS aS MYPROGRAM su EXPORT MYPROGRAM BEGIN FOR FROM TO DO END END cmas Lm Te MYPROGRAM EXPORT MYPROGRAM BEGIN FOR N FROM 1 TO 3 DO END END cmas lmm Tne 5 Move the cursor to a blank line below the FOR statement 6 Tap to open the menu of common programming commands 7 Select 1 0 and then select MSGBOX from the sub menu MYPROGRAM 1Strings 2 Drawing 3 Matrix SInteger 1 0 7 More Cmds imp _ check _ Programming in HP PPL 505 8 Fill in the arguments MYPROGRAM of the mscBox ge Pemo d d FOR N FROM 1 TO 3 DO command and type __ scsoxc counting N z END a semicolon at the end of the command EL END mr 9 Tap to check the syntax of your program 10 When you are finished press to return to the Program Catalog or to go to Home view You are ready now to execute the program Run a From Home view enter the name of the program If the
89. Box and Whisker 3 Normal Probability A Line 5 Bar 6 Pareto Example 2PH3Type Programming in HP PPL 563 Method Inference RO R9 Polar 1 85 Statistics 2Var S1Type S5Type Statistics 2Var Determines whether the Inference app is set to calculate hypothesis test results or confidence intervals In Symbolic view make a selection for Method In a program type 0 gt Method for Hypothesis Test 1 gt Method for Confidence Interval Contains an expression in 0 In Symbolic view select one of RO through R9 and enter an expression In a program type for example SIN 0 gt R1 Contains a list that defines a 2 variable statistical analysis Returns a list containing the independent column name the dependent column name and the fit equation if any Sets the type of fit to be used by the FIT operation in drawing the regression line From Symbolic view specify the fit in the field for Type1 Type2 etc In a program store one of the following constant integers into a variable S1Type S2Type etc 1 Linear 2 Logarithmic 3 Exponential 4 Power 5 Exponent 6 Inverse 7 Logistic 8 Quadratic 9 Cubic 10 Quartic 11 User Defined Example Cubic gt S2type or 8 gt S2type 564 Programming in HP PPL Type Inference XO YO X9 Y9 Parametric UO U9 Sequence Determines the type of hypothesis test or confidence interval Depends upon the value of the variable Met hod F
90. Calculates statistics for each data set selected in Symbolic view See Computed statistics on page 218 In Numeric view highlight the data to change type a new value and press _ _ You can also highlight the data tap to copy it to the entry line make your change and press _Fer_ 216 Statistics 1Var app Delete data Insert data Generating data Sort data values 2 To delete a data item highlight it and press 8 J The values below the deleted cell will scroll up one row To delete a column of data highlight an entry in that column and press E3 Clear Select the column and tap Qa To delete all data in every column press Clear select A11 columns and tap SET Highlight the cell below where you want to insert a value Tap and enter the value If you just want to add more data to the data set and it is not important where it goes select the last cell in the data set and start entering the new data You can enter a formula Make Column Data 735 to generate alist of data Spressione 7 oe Var X points for a specified Start 1 column In the example Sapto M Step 2 atthe right 5 data points Col D2 will be placed in column D2 They will be Enter expression to evaluate generated by the edit Xf cancel 0K expression X 2 F where X comes from the set 1 3 5 7 9 These are the values between 1 and 10 that differ by 2 F is whatever value has been assi
91. Example pa2b2 17 gives 4 1 Returns the Pade approximation of an expression i e a rational fraction P Q such that P Q Expr mod x n 1 or mod N with degree P lt p pade Expr Var Integern Integerp Example 3 x7 24 x 60 3 pade exp x x 5 3 returns 7 x 9 x 36 x 60 Inserts 7 Used to define a piecewise defined function Takes as arguments pairs consisting of a condition and an expression Each of these pairs defines a sub function of the piecewise function and the domain over which it is active Casel if Test1 PIECEWISE Case2 if Test2 Example x ifx lt 0 v ifx gt 0 PIECEWISE Note that the syntax varies if the Entry setting is not set to Textbook PIECEWISE Casel Testl Casen Testn Shows the graph of the solution of inequations with 2 variables plotinequation Expr x xrange y yrange xste pl lystep 404 Functions and commands plotparam plotpolar plotseq polar_point Used in the Geometry app Symbolic view Takes a complex expression in one variable and an interval for that variable as arguments Interprets the complex expression t i g t as x f t and y g t and plots the parametric equation over the interval specified in the second argument plotparam f Var i g Var Var Interval Example plotparam cos t i sin t t 0 2 m plots the unit circle Used in the Geometry app Symbolic view Takes an expression in one
92. F0 3T 22r Returns the list made by the matrix of passage and the Jordan form of a matrix j ordan matrix Example sordan 1 returns V2 42 A J2 0 10 1 2 0 2 480 Matrices Diagonal Cholesky Hermite Given a list returns a matrix with the list elements along its diagonal and zeroes elsewhere Given a matrix returns a vector of the elements along its diagonal diag list or diag matrix Example asaa returns 1 4 For a numerical symmetric matrix A returns the matrix L such that A L tran L cholesky matrix Example In CAS view cronesty 3 1 returns diya J3 0 NE after simplification 3 3 Hermite normal form of a matrix with coefficients in Z returns U B such that U is invertible in Z B is upper triangular and B U A ihermite Mtrx A Example 23 zavil g Let 3 ihermite 4 5 returns 4 1 o o 3 6 789 1 2 1 0 0 0 Matrices 481 Hessenberg Matrix reduction to Hessenberg form Returns P B such that B inv P A P hessenberg Mtrx A Example 123 In CAS view hessenberg 4 5 6 789 4 1 0 o ogy lo 1 0 returns PE pel Gee 7 7 49 7 Smith Smith normal form of a matrix with coefficients in Z returns U B V such that U and V invertible in Z B is diagonal B i i divides B i 1 i 1 and B U A V ismith Mtrx A Example 123 ismith 4 5 6 returns 7 8 9 1 0 OO 100 1 2 1 4 1 0 0 3 0 O 1 2 1 2 1 000 0 0
93. Group Size In a program type nb amp GSize The following variables are used by the Linear Solver app They correspond to the fields in the app s Numeric view Contains a 2x3 or 3x4 matrix which represents a 2x2 or 3x3 linear system From the Numeric view of the Linear Solver app enter the coefficients and constants of the linear system In a program type matrix mLSystem where matrix is either a matrix or the name of one of the matrix variables MO M9 The following variables are used by the Triangle Solver app They correspond to the fields in the app s Numeric view The length of Side a Sets the length of the side opposite the angle A From the Triangle Solver Numeric view enter a positive value for a In a program type nhSideA where n gt 0 The length of Side b Sets the length of the side opposite the angle B From the Triangle Solver Numeric view enter a positive value for b In a program type nhSideB where n gt 0 Programming in HP PPL 573 SideC The length of Side c Sets the length of the side opposite the angle C From the Triangle Solver Numeric view enter a positive value for c In a program type nbSidec where n gt 0 AngleA The measure of angle A Sets the measure of angle A The value of this variable will be interpreted according to the angle mode setting Degrees or Radians From the Triangle Solver Numeric view enter a positive value for angle A In a program ty
94. ICDF 20 0 5 0 6 returns 11 Inverse cumulative Poisson distribution function Returns the value x such that the probability of x or fewer occurrences of an event with u expected or mean occurrences of the event in the interval is p POISSON _ICDF pu p Example POISSON_ICDF 4 0 238103305554 returns 3 These functions work on data in a list They are explained in detail in chapter 24 Lists beginning on page 451 322 Functions and commands Matrix Special Beta Gamma Psi Zeta erf erfc Ei Si Ci These functions work on matrix data stored in matrix variables They are explained in detail in chapter 25 Matrices beginning on page 463 Returns the value of the beta function B for two numbers a and b Beta a b Returns the value of the gamma function T for a number a Gamma a Returns the value of the nth derivative of the digamma function at x a where the digamma function is the first derivative of In I x Psi a n Returns the value of the zeta function Z for a real x Zeta x Returns the floating point value of the error function at x a erf a Returns the value of the complementary error function at x a erfc a Returns the exponential integral of an expression Ei Expr Returns the sine integral of an expression Si Expr Returns the cosine integral of an expression Ci Expr Functions and commands 323 CAS menu Algebra Simp
95. M2 a sm anas eee Function 18 15 RREF M1 M2 1001 010 2 0013 re ee eamas ee ee resulting from systems of equations which have no solution or infinite solutions For example the following set of equations has an infinite number of solutions The final row of zeros in the reduced row echelon form of the augmented matrix indicates an inconsistent system with infinite solutions Function RREF M3 1 0 333333333333 4 0 1 666666666667 1 00 o 0 C a 487 488 Matrices 26 Notes and Info The HP Prime has two text editors for entering notes The Note Editor opens from within the Note Catalog which is a collection of notes independent of apps The Info Editor opens from the Info view of an app A note created in the Info view is associated with the app and stays with it if you send the app to another calculator The Note Catalog Note Catalog button and keys Subject to available memory you can store as many notes as you want in the Note Catalog These notes are independent of any app The Note Catalog lists the notes by name This list excludes notes that were created in any app s Info view but these can be copied and then pasted into the Note Catalog via the clipboard From the Note Catalog you create or edit individual notes in the Note Editor Press Notes to enter the Note Catalog While you are in the Note Catalog you can use th
96. Meaning Checks the current program for errors If your program goes beyond one screen you can quickly jump from screen to screen b and Gopi either side of this button Tap the left side of the button to display the previous page tap the right side to display the next page The left tap will be inactive if you have the first page of the program displayed or Opens a menu from which you can choose from common programming commands The commands are grouped under the options e Strings e Drawing Matrix e App Functions e Integer I O e More 502 Programming in HP PPL Button or Key Meaning Continued Vars chars Chars Press to return to the main menu The commands in this menu are described in Commands under the Cmds menu beginning on page 534 Opens a menu from which you can select common programming commands The commands are grouped under the options Block Branch e Loop Variable Function Press to return to the main menu The commands in this menu are described in Commands under the Tmplt menu beginning on page 528 Displays menus for selecting variable names and values Displays a palette of characters If you display this palette while a program is open you can choose a character and it will be be added to your program at the cursor point To add one character highlight it and tap or press To add a char
97. Numeric view From Numeric Setup view enter a value for NUMSTEP In a program type n gt NumStep where n gt 0 Sets the step size increment value for the independent X variable in Numeric view From Numeric Setup view enter a value for NUMXSTEP In a program type n gt NumXStep where n gt 0 Sets the step size increment value for the independent Y variable in Numeric view From Numeric Setup view enter a value for NUMYSTEP In a program type n gt NumYStep where n gt 0 Sets the table format In Numeric Setup view make a selection for Num Type In a program type 0 gt NumType for Automatic default 1 gt NumType for BuildYourOwn Sets the zoom factor in the Numeric view From Numeric Setup view type in a value for NUMZOOM In a program type n gt NumZoom where n gt 0 Programming in HP PPL 567 NumXZoom Sets the zoom factor for the values in the X column in the Advanced Graphing Numeric view From Numeric Setup view type in a value for NUMXZOOM In a program type n gt NumXZoom where n gt 0 NumYZoom Sets the zoom factor for the values in the Y column in the Advanced Graphing Numeric view From Numeric Setup view type in a value for NUMY ZOOM In a program type n gt NumYZoom where n gt 0 Inference The following variables are used by the Inference app app They correspond to fields in the Inference app Numeric variables view The set of variables show
98. Objectl Object2 Example cat aaa c 12 3 gives aaac36 Returns an expression factorized over the complex field on Gaussian integers if there are more than two cfactor Expr Example cFactor x 2 y y gives x i x i y Functions and commands 383 charpoly chrem col colDim comDenom Returns the coefficients of the characteristic polynomial of a matrix With only one argument the variable used in the polynomial is x With a variable as second argument the polynomial returned is in terms of that variable charpoly Mtrx Var Example charpoly T 2 returns z 5 2 2 Returns a vector containing the Chinese remainders for two sets of integers contained in either two vectors or two lists chrem Listl List2 or chrem Vectorl Vector2 Example chrem 2 3 7 5 returns 12 35 Given a matrix and integer n returns the column of index n of the matrix col Matrix Integer Example 123 col 4 5 l 2 returns 2 5 8 789 Returns the number of columns of a matrix colDim Mtrx Example 123 copia 5 i returns 3 Rewrites a sum of rational fractions as a one rational fraction The denominator of the one rational fraction is the common denominator of the rational fractions in the original expression With a variable as second argument the numerator and denominator are developed according to it comDenom Expr Var Example comDenom 1 x 1 y 2 1 gives
99. Open the Application Library 2 Use the cursor keys to highlight the app 3 Tap Gag 4 Tap Geis You can also reset an app from within the app From the main view of the app which is usually but not always the Symbolic view press and tap to confirm your intention to confirm your intention By default the built in apps in the Application Library are sorted chronologically with the most recently used app shown first Customized apps always appear after the built in apps An introduction to HP apps 71 You can change the sort order of the built in apps to Alphabetically The app icons are sorted alphabetically by name and in ascending order A to Z e Fixed Apps are displayed in their default order Function Advanced Graphing Geometry Polar and Sequence Customized apps are placed at the end after all the built in apps They appear in chronological order oldest to most recent To change the sort order 1 Open the Application Library 2 Tap EIS 3 From the Sort Apps list choose the option you want To delete an The apps that come with the HP Prime are built in and cannot be app deleted but you can delete an app you have created To delete an app 1 Open the Application Library 2 Use the cursor keys to highlight the app 3 Tap GEE 4 Tap to confirm your intention Other The other options available in the Application Library are options Enables you to save a copy of an app
100. PPL Sik FOR k FROM 1 TO n DO ROLLDIE sides ROLLDIE sides gt roll results roll 1 gt results roll END RETURN results END ROLLDIE N BEGIN RETURN 1 RANDINT N 1 END In Home view you would enter ROLLMANY 100 6 gt L5 and the results of the simulation of 100 rolls of two six sided dice would be stored in list L5 The User Keyboard Customizing key presses User mode You can assign alternative functionality to any key on the keyboard including to the functionality provided by the shift and alpha keys This enables you to customize the keyboard to your particular needs For example you could assign to a function that is multi nested on a menu and thus difficult to get to on a menu such as ALOG A customized keyboard is called the user keyboard and you activate it when you go into user mode There are two user modes Temporary user mode the next key press and only the next enters the object you have assigned to that key After entering that object the keyboard automatically returns to its default operation To activate temporary user mode press User Notice that 1U appears in the title bar The 1 will remind you that the user keyboard will be active for just one key press e Persistent user mode each key press from now until you turn off user mode will enter whatever object you have assigned to a key 516 Programming in HP PPL
101. Plot Setup view Statistics 1 Var app 219 Box and Whisker plot Normal probability plot Line plot Bar graph that bin is 6 The data set is defined by H3 in Symbolic view You can see information about other bins by pressing or The left whisker marks the minimum data value The box marks the first quartile the median and the third quartile The right whisker marks the maximum data value The numbers below the a x H3 Min 2 plot give the statistic at the cursor You can see other statistics by pressing Dor The normal probability plot is used to determine whether or not sample data is more or less normally distributed The more linear the data appear the more likely that the data are normally distributed The line plot connects points of the form x y where x is the row number of the data point and y is its value The bar graph shows the value of a data point as a vertical bar placed along the x axis at the row number of the data point wl 1 0 0471698113208 ii 15 H3 X 2 Y 1 6448536270 e 7 x 0 0471698113208 i 45 I H3 1 2 0 0471698113208 15 7 H3 1 2 220 Statistics 1Var app Pareto chart A pareto chart places the fro data in descending order and displays each with its percentage of the whole H1 180 of Total 26 47
102. Result 0 content contents or empty 1 formula formula 2 name name or empty 3 number format Standard O Fixed 1 Scientific 2 number of deci mal places font background color Engineering 3 1 to 11 or unspecified 1 O to 6 unspecified with O 10 pt and 6 22pt cell fill color or 32786 if unspecified foreground color cell contents color horizontal align ment vertical align ment show strings in quotes textbook mode as opposed to algebraic mode or 32786 if unspecified Left O Center 1 Right 2 unspecified 1 Top 0 Center 1 Bottom 2 unspecified 1 Yes 0 No 1 unspecified 1 Yes 0 No 1 unspecified 1 As well as retrieving format attributes you can set a format attribute or cell content by specifying it in a formula in the Spreadsheet 209 relevant cell For example wherever it is placed g5 1 6543 enters 6543 in cell g5 Any previous content in g5 is replaced Similarly B3 5 2 forces the contents of B3 to be displayed in medium font size Spreadsheet functions As well as the functions on the Math CAS and Catlg menus you can use special spreadsheet functions These can be found on the App menu one of the Toolbox menus Press I tap and select Spreadsheet The functions are described on Spreadsheet app functions on page 349 Remember to precede a function by an equals sign SA 2 if you
103. SIDES modifying an earlier program in this chapter t XPORT SIDES XPORT GETSIDES GI REPEAT a B a INPUT SIDES Die Sides N Enter num sides 2 UNTIL SIDES gt 0 END BREAK Syntax BREAK n Exits from loops by breaking out of n loop levels Execution picks up with the first statement after the loop With no argument exits from a single loop CONTINUE Syntax CONTINU Transfers execution to the start of the next iteration of a loop Fl 532 Programming in HP PPL Variable Function LOCAL EXPORT EXPORT VIEW KEY These commands enable you to control the visibility of a user defined variable Local Syntax LOCAL var 1 var2 varn Makes the variables var1 var2 etc local to the program in which they are found Syntax EXPORT varl var2 varn Exports the variables var var2 etc so they are globally available and appear on the User menu when you press and select MEIS These commands enable you to control the visibility of a user defined function Export Syntax EXPORT FunctionName Exports the function FunctionName so that it is globally available and appears on the User menu A MES Syntax VIEW text functionname Replaces the View menu of the current app and adds an entry with text If text is selected and the user presses or then functionname
104. Select Object menu appears 3 Select the object Undoing You can undo your last addition or change to Plot view by pressing v4 However you must have keyboard shortcuts activated for this to work See page 147 144 Geometry Clearing an object Clearing all objects Moving about the Plot view Zooming Geometry To clear one object select it and tap 8 Note that an object is distinct from the points you entered to create it Thus deleting the object does not delete the points that define it Those points remain in the app For example if you select a circle and press 8 J the circle is deleted but the center point and radius point remain If you tap when no object is selected a list of 2 objects appears Tap on the point 3 8 3 176 f circle GA GB GA f one you want to delete l point 9 27 3 217 4 you don t want to delete an EEEN R TO j E segment GD GE 6 object press to close center GC cs x 4 point 5 76 3 87 7 the list If other objects are Ba Pone DOT 622 dependent on the one you have selected for deletion you will be asked to confirm your intention Tap to do so otherwise tap Note that points you add to an object once the object has been defined are cleared when you clear the object Thus if you place a point say D on a circle and delete the circle the circle and D are deleted but the defining points the center and radius points remain
105. Symbolic setup of Setup an app They can be used to overwrite the value of the variables corresponding variable in Home Settings AAngle Sets the angle mode From Symbolic setup choose System Degrees or Radians for angle measure System default will force the angle measure to agree with that in Home Settings In a program type 0 gt AAngle for System default 1 gt AAngle for Degrees 2 gt AAngle for Radians AComplex Sets the complex number mode From Symbolic setup choose System ON or OFF System default will force the complex number mode to agree with the corresponding setting in Home Settings In a program type 0 gt AComplex for System default 1 gt AComplex for ON 2 gt AComplex for OFF ADigits Contains the number of decimal places to use for the Fixed Scientific or Engineering number formats in the app s Symbolic Setup From Symbolic setup enter a value in the second field of Number Format In a program type n gt ADigits where 0 lt n lt 11 578 Programming in HP PPL AFormat Results variables Defines the number display format used for number display in the Home view and to label axes in the Plot view From Symbolic setup choose Standard Fixed Scientific or Engineering in the Number Format field In a program store the constant number into the variable AFormat O System 1 Standard 2 Fixed 3 Scientific 4 Engineering Example 3 gt
106. Symbolic view are Menu item Purpose Copies the column variable or vari able expression to the entry line for editing Tap when done Selects or deselects a statistical analysis H1 H5 for exploration Enters D directly to save you having to press two keys Displays the current expression in textbook format in full screen view Tap when done Evaluates the highlighted expres sion resolving any references to other definitions To continue our example suppose that the heights of the rest of the students in the class are measured and that each one is rounded to the nearest of the five values first recorded Instead of entering all the new data in D1 we simply add another column D2 that holds the frequencies of our five data points in D1 Height cm Frequency 160 5 165 3 170 8 175 2 180 6 Tap on Freq to the right of H1 or press to highlight the second H1 field Statistics 1Var app 213 10 11 12 Enter the name of the column that you will contain the frequencies in this example D2 am If you want to choose Statistics 1Var Symboli H1 D1 E Plott Histogram H2 D2 I Plot2 Histogram V H3 D1 D2 E Plot3 Line H4 Enter frequency column Show Eval a color for the graph of the data in Plot view see Choose a color for plots on page 85 If you have more than one analysis defined in Symbolic view deselect a
107. TEET functions and commands Trigonometry 4 Hyperbolic available on the Math menu _ sprobability are listed as they are Ps 7 Matrix categorized on the menu Special van S Ap cate OK Smallest integer greater than or equal to value CEILING value Examples CEILING 3 2 returns 4 EILING 3 2 returns 3 Q Greatest integer less than or equal to value FLOOR value Example tj LOOR 3 2 returns 3 FLOOR 3 2 returns 4 Integer part IP value Example IP 23 2 returns 23 Fractional part FP value Example FP 23 2 returns 2 Rounds value to decimal places Also accepts complex numbers ROUND value places Functions and commands 313 Truncate Mantissa Exponent Arithmetic Maximum ROUND can also round to a number of significant digits if places is a negative integer as shown in the second example below Examples ROUND 7 8676 2 returns 7 87 ROUND 0 0036757 3 returns 0 00368 Truncates value to decimal places Also accepts complex numbers TRUNCATE value places TRUNCATE can also round to a number of significant digits if places is a negative integer as shown in the second example below Examples TRUNCATE 2 3678 2 returns 2 36 TRUNCATE 0 0036757 3 returns 0 00367 Mantissa that is the significant digits of value where value is a floating point number MANT value Example MANT 21 2E34 retur
108. Tap the point that is the vertex of the angle to be bisected A and press __ Tap another point B and press _ _ Tap a third point C and press _ J A line is drawn through A bisecting the angle formed by AB and AC Tap one point and press _ _ Tap another point and press __ These two points define a segment A line is drawn perpendicular to the segment through its midpoint It does not matter if the segment is actually defined in the Symbolic view or not Alternately tap to select a segment and press _ fuer If you are drawing a perpendicular bisector to a segment choose the segment first and then select Perp Bisector from the Line menu The bisector is drawn immediately without you having to select any points Just press to save the bisector 156 Geometry Parallel 3 Perpendicular 4L Tangent Median Altitude Polygon Triangle Quadrilateral Ngon Polygon5 Polygon Hexagon Geometry Tap on a point P and press _ _ Tap on a line L and press _ _ A new line is draw parallel to L and passing through P Tap on a point P and press _ Tap on a line L and press _ _ A new line is draw perpendicular to L and passing through P Tap on a curve C and press __ _ Tap on a point P and press _ _ Ifthe point P is on the curve C then a single tangent is drawn If the point P is not on the curve C then zero or more tangents may be drawn
109. Tap to open the Zoom menu 4 Scroll and select Set Factors Zoom Factors zzomm i Y Zoom 2 Recenter y The Zoom Factors screen appears 5 Change one or both zoom factors Enter horizontal zoom factor 6 If you want the plot to be centered around the current position of the cursor in Plot view select Recenter 7 Tap or press _f _ J Zoom Zoom options are available from three sources options the keyboard e the menu in Plot view the Views menu EB 88 An introduction to HP apps Zoom keys Zoom menu There are two zoom keys pressing zooms in and pressing zooms out The extent of the scaling is determined by the ZOOM FACTOR settings explained above In Plot view tap and tap an option If is not displayed tap METE The zoom options are explained in the following table Examples are provided on Zoom examples on page 91 Menu d Option Result Center on Redraws the plot so that the cursor is in the Cursor center of the screen No scaling occurs Box Explained in Box zoom on page 90 In Divides the horizontal and vertical scales by X Zoom and Y Zoom values set with the Set Factors option explained on page 88 For instance if both zoom factors are 4 then zooming in results in 1 4 as many units depicted per pixel Shortcut press Out Multiplies the horizontal and vertical scales by the X Zoom and Y Zoom settings Shortcut press bz J
110. You must recover a lot of memory to continue operation Delete one or more customized apps matrices lists notes or programs One of the numbers you have entered has two or more decimal points Division by zero error Undefined result in division LN O is undefined The calculation involves incompatible units eg adding length and mass 593 594 Troubleshooting Appendix C Product regulatory information Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmtul interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television recep tion which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that
111. a ZTest on one mean using the sample data 1 Open the Inference app Apps Select Inference Symbolic View Gal Tnfer nc Method Hyporhesstes Type Z Test 1 p The Inference app Ealen e opens in Symbolic view Choose an inferential method fa Choose a ee Inference app 239 Symbolic view options The table below summarizes the options available in Symbolic view for the two inference methods hypothesis test and confidence interval Hypothesis Test Confidence Interval ZTest 1 u the Z Test on one mean Zest u4 pg the ZTest on the difference between two means ZTest 1 x the Z Test on one proportion ZTest n4 To the ZTest on the difference between two proportions T Test 1 p the T Test on one mean TTest 11 uo the T Test on the difference between two means Zint 1 p the confidence interval for one mean based on the Normal distribution Zint u4 ug the confidence interval for the difference between two means based on the Normal distribution Zint 1 x the confidence interval for one proportion based on the Normal distribution Zint n1 T the confidence interval for the difference between two proportions based on the Normal distribution T Int 1 u the confidence interval for one mean based on the Student s t distribution T Int u1 uz the confidence interval for the difference between two means based on the Student s t distribution I
112. a x 3 7 4 a x 2 13 3 a x 25 12 a 1 24 x 4 2 3 x 343 x 2 4 x41 Given an integer n returns the Legendre polynomial of degree n legendre Integer Example legendre 4 returns 3A Be olw Given an integer n returns the Tchebyshev polynomial of the first kind of degree n tchebyshev1 Integer Example tchebyshev1 3 gives 4 x 3 3 x Given an integer n returns the Tchebyshev polynomial of the second kind of degree n tchebyshev2 Integer Example tchebyshev2 3 gives 8 x 3 4 x Functions and commands 345 Plot Function Implicit Slopefield Contour Used to define a function graph in the Symbolic view of the Geometry app Plots the graph of an expression written in terms of the independent variable x Note that the variable is lowercase plotfunc Expr Example plotfunc 3 sin x draws the graph of y 3 sin x Used to define an implicit graph in the Symbolic view of the Geometry app Plots the graph of an equation written in terms of the independent variable x and the dependent variable y Note that the variables are lowercase plotimplicit Expr Example plotimplicit x 2 2 y 2 3 x y plots a rotated hyperbola Used to define a slopefield graph in the Symbolic view of the Geometry app Plots the graph of the slopefield for the differential equation y f x y over the given xrange and y range plotfield Expr x X1 X2 y Y1 Y2 Example
113. above that GC is the name of the variable that represents a circle drawn in Plot view If you are working in the CAS and wanted to know what the area of that circle is you could enter area GC and press _ The CAS is explained in chapter 3 148 Geometry Note Calculations referencing geometry variables can be made in the CAS or in the Numeric view of the Geometry app explained below on page 150 You can change the definition of an object by selecting it tapping BEIB and altering one or more of its defining parameters The object is modified accordingly in Plot view For example if you selected point GB in the illustration above tapped QB changed one or both of the point s coordinates and tapped you would find on returning to Plot view a circle of a different size Creating objects You can also create an object in Symbolic view Tap EIB define the object for example point 4 6 and press _ fer The object is created and can be seen in Plot view Another example to draw aline through points P and Q enter line GP GQ in Symbolic view and press _ J When you return to Plot view you will see a line passing through points P and Q The object creation Geometry Symbolic View commands available in GA poin 10 19 1 faguilateraltriangie H H V GE hexagon 5 4 hexagon Symbolic view can be seen V GG undef Sisosceles triangle by tapping cmds The AE em isopolygon a 1Point 2
114. alert you to the existence of multiple solutions If you suspect that another solution exists close to a particular value repeat the exercise using that value as a seed In the example just discussed you will find another solution if you enter 4 as the seed value for X In some situations the Solve app will use a random number seed in its search for a solution This means that it is not always predictable which seed will lead to which solution when there are multiple solutions 264 Solve app Solution information When you are solving a single equation the button appears on the menu after you tap EIS Tapping displays a message giving you some information about the solutions found if any Tap to clear the message Message Meaning Zero The Solve app found a point where both sides of the equation were equal or where the expression was zero a root within the calculator s 12 digit accuracy Sign Solve found two points where the two sides Reversal of the equation have opposite signs but it cannot find a point in between where the value is zero Similarly for an expression where the value of the expression has different signs but is not precisely zero Either the two values are neighbors they differ by one in the twelfth digit or the equation is not real valued between the two points Solve returns the point where the value or difference is closer to zero If the equation or expression is continuously real
115. as perimeterat but without the label Used in Symbolic view Displays the slope of a straight object segment line etc The measure is displayed with a label at the given point in Plot view slopeat object point Example slopeat line point 0 0 point 2 3 point 8 8 displays sline point 0 0 point 2 3 3 2 at point 8 8 Works the same as slopeat but without the label Numeric view Cmds menu Measure abscissa Returns the x coordinate of a point or the x length of a vector abscissa point or abscissa vector Example abscissa GA returns the x coordinate of the point A 182 Geometry affix angle arcLen area Geometry Returns the coordinates of a point or both the x and y lengths of a vector as a complex number affix point or affix vector Example if GA is a point at 1 2 then affix GA returns 1 2i Returns the measure of a directed angle The first point is taken as the vertex of the angle as the next two points in order give the measure and sign angle vertex point2 point3 Example angle GA GB GC returns the measure of BAC Returns the length of the arc of a curve between two points on the curve The curve is an expression the independent variable is declared and the two points are defined by values of the independent variable This command can also accept a parametric definition of a curve In this case the expression is a list of 2 ex
116. available for storing complex numbers These are labeled 20 to 29 You can also assign a complex number to a variable you create yourself To store a complex ncaa ee ee AN Od number in a variable enter the complex MENER number press 3 moamamanamnam enter the variable that you want to assign the complex number to and then press _fer_ For example to store 2 3i in variable 26 J22 930 GSS 2 Jol E As well as giving you access to many types of mathematical calculations the HP Prime enables you to create various objects that can be saved and used over and over again For example you can create apps lists matrices programs and notes You can also send these objects to other HP Primes Whenever you encounter a 44 Getting started General procedure screen with as a menu item you can select an item on that screen to send it to another HP Prime You use one of the supplied USB cablesto ii Guu send objects from one SS Micro A sender Micro B receiver HP Prime to another This is the micro A micro B USB cable Note that the connectors on the ends of the USB cable are slightly different The micro A connector has a rectangular end and the micro B connector has a trapezoidal end To share objects with another HP Prime the micro A connector must be inserted into the USB port on the sending calculator with the micro B connector inserted into the USB port on the receiving calculator
117. changes by looking at a plot of it rather than comparing subsequent calculations We can do that by tracing point D as it moves in response to movements of point B First we ll hide the calculations so that we can better see the trace curve 35 Press to return to Numeric view 36 Select each calculation in turn and tap GR All calculations should now be deselected 37 Press to return to Plot view 38 Press and select point GD 39 Tap and select More gt Trace AO Press and select point GB Al Using the cursor keys y move B along the curve Eo pe You will notice that a N i la shadow curve is traced i f i out as you move B This is the curve of the derivative of 3sin x we a Wave GB detail In Plot view you can directly draw objects on the screen using various drawing tools For example to draw a circle tap and select Circle Now tap where you want the center of the circle to be and press Loe i Lansio fuer Next tap a point that is to be on the circumference and press _ _ A circle is drawn with a center at the location of your first tap and with a radius equal to the distance between your first tap and second tap n 141 Creating or selecting an object always involves at least two steps tap and press _ _ Only by pressing do you confirm your intention to create the point or select an object When creating a point you can tap
118. cursor 9 Move the tracing cursor from the linear function to the quadratic function or 10 Trace the quadratic function or Again notice how the coordinates of the cursor appear at 41 F200 6 61 the bottom of the screen and change as you move the cursor Tracing is explained in more detail in Trace on page 94 Change the You can change the scale to see more or less of your scale graph This can be done in four ways e Press to zoom in or to zoom out on the current cursor position This method uses the zoom factors set in the Zoom menu The default for both x and y is 2 e Use the Plot Setup view to specify the exact xrange XRNG and y range YRNG you want 114 Function app Note Display Numeric view Set up Numeric view Use options on the Zoom menu to zoom in or out horizontally or vertically or both etc Use options on the View menu EB to select a pre defined view Note that the Autoscale option attempts to provide a best fit showing as many of the critical features of each plot as possible By dragging a finger horizontally or vertically across the screen you can quickly see parts of the plot that are initially outside the set x and y ranges This is easier than resetting the range of an axis Display the Numeric view T x 7 a 2 A 9 2 19 A 8 2 36 a Fi 51 S 4 6 2 64 The Numeric view 5 5 2 75 a 6 4 2 84 displays data 7 3 2 91 8 i CA generated by the ia 2 3 i 0
119. entire entry line e Press to clear the entire entry line History in RPN mode The results of your calculations are kept in history This history is displayed above the entry line and by scrolling up to calculations that are no longer immediately visible The calculator offers three histories one for the CAS view and two for Home view CAS history is discussed in chapter 3 The two histories in Home view are non RPN visible if you have chosen algebraic or textbook as your preferred entry technique RPN visible only if you have chosen RPN as your preferred entry technique The RPN history is also called the stack As shown in the illustration below each entry in the stack is given a number This is the stack level number 5 T 3 1 0471975512 ls COS 25 x547 542187938089 las 23 23 es SIN 45 TAN 52 6 90417590732 a J415 20 3715487875 As more calculations are added an entry s stack level number increases If you switch from RPN to algebraic or textbook entry your history is not lost It is just not visible If you switch back to RPN your RPN history is redisplayed Likewise if you switch to RPN your non RPN history is not lost When you are not in RPN mode your history is ordered chronologically oldest calculations at the top most recent at the 48 Reverse Polish Notation RPN Re using results bottom In RPN mode your history is ordered chronologically by default b
120. example 7 45 A ZO to Z9 For example 2 3xi Zl or 2 3 Z1 depending on your Complex number settings LO to L9 For example 1 2 3 EEA L1 MO to M9 Store matrices and vectors in these variables For example 1 2 3 4 M1 GO to G9 HAngle HFormat HDigits HComplex Date Time Language Entry Integer Base Bits Signed 428 Variables App variables The app variables are accessed by pressing and tapping IER They are grouped below by app You can find then grouped by view Symbolic Numeric Plot in Variables and Programs on page 556 Note that if you have customized a builtin app your app will appear on the App variables menu under the name you gave it You access the variables in a customized app in the same way that you access the variables in built in apps Function app variables Category Names Results SignedArea Root explained Extremum Slope below Isect Symbolic F1 F6 F2 F7 F3 F8 F4 F9 F5 FO Plot Axes Xmin Cursor Xtick GridDots Xzoom GridLines Ymax Labels Ymin Method Ytick Recenter Yzoom xmax Numeric NumStart NumType NumStep NumZoom NumIndep Modes AAngle ADigits AComplex AFormat Variables 429 Results variables Extremum Isect Root SignedArea Slope Contains the value from the last use of the Extremum function from the menu in the Plot view of the Function app The app function EXTREMUM does not store results to
121. flash the same pattern at the same time Exam Mode 6l Modifying the default configuration A configuration named Default Exam appears when you first access the Exam Mode screen This configuration has no functions disabled If only one configuration is needed you can simply modify the default exam configuration If you envisage the need for a number of configurations different ones for different examinations for example modify the default configuration so that it matches the settings you will most often need and then create other configurations for the settings you will need less often There are two ways to access the screen for configuring and activating exam mode press amp BB E choose the third page of the Home Settings screen The procedure below illustrates the second method 1 Press ED The Home Settings screen appears 2 Top ZN 3 Top GZ The Exam Mode Exam Mode Pca screen appears You Configuration Default am Timeout 15 Minutes use this screen to Password activate a particular Erase memory a Blink LED configuration just before an Choose exam mode configuration examination begins for example 4 Tap CIA The Exam Mode Configuration Exam Mode Er here A m Physics Configuration Help Q Units Matrices C Complex gas Qvo Notes and Programs New Notes and Programs you want disabled E New Notes a and make s
122. for your note In this example we ll call the note MYNOTE MYNOTE OK 4 Write your note using the editing Enter name for new note Pest TT Tcancel 0K Enter name for new note MYNOTE mmnm keys and formatting options described in the following sections When you are finished exit the Note Editor by pressing E or pressing and opening an app Your work is automatically saved THIS IS MY TES Format sole fe To access your new note return to the Notes Catalog To create a note for You can also create a note that is specific to an app and an app which stays with the app should you send the app to another calculator See Adding a note to an app on page 106 Notes created this way take advantage of all the formatting features of the Note Editor see below Notes and Info 491 Note Editor buttons The following buttons and keys are available while you and keys are adding or editing a note Button or Key Purpose Opens the text formatting menu See Formatting options on page 494 Provides bold italic underline full caps superscript and subscript options See Formatting options on page 494 A toggle button that offers three types of bullet See Formatting options on page 494 Insert Starts a 2D editor for entering mathematical expressions in textbook format see Inserting mathematical expressions on page 495
123. for Alt Hypoth In a program type 0 gt AltHyp for p lt Ho 1 gt AltHyp for u gt Uy 2 gt AltHyp for u yuo 562 Programming in HP PPL EO E9 Solve FO F9 Function H1 H5 Statistics 1 Var H1Type H5Type Statistics 1 Var Contains an equation or expression In Symbolic view select one of E0 through E9 and enter an expression or equation The independent variable is selected by highlighting it in Numeric view In a program type for example X Y X 2 Y gt El Contains an expression in X In Symbolic View select one of FO through F9 and enter an expression In a program type for example SIN X gt Fl Contains a list of the dataset s that define a 1 variable statistical analysis The first column in the list is the independent column and the second if any specifies the column used for the frequencies For example H1 by default returns D1 where D1 is the default independent column and indicates that there is no column used for frequencies In Symbolic view select one of H1 through H5 and enter an independent column and an optional frequency column Sets the type of plot used to graphically represent the statistical analyses H1 through H5 In Symbolic View specify the type of plot in the field for Plot1 Plot2 etc Or in a program store one of the following constant integers or names into the variables H1Type H2Type etc 1 Histogram default 2
124. get data into a column Go to Numeric view and enter the data directly See Getting started with the Statistics 1Var app on page 211 for an example Go to Home view and copy the data from a list For example if you enter L1 D1 in Home view the items in list L1 are copied into column D1 in the Statistics 1Var app Go to Home view and copy the data from the Spreadsheet app For example suppose the data of interest is in Al A10 in the Spreadsheet app and you want to copy it into column D7 With the Statistics Statistics 1Var app 215 1Var app open return to Home view and enter Spreadsheet Al A10 py Lae Whichever method you use the data you enter is automatically saved You can leave this app and come back to it later You will find that the data you last entered is still available After entering the data you must define data sets and the way they are to be plotted in Symbolic view Numeric view menu items Edit a data set The menu items you can tap on in Numeric view are ltem Purpose Copies the highlighted item into the entry line Inserts a zero value above the highlighted cell Sorts the data in various ways See Sort data values on page 217 Displays a menu from which you can choose small medium or large font Displays an input form for you to enter a formula that will generate a list of values for a specified col umn See Generating data on page 217
125. hand non CAS calculations such as those performed in HOME view or by an app are numerical calculations and are often approximations limited by the precision of the calculator to 12 significant digits in the case of the HP Prime For example 142 yields the approximate answer 619047619047 in Home view with Standard numerical format but yields the exact answer i in the CAS The CAS offers many hundreds of functions covering algebra calculus equation solving polynomials and more You select a function from the CAS menu one of the Toolbox menus discussed in chapter 21 Functions and commands beginning on page 307 Consult that chapter for a description of all the CAS functions and commands CAS calculations are done Function in CAS view CAS view is almost identical to Home view A history of calculations is built and you can select and copy previous calculations just as you can in Home view as well as store objects in variables To open CAS view press GJ CAS appears in red at the left of the title bar to indicate that you are in CAS view rather than Home view Computer algebra system CAS 53 The menu buttons in CAS view are EZ assigns an object to a variable GEM applies common simplification rules to reduce an expression to its simplest form For example simplify e e yields b EXP a EXP c EI copies a selected entry in history to the entry line EB display
126. if possible of the recurrent sequence Given three lists each containing multiple items of the above nature solves the system of recurrent sequences rsolve Expr Var Condition or rsolve Listl List2 List3 Example rsolve u n 1 2 u n n u n u 0 1 returns n 2 2 1 414 Functions and commands select seq seqsolve shift_phase signature Given a Boolean expression in a single variable and a list or vector tests each element in the list or vector and returns a list or vector containing the elements that satisfy the Boolean select Expr List or select Expr Vector Example select x x gt 5 1 2 6 7 gives 6 7 Given an expression a variable defined over an interval and a step value returns a vector containing the sequence obtained when the expression is evaluated within the given interval using the given step If no step is provided the step used is 1 seq Expr Var Interval Step Example seq 2 k 0 8 gives 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 Similar to rsolve Given an expression defining a recurrence relation in terms of n and or the previous term x followed by a vector of variables and an initial condition for x the Oth term returns the closed form solution if possible for the recurrent sequence Given three lists each containing multiple items of the above nature solves the system of recurrent sequences seqsolve Expr Vector Condition or rsolve Listl List2 L
127. in Symbolic view Numeric view menu items The buttons you can tap on in Numeric view are Purpose Edit a data set Copies the highlighted item to the entry line Inserts a new cell above the highlighted cell and gives ita value of 0 Opens an input form for you to choose to sort the data in various ways Displays a menu for you to choose the small medium or large font Opens an input form for you to create a sequence based on an expression and to store the result in a specified data column See Generating data on page 217 Calculates statistics for each data set selected in Symbolic view See Computed statistics on page 233 In Numeric view highlight the data to change type a new value and press _ _ You can also highlight the data tap QE make your change and tap GE Statistics 2Var app 229 Delete data To delete a data item highlight it and press L8 The values below the deleted cell will scroll up one row To delete a column of data highlight an entry in that column and press emn BA Clear Select the column and tap Qe To delete all data in every column press Clear select A11 columns and tap GB Insert data Highlight the cell below where you want to insert a value Tap and enter the value If you just want to add more data to the data set and it is not important where it goes select the last cell in the data set and start entering the new data
128. level 246 Inference app Results The results are Result Description Test Z Z est statistic Test 3 Value of 3 associated with the test Zvalue P Probability associated with the Zest statistic Critical Z Boundary value s of Z associated with the a level that you supplied Critical 3 Boundary value s of 3 required by the a value that you supplied Two Sample Z Test Menu name Zlest wy u2 On the basis of two samples each from a separate ea this test measures the strength of the evidence or a selected hypothesis against the null hypothesis The null hypothesis is that the means of the two populations are equal Hg u bo You select one of the following alternative hypotheses to test against the null hypothesis Ho u lt u2 Ho by gt u2 Ho u u2 Inputs The inputs are Field name Definition R Sample 1 mean X3 Sample 2 mean ny Sample 1 size n2 Sample 2 size o Population 1 standard deviation o2 Population 2 standard deviation a Significance level Inference app 247 Results The results are Result Description Test Z Z Test statistic Test A X Difference in the means associ ated with the test Z value P Probability associated with the Z Test statistic Critical Z Boundary value s of Z associated with the a level that you supplied Critical A x Difference in the means associ ated with the a level you supplied One Proportion Z Test Menu name Inputs ZlTest 1 2 On the
129. limit of the ymad range of the Enter maximum angle value independent variable to 41 Select the 2nd 0 Rng field and enter 46A 3 x OK There are numerous ways of configuring the appearance of Plot view For more information see Common operations in Plot Setup view on page 96 Plot the expression gae WV CWS 6 0 R1 8 15 707963268 EUGI Display the Plot view menu A number of options appear to WY help you explore ONO the graph such as zooming and f tracing You can Zoom Traces Go To Defn Menu also jump directly to a particular 6 value by entering that value The Go To screen appears with the number you typed on the entry line Just tap to accept it You could also tap the button and spwecify the target value Polar app 279 If only one polar equation is plotted you can see the equation that generated the plot by tapping ERE If there are several equations plotted move the tracing cursor to the plot you are interested by pressing or and then tap MED For more information on exploring plots in Plot view see Common operations in Plot view on page 88 e Display the 11 Open the Numeric 5 Ri BE O 5707963 Numeric view 0 1 1 553197161 e 0 2 1 501260161 Num amp 0 3 1 417517361 view 0 4 1306027261 0 5 1 172142461 0 6 1 022203661 The Numeric view 5 363120235 0 8 7 02276690 displays a table of
130. menu will appear asking you to choose a point With point B selected use the cursor keys to move it about Note that whatever you do point B remains constrained to the curve Moreover as you move point B the tangent moves as well If it moves off the screen you can always bring it back by dragging your finger across the screen in the appropriate direction Press to deselect point B Note that there are two ways to move a point atter it is selected a using the cursor keys as described above and b using your finger If you use the cursor keys pressing will cancel the move and put the point back where it was while pressing will accept the move and deselect the point If you use your finger to move the point lifting your 137 finger completes the move and deselects the point In this case there is no way to cancel the move unless you have activated keyboard shortcuts which provides you with an undo function Shortcuts are described on page 147 Create a The derivative of a graph at any point is the slope of its derivative point tangent at that point We ll now create a new point that will be constrained to point B and whose ordinate value is the derivative of the graph at point B We ll constrain it by forcing its x coordinate that is its abscissa to always match that of point B and its y coordinate that is its ordinate to always equal the slope of the tangent at that point 16 To define a point in Geome
131. multi our store pyy mmmn value by 5 you could enter BA Ys Js e You can also create your own variables in Home view For example suppose you wanted to create a variable called ME and assign 7 to it You would enter E 7 EA A message appears asking if you want to create a variable called ME Tap or press to confirm your intention You can now use that variable in subsequent calculations ME 3 will yield 29 6088132033 for example You can also create variables in CAS view in the same way However the built in CAS variables must be entered in lowercase However the variables you create yourself can be uppercase or lowercase See chapter 22 Variables starting on page 423 for more information As well as built in Home and CAS variables and the variables you create yourself each app has variables that you can access and use in calculations See App functions and variables on page 109 for more information Getting started 43 Complex numbers Sharing data You can perform arithmetic operations using complex numbers Complex numbers can be entered in the following forms where x is the real part y is the imaginary part and i is the imaginary constant J 1 gt xy e x yi except in RPN mode e x yi except in RPN mode e x iy except in RPN mode or x iy except in RPN mode To enter i press or press EME 5 There are 10 built in variables
132. of 2 2 2 Now enter VAns in i en ca This calculates the fourth root of 2 3 Press Function repeatedly Each time you press the root is twice the previous 2 1 41421356237 root The last answer fans 1 189207115 1 09050773266 shown in the 1 04427378242 illustrati tthe richt 1 02189714865 IHUSTration a erg E E ED CD EES is 3 2 When your are working in Home view you can retrieve an expression or result from the CAS by tapping and selecting Get from CAS The CAS opens Press or until the item you want to retrieve is highlighted and press _ The highlighted item is copied to the cursor point in Home view Storing a value in a variable You can store a value in a variable that is assign a value to a variable Then when you want to use that value in a calculation you can refer to it by the variable s name You can create your own variables or you can take advantage of the built in variables in Home view named A to Z and 0 and in the CAS named a to z and a few others CAS variables can be used in calculations in Home view and Home variables can be used in calculations in the CAS There are also built in app variables and geometry variables These can also be used in calculations 42 Getting started Example To assign 7 to to the variable A Your stored value appears as shown at the right If you then wanted d m A 9 86960440109 to
133. of important Larus 3 LN 45 620 996104305 points to be aware of the importance of SE a delimiters such as parentheses how to enter negative numbers e the use of implied versus explicit multiplication As the example above shows parentheses are automatically added to enclose the arguments of functions as in LN However you will need to manually add parentheses by pressing 0 to enclose a group of objects you want operated on as a single unit Parentheses provide a way of avoiding arithmetic ambiguity In the example above we wanted the entire numerator divided by 3 thus the entire numerator was enclosed in parentheses Without the parentheses only 14V8 would have been divided by 3 38 Getting started Algebraic precedence Negative numbers The following examples show the use of parentheses and the use of the cursor keys to move outside a group of objects enclosed within parentheses Entering Calculates SN 45 c EA G 3 sin 45 1 5N 450 Lt e G2 sin 45 7 Oma 85 OL J35 x9 em 85 9 J REx9 The HP Prime calculates according to the following order of precedence Functions at the same level of precedence are evaluated in order from left to right 1 Expressions within parentheses Nested parentheses are evaluated from inner to outer l v reciprocal square nth root Power 10 Negation multiplication division and modulo Ad
134. one for the maximum value TSTEP Sets the increment between consecutive T Parametric only values ORNG Sets the range of angle values to be Polar only plotted Note that here are two fields one for the minimum and one for the maximum value OSTEP Sets the increment between consecutive Polar only angle values SEQPLOT Sets the type of plot Stairstep or Cobweb Sequence only NRNG Sets the range of N values to be plotted Sequence Note that here are two fields one for the only minimum and one for the maximum value HWIDTH Sets the width of the bars in a histogram Stats 1 Var only HRNG Sets the range of values to be included in a Stats 1 Var histogram Note that here are two fields only one for the minimum and one for the maximum value An introduction to HP apps 97 Setup field Purpose Cont S MARK Sets the graphic that will be used to Stats 2 Var represent a data point in a scatter plot A only different graphic can be used for each of the five analyses that can be plotted together XRNG Sets the initial range of the xaxis Note that here are two fields one for the minimum and one for the maximum value In Plot view the range can be changed by panning and zooming YRNG Sets the initial range of the y axis Note that there are two fields one for the minimum and one for the maximum value In Plot view the range can be changed by panning and zooming XTICK Set
135. plotfield x sin y x 6 6 y 6 6 draws the slopefield for y x sin y in the square region defined by the x interval 6 6 and the y interval 6 6 Used to define a contour graph in the Symbolic view of the Geometry app Given an expression in x and y as well as a list of variables and a list of values plots the contour graph of the surface z x y Specifically plots the contour lines z1 z2 etc defined by the list of values Example plotcontour x 2 2 y 2 2 x y 2 4 6 draws the three contour lines of z x 2 2 y 2 2 for z 2 z 4 and z 6 346 Functions and commands ODE List App menu Used in the Symbolic view of the Geometry app Draws the solution of the differential equation y t x y that contains as initial condition the point xo Yo The first argument is the expression f x y the second argument is the vector of variables abscissa must be listed first and the third argument is the initial condition xo yo plotode Expr Varl Var2 Xo Yo Example plotode x sin y x y 2 2 draws the graph of the solution to y x sin y that passes through the point 2 2 as an initial condition Used in the Symbolic view of the Geometry app this command plots a set of points and connects them with segments Each point is defined by a vector plotlist X1 Yl X2 Y2 Example plotlist 0 0 2 2 4 0 connects the points O 0 2 2 and
136. q also n p q ichinrem LstIntg a p LstIntg b q Example ichinrem 2 7 3 5 returns 12 35 Given a polynomial in x or a vector containing the coefficients of a polynomial returns a vector containing its roots proot Poly or proot Vector Example proot 1 0 2 returns 1 41421356237 1 41421356237 Functions and commands 339 Coefficients Divisors Factor List GCD LCM Given a polynomial in x returns a vector containing the coefficients If the polynomial is in a variable other than x then declare the variable as the second argument With an integer as the optional third argument returns the coefficient of the polynomial whose degree matches the integer coeff Poly Var Integer Examples coeff x 2 2 returns 1 0 2 coeff y 2 2 y 1 returns 0 Given a polynomial returns a vector containing the divisors of the polynomial divis Poly or divis Polyl Poly2 Example divis x 2 1 returns 1 1 x 1 x 1 x 1 x Returns a vector containing the prime factors of a polynomial or a list of polynomials with each factor followed by its multiplicity factors Poly or factors Polyl Poly2 Example factors x 4 1 returns x 1 1 x l 1 x24 1 1 Returns the greatest common divisor of two or more polynomials gcd Polyl Poly2 Example gcd x 4 1 x 2 1 returns x 2 1 Returns the least common multiple of two or more polynomials lem Polyl
137. re display the menu tap EERE enter 1 and tap GS The tracing cursor will now be on one of the functions at x 1 2 Tap and select Intersection Intersection of F2 and A list appears giving you a choice of functions and axes Function app 119 3 Choose the function whose point of intersection with the currently selected function you wish to find The coordinates of the intersection are displayed at the bottom of the screen Tap on the screen near the intersection and HEB rtersection 1 3028 2 30278 ok repeat from step 2 The coordinates of the intersection nearest to where you tapped are displayed at the bottom of the screen To find the slope of We will now find the slope of the quadratic function at the the quadratic intersection point function 1 Tap to re display the menu tap and select Slope The slope that is the gradient of the function at the intersection point is displayed at the bottom of the screen You can press Slope undefined or to trace along the curve and see the slope at other points You can also press or to jump to another function and see the slope at points on it fea to re display the Plot menu 120 Function app To find the signed area between the two functions We ll now find the area between the two functions in the range 1 3 lt x lt 2 3 1 Tap and select Signed area 2 Specify the start
138. return to the previous view Reusing previous expressions and results Being able to retrieve and reuse an expression provides a quick way of repeating a calculation that requires only a few minor changes to its parameters You can retrieve and reuse any expression that is in history You can also retrieve and reuse any result that is in history To retrieve an expression and place it on the entry line for editing either tap twice on it or e use the cursor keys to highlight the expression and then either tap on it or tap Copy J To retrieve a result and place it on the entry line use the cursor keys to highlight it and then tap 2B If the expression or result you want is not showing press repeatedly to step through the entries and reveal those that are not showing You can also swipe the screen to quickly scroll through history 40 Getting started Using the clipboard To reuse the last result Pressing takes you straight to the very first entry in history and pressing takes you straight to the most recent entry Your last four expressions are always copied to the clipboard and can easily be retrieved by pressing E This opens the clipboard from where you can quickly choose the one you want Note that expressions and not results are available from the clipboard Note too that the last four expressions remain on the clipboard even if you have cleared history Press Ans to 4 OV retriev
139. selected in Symbolic view View a table of numbers generated by the functions selected in Symbolic view Not used View a table of numbers generated by the sequences selected in Symbolic view Enter the known values and solve for the unknown value Enter numbers text formulas etc The Numeric view is the primary view for this app Enter data for analysis Enter data for analysis An introduction to HP apps 77 App Use the Numeric view to Cont Triangle Solver Trig Explorer Enter known data about a triangle and solve for the unknown data Not used Numeric Setup view The table below outlines what is done in the Numeric Setup view of each app App Use the Numeric Setup view to Advanced Specify the numbers to be calculated Graphing according to the open sentences specified in Symbolic view and set the zoom factor Finance Not used Function Specify the numbers to be calculated according to the functions specified in Symbolic view and set the zoom factor Geometry Not used Inference Not used Linear Explorer Not used Linear Solver Not used Parametric Polar Quadratics Explorer Sequence Solve Specify the numbers to be calculated according to the functions specified in Symbolic view and set the zoom factor Specify the numbers to be calculated according to the functions specified in Symbolic view and set the zoom factor Not used Specify the
140. sets the population standard deviation of the second sample From the Numeric view set the value of o gt In a program type n gt O 570 Programming in HP PPL xy X2 Finance app variables CPYR BEG FV Sets the number of successes for a one proportion hypothesis test or confidence interval For a test or interval involving the difference of two proportions sets the number of successes of the first sample From the Numeric view set the value of x In a program type n gt xi For a test or interval involving the difference of two proportions sets the number of successes of the second sample From the Numeric view set the value of x In a program type n gt x The following variables are used by the Finance app They correspond to the fields in the Finance app Numeric view Compounding periods per year Sets the number of compounding periods per year for a cash flow calculation From the Numeric view of the Finance app enter a value for C YR In a program type nPhCPYR where n gt 0 Determines whether interest is compounded at the beginning or end of the compounding period From the Numeric view of the Finance app check or uncheck End In a program type 1 gt BEG for compounding at the end of the period Default 0 BEG for compounding at the beginning of the period Future value Sets the future value of an investment From the Numeric view of the Finance ap
141. shows two gah 710 E4h equivalent calculations the first 72 sato multiplies 419 by 5710 and the Cr C a second multiplies 5719 by 410 Obviously the results too are mathematically equivalent However each is presented in the base of the operand entered first 16 in the first case and 8 in the second The exception is if an operand is Function not marked as an integer by preceding it with In these cases the result is presented in base 10 710 4h 10 2280 ES R E S S 584 Basic integer arithmetic Integer manipulation The result of integer arithmetic can be further analyzed and manipulated by viewing it in the Edit Integer dialog 1 In Home view use the cursor keys to select the result of interest 2 Press Base The Edit Integer dialog appears The Was field at the top shows the result you selected in Home view The hex and decimal equivalents are shown under the Out field followed by a bit by bit representation of the integer Function Edit Integer 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 11100100 4l lt gt Shift Bits Neg Cycle base Symbols beneath the bit representation show the keys you can press to edit the integer Note that this doesn t change the result of the calculation in Home view The keys are or Shift these keys shift the bits one space to the left or right With each p
142. string that controls what results are shown and the order in which they appear An empty string displays the default all results including headers The options in the configuration string are separated by spaces h show row headers H show column headers S show the start of the period E show the end of the period P show the principal paid this period B show the balance at the end of the period show the interest paid this period All the other input parameters except fix are Finance app Numeric view variables see page 440 for details Note that only the first four are required fix is the number of decimal places to be used in the displayed results Functions and commands 351 STATI The STAT1 function provides a range of one variable statistics It can calculate all or any of X X X s s o 0 serr Fo n min ql med q3 and max STAT1 Input range mode outlier removal Factor configuration Input range is the data source such as A1 D8 Mode defines how to treat the input The valid values are 1 Single data Each column is treated as an independent dataset 2 Frequency data Columns are used in pairs and the second column is treated as the frequency of appearance of the first column 3 Weight data Columns are used in pairs and the second column is treated as the weight of the first column 4 One Two data Columns are used in pairs and the 2 col
143. the coefficients of the regression line or the n coefficients one after another Functions and commands 355 HypZ1mean HYPZ2mean The one sample Ztest for a mean HypZlmean xX n uUg 6 a mode configuration The input parameters can be a range reference a list of cell references or a simple list of values Mode Specifies which alternative hypothesis to use eT lt Ho e 2 gt Ho e 3 Uo Configuration a string that controls what results are shown and the order in which they appear An empty string displays the default all results including headers The options in the configuration string are separated by spaces h header cells will be created e acc the test result O or 1 to reject or fail to reject the null hypothesis e 1Z the test Zvalue e tM the input x value e prob the lower tail probability e cZ the critical Zvalue associated with the input a level e cx the lower critical value of the mean associated with the critical Z value x2 the upper critical value of the mean associated with the critical Zvalue e std the standard deviation Example HypZ1mean 0 461368 50 0 5 0 2887 0 05 1 my The two sample Ztest for the difference of two means HypZ2mean Xq X27 01 N2 01 02 QA mode configuration 356 Functions and commands HypZ1prop Mode Specifies which alternative hypothesis to use T py lt He 2 bh gt He 3 m M
144. the 5 19830 85 82563 95 130169 15 bas 10 22835 53 90936 47 127164 47 principal and 11 26041 43 99107 77 h23958 57 sje 10 90 936 47 paid in quan gun gener OTT interest leaving a balloon payment due of 127 164 47 Press to see the Amortization amortization schedule presented graphically The balance owing at the My end of each payment ir group is indicated by the Il lin 1 12 Principal 1676 5 height of a bar The Interest 9700 63 amount by which the a principal has been reduced and interest paid during a payment group is shown at the bottom of the bottom of the screen The example at the right shows the first payment group selected This represents the first group of 12 payments or the state of the loan at the end of the first year By the end of that year the principal had been reduced by 1 676 57 and 9 700 63 had been paid in interest Tap or to see the amount by which the principal has been reduced and interest paid during other payment groups 294 Finance app Finance app 295 19 Triangle Solver app The Triangle Solver app enables you to calculate the length of a side of a triangle or the size of an angle ina triangle from information you supply about the other lengths angles or both You need to specify at least three of the six possible values the lengths of the three sides and the size of the three angles before the app can calculate t
145. the Level button zB and so on until the form you want is displayed The keys available to you to manipulate the graph vary from level to level Tap fo move to Yl Y uX 0 0 equation mode In equation mode you use the cursor keys to move ad between parameters in be dac 0 the equation and change their values observing aise anal ened deta Genie D the effect on the graph displayed Press or to decrease or increase the value of the selected parameter Press or to select another parameter Press to change the sign You have four forms or levels of graph and the keys available for manipulating the equation depend on the level chosen Tap to enter test mode In Test mode you test your skill at matching an ima equation to the graph shown Test mode is like equation mode in that you use the cursor keys to select and change the value of each parameter in the equation The goal is to try to match the graph that is shown The app displays the graph of a randomly chosen quadratic function Tap the Level button to choose between one of four forms of quadratic equation You can also choose graphs that are relatively easy to match or graphs that are harder match by tapping or respectively Now press the cursor keys to select a parameter and set its value When you are ready tap to see if you have correctly matched your equation to the given graph T
146. the common operators that can take numbers matrices or lists as arguments there are commands that can only operate on lists Lists 457 Menu format By default a List function is presented on the Math menu using its descriptive name not its common command name Thus the shorthand name CONCAT is presented as Concatenate and POS is presented as Position If you prefer the Math menu to show command names instead deselect the Menu Display option on page 2 of the Home Settings screen see page 26 Make List Calculates a sequence of elements for a new list using the syntax MAKELIST expression variable begin end increment Evaluates expression with respect to variable as variable takes on values from begin to end values taken at increment steps Example In Home generate a series of squares from 23 to 27 Function Select List Select Make List or MAKELIST wa eased iced 529 576 625 676 729 23 mema 27 ka 31 Sort Sorts the elements in a list in ascending order SORT list Example SORT 2 5 3 returns 2 3 5 458 Lists Reverse Concatenate Position Size Creates a list by reversing the order of the elements in a list REVERSE list Example REVERSE 1 2 3 returns 3 2 1 Concatenates two lists into a new list CONCAT list 1 list2 Example CONCAT 1 2 3 4 returns 1 2 3 4 Returns the position of an elem
147. the functions and commands onthe Math menu onthe CAS menu used in the Geometry app Functions and commands 307 Setting the form of menu items used in programming used in the Matrix Editor used in the List Editor and some additional functions and commands See Ctlg menu on page 378 Although the Catlg menu includes all the programming commands the Commands menu WEB in the Program Editor contains all the programming commands grouped by category It also contains the Template menu ES which contains the common programming structures See chapter 27 Programming in HP PPL beginning on page 497 for complete descriptions of these commands Some functions can be chosen from the math template displayed by a amp pressing J See Math template va Ya IMP fo on page 24 lol og fo veg oo foo oo 00 w H o oi You can also create your own functions See Creating your own functions on page 421 You can choose to have entries on the Math and CAS menus presented either by their descriptive name or their command name The entries on the Catlg menu are always presented by their command name Descriptive name Command name Factor List ifactors Complex Zeros cZeros Groebner Basis gbasis Factor by Degree factor_xn Find Roots proot The default menu presentation mode is to provide the descriptive names for the Math and CAS functio
148. the item on stack level 1 Items above the highlighted item drop down to fill the levels of the deleted items If you just want to delete a single item from the stack see Delete an item below Reverse Polish Notation RPN 51 DUPN Duplicates all items between and including the highlighted item and the item on stack level 1 If for example you have selected the item on stack level 3 selecting DUPN duplicates it and the two items below it places them on stack levels 1 to 3 and moves the items that were duplicated up to stack levels 4 to 6 Echo Places a copy of the selected result on the entry line and leaves the source result highlighted DLIST Creates a list of results with the highlighted result the first element in the list and the item on stack level 1 the last Function zz Function 13 4 25 1 12 17 8 13 Before After Show an To show a result in full screen textbook format tap EIA item Tap to return to the history Delete an To delete an item from the stack item 1 Select it You can do this by pressing or until the item is highlighted or by tapping on it 2 Press 8 Delete all To delete all items thereby clearing the history press SA EJ items 52 Reverse Polish Notation RPN Computer algebra system CAS CAS view A computer algebra system CAS enables you to perform symbolic calculations By default CAS works in exact mode giving you infinite precision On the other
149. the location where you want the copied text to be pasted and open the clipboard Select the text from the clipboard and press SR You can send a note to another HP Prime See Sharing data on page 44 496 Notes and Info 27 Programming in HP PPL HP Prime Programs Command Structure This chapter describes the HP Prime Programming Language HP PPL In this chapter you ll learn about e programming commands e writing functions in programs e using variables in programs e executing programs e debugging programs e creating programs for building custom apps e sending a program to another HP Prime An HP Prime program contains a sequence of commands that execute automatically to perform a task Commands are separated by a semicolon Commands that take multiple arguments have those arguments enclosed in parentheses and separated by a comma For example PIXON xposition yposition Sometimes arguments to a command are optional If an argument is omitted a default value is used in its place In the case of the PIXON command a third argument could be used that specifies the color of the pixel PIXON xposition yposition color In this manual optional arguments to commands appear inside square brackets as shown above In the PIXON example a graphics variable G could be specified as the first argument The default is GO which always contains the currently displayed screen Thus
150. the purpose of any of these variables Select the variable of interest and press Mid Suppose for example that you wanted to get help on the Function app variable GridDots Press to open the Vars menu 2 Tap to open Function 1Xmin the app variables 1Function fji Results 2Xmax menu If you were 2Triangle Solver gt l2 Symbolic gt 3 min 7 3 Finance gt ffa Plot j4Ymax interested in a Home 4Inference gt 4Numeric gt 5Xtick bl inst d SStatistics 2Var gt 5Modes gt 6 tick variable instead you Sequence x 7Axes w t Home 7 Pictures gt 8 Labels 9V d ap Home 8 Pretty Plot gt ______13GridDots instead pp DCI 3 Use the cursor keys to navigate to the variable of interest 4 Press to see the GridDots App Variable Turns the background dot grid in Plot view on or help about that off GridDots 0 to turn the grid dots on default GridDots 1 to turn the grid dots off variable 5 Tap E to exit or to return to the current Vars submenu CS a aaa lamas 426 Variables Qualifying variables Tip Some app variable names are shared by multiple apps For example the Function app has a variable named Xmin but so too does the Polar app the Parametric app the Sequence app and the Solve app Although named identically these variables usually hold different values If you attempt to retrieve the conten
151. the real part and b is the imaginary part You can also enter them in the form atbi By default on entering an element the cursor moves to the next column in the same row You can use the cursor keys to move to a different row or column You can also change the direction the cursor automatically moves by tapping Wa The button toggles between the following options EBB the cursor moves to the cell to the right of the current cell when you press r_ EJB the cursor moves to the cell below the current cell when you press _ r_ IJ the cursor stays in the current cell when you press _ fuer When done press Matrix to return to the A Matrix Catalog or press to return to Home view The matrix entries are automatically saved 466 Matrices Matrices in Home view To store a matrix 4 When you are Function 05 49 You can enter and operate on matrices directly in Home view The matrices can be named or unnamed Enter a vector or matrix in Home or CAS views directly in the entry line 1 Press Function to start a vector or matrix The matrix template will appear as shown in the figure to the right e w i Enter a value in the pepe oe square Then press to enter a second value in the same row or press to move to the second row The matrix will grow with you as you enter values adding rows and columns as needed You can increase Functio
152. the screen press Hag The following examples show the effects of the zooming options on a plot of 3sinx using the default zoom factors 2 x 2 Split screen mode described above has been used to help you see the effect of zooming An introduction to HP apps 91 Note that there is an Unzoom option on the Zoom menu Use this to return a plot to its pre zoom state If the Zoom menu is not shown tap EEM Zoom In In Shortcut press Zoom Out AUS Out Shortcut press X In Cm X In X Out X Out Y in Em Y In Zoom Zoom Traces Menu Zoom Traces Menu Menu 92 An introduction to HP apps Y Out Y Out Zoom Traces Menu Square Square Notice that in this example the plot on left has had a Y In zoom applied to it The Square zoom has returned the plot to its default state where the X and Y REZ scales are equal Autoscale Autoscale Decimal Decimal Notice that in this example the plot on left has had a X In zoom applied to it The Decimal zoom has reset the default values for the xrange and y iZoomi ilracee Menu range Integer Integer Zoom Traces Menu An introduction to HP apps 93 Trig Trig Zoom Traces Menu Trace Scope Advanced Graphing Function Parametric Polar Sequence Solve Statistics 1 Var and Statistics 2Var The tracing fu
153. they are not If they are returns the number order of the common point of the two sides of equal length 1 2 or 3 Returns 4 if the three points form an equilateral triangle is_isosceles pointl point2 point3 Example is _isoscelesl point 0 0 point 4 0 point 2 4 returns 3 Tests whether or not two lines or two circles are orthogonal perpendicular In the case of two circles tests whether or not the tangent lines at a point of intersection are orthogonal Returns 1 if they are and O otherwise is orthogonal linel line2 or is orthogonal circlel circle2 Example is orthogonal line y x line y x returns 1 187 is_parallel is_parallelogram is_perpendicular is_rectangle Tests whether or not two lines are parallel Returns 1 if they are and 0 otherwise is_parallel linel line2 Example is parallel line 2x 3y 7 line 2x 3y 9 returns 1 Tests whether or not a set of four points are vertices of a parallelogram Returns O if they are not If they are then returns 1 if they form only a parallelogram 2 if they form a rhombus 3 if they form a rectangle and 4 if they form a square is_parallelogram pointl point2 point3 point4 Example is parallelogram point 0 0 point 2 4 point 0 8 point 2 4 returns 2 Similar to is_orthogonall Tests whether or not two lines are perpendicular is_perpendicular linel line2 Tests whether or not a set of four poi
154. this field is an unnamed checkbox Check it if you want to allow complex output from real input Choose the language you want for menus input forms and the online help Getting started Setting Options Continued Decimal Mark Dot or Comma Displays a number as 12456 98 dot mode or as 12456 98 comma mode Dot mode uses commas to separate elements in lists and matrices and to separate function arguments Comma mode uses semicolons as separators in these contexts Page 2 Setting Options Font Size Calculator Name Textbook Display Menu Display Choose between small medium and large font for general display Enter a name for the calculator If selected expressions and results are displayed in textbook format that is much as you would see in textbooks If not selected expres sions and results are displayed in algebraic format that is in one dimensional format For example gt is displayed as 14 51 6 21 6 2 in algebraic format This setting determines whether the commands on the Math and CAS menus are presented descriptively or in common mathematical shorthand The default is to provide the descriptive names for the functions If you prefer the functions to be presented in mathematical shorthand deselect this option Getting started 33 Page 3 Page 4 Setting Options Continued Time Set the time and choose a format 24 ho
155. this variable Contains the value from the last use of the Isect function from the menu in the Plot view of the Function app The app function ISECT does not store results to this variable Contains the value from the last use of the Root function from the menu in the Plot view of the Function app The app function ROOT does not store results to this variable Contains the value from the last use of the Signed Area function from the menu in the Plot view of the Function app The app function AREA does not store results to this variable Contains the value from the last use of the Slope function from the menu in the Plot view of the Function app The app function SLOPE does not store results to this variable Geometry app variables Category Names Numeric Xmin Xmax Ymin Ymax Modes AAngle ADigits AComplex AFormat 430 Variables Spreadsheet app variables Category Names Numeric ColWidth RowHeight Row Col Cell Modes AAngle ADigits AComplex AFormat Solve app variables Category Names Symbolic El E6 E2 E7 E3 E8 E4 E9 E5 EO Plot Axes Xmin Cursor Xtick GridDots Xzoom GridLines Ymax Labels Ymin Method Ytick Recenter Yzoom Xmax Modes AAngle ADigits AComplex AFormat Variables 431 Advanced Graphing app variables Category Names Symbolic v1 v6 V2 V7 v3 v8 v4 v9 v5 vo Plot Axes Xmin Cursor Xtick GridDots Xzoom GridLines Ymax Labels Ymin
156. three as an introduction to using the Program editor and its menus 1 Open the Program Catalog and start a new program Program 2 Enter a name for the program to lock alpha mode MYPROGRAM OK 3 Press again A template for your program is then automatically created The template consists of a heading for a function with the New Program Enter name for new program Fest Tf cancel 04 Enter name for new program IMYPROGRAM ammer MYPROGRAM saf EXPORT MYPROGRAM BEGIN END COD same name as the program EXPORT MYPROGRAM and a BEGIN END pair that will enclose the statements for the function A program name can contain only alphanumeric characters letters and numbers and the underscore character The first character must be a letter For example GOOD_NAME and Spin2 are valid program names while HOT STUFF contains a space and 2Coo1 starts with number and includes are not valid Programming in HP PPL 501 The Program Editor Until you become familiar with the HP Prime commands the easiest way to enter commands is to select them from the Catalog menu E RAE or from the Commands menu in the Program Editor EES To enter variables symbols mathematical functions units or characters use the keyboard keys Program Editor The buttons and keys in the Program Editor are buttons and keys Button or Key
157. to page There are two shift keys that you use to access the operations and characters printed on the bottom of the keys and EA Key Purpose alpha Press to access the operations printed in blue on a key For instance to access the settings for Home view press mga Press the A key to access the characters printed in orange on a key For instance to type Z in Home view press and then press For a lowercase letter press faa and then the letter In CAS view and another key gives a lowercase letter and and another letter gives an uppercase letter 22 Getting started Adding text The text you can enter directly is shown by the orange characters on the keys These characters can only be entered in conjunction with the and keys Both uppercase and lowercase characters can be entered and the method is exactly the opposite in CAS view than in Home view Keys Effect in Home view Effect in CAS view Makes the next charac Makes the next charac fer uppercase Lock mode makes all alpha _ _alpha_J characters uppercase until the mode is reset Shift With uppercase locked DESET makes the next character lowercase Makes the next charac Com Cd ter lowercase Lock mode makes all alpha _ J characters lowercase until a the mode is reset With lowercase locked comes makes the next character uppercase With lowercase locked Lo Lapha J makes all characters
158. to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by Hewlett Packard Company may void the user s authority to operate the equipment Cables Connections to this device must be made with shielded cables with metallic RFI EMI connector hoods to main tain compliance with FCC rules and regulations Applica ble only for products with connectivity to PC laptop Product regulatory information 595 Declaration of Conformity for products Marked with FCC Logo United States Only This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Oper ation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration write to Hewlett Packard Company P O Box 692000 Mail Stop 530113 Houston TX 77269 2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration write to Hewlett Packard Company P O Box 692000 Mail Stop 510101 Houston TX 77269 2000 or call HP at 281 514 3333 To identify your product refer to the part series or model number located on the product Canadian Notice This Class B digital apparat
159. user variable M25 You will Qoe AEEA be prompted to confirm Se that you want to create your own variable Tap ee pws to proceed or D AS STEN aCTED to cancel Once you tap your new matrix will be M4 1 1 023KB tored under the nam vsom oaea stored u e e name M6 1 1 023KB M25 This variable will M7 1 023KB h h M8 1 1 023KB show up in the User M9 1 1 023KB section of the Vars menu M0 1 023KB Ans 3 039KB You will also see your M25 3 039KB new matrix in the Matix BEGISSa ee Catalog In Home view enter the name of the vector or matrix and press _r_ If the vector or matrix is empty zero is returned inside double square brackets In Home view enter matrixname row column For example if M2 is 3 4 5 6 then M2 1 2 Ete returns 4 468 Matrices To store one element To send a matrix In Home view enter value tap EE and then enter matrixname row column For example to change the element in the first row and second column of M5 to 728 and then display the resulting matrix 728 stor Jesi Loik 2 728 gt M5 1 2 les 724 16 2 An attempt to store an COE a element to a row or column beyond the size of the matrix results in re sizing the matrix to allow the storage Any intermediate cells will be filled with zeroes You can send matrices between calculators just as you can send apps programs lists and notes See Sha
160. x asin2acos Expr Example asin2acos acos x asin x returns 1 2 Functions and commands 333 asinx gt atanx sinx gt cosx tanx Cosine acosx gt asinx acosx gt atanx cosx gt sinx tanx Returns an expression with asin x rewritten as asin2atan Expr Example asin2atan 2 asin x returns x 2 atan 7 Returns an expression with sin x rewritten as cos x tan x sin2costan Expr Example sin2costan sin x gives tan x cos x Returns an expression with acos x rewritten as t 2 asin x acos2asin Expr Example acos2asin acos x asin x returns 1 2 Returns an expression with acos x rewritten as z z 5 atan 2 GF x2 acos2atan Expr Example acos2atan 2 acos x gives E Returns an expression with cos x rewritten as sin x tan x cos2sintan Expr Example cos2sintan cos x gives sin x tan x 334 Functions and commands Tangent atanx gt asinx atanx gt acosx tanx gt sinx cosx halftan Trig trigx gt sinx Returns an expression with atan x rewritten as oe ees See osn 5 l x atan2asin Expr Example atan2asin atan 2 x returns 2 x as n iG Returns an expression with atan x rewritten as z OCOS 2 z x atan2acos Expr Returns an expression with tan x rewritten as sin x cos x tan2sincos Expr Example tan2sincos ta
161. x 1 Given an expression a matrix and an integer n multiplies row n of the matrix by the expression mRow Expr Matrix Integer Example 12 mRow 12 3 4 1 returns 56 12 24 3 4 5 6 If the given complex expression has a complex denominator returns the expression after both the numerator and the denominator have been multiplied by the complex conjugate of the denominator If the given complex expression does not have a complex denominator returns the expression atter both the numerator and the denominator have been multiplied by the complex conjugate of the numerator mult _c_conjugate Expr Example 1 3 2 i 1 mult_c_conj ugate returns 340 142 a 3 2 i Takes an expression in which the numerator or the denominator contains a square root If the denominator contains a square root returns the expression after both the numerator and the denominator have been multiplied by the complex conjugate of the denominator If the denominator does not contain a square root returns the expression after both the numerator and the denominator have been multiplied by the complex conjugate of the numerator mult conjugate Expr Example mult_conjugate J 3 2 returns a 402 Functions and commands nDeriv NEG normal normalize NOT odd OR Given an expression a variable of differentiation and a real number h returns an approximate value of the derivative of the expressi
162. 05 1 returns 1 9462 0 4614 0 8277 1 6448 0 5671 The two sample T test for means Returns a list containing in order e Oor 1 to reject or fail to reject the null hypothesis e The test T value The test Ax value The upper tail probability The degrees of freedom The upper critical T value associated with the input a level e The critical value of Ax associated with the critical T value HypT2mean x1 X2 S17 S2 N17 N2 a pooled mode Pooled Specifies whether or not the samples are pooled 0 not pooled e 1 pooled Mode Specifies which alternative hypothesis to use so py lt Be Ze hy abe e 3 bh be Example HypT2mean 0 461368 0 522851 0 2776 0 2943 50 50 0 05 0 1 returns 1 1 0746 0 0614 0 8574 97 6674 1 6606 0 0335 Functions and commands 369 ConfZ1mean The one sample Normal confidence interval for a mean Returns a list containing in order The lower critical Z value The lower bound of the confidence interval The upper bound of the confidence interval ConfZlmean x n 0 C Example ConfZlmean 0 461368 50 0 2887 0 95 returns 1959S 0 3813 0 5413 ConfZ2mean The two sample Normal confidence interval for the difference of two means Returns a list containing in order The lower critical Z value The lower bound of the confidence interval The upper bound of the confidence interval ConfZ2mean
163. 0938561 es X S1 R 3 333333333 x 20 De 80 sX 1 632993162 oX 1 490711985 serrx 6 666667E 1 3 33333333333 EDENEDES Statistics 2Var app 225 10 Find the mean sales y The mean sales 7 is approximately 1 796 Press X S1 9 1 7958333E3 ZY 10775 ZY 22338725 sY 7 7312623E2 oY 7 0576446E2 serrY 3 1562746E2 1795 83333333 return to Numeric view Setup plot 11 Change the plotting range to ensure that all the data points are plotted and to select a different data point indicator if you wish Setup Statistics 2Var Plot Setup 1 6 S1 Mark EI S2 Mark S3 Mark aE S4 Mark 33 SS Mark 5 100 xes F 3200 Y Rng 100 3200 5 0 E i Enter minimum horizontal value _edit_ __ __Page _ __ __ Plot the graph 12 Plot the graph Notice that the regression curve that is a curve to best fit the data points is plotted by default S1 1 X 2 1400 226 Statistics 2Var app Display the equation Predict values 13 Return to the Symbolic view a Note the expression in the Fit1 field It shows that the slope m of the regression line is 425 875 and the y intercept b is 376 25 Statistics 2Var Symbolic View Vsifr_ de Type Linear WB Fitt 425 875 X 376 25 S2 Type2 Linear W Fit2 M X B s3 Enter independent column Let s now predict the sales figure if adve
164. 1 2 returns 0 977249868052 Cumulative Student s t distribution function Returns the lower tail probability of the Student s tprobability density function at x given n degrees of freedom STUDENT _CDF n x Example STUDENT CDF 3 3 2 returns 0 0246659214814 320 Functions and commands Binomial Poisson Inverse Normal Cumulative z distribution function Returns the lower tail probability of the x probability density function for the value x given n degrees of freedom CHISQUARE_CDF n k Example CHISQUARE CDF 2 6 1 returns 0 952641075609 Cumulative Fisher distribution function Returns the lower tail probability of the Fisher probability density function for the value x given numerator n and denominator d degrees of freedom FISHER_CDF n d x Example FISHER_CDF 5 5 2 returns 0 76748868087 Cumulative binomial distribution function Returns the probability of k or fewer successes out of n trials with a probability of success p for each trial Note that n and k are integers withk lt n BINOMIAL CDF n p k Example Suppose you want to know the probability that during 20 tosses of a fair coin you will get either O 1 2 3 4 5 or 6 heads BINOMIAL CDF 20 0 5 6 returns 0 05765914917 Cumulative Poisson distribution function Returns the probability x or fewer occurrences of an event in a given time interval given u expected occurrences POISSON CDF u x Example
165. 280 variables 440 polygons 157 polynomial functions 339 345 precedence algebraic 39 prediction 237 prefixes for units 444 principal solutions 57 probability functions 317 322 program commands app functions 546 block 528 branch 528 drawing 536 544 function 533 I O 547 549 integer 547 loop 529 matrix 544 other 554 556 strings 534 variable 533 commenting in 498 create 501 debug 507 run 506 samples 514 516 524 527 structure of 498 programming 497 579 projection 163 protective cover 13 Q Quadratic Explorer app 70 302 303 quadratic fit 232 qualify variables 110 513 quantum science constants 449 quotes in strings 534 R real variables 428 recursive evaluation 57 recursive function 58 recursive replacement 58 reduced row echelon matrix 486 regression models See fit types regulatory information 595 relations palette 21 25 reset app 71 calculator 591 result reusing 40 Reverse Polish Notation See RPN rewrite functions 332 337 rightangled triangles See Triangle Solv er app RPN 36 47 52 commands 51 52 entry 32 S sample programs 514 516 524 527 scientific number format 27 31 searching menus 28 online help 46 speed searches 28 seconds symbol 21 seed value 259 263 sending See data sharing Index 607 Sequence app 70 281 286 graph types 281 variables 442 settings 30 428 CAS 30 55 sharing data 44 shift keys 22 shortcut palettes 20 shortcuts in Geometry 147 in menus 28 Solv
166. 2mean Ey X27 S1 S2 N1 N2 pooled C Example ConfT2mean 0 461368 0 522851 0 2887 0 2887 50 50 0 95 0 returns 98 0000 1 9844 0 1760 0 0531 Functions and commands 371 Finance app functions The Finance app uses a set of functions that all reference the same set of Finance app variables These correspond to the fields in the Finance app Numeric view There are 5 main TVM variables 4 of which are mandatory for each of these functions as they each solve for and return the value of the fifth variable to two decimal places DoFinance is the sole exception to this syntax rule Note that money paid to you is entered as a positive number and money you pay to others as part of a cash flow is entered as a negative number There are 3 other variables that are optional and have default values These variables occur as arguments to the Finance app functions in the following set order NbPmt the number of payments IPyYR the annual interest rate pv the present value of the investment or loan PMTV the payment value FV the future value of the investment or loan PPYR the number of payments per year 12 by default CPYR the number of compounding periods per year 12 by default BEG payments made at the beginning or end of the period the default is BEG 0 meaning that payments are made at the end of each period The arguments PPYR CPYR and BEG are op
167. 3 Sp ciallssen ni RO e aS 323 CAS MENU ssor sisin nenii EEEE EAEE ASE EAEE EEKE eiS 324 Alge Pra onni aa Aerie rao a aaa E A T A ia 324 GGUS innen e a De ia aAA de 326 SOVE ae an E E Mee E GE ATOSS 330 PSV ADIN 5 tet ip te tha gare Some nage duaied beamed A RE gS 332 neger inn ie O O E EEE a A DAE A Eae 337 Polynomials irene onean aeaa oun AA E 339 Pi sess asringe sinai e Oa EN e Satine e NAA AAGA 346 Contents 5 APP MENU aois iiiar saci Nasa aut vad ts E E R E E er 347 Function app MINGHONS 3 2 nkct etude needa tndeh retecavaunendwbaseeermanvine 348 Solve app functions iv cccsicccneassyidensaacnsdvansvesnsis deradansenaniear 349 Spreadsheet app functions c ccccseseeeseteeeesseeeenteeees 349 Statistics 1Var app fUNctionS ccccececeeeseeeeesteeeeeseeees 363 Statistics 2Var app fUNCTHIONS ccceeceeeeeteeeeeseeeenteeeees 365 Inference app FUNCTIONS cccccecesceceesteeeeeteeeettseeetteeeeees 366 Finance app functions lt is3 ccc iecceacedssnadarnnesannneasdetadensedaneies 372 Linear Solver app functions cccecseeseseeeeeeteeeeeteeeeaes 374 Triangle Solver app functions c cccceeseeeeseeeeeeseeeeetseees 374 Linear Explorer functions ccccccccesceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeenaes 376 Quadratic Explorer functions ccccccceeeseeceeeeeeeeteeeteaees 377 Common app WACHONS scosesnd iisasziccte tecicesavinareswananeonvente 377 SHS MSA zan ea haul es see Bical ara eke 378 Creat
168. 3 2 2 returns 0 1 3 2 Given an expression and an integer n returns the expression raised to the power 1 n surd Expr Integer Example 1 surd 8 3 gives 8 Functions and commands 417 sylvester table tail tan2cossin2 tan2sincos2 transpose Returns the Sylvester matrix of two polynomials sylvester Polyl Poly2 Var Example 10 10 0 010 10 sylvester x2 1 x3 1 x gives oo 1 o 1 100 10 010 0 1 Defines an array where the indexes are strings or real numbers table SeqEqual index_name element_value Given a list string or sequence of objects returns a vector with the first element deleted tail List ortail Vector ortail String or tail Obj1l Obj2 Example tail 3 2 4 1 0 gives 2 4 1 0 Returns an expression with tan x rewritten as 1 cos 2 x sin 2 x tan2cossin2 Expr Example tan2cossin2 tan x gives 1 cos 2 x sin 2 x Returns an expression with tan x rewritten as sin 2 x 1 cos 2 x tan2sincos2 Expr Example tan2sincos2 tan x gives sin 2 x 1 cos 2 x Returns a matrix transposed without conjugation transpose Matrix Example transpose 2 returns 3 34 24 418 Functions and commands trunc tsimplify type unapply valuation variance Given a value or list of values as well as an integer n returns the value or list truncated to n decimal places If n is not provided it is taken as O Acc
169. 589009 pwya a Whi Again you can enter a value for Y that is of interest 17 With O highlighted in the Y column enter B f 3 7 3b7 2 Y 1 126 1 18 Tap and select 4 The first row of the table now illustrates that there are two branches of solutions In each branch the consecutive solution values are 2x apart 1 152 1 1 047 1 5 23599 4 18879 1 073 1 4 97380 4 45097 Trace Pol 19 Tap GEES select Pot and select Vertical Extrema to see the extrema listed in the table 20 Tap and select Small for a small font 785398163397 size 157079632679 4 71238898038 10 99 5742876 21 Tap and select 2 431233292035 R 157079632679 to see just two columns Peppers The table lists the 5 minima visible in Plot view followed by the 5 maxima Advanced Graphing app 133 Plot Gallery A gallery of interesting graphs and the equations that generated them is provided with the calculator You open the gallery from Plot view 1 satan sve n k 2 SIN Wg 5 LN X Y J LNI 1 With Plot view open asia press the Menu key Note that you press the Menu key here not the Menu touch button on the screen 2 From the menu select Visit Plot Gallery The first graph in the Gallery appears along with its equation 3 Press to display the next graph in the Gallery and continue likewise until you want to close the Gallery 4 To
170. 6 1 6 T T T sve folum o beginning on page 211 for the meaning of each statistic 462 Lists 25 Matrices You can create edit and operate on matrices and vectors in the Home view CAS or in programs You can enter matrices directly in Home or CAS or use the Matrix Editor Vectors Vectors are one dimensional arrays They are composed of just one row A vector is represented by single brackets for example 1 2 3 A vector can be a real number vector or a complex number vector such as 1 2 i 7 3 i Matrices Matrices are two dimensional arrays They are composed of at least two rows and at least one column Matrices may contain any combination of or real and complex numbers such as 142i aki 7 Matrix variables There are ten reserved matrix variables available named MO to M9 however you can save a matrix in a variable name you define You can then use them in calculations in Home or CAS views or in a program You can retrieve matrix names from the Vars menu or just type their names from the keyboard Matrices 463 Creating and storing matrices Matrix Catalog buttons and keys The Matrix Catalog x M1 1 1 023KB contains the reserved H R TEKE matrix variables MO M9 M3 11 02348 M4 1 1 023KB as well as any matrix MS 11 023KB q M6 1 1 023KB variables you have cape Sak created in Home or CAS wa 1 023KB F M9 1 1 023KB views or froma program mo 11 1023KB if they are
171. 7 In other Group Size 12 words your monthly Enter payment amount or solve payment will be E sl Ot Sb 315 17 The PMT value is negative to indicate that it is money owed by you Note that the PMT value is greater than 300 that is greater than the amount you can afford to pay each month So you ned to re run the calculations this time setting the PMT value to 300 and calculating a new PV value 7 In the pt field enter 300 move the cursor to the Pv field and tap Sa 288 Finance app The PV value is Time Value of Money calculated as N 60 I YR 5 5 pv 15705 8506337 P VR 12 15 705 85 this PMT 300 CNR 12 being the maximum Fv 0 End y you can borrow Group Size 12 Thus with your 3 000 deposit you R value or oT can afford a car with a price tag of up to 18 705 85 Cash flow diagrams TVM transactions can be represented in cash flow diagrams A cash flow diagram is a time line divided into equal segments representing the compounding periods Arrows represent the cash flows These could be positive upward arrows or negative downward arrows depending on the point of view of the lender or borrower The following cash flow diagram shows a loan from a borrower s point of view Present value PV Loan Money Equal periods received is apasive a a Ai fe i number TY 273415 Lenn Money Payment Payment Payment Payment paid out is PMT PMT
172. 8712 i 2 0 2 41421356237 1 24264068712 i 2 0 2 0 i Returns the inverse discrete Fourier transform ifft Vector Example ifft 100 0 52 2842712475 6 i 8 0 i 4 28427124746 6 i 4 0 4 28427124746 6 i 8 i 52 2842712475 6 i gives 0 99999999999 3 99999999999 10 0 20 0 25 0 2 4 0 16 0 6 39843733552e 12 Returns a list of the solutions real and complex to a polynomial equation or a set of polynomial equations solve Eq Var or solve Eql Eq2 Var Examples solve x 2 3 1 returns 2 2 solve x 2 3 1 x 2 0 x returns 2 330 Functions and commands Zeros Complex Solve Complex Zeros Numerical Solve With an expression as argument returns the real zeros of the expression that is the solutions when the expression is set equal to zero With a list of expressions as argument returns the matrix where the rows are the real solutions of the system formed by setting each expression equal to zero zeros Expr Var or zeros Exprl Expr2 Varl Var2 Example zeros x 2 4 returns 2 2 Returns a list of the complex solutions to a polynomial equation or a set of polynomial equations csolve Eq Var or csolve Eql Eq2 Var Example csolve x 4 1 0 x returns 1 1 i i With an expression as argument returns a vector containing the complex zeros of the expression that is the solutions when the expression i
173. 9 7 973238986324 MENU e fixed step dots this works like fixed step segments method but does not connect the points An introduction to HP apps 99 Restore default settings Scope Advanced Graphing Function Parametric Polar Sequence Solve Statistics 1 Var Statistics 2Var Geometry To restore one field to its default setting 1 Select the field 2 Press 8 pra 4 To restore all default settings press ces Common operations in Numeric view Zoom Scope Advanced Graphing Function Parametric Polar Numeric view functionality that is common to many apps is described in detail in this section Functionality that is available only in a particular app is described in the chapter dedicated to that app Numeric view provides a table X F1 F2 i PES o 2 5 of evaluations Each definitionin Pi 319 4 99 n s A 0 2 2 36 4 96 Symbolic view is evaluated fora 3 251 491 0 4 2 64 4 84 range of values for the 0 5 2 75 4 75 3 0 6 2 84 4 64 independent variable You can 7 z asi 0 8 2 96 4 36 set the range and fineness of the o9 j2s9 4 19 independent variable or leave it f Zoom Big Defn Width to the default settings Press to open Numeric view Unlike in Plot view zooming in Numeric view does not affect the size of what is displayed Instead it changes the increment between consecutive values of the independent variable that is
174. AFormat The Function Statistics 1 Var Statistics 2Var and Inference apps offer functions that generate results that can be re used outside those apps such as in a program For example the Function app can find a root of a function and that root is written to a variable called Root That variable can then be used elsewhere The results variables are listed with the apps that generate them See App variables on page 429 Programming in HP PPL 579 580 Programming in HP PPL 28 Basic integer arithmetic The common number base used in contemporary mathematics is base 10 By default all calculations performed by the HP Prime are carried out in base 10 and all results are displayed in base 10 However the HP Prime enables Function Tae you to carry out integer arithmetic in four bases decimal base 10 binary base 2 octal base 8 and hexadecimal base 16 For example you could multiply 4 in base 16 by 71 in base 8 and the answer is EDD GG EEEED E4 in base 16 This is equivalent in base 10 to multiplying 4 by 57 to get 228 You indicate that you are about to engage in integer arithmetic by preceding the number with the pound symbol got by pressing 24 You indicate what base to use for the number by appending the appropriate base marker 4h 710 E4h Base marker Base blank Adopt the default base see The default base on page 582 d decimal b binary o oc
175. AP EIA BBISEIME Enter value or expression In Symbolic view you can define up to five analyses of two variable data named s1 to s5 In this example we will define just one S1 The process involves choosing data sets and a fit type 4 Specify the columns that contain the data you want to analyze In this case C1 and C2 appear by default But you could have entered your data into columns other than C1 and C2 Statistics 2Var Symbolic View tefl sifr e Type1 Linear W Fit M x B S2 Type2 Linear W Fit2 M x B s3 Enter independent column 224 Statistics 2Var app Explore statistics Select a fit From the Type 1 field select a fit In this example select Linear If you want to choose a color for the graph of the data in Plot view Logarithmic Exponential Power Exponent Inverse Logistic Quadratic Cubic Statistics 2Var Symbolic View 11 150 see Choose a color for plots on page 85 If you have more than one analysis defined in Symbolic view deselect any analysis you are not currently interested in Find the correlation r between advertising time and sales The correlation is r 0 8995 Find the mean advertising time x The mean advertising time is 3 33333 minutes X S1 n J6 r 8 995309e 1 R 8 091559E 1 sCOV_ 1 135667 3 oCOV 9 463889E2 2XY 41595 89953
176. CE and tap CEN You have named the entire first column PRICE 4 Select column B Either tap on B or use the cursor keys to highlight the B cell 5 Enter a formula for your commission being 10 of the price of each item sold ma JPRICEL JOC E Because you entered the arr Serre PRICE B IC ID IE formula in the heading of a column it is automatically copied to every cell in that column p b fo b b p jo fo lo T bead ad Riedel bel a bod Ln At the moment only O is shown since there are no quay peep ETIREEITS values in the PRICE column yet 6 Once again select the header of column B Tap and select Name 8 Type COMMIS and tap Note that the heading of column B is now COMMIS 9 It is always a good idea to check your formulas by entering some dummy values and noting if the result is as expected Select cell A1 and make sure that and not is showing in the menu If not tap the button This option means that your cursor automatically selects the cell immediately below the one you have just entered content into 10 Add some values in the PRICE column and note RE COMMIS Ic P E the result in the COMMIS iois column If the results do ao i not look right you can tap 3 io the CoMMIS heading tap a b EiB and fix the gener ER formula 196 Spreadsheet
177. Catlg menu can be incorporated into a definition The Catlg menu is one of the Toolbox menus The following definition incorporates a command from that menu and an app variable F6 X X2 INT Root The integer value of the last root calculated in the Function app is substituted for INT Root when this definition is evaluated From other definitions You could for example define F3 X as F1 X F2 X Evaluate a dependent definition If you have a dependent definition that is one defined in terms of another definition you can combine all the definitions into one by evaluating the dependent definition 1 Select the dependent expression 2 Top EB Consider the example at the Function Symbolic View right Notice that F3 X is aLaaa V E F2 X X2 1 defined in terms of two other 5 E F3 X F1 X 2 F2 x functions It is a dependent Se O definition and can be evaluated m Fs If you highlight F3 X and tap e F7 X F3 i een Enter function brent a Select or deselect a definition to explore In the Advanced Graphing Function Parametric Polar Sequence and Solve apps you can enter up to 10 definitions However only those definitions that are selected in Symbolic view will be plotted in Plot view and evaluated in Numeric view 84 An introduction to HP apps You can tell if a definition is selected by the tick or checkmark beside it A checkmark is added by default as s
178. Cobweb N Rng 1 24 X Rng 1 1 Y Rng 1 1 Y Tick 1 Enter horizontal tick spacing COENE qan a Set both X Rng and Y Rng to 1 1 as shown above Sequence app 285 Plot the 6 Plot the sequence sequence ia Press to see rat the dotted lines in Le the figure to the right Press it again i N 10 U1 N 1 73415299E 2 Menu _ to hide the dotted lines Explore the 7 View the table Sequence Numeric View l f N Ul tab eo i 666666666667 Setup 2 444444444445 se uence 3 296296296297 h 8 Top EM ond i pirer va ues h 6 0877914951992 se ect 1 to see t e tA 0585276634661 8 0390184423108 sequence values 9 _ 0260122948739 0260122948739 zoom size Defn column 286 Sequence app 18 Finance app The Finance app enables you to solve time value of money TVM and amortization problems You can use the app to do compound interest calculations and to create amortization tables Compound interest is accumulative interest that is interest on interest already earned The interest earned on a given principal is added to the principal at specified compounding periods and then the combined amount earns interest at a certain rate Financial calculations involving compound interest include savings accounts mortgages pension funds leases and annuities Getting Started with the Finance app Suppose you finance the purchase of a c
179. EIB The definition is now editable 10 Change the lt to and ta p OK Notice that the graph changes to match the new definition The definition in Symbolic view also changes 11 Tap to drop the si 2 2 X 7 X Y 34 X Y 2 10 4 105 00 Pcs races TL menu 2 2 X 74X Y 3Y X z 40 7 410 10 eoi races TL Men definition to the bottom of the screen so that you can see the full graph The definition is converted from textbook mode to algebraic mode to save screen space In most HP apps the Plot view contains GEES a toggle to turn tracing a function on and off In the Advanced Graphing app the relations plotted in Plot view may or may not be functions So instead of a toggle becomes a menu for selecting how the tracer will behave The Trace menu contains the following options Off Inside Pol Points of Interest Xlntercepts Y intercepts Horizontal Extrema Vertical Extrema Inflections Selection Points of Interest 1 Off 1X Intercepts 2Inside 2Y Intercepts Vv 3Edge 3 Horizontal Extrema 4Pol Vertical Extrema 5Selection gt 5Inflections Foote Dein Menu Traces Zoom Advanced Graphing app 129 The tracer does not extend beyond the current Plot view window The table below contains brief descriptions of each option Trace option Description Off Inside Edge Pol
180. Ey X27 Dy Ng 91 02 C Example ConfZ2mean 0 461368 0 522851 50 50 0 2887 0 2887 0 95 returns 1 9599 0 1746 0 0516 ConfZ1 prop The one sample Normal confidence interval for a proportion Returns a list containing in order The lower critical Z value The lower bound of the confidence interval The upper bound of the confidence interval ConfZlprop x n C Example ConfZlprop 21 50 0 95 returns 1 9599 0 2831 0 5568 370 Functions and commands ConfZ2prop ConfT1mean Conff2mean The two sample Normal confidence interval for the difference of two proportions Returns a list containing in order The lower critical Zvalue The lower bound of the confidence interval The upper bound of the confidence interval ConfZ2prop x1 X2 N1 N9 C Example ConfZ2prop 21 26 50 50 0 95 returns 159999 7 9 294 6 7 0 09463 The one sample Student s T confidence interval for a mean Returns a list containing in order The degrees of freedom The lower bound of the confidence interval The upper bound of the confidence interval ConfTlmean x sS n C Example ConfTlmean 0 461368 0 2776 50 0 95 returns 49 2009 0 5402 The two sample Student s T contidence interval for the difference of two means Returns a list containing in order The degrees of freedom The lower bound of the confidence interval The upper bound of the confidence interval ConfT
181. GB is the point at 1 0 and GC is defined as circle GA GB GA then radius GC returns 1 Takes a set of points as argument and tests whether or not they are collinear Returns 1 if the points are collinear and O otherwise is_collinear pointl point2 pointn Example is collinear point 0 0 point 5 0 point 6 1 returns O Takes a set of points as argument and tests if they are all on the same circle Returns 1 if the points are all on the same circle and O otherwise is_concyclic pointl point2 pointn Example is _concyclic point 4 2 point 4 2 point 4 2 point 4 2 returns 1 Tests whether or not two points or two lines are conjugates for the given circle Returns 1 if they are and O otherwise is _conjugate circle pointl point2 or is_conjugate circle linel line2 186 Geometry is_element is_equilateral is_isoceles is_orthogonal Geometry Tests if a point is on a geometric object Returns 1 if it is and O otherwise is element point object Example is element point 2 Ly circle 0 1 returns 1 Takes three points and tests whether or not they are vertices of a single equilateral triangle Returns 1 if they are and 0 otherwise is equilateral pointl point2 point3 Example is equilateral point 0 0 point 4 0 point 2 4 returns O Takes three points and tests whether or not they are vertices of a single isosceles triangle Returns 0 if
182. HP Prime Graphing Calculator User Guide Edition Part Number NW280 2001 Legal Notices This manual and any examples contained herein are provided as is and are subject to change without notice Hewlett Packard Company makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this manual including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability non infringement and fitness for a particular purpose Portions of this software are copyright 2013 The FreeType Project www freetype org All rights reserved e HP is distributing FreeType under the FreeType License e HP is distributing google droid fonts under the Apache Software License v2 0 e HP is distributing HIDAPI under the BSD license only e HP is distributing Qt under the LGPLv2 1 license HP is providing a full copy of the Qt source e HP is distributing QuaZIP under LGPLv2 and the zlib libpng licenses HP is providing a full copy of the QuaZIP source Hewlett Packard Company shall not be liable for any errors or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this manual or the exam ples contained herein Product Regulatory amp Environment Information Product Regulatory and Environment Information is provided on the CD shipped with this product Copyright 2013 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P Reproduction adaptation or translation of this manual is prohibited without prior written per mission of He
183. If you now move the trace cursor close to x 1 the other HE Poot 2 73205080757 ok place where the quadratic crosses the x axis and select Root again the other root is displayed 118 Function app Note the button If you tap this button vertical and horizontal dotted lines are drawn through the current position of the tracer to Zoom Traces Goto Fen Defn Menu highlight its position Use this feature to draw attention to the cursor location You can also choose a blinking cursor in Plot Setup Note that the functions in the Fen menu all use the current function being traced as the function of interest and the current tracer x coordinate as an initial value Finally note that you can tap anywhere in Plot view and the tracer will move to the point on the current function that has the same x value as the location you tapped This is a faster way of choosing a point of interest than using the trace cursor You can move this tracing cursor using the cursor keys if you need finer precision To find an Just as there are two roots of the quadratic equation there intersection of two are two points at which both functions intersect As with functions roots you need to position your cursor closer to the point you are interested in In this example the intersection close to x 1 will be determined The Go To command is another way of moving the trace cursor to a particular point 1 Tap to
184. In cases where more than one fit curve is displayed the Predx and Predy functions use the first active fit defined in Symbolic view Troubleshooting a plot If you have problems plotting check the following The fit that is regression model that you intended to select is the one selected Only those data sets you want to analyze or plot are selected in Symbolic view The plotting range is suitable Try pressing and selecting Autoscale or adjust the plotting parameters in Plot Setup view e Ensure that both paired columns contain data and are of the same length 238 Statistics 2Var app 12 Inference app Sample data The Inference app enables you to calculate confidence intervals and undertake hypothesis tests based on the Normal Z distribution or Student s t distribution In addition to the Inference app the Math menu has a full set of probability functions based on various distributions Chi Square F Binomial Poisson etc Based on statistics from one or two samples you can test hypotheses and find confidence intervals for the following quantities mean e proportion difference between two means difference between two proportions The Inference app comes with sample data which you can always restore by resetting the app This sample data is useful in helping you gain an understanding of the app Getting started with the Inference app Open the Inference app Let s conduct
185. Likewise Predy is a function that predicts a value for Y given a value for X In both cases the prediction is based on the equation that best fits the data according to the specitied fit type You can predict values in the Plot view of the Statistics 2Var app and also in Home view In Plot view 1 In the Plot view tap to display the regression curve for the data set if it is not already displayed 2 Make sure the trace cursor is on the regression curve Press or if it is not 3 Press or The cursor moves along the regression curve and the corresponding X and Y values are displayed across the bottom of the screen If these values are not visible tap ENB You can force the cursor to a specific X value by tapping ERE entering the value and tapping The cursor jumps to the specified point on the curve In Home If the Statistics 2Var app is the active app you can also view predict X and Y values in the Home view e Enter Predx Y to predict the X value for the specified Y value e Enter Predy X to predict the yY value for the specified X value You can type PredX and Statistics 2Var Predy directly on the entry line or select them from the App functions menu under the Statistics 2Var category The App functions menu is one of the Toolbox menus E 1 Statistics 2Var 2Statistics 1Var 3 Triangle Solver 4 Spreadsheet np TITS Statistics 2Var app 237 Tip
186. Math Chemistry Phyics Quantum e MAXREAL MINREAL T i Avogadro NA Boltmann k molar volume Vm universal gas R standard temperature StdT standard pressure StdP Stefan Boltzmann o speed of light c permittivity 9 permeability uo acceleration of gravity g gravitation G Planck h Dirac f electronic charge q electron mass me q me ratio qme proton mass mp mp me ratio mpme fine structure a magnetic flux Faraday F Rydberg R Bohr radius a Bohr magneton p nuclear magneton Hy photon wavelength 2 photon frequency fy Compton wavelength 2 Units and constants 449 450 Units and constants 24 Lists A list consists of comma separated real or complex numbers expressions or matrices all enclosed in braces A list may for example contain a sequence of real numbers such as 1 2 3 Lists represent a convenient way to group related objects You can do list operations in Home and in programs There are ten list variables available named LO to L9 or you can create your own list variable names You can use them in calculations or expressions in Home or in a Vars program Retrieve a list name from the Vars menu 5 or just type its name from the keyboard You can create edit delete send and receive named lists in the List Catalog EA 7 List You can also create and store lists named or unnnamed in Home view List variables are i
187. OEF 1 1 returns 1 0 1 Given a vector or list of coefficients and a value evaluates the polynomial given by those coefficients at the given value POLYEVAL Vector Value or POLYEVAL List Value Example POLYEVAL 1 0 1 3 returns 8 Draws the polygon whose vertices are elements in a list polygon Pointl Point2 p Pointn Example polygon GA GB GD draws AABD Used in the Geometry app Symbolic view Given an n x m matrix draws and connects the points xk yk where xk is the element in row k and column 1 and yk is the element in row k and column j with j fixed for k 1 to n rows Thus each column pairing generates its own figure resulting in m 1 figures polygonplot Matrix Example 123 polygonplot 2 0 1 draws two figures each with three 123 points connected by segments 406 Functions and commands polygonscatterplot polynomial_ regression POLYROOT potential Used in the Geometry app Symbolic view Given an n x m matrix draws and connects the points xk yk where xk is the element in row k and column 1 and yk is the element in row k and column with j fixed for k 1 to n rows Thus each column pairing generates its own figure resulting in m figures polygonscatterplot Matrix Example 123 polygonscatterplot 2 9 1 draws two figures each 123 with three points connected by segments Given a set of points defined by two lists and a positive integ
188. OS Function SIN A COS B C Ag BY Cc Check if you want this to be an input variable Make sure that A and B are selected and C is not Tap You can run your function by entering it on the entry line in Home view or be selecting it from the USER menu You enter the value for each variable you chose to be a parameter In this example we chose A and B to be parameters Thus you might enter SINCOS 0 5 0 75 With C 0 and in radians mode this would return 1 211 422 Functions and commands 22 Variables Variables are objects that have names and contain data They are used to store data either for later use or to control settings in the Prime system There are four types of variables all of which can be found in the Vars menu by pressing vars e Home variables Advanced Graphing CAS variables e App variables 1Real gt 2Complex gt e User variables List 4 Matrix gt The Home and app sGraphics gt leSettings gt variables all have names Home reserved for them They are also typed that is they can contain only certain types of objects For example the Home variable A can only contain a real number You use Home variables to store data that is important to you such as matrices lists real numbers etc You use app variables to store data in apps or to change app settings You can accomplish these same tasks via the user interface of an ap
189. R1 C3 2 f 3 4 5 ame a ins Size Go Column Matrices 473 6 Return to Home view and left multiply the constants vector by the inverse of the coefficients matrix ALPHA Function ALPHA The result is a vector of the solutions x 2 y 3 and z 2 4 M2 M1 2 3 2 An alternative method is 3 a GGG to use the RREF function see page 476 Matrix functions and commands Functions Menu format Commands Functions can be used in any app or in Home view They are listed on the Math menu under the Matrix category They can be used in mathematical expressions primarily in Home view as well as in programs Functions always produce and display a result They do not change any stored variables such as a matrix variable Functions have arguments that are enclosed in parentheses and separated by commas for example CROSS vector I vector2 The matrix input can be either a matrix variable name such as M1 or the actual matrix data inside brackets For example CROSS M1 1 2 By default a Matrix function is presented on the Math menu using its descriptive name not its common command name Thus the shorthand name TRN is presented as Transpose and DET is presented as Determinant If you prefer the Math menu to show command names instead deselect the Menu Display option on page 2 of the Home Settings screen see page 26 Matrix commands differ fr
190. Re assigning keys To activate persistent user mode press cmn ga en GD Notice that tU appears in the title bar The user keyboard will now remain active until you press again If you are in user mode and press a key that hasn t been re assigned the key s standard operation is performed Suppose you want to Reassign SIN KEY K_Si assign a commonly used eem O function such as ED ALOG to its own key on the keyboard Simply create a new program that mimics the syntax in the image at the righ DT CrGas The first line of the program specifies the key to be reassigned using its internal name The names of all the keys are given in Key names on page 518 They are case sensitive On line 3 enter the text you want produced when the key being re assigned is pressed This text must be enclosed in quote marks The next time you want to insert ALOG at the position of your cursor you just press GSN You can enter any string you like in the RETURN line of your program For example if you enter Newton that text will be returned when you press the re assigned key You can even get the program to return user defined functions as well as system functions and user defined variables as well as system variables You can also re assign a shifted key combination So for example could be re assigned to produce SLOPE F1 X 3 rather than the lowercase t Then if is entered in Home view and pre
191. RollDice and PlotResults instead of the app s default view list Programming in HP PPL 521 Customizing When an app is active its associated program appears an app as the first item in the Program Catalog It is within this program that you put functions to create a custom app A useful procedure for customizing an app is illustrated below 1 Decide on the HP app that you want to customize The customized app inherits all the properties of the HP app 2 Go to the Applications Library W highlight the HP app tap and save the app with a unique name 3 Customize the new app if you need to for example by configuring the axes or angle measure settings 4 Open the Program Catalog select your new app program and tap QE 5 Develop the functions to work with your customized app When you develop the functions use the app naming conventions described above 6 Put the VIEW command in your program to modify the app s View menu 7 Decide if your app will create new global variables If so you should EXPORT them from a separate user program that is called from the Start function in the app program This way they will not have their values lost 8 Test the app and debug the associated programs It is possible to link more than one app via programs For example a program associated with the Function app could execute a command to start the Statistics 1Var app and a program associated with the Statist
192. S variable The orientation of the parallelogram is counterclockwise from the first point parallelogram pointl point2 point3 Example parallelogram 0 6 9 5i draws a parallelogram whose vertices are at O 0 6 0 9 5 and 3 5 The coordinates of the last point are calculated automatically 173 polygon quadrilateral rectangle rhombus Draws a polygon from a set of vertices polygon pointl point2 pointn Example polygon GA GB GD draws AABD Draws a quadrilateral from a set of four points quadrilateral pointl point2 point3 point4 Example quadrilateral GA GB GC GD draws quadrilateral ABCD Draws a rectangle given two consecutive vertices and a point on the side opposite the side defined by the first two vertices or a scale factor for the sides perpendicular to the first side As with many of the other polygon commands you can specify optional CAS variable names for storing the coordinates of the other two vertices as points rectangle pointl point2 point3 or rectangle pointl point2 realk Examples rectangle GA GB GE draws a rectangle whose first two vertices are points A and B one side is segment AB Point E is on the line that contains the side of the rectangle opposite segment AB rectangle GA GB 3 p q drawsarectangle whose first two vertices are points A and B one side is segment AB The sides perpendicular to segment AB have length 3 AB The thir
193. S variables and User variables You can retrieve these variables from the Variable menu 2 3 The names of Home variables are reserved that is they cannot be deleted from the system and cannot be used to store objects of any other type than that for which they were designed For example A Z and 9 are reserved to store real numbers ZO Z9 are reserved to store complex numbers and LO L9 are reserved to store lists etc As a result you cannot store a matrix in L8 or a list in Z Home variables keep the same value in Home and in apps that is they are global variables common to the system They can be used in programs with that understanding App variable names are also reserved though a number of apps may share the same app variable name In any of these cases the name of the app variable must be qualified if that variable is not from the current app For example if the current app is the Function app Xmin will return the minimum x value in the Plot view of the Function app If you want the minimum value in the Plot view of the Polar app then you must enter Polar Xmin App 556 Programming in HP PPL variables represent the definitions and settings you make when working with apps interactively As you work through an app the app functions may store results in app variables as well In a program app variables are used to edit an app s data to customize it and to retrieve results from the app s operation CAS varia
194. The Triangle Solver app has two input forms a general input form and a simpler specialized form for right angled triangles If the general input form is displayed and you Enter length of side a edit __ Degree Recte __ Solve are investigating a right angled triangle tap E to display the simpler input form To return to the general input form tap ERB f the triangle you are investigating is not a rightangled triangle or you are not sure what type it is you should use the general input form Triangle Solver app 297 Special cases The indeterminate case No solution with given data Not enough data If two sides and an adjacent acute angle are entered and there are two solutions only one will be displayed initially In this case the button is displayed as in this example You can tap to display the second solution and tap again to return to the first solution Triangle Solver Solution found a 14 9052520363 A 111 317812546 b 8 B 30 c 10 C 88 6821874535 b Enter angle C CORDOBES If you are using the general input form and you enter more a 5 A than 3 values the zu po values might not be se zs consistent that is no 7 7 triangle could ibly have all the Enter angle c possibly fe Edit Degree Rect ERBES values you specified mae In these cases No sol with given data appears on the screen Triangle Solver No solution w
195. Trace in Numeric view Ti Although you can configure Advanced Graphing Num Setup awal the X and Y values shown in numxstartp i Numeric view by entering Num Y Start 0 d Num X Step 0 1 ae ame inor Num Y Step 0 1 out you can also directly set tT the values shown using Num X Zoom 4 Num Y Zoom 4 Enter table horizontal start value meree a r Numeric setup 15 Display the Numeric Setup view EB Setup You can set the starting value and step value that is the increment for both the X column and the Y column as well as the zoom factor for zooming in or out on a row of the table You can also choose whether the table of data in Numeric view is automatically populated or whether it is populated by you typing in the particular x values and y values you are interested in These options Automatic or Build YourOwn are available from the Num Type list They are explained in detail in Custom tables on page 103 Besides the default configuration of the table in Numeric view there are other options available in the Trace menu The trace options in Numeric view mirror the trace options in Plot view Both are designed to help you investigate the properties of relations numerically using a tabular format Specifically the table can be configured to show any of the following edge values controlled by X or Y points of interest Pol Advanced Graphing Numeric View bef
196. Ymin 0 1 Ymax MAX D2 1 STARTVIEW 1 1 END Symb BEGIN SetSample H1 D1 SetFreq H1 D2 H1Type 1 STARTVIEW 0 1 END The ROLLMANY routine is an adaptation of the program presented earlier in this chapter Since you cannot pass parameters to a program called through a selection from a custom View menu the exported variables SIDES and ROLLS are used in place of the parameters that were used in the previous versions The program above calls two other user programs ROLLDIE and DICESIMVARS ROLLDIE appears earlier in this chapter Here is DICESIMVARS Create a program with that name and enter the following code The program EXPORT ROLLS SIDES DICESIMVARS EXPORT DICESIMVARS BEGIN 10 gt ROLLS 6 SIDES D zal 1 Press W and open DiceSimulation The note will appear explaining how the app works 526 Programming in HP PPL 2 Press to see the DiceSimulation This is a simulation involving two dice Press the custom app menu View key and select Set Rolls Enter the number H of times you want the dice to be rolled Then ere you can reset select Set Sides and fiig emmhumber of sides on each die Finally sel Start e to see the th ae t hi e app s ta t se histogram of your st poll Dice the number of sides After the simulatior 2Set Sides ress Num to see the numerical resul 4set Rolls Mulation or press of the dice the Pl
197. a definition that reads F2 X X X Root The value of the last root calculated in the Function app is substituted for Root when this definition is evaluated App variables are discussed in detail in chapter 28 Troubleshooting beginning on page 507 From math functions Some of the functions on the Math menu can be incorporated into a definition The Math menu is one of the Toolbox menus B The following definition combines a math function Size with a Home variable L1 F4 X X SIZE L1 It is equivalent to x2 n where n is the number of elements in the list named L1 Size is an option on the List menu which is a sub menu of the Math menu From CAS functions Some of the functions on the CAS menu can be incorporated into a definition The CAS menu is one of the Toolbox menus The following definition incorporates the CAS function irem F5 X X CAS irem 45 7 irem is entered by choosing Remainder an option on the Division menu which is a sub menu of the Integer menu Note that any CAS command or function selected to operate outside the CAS is given the CAS prefix An introduction to HP apps 83 From app functions Some of the functions on the App menu can be incorporated into a definition The App menu is one of the Toolbox menus The following definition incorporates the app function Predy F9 X X Statistics 2Var Predy 6 From the Catlg menu Some of the functions on the
198. a palette of special characters For example pressing displays the special symbols palette shown at the right Select a character by tapping it or scrolling to it and pressing CEI A similar palette the relations palette is displayed if you press v The palette displays operators useful in math and programming Again just tap the character you want Other math shortcut keys include amp Pressing this key inserts an X T 8 or N depending on what app you are using This is explained further in the chapters describing the apps Similarly pressing enters a degree minute or second character It enters if no degree symbol is part of your expression enters if the previous entry is a value in Getting started 25 Fractions Hexagesimal numbers degrees and enters if the previous entry is a value in minutes Thus entering 36 ETA 24 40 ETA 54 20 ET s yields 36 40 20 See Hexagesimal numbers on page 26 for more information The fraction key J cycles through thee varieties of fractional display If the current answer is the decimal fraction 5 25 pressing converts the answer to the common fraction 21 4 If you press again the answer is converted to a mixed number 5 1 4 If pressed again the display returns to the decimal fraction 5 25 The HP Prime will approximate fraction and mixed number representations in cases 2 2360679775 n 219602 wher
199. abels Xzoom Method Ymax Recenter Ymin Tmin Yt1ck Tmax Yzoom Numeric NumStart NumType NumStep NumZoom Modes AAngle ADigits AComplex AFormat Variables 439 Polar app variables Category Names Symbolic R1 R6 R2 R7 R3 R8 R4 R9 R5 RO Plot Omin Recenter Omax Xmax Ostep Xmin Axes Xtick Cursor Xzoom GridDots Ymax GridLines Ymin Labels Ytick Method Yzoom Numeric NumIndep NumType NumStart NumZoom NumStep Modes AAngle ADigits AComp lex AFormat Finance app variables Category Names Numeric CPYR NbPmt BEG PMTV FV PPYR IPYR PV GSize Modes AAngle ADigits AComp lex AFormat 440 Variables Linear Solver app variables Category Names Numeric LSystem LSolution Modes AAngle ADigits AComplex AFormat a Contains a vector with the last solution found by the Linear Solver app Triangle Solver app variables Category Names Numeric SideA AngleA SideB AngleB SideC AngleC Rect Modes AAngle ADigits AComplex AFormat Linear Explorer app variables Category Names Modes AAngle ADigits AComplex AFormat Quadratic Explorer app variables Category Names Modes AAngle ADigits AComplex AFormat Variables 441 Trig Explorer app variables Category Names Modes AAngle ADigits AComplex AFormat Sequence app variables Category Names Symbolic UL U6 U2 U7 U3 U8 U4 U9 U5 U0 Plot Axes Xmax Cursor Xmin GridDots Xtick GridLines Xzoom Labels Ymax min Ymi
200. acter without closing the characters palette select it and tap ENB Programming in HP PPL 503 Button or Key Meaning Continued and Moves the cursor to the end or beginning of the current line You can also swipe the screen and Moves the cursor to the start or end of the program You can also swipe the screen and Moves the cursor one screen right or left You can also swipe the screen Starts a new line Deletes the character to the left of the cursor Deletes the character to the right of the cursor Deletes the entire program 1 To continue the MYPROGRAM example which we began on page 501 use the cursor keys to position the cursor where you want to insert a MYPROGRAM eal EXPORT MYPROGRAM BEGIN END Lcmds tmp check command or just tap on the desired location In this example you need to position the cursor between BEGIN and END 2 Tap to open the menu of common programming commands for blocking branching looping variables and functions MYPROGRAM EXPORT MYPROGRAM BEGIN END 1Block gt 2Branch gt gt gt gt 3Loop 4Variable 5Function A foe 504 Programming in HP PPL In this example we ll select a LOOP command from the menu 3 Select Loop and then select FOR from the sub menu Notice that a FOR_FROM_TO_DO _ template is inserted
201. age 28 Note that the HP Prime represents all numbers smaller than 1 x 10 49 as zero The largest number displayed is 9 99999999999 x 1047 A greater result is displayed as this number The home base for the calculator is the Home view EA You can do all your non symbolic calculations here You can also do calculations in CAS view which uses the computer algebra system see chapter 3 Computer algebra system CAS starting on page 53 In fact you can use functions from the CAS menu one of the Toolbox menus in an expression you are entering in Home view and use functions from the Math menu another of the Toolbox menus in an expression you are entering in CAS view Choosing an entry type The first choice you need to make is the style of entry The three types are Textbook An expression is entered in much the NS same way as if you were writing it on paper with some arguments above or below others In other words your entry could be two dimensional as in the example above Algebraic An expression is entered on a single LNCS n line Your entry is always one dimensional 36 Getting started RPN Reverse Polish Notation Not available in CAS view The arguments of the expression are entered first followed by the operator The entry of an operator automatically evaluates what has already been entered Thus you will need to enter a two operator expression as in the exa
202. aise a matrix to a power To divide by a square matrix To multiply the two matrices that you created for the previous example press the following keys alpha xi m 4 x Calpha_J Function kr k20 Se To multiply a matrix by a M1 M2 6 8 vector enter the matrix boal first then the vector The F E d number of elements in M E zJ the vector must equal the r number of columns in the matrix You can raise a matrix to any power as long as the power is an integer The following example shows the result of raising matrix M1 created earlier to the power of 5 ETS x ra 63 1075 You can also raise a matrix to a power without first storing it as a variable m1 Matrices can also be EDEDEDEDERED raised to negative powers In this case the result is equivalent to 1 matrix ABS power In the following example M1 is raised to the power of 2 5 ee ek 2337 3406 x alpha a 1 y rju m Function 2 5 5 25 M1 3 75 1 75 CO ee For division of a matrix or a vector by a square matrix the number of rows of the dividend or the number of elements if it is a vector must equal the number of rows in the divisor Matrices 471 To invert a matrix To negate each element This operation is not a mathematical division it is a left multiplication by the inverse of the divisor M1 M2 is equivalent to M27 M1 To divide the two matrices you
203. also be made part of a function s definition in Symbolic view For example you could define a function as x x Root The full range of variables and their use in calculations is covered in detail in chapter 22 Variables beginning on page 423 Function app 123 Summary of FCN operations Operation Description Root Extremum Slope Signed area Intersec tion Select Root to find the root of the current function nearest to the tracing cursor If no root is found but only an extremum then the result is labeled Extremum instead of Root The cursor is moved to the root value on the xaxis and the resulting x value is saved in a variable named Root Select Ext remum to find the maximum or minimum of the current function nearest to the tracing cursor The cursor moves to the extremum and the coordinate values are displayed The resulting x value is saved in a variable named Extremum Select Slope to find the numeric derivative of the current function at the current position of the tracing cursor The result is saved in a variable named Slope Select Signed area to find the numeric integral If there are two or more expressions checkmarked then you will be asked to choose the second expression from a list that includes the x axis Select a starting point and an ending point The result is saved in a variable named SignedArea Select Intersection to find the intersection of the graph
204. am Catalog and tap or GEE a list with NAME1 and NAME2 appears You cannot run a program that contains syntax errors If the program does not do what you expect it to do or if there is a run time error detected by the system you can execute the program step by step and look at the values of local variables Let s debug the program created above MYPROGRAM Programming in HP PPL 507 l In the Program Program Catalog Catalog select Function OKB ExportName lt 1KB MYPROGRAM MYPROGRAM lt 1KB Select MYPROGRAM Top GEG FOR N FROM 1 TO 3 DO MSGBOX Counting N El If there is more than kaz one EXPORT function in a file a list appears for you to choose which function to debug CMEC While debugging a program the title of the program or intra program function appears at the top of the display Below that is the current line of the program being debugged The current value of each variable is visible in the main body of the screen The following menu buttons are available in the debugger ETS Skips to the next line or block of the program GSB Executes the current line EZ Opens a menu of variables You can select one and add it to the list of variables so you can see how it changes as you step through the program ETB Closes the debugger GN Continues program execution without debugging Execute the FOR loop command The FOR loop starts and the top of the displ
205. ample Row 3 and press _ fue What you enter on the eniry line is evaluated as soon as you press Ete _ with the result placed in the cell or cells However if you want to retain the underlying formula precede it with _z For example suppose that want to add cell A1 which contains 7 to cell B2 which contains 12 Entering Al B2 in say A4 yields 19 as does entering em JA B2 in A5 However if the value in A1 or B2 changes the value in A5 changes but not the value in A4 This is because the expression or formula was retained in A5 To see if a cell contains just the value shown in it or also an Spreadsheet 201 underlying formula that generates the value move your cursor to the cell The entry line shows a formula if there is one A single formula can add content to every cell in a column or row For example move to C the heading cell for column C enter 2 JSIN Row and press _ t J Each cell in the column is populated with the sine of the cell s row number A similar process enables you to populate every cell in a row with the same formula You can also add a formula once and have it apply to every cell in the spreadsheet You do this by placing the formula in the cell at the top left the cell with the HP logo in it To see how this works suppose you want to generate a table of powers squares cubes and so on starting with the squares 1 Tap on the cell with the
206. an item by touch Getting started Touch gestures In addition to selection by tapping there are other touch related operations available to you To quickly move from page to page flick Place a finger on the screen and quickly swipe it in the desired direction up or down To pan drag your finger horizontally or vertically across the screen To quickly zoom in make an open pinch Place the thumb and a finger close together on the screen and move them apart Only lift them from the screen when you reach the desired magnification To quickly zoom out make an elosed pinch Place the thumb and a finger some distance apart on the screen and move them toward each other Only lift them from the screen when you reach the desired magnification Note that pinching to zoom only works in applications that feature zooming such as where graphs are plotted In other applications pinching will do nothing or do something other than zooming For example in the Spreadsheet app pinching will change the width of a column or the height of a row Getting started The keyboard The numbers in the legend below refer to the parts of the keyboard described in the illustration on the next page Number Feature o DOAN OD OF RA OU N LCD and touch screen 320 x 240 pixels Context sensitive touch button menu HP Apps keys Home view and preference settings Common math and science functions Alpha and Shift keys
207. and a quantile value between O and 1 returns the corresponding quantile of the elements of the list or vector quantile List Value or quantile Vector Value Example quantile 0 1 3 4 2 5 6 0 25 returns 1 Given a list or vector returns the first quartile of the elements of the list or vector Given a matrix returns the first quartile of the columns of the matrix quartilel List or quartilel Vector or quartilel Matrix Example quartilel 1 2 3 5 10 4 gives 2 Functions and commands 409 quartile3 quartiles quorem QUOTE randexp Given a list or vector returns the third quartile of the elements of the list or vector Given a matrix returns the third quartile of the columns of the matrix quartile3 List or quartile3 Vector or quartile3 Matrix Example quartile3 1 2 3 5 10 4 returns 5 Returns a matrix containing the minimum first quartile median third quartile and maximum of the elements of a list or vector With a matrix as argument returns the 5 number summary of the columns of the matrix quartiles List or quartiles Vector or quartiles Matrix Example quartiles 1 2 3 5 10 4 returns aAwon o Returns the quotient and remainder of the Euclidean division by decreasing power of two polynomials The polynomials can be expressed as vectors of their coefficients or in symbolic form quorem Poly Var or quorem Vector Var Example quorem
208. and other options are explained in Common operations in Numeric view on page 100 You can see the Plot and Numeric views side by side See Combining Plot and Numeric Views on page 106 Parametric app 275 276 Parametric app Polar app 16 The Polar app enables you to explore polar equations Polar equations are equations in which r the distance a point is from the origin 0 0 is defined in terms of 9 the angle a segment from the point to the origin makes with the polar axis Such equations take the form r f 0 Getting started with the Polar app Open the Polar app Define the function The Polar app uses the six standard app views described in chapter 5 An introduction to HP apps beginning on page 69 That chapter also describes the menu buttons used in the Polar app Throughout this chapter we will explore the expression 5ncos 0 2 cos 0 2 1 Open the Polar Polar Symbolic View app E R10 H R20 Select Polar E R3 0 E R4 0 The app opens in To Symbolic view E R6 0 E R7 6 Enter function Show There are 10 fields for defining polar functions These are labelled R1 0 through R9 0 and RO 0 2 Highlight the field you want to use either by tapping on it or scrolling to it If you are entering a new function just start typing If you are editing an existing function tap and make your changes When you have finished defining or c
209. ants Example The values of 34 math and physical constants can be selected by name or value and used in calculations These constants are grouped into four categories math chemistry physics and quantum mechanics A list of all these constants is given in List of constants on page 449 To display the constants press and then tap Function Const Constants Suppose you want to know the potential energy of a mass of 5 units according to the equation E mc 1 Enter the mass and Function the multiplication operator SeA 2 Open the constants menu Units and constants 447 Value or measurement 3 Select Physics Function Select c 299792458 10 5 67040E B Sale 2 c 299792458 5 Square the speed of Function light and evaluate the expression Em v 4 49377589368E17 You can enter just the value of a constant or the constant and its units if it has units If QAE is showing on the is showing on the screen the value and its units are inserted at the cursor point In the example at the right the first entry shows the Universal Gas Constant after it was chosen with amp showing The second entry shows the same constant but chosen when showing Function 8 314472 8 314472 8314472 J J H mol K Tapping 448 Units and constants List of constants Category Name and symbol
210. ap to see the correct answer and tap to exit Test mode The Explorer apps 303 Trig Explorer app The Trig Explorer app can be used to investigate the behavior of the graphs y a sin bx c d and y a cos bx c d as the values of a b cand d change The menu items available in this app are or RAIS toggles between graph mode and equation mode or SEB toggles between sine and cosine graphs or SEES toggles between radians and degrees as the angle measure for x or BERB toggles between translating the graph WH and changing its frequency or amplitude 9 You make these changes using the cursor keys R enters test mode or SEB toggles the increment by which parameter values change 2 9 2 6 7 4 or 20 30 45 depending on angle measure setting Open the app Press and select EESIN Trig Explorer i An equation is shown at 2 the top of the display i lt 3 ft with its graph shown 4 below it Choose the type of function you want to explore by tapping either or SIN 304 The Explorer apps Graph mode Equation mode The app opens in graph Y 1 SIN 1 X 0 83311 0 7 mode In graph mode you manipulate a copy of gt the graph by pressing the cursor keys All four keys are available The 4 original graph converted to dotted lines remains in place for you to easily see the result of your manipulations W
211. app Open the app The Linear Explorer app can be used to explore the behavior of the graphs of y ax and y ax b as the values of a and b change Press and select Y X Linear Explorer The left half of the display a shows the graph of a or linear function The right VRO half shows the general CEDEC The Explorer apps 299 form of the equation being explored at the top and below it the current equation of that form The keys you can use to manipulate the graph or equation appear below the equation The x and y intercepts are given at the bottom There are two types or levels of linear equation available for you to explore y ax and y ax b You choose between them by tapping or MA The keys available to you to manipulate the graph or equation depend on the level you have chosen For example the screen for a level 1 equation shows this e gt 7 This means that you can press kt and 4 If you choose a level 2 equation the screen shows this eoTtlt 7 This means that you can press kt and 5 Graph mode The app opens in graph mode indicated by the icity dot on the Graph button at the bottom of the waht screen In graph mode nt 2 the and keys translate the graph a vertically effectively changing the y intercept of the line Tap to change the magnitude of the increment for vertical translations The and keys a
212. ar near the bottom ERED EED of the display In this example the solver was able to find solutions for x y and z as soon as the first coefficient of the last equation was entered As you enter Linear Equation Solver gt each of the Lhe Oye 6Z 5 remaining known Uist 10E 8Z 10 6X 4Y OZ 6 values the k solution changes x 3 1666666667 Y 3 25 Z 2 5416666667 The graphic at the right shows the final solution EREJEDERNERED once all the coefficients and constants had been entered 268 Linear Solver app Solve a two by If the three equation TEAN 12122 two system input form is Lh OY 0 displayed and you OX oys 0 want to solve a two equation set tap ED 0 Infinite number of solutions adina 2x20 33 a a Note You can enter any expression that resolves to a numerical result including variables Just enter the name of a variable For more information on assigning values to variables see Storing a value in a variable on page 42 Menu items The menu items are B moves the cursor to the entry line where you can add or change a value You can also highlight a field enter a value and press _ _ The cursor automatically moves to the next field where you can enter the next value and press _ _ E displays the page for solving a system of 2 linear equations in 2 variables changes to when active ESB displays
213. ar app to find the mean median maximum and minimum values of the elements in the list L1 being 88 90 89 65 70 and 89 1 In Home view create Function L1 88 90 89 65 70 89 1 88 90 89 65 70 89 gt L1 88 90 89 65 70 89 Pe eee 2 In Home view store Function eal L1 in D1 ALPHA x J1 EED pir L Eter Define o 88 90 89 65 70 89 gt L1 88 90 89 65 70 89 L1 gt D1 88 90 89 65 70 89 Ee a a You will now be able to see the list data in the Numeric view of the Statistics 1Var app 3 Start the Statistics 1Var app Select DI D2 D3 D4 Statistics 1Var Notice that your list elements are in data set D1 B8 Lists 461 A In the Symbolic view specify the data set whose statistics you want to find Symb Setup By default H1 will use the data in D1 so nothing further needs to be done in Symbolic view However if the data Statistics 1Var Symbolic View V If Plott Histogram H2 F Plot2 Histogram H3 F Plot3 Histogram H4 Enter independent column Pedi fv D1 show eva of interest were in D2 or any column other than D1 you would have to specify the desired data column here 5 Calculate the statistics 6 Tap you are done See the chapter 10 Statistics 1Var app X H1 n a Min 65 Q1 70 Med 88 5 Q3 39 Max 190 x 491 ox 440811 R 8 1833333E1 sX 1 1232394 1 oX 1 025372
214. ar with a 5 year loan at 5 5 annual interest compounded monthly The purchase price of the car is 19 500 and the down payment is 3 000 First what are the required monthly payments Second what is the largest loan you can afford if your maximum monthly payment is 300 Assume that the payments start at the end of the first period 1 Start the Finance app Select Finance The app opens in the Numeric view 2 Inthe N field enter 5 12 and press nfo mo PV 0 PYR 12 PMT 0 CNR 12 y Fv 0 End V Notice that the result of the calculation Group Size 12 60 appears in the Enter number of payments or solve field This is the Pedit Amor ___ solve number of months over a five year period Finance app 287 3 In the 1 yR field type 5 5 the interest rate and press _Fuer_ 4 In Pv field type 19500 3000 and press Ete _ This is the present value of the loan being the purchase price less the deposit 5 leave P YR and Time Value of Money C YR both at 12 N 60 I YR 5 5 PV 16500 PIYR 12 their default values me cnme 2 leave End as the FV 0 End V payment option Also crane leave future value FV as 0 as your goal is aapa to end up with a future value of the loan of 0 6 Move the cursor to Time Valve of Money the PMT field and tap Nigo I YR 5 5 PV 16500 P YR 12 ENB the PMT afar o value is calculated as FV 0 End 315 1
215. asis of a vector subspace and a function that defines a scalar product on this vector subspace returns an orthonormal basis for that function gramschmidt Vector Function Example J gramschmidt 1 1 x P 9 gt fe qdx returns 1 1l l x l J2 J6 3 Used in the Symbolic view of the Geometry app In the definition of a geometric object including the statement display green specifies that the object defined will be drawn in green Returns an expression with sine cosine and tangent rewritten in terms of half tangent and sinh cosh and tanh rewritten in terms of the natural exponential halftan_hyp2exp ExprTrig Example halftan _hyp2exp sin x sinh x returns 2 tan epo ae 2 tan x Used in programming to go into step by step debugging mode Returns the Hamming distance between two integers hamdist Integerl Integer2 Example hamdist 0x12 0x38 gives 3 Returns 1 if a variable is in an expression and returns O otherwise has Expr Var Example has x y x gives 1 394 Functions and commands head Heaviside hyp2exp iabcuv ibasis icontent Returns the first element of a given vector sequence or string head Vector orhead String or head 0bj1 Obj2 Example head 1 2 3 gives 1 Returns the value of the Heaviside function for a given real number i e 1 if x gt 0 and O if x lt 0 Heaviside Real Example Heaviside 1 give
216. ass of a set of points each with a given weight a real number Each point weight pair is enclosed in square brackets as a vector barycenter pointl weight1 point2 weight2 pointn weightn Example point 1 1 barycenter point 1 i 2 returns point 1 2 1 4 point 1 i 1 165 center division_point element inter Returns the center of a circle center circle Example center circle x2 y x y gives point 1 2 1 2 For two points A and B and a numerical factor k returns a point C such that C B k C A division point pointl point2 realk Example division point 0 6 6 i 4 returns point 8 8 Creates a point on a geometric object whose abscissa is a given value or creates a real value on a given interval element object real or element reall real2 Examples element plotfunc x 2 creates a point on the graph of y x Initially this point will appear at 2 4 You can move the point but it will always remain on the graph of its function element 0 5 creates a value of 2 5 initially Tapping on this value and pressing enables you to press gt and to increase or decrease the value in a manner similar to a slider bar Press again to close the slider bar The value you set can be used as a coefficient in a function you subsequently plot Returns the intersections of two curves as a vector inter curvel curve2 y og bays Example inter 8
217. at contains STAT1 is not recalculated since it is not visible The format of cells that receive headers is changed to have Show set to false The STAT1 function will overwrite the content of destination cells potentially erasing data Examples STATI A25 A37 STAT1 A25 A37 h n x o Attempts to fit the input data to a specified function default is linear REGRS Input range model configuration e Input range specifies the data source for example A1 D8 It must contain an even number of columns Each pair will be treated as a distinct set of datapoints e model specifies the model to be used for the regression 1 y sl x int y sl In x int y int exp sl x y int x sl y int sI x Oo nA BR OUN y sl x int Functions and commands 353 7 8 9 y L 1 a exp b x y a sin b x c d y cx 2 bx a 10 y dx 3 cx 2 bx a T1 y ex 4 dx 3 cx 2 bx a Configuration a string which indicates which values you want to place in which row and if you want row and columns headers Place each parameter in the order that you want to see them appear in the spreadsheet If you do not provide a configuration string a default one will be provided The valid parameters are H Place column headers h Place row headers sl slope only valid for models 1 6 int intercept only valid for models 1 6 cor correlation only valid for models 1 6 cd Coefficient of det
218. atistic DF Degrees of freedom Critical T Boundary value s of T associated with the a level that you supplied Critical 3 Boundary value s of 3 required by the a value that you supplied Two Sample T Test Menu name T Test u u2 This test is used when the population standard deviation is not known On the basis of statistics from two samples each sample from a different population this test measures the strength of the Side for a selected hypothesis against the null hypothesis The null hypothesis is that the two populations means are equal Ho p Ho You select one of the following alternative hypotheses against which to test the null hypothesis Ho Hy lt p2 Ho My gt u2 Ho u Me Inference app 251 Inputs The inputs are Field Definition name i Sample 1 mean Ry Sample 2 mean Sy Sample 1 standard deviation S2 Sample 2 standard deviation ny Sample 1 size n2 Sample 2 size a Significance level Pooled Check this option to pool samples based on their standard deviations Results The results are Result Description Test T T Test statistic Test A 3 Difference in the means associated with the test tvalue P Probability associated with the T Test statistic DF Degrees of freedom Critical T Boundary values of T associated with the a level that you supplied Critical Difference in the means associated Az with the a level you supplied 252 Inference app Confidence intervals The con
219. atistics 1Var This opens a menu of app variables 1NbItem 2Min 3Q1 4Med 593 6 Max 1 Statistics 1Var gt 2Function gt 3 Advanced Graphing gt 4Trig Explorer gt 5 Quadratic Explorer gt 3 Select Statistics 1Var gt results gt Meanx fLinear Explorer gt Pax 7 Statistics 2Var is X2 MeanX The current value of the E variable you chose now appears on the entry line You can press to see its value Or you can include the variable in an expression that you are building For example if you wanted to calculate the square root of the mean computed in the Statistics 1Var app you would first press EA follow steps 1 to 3 above and then press _ See appendix A Glossary beginning on page 587 for a complete list of app variables You can qualify the name of any app variable so that it can be accessed from anywhere on the HP Prime For example both the Function app and the Parametric app have an variable named Xmin If the app you last had open was the Parametric app and enter Xmin in Home view you will get the value of Xmin from the Parametric app To get the value of Xmin in the Function app instead you could open the Function app and then return to Home view Alternatively you could qualify the name of the variable by preceding it with the app name and a period as in Function Xmin 110 An introduction to HP apps Function app The Fun
220. auascededeesacneserseseten 442 23 Units and constants Unitrin nan a a N o sol Sessvdenehnevesseane 443 Unitcalc lahons onenen enen aS 444 DOO nol neo salvar art EE EA E A E E ds 446 Physical constants 145 dss carstudeulets awnteredioratiade asin ann cavouenues 447 List of CONSIENIS sc aecnaccotaenaiccenecaanecneeiaeon sand aumeeateauesns 449 6 Contents 24 Lists Creote a list in the List Catalog ysucsccusicareytevetmk ine venveatarenens 451 The list Editorsin n aa n a ea 453 Deleting listinni tei E E ee etnies 455 Lists in Home vieW essesessesserrreessssseresesssrstreesessrereresssseee 455 list funtion e E n a tas E E A AS 457 Finding statistical values for lists c cccesssceeeeneeeeetteeeeeees 461 25 Matrices Creating and storing matrices nate natceatsre iawn eetere 464 Working with malices ciccsweretvtnevariauninendaus seven crsuersasciye 465 M tixarthimeti Cienan ude eee i 469 Solving systems of linear equations ccccccceeseeeeseeeeeseeees 472 Matrix functions and commands cccccceeesseeeeeseeeteseeeees 474 Matrix funetionss sisiane deiei nalts edad dna ludevasdeuiens we 475 Examples ray rary ulin erate santa souas plea sad bey EE Scanian 486 26 Notes and Info Phe Note Catalog ireren jesse tan passa eiaa a Morea nie a raase 489 lheNote Editt enesenn aen aae aaa E a EE 490 27 Programming in HP PPL The Program Catalog Armeniae E 498 Creating a new program eeeeeeeeecceeeeceeeeeeee
221. avigation 16 negation 312 negative numbers 20 39 Newtonian method 58 normal probability plot 220 Normal Z distribution confidence inter vals 253 notes 489 496 app specific 106 496 copying 496 creating 490 editing 492 496 exporting 496 formatting of 494 importing 496 sharing 496 number format 31 56 engineering 31 fixed 31 scientific 31 Standard 31 number functions 313 314 Numeric Setup view 78 common operations in 105 106 Numeric view 77 common operations in 100 103 menu buttons 104 zoom in 100 O object selection in Geometry app 143 objects geometric 153 160 on and off 12 One Proportion Z Interval 254 One Proportion Z Test 248 One Sample T Interval 256 One Sample T Test 250 One Sample Z Interval 253 One Sample Z Test 246 online help 46 open sentences 125 defining 82 127 P palettes shortcut 21 25 Parametric app 70 271 275 variables 439 pareto plot 221 physical constants 447 606 Index physics constants 449 pinch 17 plot box and whisker 220 cobweb 281 color of 85 defined in Geometry app 160 functions 346 347 line 220 one variable statistics 219 pareto 221 stairsteps 281 statistical data one variable 219 two variable 234 Plot and Numeric views together 106 Plot Gallery 134 Plot Setup view 76 common operations in 96 100 Plot view 75 common operations in 88 95 in Geometry app 141 menu buttons 96 146 variables 558 562 zoom 88 94 points 153 Polar app 70 277
222. ay shows the next line of the program the MSGBOX command 4 Execute the MSGBOX command 508 Programming in HP PPL Edit a program Copy a program or part of a program The message box appears Note that when each message box is displayed you still have to dismiss it by tapping or pressing _ er Tap and press repeatedly to execute the program step by step Tap to close the debugger at the current line of the program or tap to run the rest of the program without using the debugger You edit a program using the Program Editor which is accessible from the Program Catalog 1 Open the Program Program Catalog Function OKB Catalog MYPROGRAM lt 1KB ExportName lt 1KB 2 Tap the program you want to edit or use the arrow keys to highlight it and press ae The HP Prime opens the Program Editor The name of your program appears in the title bar of the display The buttons and keys you can use to edit your program are listed in Program Editor buttons and keys on page 502 You can use the global copy and Paste commands to copy partor all of a program The following steps illustrate the process 1 Open the Program Catalog 2 Tap the program that has the code you want to copy 3 Press Copy The menu buttons change to give you options for copying ERIB Marks where the copying or cutting is to begin ETE Marks where the copying or cutting is to end QR Select the entire p
223. b routines into the program for the DiceSimulation app The DiceSimulation DICESIMVARS program ROLLDIE EXPORT SIDES ROLLS EXPORT DiceSimulation BEGIN ND td IEW Start START EGIN D1 D2 SetSample H1 D1 SetFreq H1 D2 ws H1iType 1 STARTVIEW 6 1 ND zal EW Roll Dice ROLLMANY GIN LOCAL k roll D1 MAKELIST X 1 X 1 2 SIDES 1 1 D2 MAKELIST 0 X 1 2 SIDES 1 1 w lt s Q l i 524 Programming in HP PPL FOR k FROM 1 TO ROLLS DO roll ROLLDIE SIDES ROLLDIE SIDES D2 roll 1 D2 roll 1 1 END Xmin 0 1 Xmax MAX D1 1 Ymin 0 1 Ymax MAX D2 1 STARTVIEW 1 1 END VIEW Set Sides SETSIDES BEGIN REPEAT INPUT SIDES Die Sides N Enter of sides 2 SIDES FLOOR SIDES IF SIDES lt 2 THEN MSGBOX of sides must be gt 4 ND UNTIL SIDES gt 4 STARTVIEW 7 1 ND rs rs VIEW Set Rolls SETROLLS BEGIN REPEAT INPUT ROLLS Num of rolls N Entert of rolls 25 ROLLS FLOOR ROLLS IF ROLLS lt 1 THEN SGBOX You must enter a num gt 1 END UNTIL ROLLS gt 1 STARTVIEW 7 1 END Plot Programming in HP PPL 525 BEGIN Xmin 0 1 Xmax MAX D1 1
224. basis of statistics from a single sample this test measures the strength of the evidence for a selected hypothesis against the null hypothesis The null hypothesis is that the proportion of successes is an assumed value Ho n To You select one of the following alternative hypotheses against which to test the null hypothesis Ho T lt To Ho T gt To Ho T To The inputs are Field name Definition x Number of successes in the sample n Sample size To Population proportion of successes a Significance level 248 Inference app Results The results are Result Description Test Z Z Test statistic Test p Proportion of successes in the sample P Probability associated with the ZTest statistic Critical Z Boundary value s of Z associated with the a level that you supplied Critical p Proportion of successes associated with the level you supplied Two Proportion Z Test Menu name Inputs Zlest n4 T2 On the basis of statistics from two samples each from a different population this test measures the strength of the evidence for a selected hypothesis against the null hypothesis The null hypothesis is that the proportions of successes in the two populations are equal Ho 7 732 You select one of the following alternative hypotheses against which to test the null hypothesis The inputs are Field name Ho Ty lt T Ho 1 gt 1 Ho Tj T Definition X1 X2 ny n2
225. bles are similar to the Home real variables A Z except that they are lowercase and designed to be used in CAS view and not Home view Another difference is that Home and App variables always contain values while CAS variables can be simply symbolic and not contain any particular value The CAS variables are not typed like the Home and App variables For example the CAS variable t may contain a real number a list or a vector etc If a CAS variable has a value stored in it calling it from Home view will return its contents User variables are variables created by the user either directly or exported from a user program They provide one of several mechanisms to allow programs to communicate with the rest of the calculator and with other programs User variables created in a program may be either local to that program or global Once a variable has been exported from a program it will appear among the user variables in the Variables menu next to the program that exported it User variables may be multi character but must follow certain rules see Variables and visibility on page 511 for details User variables like CAS variables are not typed and thus may contain objects of different types The following sections deal with using app variables in programs providing descriptions of each app variable by name and its possible contents For a list of all the Home and app variables see chapter 22 Variables beginning on pag
226. bonacci sequence Ploti Setup Return to Plot Setup view E GB and select Cobweb from the Seq Plot menu Plot the sequence Plot Setup Seq Plot Stairstep N Rng 1 X Rng 1 8 Y Rng 1 8 X Tick 1 Y Tick 1 Enter maximum vertical value Cee ye N 1 U1 N 1 N 1 UIN 1 The button gives you access to common plot exploration tools such as EZIN Zoom in or out on the plot GEE Trace along a graph EI Go to a specified N value GED Display the sequence definition These tools are explained in Common operations in Plot view on page 88 Split screen and autoscaling options are also available by pressing eS Sequence app 283 e Display 11 Display Numeric N vi e A 1 1 Numeric view pod e 4 3 view 5 5 6 8 7 13 12 With the cursor 8 21 9 34 anywhere in the N 10 fs column type a new f Z Si Defn Col value and tap zoom ___ __ _ size_ _Defn_ column OK The table of values N m 25 75025 scrolls to the value 26 f121393 d Y 2s biyen you entered Youcan 28 781 30 832040 then see the 22040 32 2178309 corresponding value 33 bszas78 A 34 5702887 in the sequence The bs 9227465 25 example at the right gaya queen ery eee shows that the 25th value in the Fibonacci sequence is 75 025 Explore the The Numeric view gives you access to common table tabl
227. by spaces h header cells will be created Z the critical Zvalue zX the lower bound of the confidence interval zXh the upper bound of the confidence interval zXm the midpoint of the confidence interval e std the standard deviation Example ConfZ2mean 0 461368 0 522851 50 50 0 2887 0 288 7 0 lt 95 T The one sample Normal confidence interval for a proportion ConfZlprop x n C configuration Configuration a string that controls what results are shown and the order in which they appear An empty string displays the default all results including headers The options in the configuration string are separated by spaces h header cells will be created Z the critical Zvalue zX the lower bound of the confidence interval Functions and commands 361 ConfZ2prop ConfT1mean zXh the upper bound of the confidence interval zXm the midpoint of the confidence interval e std the standard deviation Example ConfZlprop 21 50 0 95 The two sample Normal confidence interval for the difference of two proportions ConfZ2prop x1 X2 N1 N2 C configuration Configuration a string that controls what results are shown and the order in which they appear An empty string displays the default all results including headers The options in the configuration string are separated by spaces h header cells will be created Z the critical Z va
228. cal data ceeceeeeeeseeeeetteeeeeees 215 Co mp ted statisticS se a EE REE i 218 Plotin anenee E EE t 219 Contents 3 EGU Ry Gosia taetetes katate cata nian a a a A 219 Setting up the plot Plot Setup view ccccecsseeeeeeeeeeees 221 Exploring the graph acess scaceansynsnan acy umncnangeradantannseisansbeds 221 11 Statistics 2Var app Getting started with the Statistics 2Var APP sceeeeeeeeseeees 223 Entering and editing statistical data eeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 228 Numeric view menu items ccceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeneeeeees 229 Defining a regression model ccceceeeeeseceeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeees 231 Computed statistics soss eiT a eat ee eae aie 233 Plotting statistical data crs ays era naa einenania tae aine 234 Plot view menu items sass kievceve aires voos uae Gaal nemabele 236 Plot Setup ieni oin ioe eee cue ag ert ae aes 236 Predicting VOWES Wanaisaee in aio anes 237 Troubleshooting a plotied cyraw wrnciieinmnenironunars 238 12 Inference app Getting started with the Inference App c ccceceseeeeesteeeeeees 239 Importing statistics ceeeeeeeeecccececeececeeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeaaenaaeeeea 243 Hypothesis fEStSi cr sas eisasyoenynetudcenty Maer einehhh Ny euied Hebevnetabaeiaetiads 245 One Sample Z Test sjchssueiassaing desstunuadsorpevoediivorsglouvacvasitinss 246 Two Sample Z Test tuss ascs diya soudisobveaandiieosagdor val onistewnicabarwine 247 One Proportio
229. capabilities of the HP Prime by adding programs functions and variables to the system The programs you write can be either standalone or attached to an app The functions and variables you create can be either local or global If they are declared to be global then they appear in the User menu when you press or 225 In the following sections we discuss variables and functions then create a set of short programs to illustrate the various techniques for creating programs functions and variables Variables in an HP Prime program can be used to store numbers lists matrices graphics objects and strings The name of a variable must be a sequence of alphanumeric characters letters and numbers starting with a letter Names are case sensitive so the variables named MaxTemp and maxTemp are different The HP Prime has built in variables of various types visible globally that is visible wherever you are in the calculator For example the built in variables A to Z can be used to store real numbers Z0 to Z9 can be used to store complex numbers MO to M9 can be used to store matrices and vectors and so on These names are reserved You cannot use them for other data For example you cannot name a program M1 or store a real number in a variable named 28 In addition to these reserved variables each HP app has its own reserved variables Some examples are Root Xmin and Numstart Most of these app variables are local to their app th
230. cash flow To a lender or borrower PV is the amount of the loan to an investor PV is the initial investment PV always occurs at the beginning of the first period The number of payments made in a year The periodic payment amount The payments are the same amount each period and the TVM calculation assumes that no payments are skipped Payments can occur at the beginning or the end of each compounding period an option you control by un checking or checking the End option The number of compounding periods in a year The future value of the transaction the amount of the final cash flow or the compounded value of the series of previous cash flows For a loan this is the size of the final balloon payment beyond any regular payment due For an investment this is its value at the end of the investment period TVM calculations Another example Suppose you have taken out a 30 year 150 000 house mortgage at 6 5 annual interest You expect to sell the house in 10 years repaying the loan in a balloon Finance app 291 payment Find the size of the balloon payment that is the value of the mortgage after 10 years of payment The following cash flow diagram illustrates the case of a mortgage with balloon payment I YR 6 5 PV 150 000 N 30x 12 360 for PMT N 10x 12 120 for balloon payment P YR 12 End mode 2 noho PMT Balloon payment FV 2 1 Start the Finance app
231. ce intervals and hypothesis tests based on the Normal and Student s t distributions Linear Explorer Explore the properties of linear equations and test your knowledge An introduction to HP apps 69 App name Use this app to Cont Linear Solver Parametric Polar Quadratic Explorer Sequence Solve Spreadsheet Statistics 1 Var Statistics 2Var Triangle Solver Trig Explorer Find solutions to sets of two or three linear equations Explore parametric functions of x and y in terms of t Example x cos A and y sin f Explore polar functions of rin terms of an angle 6 Example r 2cos 40 Explore the properties of quadratic equations and test your knowledge Explore sequence functions where U is defined in terms of n or in terms of previous terms in the same or another sequence such as U _ and U _5 Example U 0 U 1 and U U 2 Un 1 Explore equations in one or more real valued variables and systems of equations 2 Example x 1 x x 2 To solve problems or represent data best suited to a spreadsheet Calculate one variable statistical data x Calculate two variable statistical data x and y Find the unknown values for the lengths and angles of triangles Explore the properties of sinusoidal equations and test your knowledge As you use an app to explore a lesson or solve a problem you add data and definitions in one or more of the app
232. center S1mark S5mark Statistics 2Var SegPlot Sequence Omin Omax Polar Defines the minimum and maximum values for the independent variable Appears as the N RNG fields in the Plot Setup view In Plot Setup view enter values for N Rng In a program type n gt Nmin n Nmax where n lt n Recenters at the cursor when zooming From Plot Zoom Set Factors check or uncheck Recenter In a program type 0 gt Recenter to turn recenter on default 1 gt Recenter to turn recenter off Sets the mark to use for scatter plots In Plot Setup view for two variable statistics select one of S1 Mark S Mark Enables you to choose between a Stairstep or a Cobweb plot In Plot Setup view select SeqPlot then choose Stairstep or Cobweb In a program type 0 gt SeqPlot for Stairstep 1 gt SeqPlot for Cobweb Sets the minimum and maximum independent values In Plot Setup view enter values for 8 Rng In a program type ny Omin ny Omax where n lt m 560 Programming in HP PPL Ostep Polar Tmin Tmax Parametric Tstep Parametric Xtick Ytick Xmin Xmax Sets the step size for the independent variable In Plot Setup view enter a value for 0 Step In a program type n gt Ostep where n gt 0 Sets the minimum and maximum independent variable values In Plot Setup view enter values for T Rng In a program type n gt Tmin n gt Tmax wher
233. cimal integer base 10 to an integer in the default base Example R B 13 returns 1101 b if the default base is binary or Dh if the default base is hexadecimal Syntax SETBITS integer m bits Sets the number of bits to represent integer Valid values are in the range 64 to 65 If m or bits is omitted the default value is used Example SETBITS 1111b 15 returns 1111 b15 Syntax SETBASE integer m c Displays integer expressed in base m in whatever base is indicated by c where c can be 1 for binary 2 for octal or 3 for hexadecimal Parameter m can be b for binary d for decimal o for octal or h for hexadecimal If m is omitted the input is assumed to be in the default base Likewise if c is omitted the output is displayed in the default base Examples SETBASE 340 1 returns 11100b while SETBASE 1101 returns 0h if the default base is hexadecimal I O commands are used for inputting data into a program and for outputting data from a program They allow users to interact with programs Syntax CHOOSE var title item1 item2 itemn Displays a choose box with the title and containing the choose items If the user selects an object the variable whose name is provided will be updated to contain the number of the selected object an integer 1 2 3 or O if the user taps EEEN Programming in HP PPL
234. close the Gallery and return to Plot view press Gig Exploring a plot from the Plot Gallery If a particular plot in the Plot Gallery interests you you can save a copy of it The copy is saved as a new app a customized instance of the Advanced Graphing app You can modify and explore the app as you would with built in version of the Advanced Graphing app To save a plot from the Plot Gallery 1 With the plot of interest displayed tap HEY 3 Tap S again Your new app opens with the equations that generated the plot displayed in Symbolic view The app is also added to the Application Library so that you can return to it later 134 Advanced Graphing app Geometry The Geometry app enables you to draw and explore geometric constructions A geometric construction can be composed of any number of geometric objects such as points lines polygons curves tangents and so on You can take measurements such as areas and distances manipulate objects and note how measurements change There are five app views e Plot view provides drawing tools for you to construct geometric objects Symbolic view provides editable definitions of the objects in Plot view Numeric view for making calculations about the objects in Plot view e Plot Setup view for customizing the appearance of Plot view Symbolic Setup view for overriding certain system wide settings There is no Numeric Setup view in this app To o
235. created for the previous example press the following keys 5 E52 n E3 oe ee eee You can invert a square matrix in Home view by typing the matrix or its variable name and pressing J E _ You can also use the INVERSE command in the Matrix category of the Math menu You can change the sign of each element in a matrix by pressing cet entering the matrix name and pressing Solving systems of linear equations You can use matrices to solve systems of linear equations such as the following 2x 3yt 4z 5 x y z Ax y 2z 1 In this example we will use matrices M1 and M2 but you could use any available matrix variable name 1 Open the Matrix MI T Catalog clear M1 choose to create a vector and open the Matrix Editor 0 la a o 7 meeer select 472 Matrices Create the vector of as 3 M1 1 ry 1 5 the three constantsin 2 7 3 1 the linear system R JE ims size Go Column Return to the Matrix M1 3 039KB Catalog M2 2 2 047KB 7 M3 1 1 023KB M4 1 1 023KB MS 2 2 047KB The size of M1 M6 3 039KB M7 1 1 023KB should be showing ms 1 1 023KB vid 1 1 023KB 1 1 023KB Edit Delete vecte sena Select and clear M2 mmz 1 lo and re open the Matrix Editor Press or to select M2 7 0 Enter the equation edit ins Size Go column coefficients 2 Enter 3 Enter MZ 1 2 Tap incell
236. ction The original object is left in place 1 oa bo L 1 8 6 4 Pointer 1 189 1 392 Zoom Point Line Polygo Curve Transfo 161 Reflection A reflection is a transformation which maps an object or set of points onto its mirror image where the mirror is either a point or a line A reflection through a point is sometimes called a half turn In either case each Hit Symetry_center_axis ly ey 3 9 l b 3 A wa ai f A reflection Gb Zoom Point Line Polygo Curve Transfo point on the mirror image is the same distance from the mirror as the corresponding point on the original In the example at the right the original triangle D is reflected through point I l 2 Tap and select Reflection Tap the point or straight object segment ray or line that will be the symmetry axis that is the mirror and press Tap the object that is to be reflected across the symmetry axis and press _ _ The object is reflected across the symmetry axis defined in step 2 Dilation A dilation also called a homothety or uniform scaling is a transformation where an object is enlarged or reduced by a given scale factor around a given point as center In the illustration at the right the scale factor is 2 and the center of dilation is indicated by a point near the top right of the screen named I Each point on the new triangle
237. ction app enables you to explore up to 10 real valued rectangular functions of y in terms of x for example y 1 x and y x 1 3 Once you have defined a function you can e create graphs to find roots intercepts slope signed area and extrema and create tables that show how functions are evaluated at particular values This chapter demonstrates the basic functionality of the Function app by stepping you through an example More complex functionality is described in chapter 5 An introduction to HP apps beginning on page 69 Getting started with the Function app The Function app uses the customary app views Symbolic Plot and Numeric described in chapter 5 For a description of the menu buttons available in this app see Symbolic view Summary of menu buttons on page 86 Plot view Summary of menu buttons on page 96 and Numeric view Summary of menu buttons on page 104 Throughout this chapter we will explore the linear function y 1 x and the quadratic function y x 1 3 Function app 111 Open the Function app Define the expressions Note 1 Open the Function Function Symbolic View app BMX E F2 X S Select E F3 X Function H F4QX E F5 Recall that you can req open an app justby E F70 tapping its icon aaga You can also open it by using the cursor keys to highlight it and then pressing Show The Funct
238. ctions are used in HP apps to perform common calculations For example in the Function app the Plot view Fen menu has a function called SLOPE that calculates the slope of a given function at a given point The SLOPE function can also be used from the Home view or a program For example suppose you want to find the derivative of x 5 at x 2 One way using an app function is as follows 1 Press 2 Tap and select Function gt SLOPE SLOPE appears on the entry line ready for you to specify the function and the x value 3 Enter the function kzJ5 4 Enter the parameter Function separator x Eval _O 5 Enter the xvalue and press The slope that is the s orda 52 4 derivative at x 2 is Ce a calculated 4 All the app functions are described in App menu beginning on page 347 All apps have variables that is placeholders for various values that are unique to a particular app These include symbolic expressions and equations settings for the Plot and Numeric views and the results of some calculations such as roots and intersections An introduction to HP apps 109 Qualifying variables Suppose you are in Home view and want to retrieve the mean of a data set recently calculated in the Statistics 1Var app 1 Press 2 3 This opens the Variables menu From here you can access Home variables user defined variables and app variables 2 Tap Ey St
239. current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 Inference app variables Category Names Results Result CritScore explained TestScore CritVal below TestValue CritVal2 Prob DF Symbolic AltHyp Type Method Numeric Alpha Pooled Cont sl Mean s2 Mean2 ol n o2 n2 x uO x2 nO Modes AAngle ADigits AComplex AFormat Variables 437 Results CritScore CritVal1 CritVal2 DF Prob Result TestScore TestValue Contains the value of the Z or t distribution associated with the input a value Contains the lower critical value of the experimental variable associated with the negative TestScore value which was calculated from the input a level Contains the upper critical value of the experimental variable associated with the positive TestScore value which was calculated from the input a level Contains the degrees of freedom for the t tests Contains the probability associated with the TestScore value For hypothesis tests contains O or 1 to indicate rejection or failure to reject the null hypothesis Contains the Z or tdistribution value calculated from the hypothesis test or confidence interval inputs Contains the value of the experimental variable associated with the Test Score 438 Variables Parametric app variables Category Names Symbolic X1 X6 Y1 Y6 X2 X7 Y2 V7 X3 X8 Y3 Y8 X4 x9 Y4 Y9 x5 X0 Y5 YO Plot Axes Tstep Cursor xmax GridDots Xmin GridLines Xtick L
240. d Plot and explore the open sentences Graphing selected in Symbolic view Finance Display an amortization graph Function Plot and explore the functions selected in Symbolic view Geometry Create and manipulate geometric constructions Inference View a plot of the test results Linear Explorer Linear Solver Parametric Polar Quadratics Explorer Sequence Solve Spreadsheet Statistics 1 Var Statistics 2Var Triangle Solver Trig Explorer Explore linear equations and test your knowledge of them Not used Plot and explore the functions selected in Symbolic view Plot and explore the functions selected in Symbolic view Explore quadratic equations and test your knowledge of them Plot and explore the sequences selected in Symbolic view Plot and explore a single function selected in Symbolic view Not used Plot and explore the analyses selected in Symbolic view Plot and explore the analyses selected in Symbolic view Not used Explore sinusoidal equations and test your knowledge of them An introduction to HP apps 75 Plot Setup view The table below outlines what is done in the Plot Setup view of each app App Use the Plot Setup view to Advanced Modify the appearance of plots and the Graphing plot environment Finance Not used Function Modify the appearance of plots and the plot environment Geometry Modify the appearance of the drawing environment Inference N
241. d and fourth points are stored into the CAS variables pand q respectively Draws a rhombus given two points and an angle As with many of the other polygon commands you can specify optional CAS variable names for storing the coordinates of the other two vertices as points rhombus point1 point2 angle 174 Geometry right_triangle square triangle Geometry Example rhombus GA GB angle GC GD GE draws a rhombus on segment AB such that the angle at vertex A has the same measure as DCE Draws a right triangle given two points and a scale factor One leg of the right triangle is defined by the two points the vertex of the right angle is at the first point and the scale factor multiplies the length of the first leg to determine the length of the second leg right triangle pointl point2 realk Example right _triangle GA GB 1 draws an isosceles right triangles with its right angle at point A and with both legs equal in length to segment AB Draws a square given two consecutive vertices as points square pointl point2 Example Example square 0 3 2i p q draws a square with vertices at O 0 3 2 1 5 and 2 3 The last two vertices are computed automatically and are saved into the CAS variables pand q Draws a triangle given its three vertices triangle point1 point2 point3 Example triangle GA GB GC draws AABC 175 Curve function Draws t
242. d in the Home view In Home Settings enter a value in the second field of Number Format In a program type n gt HDigits where 0 lt n lt ll Sets the number display format used in the Home view In Home Settings choose Standard Fixed Scientific or Engineering in the Number Format field In a program store one of the following the constant numbers or its name into the variable HFormat O Standard 1 Fixed 2 Scientific 3 Engineering Programming in HP PPL 575 HComplex Sets the complex number mode for the Home view In Home Settings check or uncheck the Complex field Or in a program type 0 gt HComplex for OFF 1 gt HComplex for ON Date Contains the system date The format is YYYY MMDD This format is used irrespective of the format set on the Home Settings screen On page 2 of Home Settings enter values for Date In a program type YYYY MMDD gt Date where YYYy are the four digits of the year MM are the two digits of the month and DD are the two digits of the day Time Contains the system time The format is HH MM SS with the hours in 24 hour format This format is used irrespective of the format set on the Home Settings screen On page 2 of Home Settings enter values for Time In a program type HH MM SS gt Time where HH are the two digits of the hour O lt SHH lt 24 mm are the two digits of the minutes and SS are the two digits o
243. d of the confidence interval Xm the midpoint of the confidence interval e std the standard deviation Example ConfT2mean 0 461368 0 522851 0 2776 0 2943 50 50 0 0 95 Statistics 1Var app functions The Statistics 1Var app has three functions designed to work together to calculate summary statistics based on one of the statistical analyses H1 H5 defined in the Symbolic view of the Statistics 1Var app Functions and commands 363 Do1VStats SetFreq SetSample Dol variable statistics Performs the same calculations as tapping in the Numeric view of the Statistics 1 Var app and stores the results in the appropriate Statistics 1 Var app results variables Hn must be one of the Statistics 1 Var app Symbolic view variables H1 H5 DolVStats Hn Example DolVStats H1 executes summary statistics for the currently defined H1 analysis Set frequency Sets the frequency for one of the statistical analyses H1 H5 defined in the Symbolic view of the Statistics 1Var app The frequency can be either one of the columns D0 D9 or any positive integer Hn must be one of the Statistics 1Var app Symbolic view variables H1 H5 If used Dn must be one of the column variables DO D9 otherwise value must be a positive integer SetFreq Hn Dn or SetFreq Hn value Example SetFreq H2 D3 sets the Frequency field for the H2 analysis to use the list D3 Set sample data Sets the sample data for one of
244. d to a number of decimal places If you choose this option a new field appears for you to enter the number of decimal places For example 123 456789 becomes 123 46 in Fixed 2 format Scientific Displays results with an one digit exponent to the left of the decimal point and the specified number of decimal places For example 123 456789 becomes 1 23E2 in Scientific 2 format Engineering Displays results with an exponent that is a multiple of 3 and the specified number of significant digits beyond the first one Example 123 456E7 becomes 1 23E9 in Engineer ing 2 format Getting started 31 Setting Options Continued Entry Integers Complex Language Textbook An expression is entered in much the same way as if you were writing it on paper with some arguments above or below others In other words your entry could be two dimensional Algebraic An expression is entered on a single line Your entry is always one dimensional RPN Reverse Polish Notation The arguments of the expression are entered first followed by the operator The entry of an operator automatically evaluates what has already been entered Sets the default base for integer arithmetic binary octal decimal or hex You can also set the number of bits per integer and whether inte gers are to be signed Choose one of two formats for displaying complex numbers a b or atb i To the right of
245. defined by its name two points or an expression in x and y perpendicular point line or perpendicular pointl point2 point3 Examples perpendicular GA GD draws a line perpendicular to line D through point A perpendicular 3 2i GB GC draws a line through the point whose coordinates are 3 2 that is perpendicular to line BC perpendicular 3 2i line x y 1 draws a line through the point whose coordinates are 3 2 that is perpendicular to the line whose equation is x y 1 that is the line whose equation is y x 5 Draws a segment defined by its endpoints segment pointl point2 Examples segment 1 2i 4 draws the segment defined by the points whose coordinates are 1 2 and 4 0 segment GA GB draws segment AB Draws the tangent s to a given curve through a given point The point does not have to be a point on the curve tangent curve point Examples tangent plotfunc x 2 GA draws the tangent to the graph of y x 2 through point A tangent circle GB GC GB GA draws one or more tangent lines through point A to the circle whose center is at point B and whose radius is defined by segment BC 171 Polygon equilateral_triangle hexagon Draws an equilateral triangle defined by one of its sides that is by two consecutive vertices The third point is calculated automatically but is not defined symbolically If a lowercase variable is added as a third argument th
246. definition of a plot and press or to move the trace cursor from plot to plot 4 If you pressed to see the definition of a plot the menu at the bottom of the screen will be closed Tap to re open it 5 Tap RIB 6 Enter 25 and tap 7 Top EEM The value of F1 x when X is 25 as shown at the bottom of the screen This is one of many ways the HP Prime provides for you to evaluate a function for a specific independent variable You can also evaluate a function in Numeric view see page 102 Moreover any expression you define in Symbolic view can be evaluated in Home view For example suppose F1 X is defined as x 1 2 3 If you enter F1 4 in Home view and press you get 6 since 4 1 3 F1 X 573 To turn off tracing tap EEA e To turn on tracing tap Ga If these options are not displayed tap QUE When tracing is off pressing the cursor keys no longer constrains the cursor to a plot An introduction to HP apps 95 Plot view Summary of menu buttons Button Purpose Displays a menu of zoom options See Zoom options on page 88 zo Ga toggle button for turning off and turning on trace functionality See Trace on page 94 Displays an input form for you to specify a value you want the cursor to jump to The value you enter is the value of the independent variable Displays a menu of options for analyzing a Function only plot See Analyzing functions
247. dentical in behavior to the columns C1 CO in the Statistics 2Var app and the columns D1 D0 in the Statistics 1Var app You can store a statistics column as a list or vice versa and use any of the list functions on the statistics columns or the statistics functions on the list variables Create a list in the List Catalog 1 Open the List Catalog List The number of elements in a list is wo cooooocoo0osd shown beside the list Lo 0 F cait Delete send 1 name Lists 451 List Catalog Buttons and keys 2 Tap on the name you T want to assign to the new list L1 L2 etc The list editor appears If you re creating a new list rather than MEETER changing make sure you choose a list with out any elements in it 3 Enter the values you want in the list pressing _ after each one Values can be real or T complex numbers or an expression If you enter a expression it is evaluated and the result is inserted in SEpgTECTOMEDETSETE the list 4 When done press BUNS or ES a7 a List to return to the List catalog or press Eio go to Home view The buttons and keys in the List Catalog are Button or Key Purpose Em 2 en EZ Clear BM or Opens the highlighted list for editing You can also just tap ona list name Deletes the contents of the selected list Transmits the highligh
248. dex is the nth element that would have been returned x y original x etc had the parameter been omitted or 1 if no pointer activity had occurred MSGBOX Syntax MSGBOXx expression or string ok_cancel Displays a message box with the value of the given expression or string If ok_cancel is true displays the and GARR buttons otherwise only displays the button Default value for ok_cancel is false false O if Returns true non zero if the user taps the user presses ERE EXPORT AREACALC BEGIN OCAL radius INPUT radius Radius of Circle r Enter radius 1 SGBOX The area is m radius 2 END If the user enters 10 for Program Catalog fs DiceSimulation OKB the radius the message AREATA a box shows this DRAWPATTERN 1KB MAXFACTORS lt 1KB MYPROGRA The area is 314 159265359 ona b laa s ao s aa Kao 552 Programming in HP PPL PRINT Syntax PRINT expression or string Prints the result of expression or string to the terminal The terminal is a program text output viewing mechanism which is displayed only when PRINT commands are executed When visible you can press or to view the text LE Jto erase the text and any other key to hide the terminal Pressing stops the interaction with the terminal PRINT with no argument clears the terminal There are also commands for outputting data in the Graphics section In particular th
249. dition and subtraction Relational operators lt gt lt AND and NOT OR and XOR 10 Left argument of where OM NAAR WH 11 Assign to variable It is best to press to start a negative number or to insert a negative sign Pressing instead will in some situations be interpreted as an operation to subtract the next number you enter from the last result This is explained in To reuse the last result on page 41 To raise a negative number to a power enclose it in parentheses For example 5 25 whereas 52 25 Getting started 39 Explicit and implied multiplication Large results Implied multiplication takes place when two operands appear with no operator between them If you enter AB for example the result is A B Notice in the example on page 38 that we entered 14 BMli 8 without the multiplication operator after 14 For the sake of clarity the calculator adds the operator to the expression in history but it is not strictly necessary when you are entering the expression You can though enter the operator if you wish as was done in the examples on page 39 The result will be the same If the result is too long or too tall to be seen in its entirety for example a many rowed matrix highlight it and then press EMM The result is displayed in full screen view You can now press and as well as and to bring hidden parts of the result into view Tap to
250. ducts for the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 Contains the mean of the independent values X of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 Contains the sum of the independent values X of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 Contains the sum of the squares of the independent values X of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 Contains the sample standard deviation of the independent values X of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 Contains the population standard deviation of the independent values X of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 Contains the standard error of the independent values X of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 Contains the mean of the dependent values Y of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 436 Variables LY xY2 sY oY serrY Contains the sum of the dependent values Y of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 Contains the sum of the squares of the dependent values Y of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 Contains the sample standard deviation of the dependent values Y of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 s5 Contains the population standard deviation of the dependent values Y of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 Contains the standard error of the dependent values Y of the
251. e Configuration a string that controls what results are shown and the order in which they appear An empty string displays the default all results including headers The options in the configuration string are separated by spaces h header cells will be created acc the test result O or 1 to reject or fail to reject the null hypothesis tZ Test Z tM the input Ax value prob the lower tail probability cZ the critical Zvalue associated with the input a level cxl the lower critical value of A z associated with the critical Z value cx2 the upper critical value of Az associated with the critical Zvalue std the standard deviation Example HypZ2mean 0 461368 0 522851 50 50 0 2887 028 871 0 05 Lp Me The one sample Ztest for a proportion HypZlprop x n a mode configuration where x is the success count of the sample Mode Specifies which alternative hypothesis to use T T lt To 2 T gt To 3 TFT Functions and commands 357 HypZ2prop Configuration a string that controls what results are shown and the order in which they appear An empty string displays the default all results including headers The options in the configuration string are separated by spaces e h header cells will be created acc 0 or 1 to reject or fail to reject the null hypothesis e 1Z the test Zvalue e tP the test proportion of successes e prob the lower tail probability e cZ Th
252. e 423 For user variables in programs see The HP Prime programming language beginning on page 511 Programming in HP PPL 557 App variables Not all app variables are used in every app S1Fit for example is only used in the Statistics 2Var app However many of the variables are common to the Function Advanced Graphing Parametric Polar Sequence Solve Statistics 1Var and Statistics 2Var apps If a variable is not available in all of these apps or is available only in some of these apps or some other app then a list of the apps where the variable can be used appears under the variable name The following sections list the app variables by the view in which they are used To see the variables listed by the categories in which they appear on the Variables menu see App variables beginning on page 429 Plot view variables Axes Cursor GridDots Turns axes on or off In Plot Setup view check or uncheck AXES In a program type 0 gt Axes to turn axes on 1 gt Axes to turn axes off Sets the type of cursor Inverted or blinking is useful if the background is solid In Plot Setup view choose Cursor In a program type 0 gt Cursor for solid crosshairs default 1 gt Cursor to invert the crosshairs 2 gt Cursor for blinking crosshairs Turns the background dot grid in Plot view on or off In Plot Setup view check or uncheck GRID DOTS In a program type 0
253. e EPA scl 555x10 20g 3722 Singular Value Decomposition Factorizes an m x n matrix into two matrices and a vector m x m square orthogonal n x n square orthogonal real SVD matrix Example SVD 12 returns 34 0 4045 0 9145 0 5760 0 8174 5 4649 0 3659 0 9145 0 4045 0 8174 0 5760 484 Matrices SVL Vector Cross Product Dot Product L2 Norm L Norm Singular Values Returns a vector containing the singular values of matrix SVL matrix Example SVL i 1 returns 5 4649 0 3659 3 4 Cross Product of vector with vector2 CROSS vectorl vector2 Example CROSS da 2 3 a returns o 0 Dot Product of two arrays matrix and matrix2 DOT matrix1 matrix2 Example DOT da 2 3 3 a returns 11 Returns the norm sqrt x1 2 x2 2 xn 2 of a vector l2norm Vect Example 12norm 3 4 2 returns V29 Returns the norm sum of the absolute values of the coordinates of a vector llnorm Vect Example linorm 3 4 2 returns 9 Matrices 485 Max Norm Examples Identity Matrix Transposing a Matrix Reduced Row Echelon Form Returns the norm the maximum of the absolute values of the coordinates of a vector maxnorm Vect or Mtrx Example maxnorm o returns 4 123 4 You can create an identity matrix with the IDENMAT function For example IDENMAT 2 creates the 2x2 identity ma
254. e Statistics 2Var app Symbolic view variables s1 s5 Do2VStats Sn Example DolvStats S1 executes summary statistics for the currently defined S1 analysis Set dependent column Sets the dependent column for one of the statistical analyses S1 S5 to one of the column variables CO C9 SetDepend Sn Cn Example SetDepend S1 C3 sets the Dependent Column field for the S1 analysis to use the data in list C3 Functions and commands 365 SetIndep Set independent column Sets the independent column for one of the statistical analyses S1 S5 to one of the column variables CO C9 SetIndep Sn Cn Example SetIndep S1 C2 sets the Independent Column field for the S1 analysis to use the data in list C2 Inference app functions Dolnference HypZ1mean The Inference app has a single function that returns the same results as tapping in the Numeric view of the Inference app The results depend on the contents of the Inference app variables Method Type and AltHyp Calculate confidence interval or test hypothesis Uses the current settings in the Symbolic and Numeric views to calculate a confidence interval or test an hypothesis Performs the same calculations as tapping in the Numeric view of the Inference app and stores the results in the appropriate Inference app results variables DoInference The one sample Z test for a mean Returns a list containing in order e Oor 1 to reject or fail to reject the n
255. e app 70 259 266 functions 349 limitations 264 messages 265 one equation 260 several equations 263 variables summary of 431 solve functions 330 332 sort apps 71 72 special symbols palette 21 25 splitscreen viewing 91 106 Spreadsheet app 70 195 210 cell referencing 200 entering content 201 external functions 203 external referencing 204 format parameters 209 formatting 208 functions 210 349 363 gestures 199 importing data 202 menu buttons 207 naming cells 200 navigating 199 selecting cells 199 variables 205 431 square zoom 90 93 stack in RPN 48 51 stairsteps graph 281 standard number format 31 statistical calculations 218 233 statistical fit types 23 1 232 statistical plots 219 221 234 Statistics 1Var 70 211 222 data set definitions 212 deleting data 217 230 editing data 216 entering frequencies 213 functions 363 364 generating data 217 importing data from a spreadsheet 215 inserting data 215 217 230 menu buttons 213 216 plot types bar graph 220 box and whisker plot 220 histogram 219 line plot 220 normal probability plot 220 pareto chart 221 plotting data 219 results 218 sorting data 217 230 variables summary of 433 Statistics 2Var 70 223 238 adjusting plotting scale 235 choosing the fit 231 define your own fit 232 deleting data 230 editing data 228 fit types 231 232 functions 365 366 inserting data 228 230 menu buttons 229 236 plot setup 236 plotting data 234 predicting value
256. e commands TEXTOUT and TEXTOUT_P can be used for text output This example prompts the user to enter a value for the radius of a circle and prints the area of the circle on the terminal EXPORT AREACALC BEGIN OCAL radius Be INPUT radius Radius of Circle r Enter radius 1 Enter radius 10 mmm PRINT The The area is 314 159265359 area is r radius 2 END Notice the use of the LOCAL variable for the radius and the naming convention that uses lower case letters for the local variable Adhering to such a convention will improve the readability of your programs WAIT Syntax WAIT n Pauses program execution for n seconds With no argument or with n O pauses program execution for one minute Programming in HP PPL 553 More CHANGE TOTAL CAS EVALLIST EXECON Syntax CHANGE x y The percentage change in going from x to y Example CHANGE 20 50 returns 150 Syntax TOTAL x y The percentage of x that is y Example TOTAL 20 50 returns 250 Syntax CAS function or CAS variable Executes the function or returns the variable using the CAS Syntax EVALLIST list Evaluates the content of each element in a list and returns an evaluated list Syntax EXECON amp expr List1l list2 Creates a new list based on the elements in one or more lists by iteratively modi
257. e correctly matched your equation to the given graph Tap to see the correct answer and tap to exit Test mode The Explorer apps 301 Quadratic Explorer app Open the app The Quadratic Explorer app can be used to investigate the behavior of y a x h v as the values of a h and v change Press and select Y X Quadratic Explorer cafi i The left half of the display ee shows the graph of a a quadratic function The right half shows the CEPCCDPTOCHETIER general form of the equation being explored at the top and below it the current equation of that form The keys you can use to manipulate the graph or equation appear below the equation These will change depending on the level of equation you choose Displayed beneath they keys is the equation the discriminant that is b 4ac and the roots of the quadratic Graph mode The app opens in graph Y X 3 mode In graph mode you manipulate a copy of the graph using whatever a keys are available The b 4ac 12 X1 1 73205080757 original X2 1 73205080757 graph convertedio SECHDE dotted lines remains in place for you to easily see the result of your manipulations Four general forms of quadratic equations are available for you to explore y ax Level 1 y x h level 2 ys xty Level 3 y a xt hy ty Level 4 302 The Explorer apps Equation mode Test mode Choose a general form by tapping
258. e critical Zvalue associated with the input a level e cpl the lower critical proportion of successes associated with the critical Z value cp2 the upper critical proportion of successes associated with the critical Zvalue e std the standard deviation Example HypZlprop 21 50 0 5 0 05 1 The two sample Zest for comparing two proportions HypZ2prop x1 X2 N1 02 4 mode configuration where x and x are the success counts of the two samples Mode Specifies which alternative hypothesis to use 0 lt 1 e 2 m gt t 3 1 Configuration a string that controls what results are shown and the order in which they appear An empty string displays the default all results including headers The options in the configuration string are separated by spaces e kh header cells will be created e acc Oor 1 to reject or fail to reject the null hypothesis e 1Z the test Zvalue tP the test Az value 358 Functions and commands e prob the lower tail probability e cZ The critical Zvalue associated with the input a level cpl The lower critical value of An associated with the critical Z value cp2 The upper critical value of Ar associated with the critical Z value Example HypZ2prop 21 26 50 50 0 05 1 HypT1mean The one sample t test for a mean HypTlmean xX S n Up a mode configuration Mode Specifies which alternative hypothesis to use e Tl lt p 2
259. e following buttons and keys Note that some buttons will not be available if there are no notes in the Note Catalog Button or Key Purpose Opens the selected note for editing Begins a new note and prompts you for a name Tap to provide additional features See below Notes and Info 489 Button or Key Purpose Continued Save creates a copy of the selected note and prompts you to save it under a new name Rename renames the selected note Sort sorts the list of notes sort options are alphabetical and chronological Delete deletes the selected note Clear deletes all notes Send sends the selected note to another HP Prime Deletes the selected note Deletes all notes in the catalog The Note Editor The Note Editor is where you create and edit notes You can launch the Note Editor from the Notes Catalog and also from within an app Notes created within an app stay with that app even if you send the app to another calculator Such notes do not appear in the Notes Catalog They can only be read when the associated app is open Notes created via the Notes Catalog are not specific to any app and can be viewed at any time by opening the Notes Catalog Such notes can also be sent to another calculator To create a note 1 Open the Note Nota Catalog from the Notes Catalog Catalog fT New More T T 490 Notes and Info 2 Create a new note 3 Enter a name
260. e is from 0 to 180 or O to T Inputs and outputs depend on the current angle format Also accepts complex numbers Output will be complex for values outside the normal cosine domain of 1 lt x lt 1 ACOS value Example ACOS 1 returns 0 degrees mode Arc tangent tan x Output range is from 90 to 90 or r 2 to 7 2 Inputs and outputs depend on the current angle format Also accepts complex numbers ATAN value Example ATAN 1 returns 45 degrees mode Square Also accepts complex numbers value 2 Example 182 returns 324 Functions and commands 311 x bm eax Square root Also accepts complex numbers Vvalue Example V 320 returns 17 88854382 x raised to the power of y Also accepts complex numbers value Power Example 2 8 returns 256 The nth root of x rootv value Example 3V8 returns 2 Reciprocal value Example 3 1 returns 333333333333 Negation Also accepts complex numbers value Example 1 2 i returns 1 2 i Absolute value value x y il matrix For a complex number x y i returns Jx y For a matrix matrix returns the Frobenius norm of the matrix Example 1 returns 1 1 2 returns 2 2360679775 312 Functions and commands Math menu Numbers Ceiling Floor FP Round Press to open the Statistics 1Var Toolbox menus one of which 1Numbers is the Math menu The
261. e it cannot find 38209 23184 exact ones For example 2 58209 enter 5 to see the ES SSS a decimal approximation 2 236 Press once to see co and again to see a a third time will cycle back to the 98209 original decimal representation uy oF a 2 Pressing Any decimal result can de displayed in hexagesimal format that is in units subdivided into groups of 60 This includes degrees minutes and seconds as well as hours minutes and seconds For example enter a to see the decimal result 1 375 Now press to see 1 22 30 Press again to return to the decimal representation HP Prime will produce the best approximation in cases where an exact result is not possible Enter 5 to see the decimal approximation 2 236 Press to see 2 14 9 84472 26 Getting started EEX key powers of 10 Note that the degree and minute entries must be integers and the minute and second entries must be positive Decimals are not allowed except in the seconds Note too that the HP Prime treats a value in hexgesimal format as a single entity Hence any operation performed on h imalvaliei 5 2 14 9 844719 a hexagesimal value is or2526 Er performed on the entire apg gene value For example if you enter 10 25 26 the whole value is squared not just the seconds component The result in this case is 108 39 26 8544 Numbers like 5x 10 and 3 21 x 10
262. e n lt n Sets the step size for the independent variable In Plot Setup view enter a value for T Step In a program type n Tstep where n gt 0 Sets the distance between tick marks for the horizontal axis In Plot Setup view enter a value for X Tick In a program type n Xtick where n gt 0 Sets the distance between tick marks on the vertical axis In Plot Setup view enter a value for Y Tick In a program type n gt Ytick where n gt 0 Sets the minimum and maximum horizontal values of the plot screen In Plot Setup view enter values for X Rng In a program type n gt Xmin n Xmax where n lt n Programming in HP PPL 561 Ymin Ymax Xzoom Yzoom Sets the minimum and maximum vertical values of the plot screen In Plot Setup view enter the values for Y Rng In a program type n gt Ymin n gt Ymax where n lt m Sets the horizontal zoom factor In Plot View press then BN Scroll to Set Factors select it and tap Enter the value for x Zoom and tap SB In a program type n gt Xzoom where n gt 0 The default value is 4 In Plot View tap then BS Scroll to Set Factors and tap eS Enter the value for Y Zoom and tap SS Or in a program type n gt Yzoom where n gt 0 The default value is 4 Symbolic view variables AltHyp Inference Determines the alternative hypothesis used for hypothesis testing In Symbolic View select an option
263. e of exploration tools such as values EZ Change the increment between consecutive values E Change the size of the font GG Display the sequence definition EMD Choose the number of sequences to display These tools are explained in Common operations in Numeric view on page 100 Split screen and autoscaling options are also available by pressing i 284 Sequence app Set up the table of values The Numeric Setup view provides options common to most of the graphing apps although there is no zoom factor as the domain for the sequences is the set of counting numbers See Sequence Num Setup Num Step 1 Num Zoom 4 Num Type Automatic Enter table start value mmer Common operations in Numeric Setup view on page 105 for more information Another example Explicitly defined sequences In the following example we define the nth term of a sequence simply in terms of n itself In this case there is no need to enter either of the first two terms numerically Define the expression Setup the plot e Define 2 N ui 3 Select U1 N and select D 2 3 Oo n Open the Plot Setup view Setup Reset all settings to their default values Clear Tap Seq Plot and select Cobweb Sequence Symbolic View a 35 U1 1 Bue N V Ut N 2 3 U2 1 N 2 3 Sequence Plot Setup Seq Plot
264. e optional and if not specified will be the top left of srcGRB Example SUBGROB GI G4 will copy G1 in G4 Programming in HP PPL TEXTOUT_P TEXTOUT Syntax TEXTOUT text G x y font cl width c2 TEXTOUT_P text G x y font cl width c2 Draws text using color c1 on graphic G at position x y using font Do not draw text more than width pixels wide and erase the background before drawing the text using color c2 G can be any of the graphics variables and is optional The default is GO Font can be 0 current font selected on the Homes Settings screen 1 small font 2 large font Font is optional and if not specitied is the current font selected on the Homes Settings screen cl can be any color specified as RRGGBB The default is black 000000 width is optional and if not specified no clipping is performed c2 can be any color specified as RRGGBB c2 is optional If not specified the background is not erased Example The following program displays the successive approximations for 7 using the series for the arctangent 1 Note that a color for the text and for background has been specified with the width of the text being limited to 100 pixels EXPORT PISERIES BEGIN LOCAL sign K 2 A 4 sign 1 RECT TEXTOUT P N 0 0 TEXTOUT P PI APPROX 0 30 REPEAT A tsign 4 2 K 1 gt A Programmin
265. e root intersection or extremum The app will only return values that are closest to the cursor You will need to move the cursor closer to other roots intersections or extrema if you want the app to calculate values for those The Function Variables The result of each numerical analysis in the Function app is assigned to a variable These variables are named Root e Isect for Intersection e Slope e SignedArea Extremum The result of each new analysis overwrites the previous result For example if you find the second root of a quadratic equation atter finding the first the value of Root changes form the first to the second root 122 Function app To access Function The Function variables are available in Home view and in variables the CAS where they can be included as arguments in calculations They are also available in Symbolic view 1 To access the Function variables press Qe tap and select Function 2 Select Results and then the variable of interest The variable s name is copied to the insertion point and its value is used in evaluating the expression that contains it You can also enter the value of the variable instead of its name by tapping For example in Function Home view or the CAS you could select SignedArea from the Vars menus press 3 and SignedArea 3 get the current value eda laity of SignedArea multiplied by three Function variables can
266. e your last answer i Ir 1 77245385091 for use in another Ans 13 23 0419000618 calculation ans me appears on the entry line This is a shorthand for your last answer and it can be part of a new expression You could now enter other components of a calculation such as operators number variables etc and create a new calculation You don t need to first select Ans before it can be part of a new calculation If you press a binary operator key to begin a new calculation Ans is automatically added to the entry line as the first component of the new calculation For example to multiply the last answer by 13 you could enter S J13 _ e _ But the first two keystrokes are unnecessary All you need to enter is oe The variable Ans is always stored with full precision whereas the results in history will only have the precision determined by the current Number Format setting see page 31 In other words when you retrieve the number assigned to Ans you get the result to its full precision but when you retrieve a number from history you get exactly what was displayed Getting started 41 To reuse an expression or result from the CAS You can repeat the previous calculation simply by pressing fuer This can be useful if the previous calculation involved Ans For example suppose you want to calculate the nth root of 2 when n is 2 4 8 16 32 and so on 1 Calculate the square root
267. eates a matrix of dimension rows x columns using expression to calculate each element If expression contains the variables and J then the calculation for each element substitutes the current row number for and the current column number for J You can also create a vector by the number of elements e instead of the number of rows and columns AKEMAT expression rows columns AKEMAT expression elements Examples AKEMAT 0 3 3 returns a 3 x 3 zero matrix 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 AKEMAT V2 2 3 returns the 2 x 3 matrix V2 V2 V2 V2 V2 V2 AKEMAT I J 1 2 3 returns the 2 x 3 matrix 1 2 3 2 3 4 Note in the example above that each element is the sum of the row number and column number minus 1 MAKEMAT V2 2 returns the 2 element vector V2 V2 Identity Identity matrix Creates a square matrix of dimension size x size whose diagonal elements are 1 and off diagonal elements are zero IDENMAT size 476 Matrices Random Jordan Hilbert Isometric Given two integers n and m and a matrix name creates ann x m matrix that contains random integers in the range 99 through 99 with a uniform distribution and stores it in the matrix name randMat MatrixName n m Example RANDMAT M1 2 2 returns a 2x2 matrix with random integer elements and stores it in M1 Returns a square nxn matrix with expr on the diagonal 1 above and O everywhere else JordanBloc
268. eatures of the Numeric view are illustrated in the following sections 1 2 Press to return to Advanced Graphing Symbolic View 11381 Symbolic view and V E vi SING i mA S define V1 as E v Y SIN X Ev E vs Note that you don t Ew have to erase the Ev previous definition first Enter an open sentence Just enter the new definition and tap Display the 13 Press to display the Numeric Numeric view o a a view By default the Numeric 2 2 ras view displays rows of x aE False and y values In each 5 5 False row the 2 values are 3 s False a q Ealse followed by a column enre a e e that tells whether or not the x y pair satisfies each open sentence True or False Explore 14 With the cursor in the X column type a new value and Numeric tap W The table scrolls to the value you entered view You can also enter a value in the Y column and tap Press and to move between the columns in Numeric view You can also zoom in or out on the X variable or Y variable Note that in Numeric view zooming does not affect the size of what is displayed Instead it decreases or increases the increment between consecutive x and y values Zooming in decreases the increment zooming out increases the increment This and other options are explained in Common operations in Numeric view on page 100 Advanced Graphing app 131 Numeric Setup
269. econd data point of S1 at 1 920 Press to move to the next data point and display information about it 51 2 X11 920 If the regression line is not showing tap HG The coordinates of the tracer cursor are shown at the bottom of the screen If they are not visible tap Menu t Press Bio see the Statistics 2Var Symbolic View equation of the Vsi ct 2 Type1 Linear X regression line in Symbolic view zg Type2 Linear If the equation is too wide m Fitz m x s for the screen select it F Enter function and press EIA The example above shows that the slope of the regression line m is 425 875 and the y intercept b is 376 25 While and move the cursor along a fit or from point to point in a scatter plot use and to choose the scatter plot or fit you wish to trace For each active analysis S1 S5 the tracing order is the scatter plot first and the fit second So if both S1 and S2 are active the tracer is by default on the S1 scatter plot when you press Press to trace the S1 fit At this point press O to return to the S1 scatter plot or again to trace the 2 scatter plot Press a third time to trace the 2 fit If you Statistics 2Var app 235 press a fourth time you will return to the S1 scatter plot If you are confused as to what you are tracing just tap to see the definition of the object scatter plot or fit currently being trac
270. ect a point by tapping on it In addition to tapping a new location for a selected point you can press the arrow keys to move the point to a new location or use a finger to drag the point to a new location A point can also be selected directly by tapping on it If the bottom right of the screen shows the name of the point you have accurately tapped the point otherwise the pointer coordinates are shown indicating that the point is not selected Composite objects To move a multi point object see Translation on page 161 143 Coloring objects Filling objects Removing fill An object is colored black by default and cyan when it is selected If you want to change the color of an object l 2 Select the object whose color you want to change Press aw 3 Select Change Color The Choose Color palette appears 4 Select the color you want 5 Press Ea An object with closed contours such as a circle or polygon can be filled with color 1 2 4 Press aw y F 5 Select Change Color a fi to The Choose Color 4 B palette appears 5 Select the color you EF want 15 10 5 d Pointer 2 29 5 19 E Press B3 Press E8 Select Fill with Color The Select Object menu appears Select the object you want to fill The object is highlighted To remove the fill from an object 1 Press ap 2 Select Fill with Color The
271. ed Plot view menu items Plot setup Plotting mark Connect The menu items in Plot view are Button Purpose Displays the Zoom menu Turns trace mode on or off Shows or hides a curve that best fits the data points according to the selected regression model Enables you to specify a value on the regression line to jump to or a data point to jump to if your cursor is on a data point rather than on the regression line You might need to press or to move the cursor to the object of interest the regression line or the data points Shows or hides the menu buttons As with all the apps that provide a plotting feature he Plot Setup view Sia Setup enables you to set the range and appearance of Plot view The common settings available are discussed in Common operations in Plot Setup view on page 96 The Plot Setup view in the Statistics 2Var app has two additional settings Page 1 of the Plot Setup view has fields namedS1MARK through SSMARK These fields enable you to specify one of five symbols to use to represent the data points in each data set This will help you distinguish data sets in Plot view if you have chosen to plot more than one Page 2 of the Plot Setup view has a Connect field If you choose this option straight lines join the data points in Plot view 236 Statistics 2Var app Predicting values Predx is a function that predicts a value for X given a value for Y
272. eger using the Legendre polynomial whose degree is the first integer legendre symbol Integerl Integer2 Example legendre 4 gives 35 x 4 8 15 x 2 4 3 8 while legendre 4 2 returns 443 8 after simplification Functions and commands 397 length Igcd lin linear_interpolate linear_regression Returns the length of a list string or set of objects length List or length String or length Objectl Object2 Example length 1 2 3 gives 3 Returns the greatest common divisor of a set of integers or polynomials contained in a list a vector or just entered directly as arguments lgcd List or lgcd Vector or lgcd Integerl nteger2 orlgcd Polyl Poly2 Example lgcd 45 75 20 15 gives 5 Returns an expression with the exponentials linearized lin Expr Example lin exp x 3 exp x 2 gives exp 6 x 2 exp 4 x exp 2 x Takes a regular sample from a polygonal line defined by a matrix of two rows linear interpolate Matrix Xmin Xmax Xstep Example linear _interpolate 1 2 6 9 3 4 6 7 1 9 1 returns 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 0 3 0 4 0 4 5 5 0 5 5 6 0 6 33333333333 6 6666 6666667 7 0 Given a set of points returns a vector containing the coefficients a and b of y a x hb the linear which best fits the set of points The points may be the elements in two lists or the rows of a matrix linear_regression Matrix or linear _r
273. egression Listl List2 Example 1 0 2 0 linear_regression 0 0 1 0 returns 1 53 0 769 4 0 7 0 398 Functions and commands list2mat Iname Inexpand logarithmic_ regression logb Returns a matrix of n columns made by splitting a list into rows each containing n terms If the number of elements in the list is not divisible by n then the matrix is completed with zeros list2mat List Integer Example list2mat 1 8 4 9 1 returns o A OO Returns a list of the variables in an expression lname Expr Example lname exp x 2 sin y gives x y Returns the expanded form of a logarithmic expression lnexpand Expr Example lnexpand 1n 3 x gives 1n 3 1n x Given a set of points returns a vector containing the coefficients a and b of y a ln x b the natural logarithmic function which best fits the set of points The points may be the elements in two lists or the rows of a matrix logarithmic_regression Matrix or logarithmic _regression Listl List2 Example 1 0 1 0 2 0 4 0 logarithmic regression returns 4 0 9 0 O23 299 7 08 720 Tin Returns the logarithm of base b of a logb a b Example logb 5 2 gives 1n 5 1n 2 which is approximately 2 32192809489 Functions and commands 399 logistic_ regression Ivar magenta map mat2list matpow Returns y y C y max xmax and R where y is a logistic function the solution of
274. el at the location in the Plot view given by the fourth point The first point is the vertex of the angle angleat pointl point2 point3 point4 Example In degree mode angleat point 0 0 point 2V3 0 point 2V3 3 point 6 6 displays appoint 0 0 30 0 at point 6 6 Works the same as angleat but without the label Used in Symbolic view Displays the algebraic area of a polygon or circle The measure is displayed with a label at the given point in Plot view areaat polygon point or areaat circle point Example areaat circle x 2 y 2 1 point 4 4 displays acircle x 2 y 2 1 n at point 4 4 Works the same as areaat but without the label Used in Symbolic view Displays the distance between 2 geometrical objects The measure is displayed with a label at the given point in Plot view distanceat objectl object2 point Example distanceat 1 i 3 3 i 4 4 i returns 1 i 3 3 i 2V2 at point 4 4 181 distanceatraw perimeterat perimeteratraw slopeat slopeatraw Works the same as distanceat but without the label Used in Symbolic view Displays the perimeter of a polygon or circle The measure is displayed with a label at the given point in Plot view perimeterat polygon point or perimeterat circle point Example perimeterat circle x 2 y 2 1 point 4 4 displays pcircle x 2 y 2 1 2 n at point 4 4 Works the same
275. emicircle with center at 0 0 using the current Plot Setup window and with a radius of 60 pixels The semicircle is drawn counterclockwise from O to x BLIT_P BLIT Syntax BLIT trgtGRB dx1 dy dx2 dy2 srcGRB sx1 syl sx2 sy2 c BLIT_P trgtGRB dx dyl dx2 dy2 srcGRB sx1 syl sx2 sy2 c Copies the region of srcGRB between point sx sy and sx2 sy2 into the region of trgtGRB between points dx dy1 and dx2 dy2 Do not copy pixels from srcGRB that are color c trgtGRB can be any of the graphics variables and is optional The default is GO srcGRB can be any of the graphics variables dx2 dy2 are optional and if not specified will be calculated so that the destination area is the same size as the source area 538 Programming in HP PPL Note DIMGROB_P DIMGROB GETPIX_P GETPIX GROBH_P GROBH sx2 sy2 are optional and if not specified will be the bottom right of the srcGRB sx 1 sy are optional and if not specified will be the top left of srcGRB dx dy are optional and if not specified will be the top left of trotGRB c can be any color specified as RRGGBB If it is not specified all pixels from srcGRB will be copied Using the same variable for trgtGRB and srcGRB can be unpredictable when the source and destination overlap Syntax DIMGROB P G w h color or DIMGROB_ P G list DIMGROB G w h color or DIMGROB G list Sets the dimensi
276. en the coordinates of the third point are stored in that variable The orientation of the triangle is counterclockwise from the first point equilateral triangle pointl point2 or equilateral triangle pointl point2 var Examples equilateral triangle 0 6 draws an equilateral triangle whose first two vertices are at O O and 6 0 the third vertex is calculated to be at 3 3 V3 equilateral triangle 0 6 v draws an equilateral triangle whose first two vertices are at O O and 6 0 the third vertex is calculated to be at 3 3 V3 and these coordinates are stored in the CAS variable v In CAS view entering v returns point 3 V3 i 1 which is equal to 3 3 V3 Draws a regular hexagon defined by one of its sides that is by two consecutive vertices The remaining points are calculated automatically but are not defined symbolically The orientation of the hexagon is counterclockwise from the first point hexagon pointl point2 or hexagon pointl point2 varl var2 var3 var4 Examples hexagon 0 6 draws a regular hexagon whose first two vertices are at O O and 6 0 hexagon 0 6 a b c qd draws a regular hexagon whose first two vertices are at 0 O and 6 O and stores the other four points into the CAS variables a b c and d You do not have to define variables for all four remaining points but the coordinates are stored in order For example hexagon 0 6 a stores just the third point into
277. ent within a list The element can be a value a variable or an expression If there is more than one instance of the element the position of the first occurrence is returned A value of O is returned if there is no occurrence of the specified element POS list element Example POS 3 7 12 19 12 returns 3 Returns the number of elements in a list SIZE list Example SIZE 1 2 3 returns 3 Lists 459 ALIST Creates a new list composed of the first differences of a list that is the differences between consecutive elements in the list The new list has one less element than the original list The differences for x x2 X3 Xn 1 Xn are XQ X pp NZX s Xy Xn 1 ALIST list Example In Home view store Function 3 5 8 12 17 23 in L5 and find the first differences for the list 3 5 8 12 17 23 gt L5 3 5 8 12 17 23 3 5 8 12 17 23 TE oO Select List Select AList ALPHA EA 5 Enter ELIST Calculates the sum of all elements in a list XLIST list Example LZLIST 2 3 4 returns 9 TILIST Calculates the product of all elements in list TILIST list Example TILIST 2 3 4 returns 24 460 Lists Finding statistical values for lists To find statistical values such as the mean median maximum and minimum of a list you create a list store it in a data set and then use the Statistics 1 Var app Example In this example use the Statistics 1V
278. epts complex numbers trunc Real Integer ortrunc List Integer Example trunc 4 3 gives 4 Returns an expression with transcendentals rewritten as complex exponentials tsimplify Expr Example tsimplify exp 2 x texp x gives exp x 2 exp x Returns the type of an expression e g list string type Expr Example type abc gives DOM STRING Returns the function defined by an expression and a variable unapply Expr Var Example unapply 2 x 2 x gives x 32 x 2 Returns the valuation degree of the term of lowest degree of a polynomial With only a polynomial as argument the valuation returned is for x With a variable as second argument the valuation is performed for it valuation Poly Var Example valuation x 4 x 3 gives 3 Returns the variance of a list or the list of variances of the columns of a matrix The optional second list is a list of weights variance List1 List2 or variance Matrix Example variance 3 4 2 returns 2 3 Functions and commands 419 vpotential when XOR yellow zip Given a vector V and a vector of variables returns the vector U such that curl U V vpotential Vectorl Vector2 Example vpotential 2 x y 3 x 4 z 2 y z x y z returns o 2 x y z 4x z5 3 y Used to introduce a conditional statement Exclusive or Returns 1 if the first expression is true and the second expression is false or if the
279. er n returns a vector containing the coefficients an an1 ws Ag of y a x a 1x a x ao the nth order polynomial which best approximates the given points polynomial regression Listl List2 Integer Example polynomial regression 1 2 3 4 1 4 9 16 3 returns 0 1 0 0 Returns the zeros of the polynomial given as argument either as a symbolic expression or as a vector of coefficients POLYROOT Poly or POLYROOT Vector Example POLYROOT 1 0 1 returns 1 1 Returns a function whose gradient is the vector field defined by a vector and a vector of variables potential Vectorl Vector2 Example potential 2 x y 3 x 2 4 z 4 y x y Z returns x2 y 3 x 4 y z Functions and commands 407 power_reg ression powerpc prepend primpart product Given a set of points defined by two lists returns a vector containing the coefficients m and b of y b x m the monomial which best approximates the given points power regression Listl List2 Example power regression 1 2 3 4 1 4 9 16 returns 2 1 Given a circle and a point returns the real number d r where d is the distance between the point and the center of the circle and ris the radius of the circle powerpc Circle Point Example powerpc circle 0 1 i 3 i gives 8 Adds an element to the beginning of a list or vector prepend List Element or prepend Vector Element Example pre
280. ercase until the mode is reset With lowercase locked make next character uppercase Notes and Info 493 Text formatting Formatting options Keys Purpose Continued ALPHA With lowercase locked make all characters uppercase until the mode is reset Reset lowercase lock mode The left side of the notification area of the title bar will indicate what case will be applied to the character you next enter You can enter text in different formats in the Note Editor Choose a formatting option before you start entering text The formatting options are described in Formatting options below Formatting options are available from three touch buttons in the Note Editor and in the Info view of an app Farmall sie f e The formatting options are listed in the table below Category Options 10 22 pt Font Size Select from twenty colors Foreground Color Select from twenty colors Background Color e Left Align e Center text alignment e Right 494 Notes and Info Options Continued Category Font Style Bold Italic Underline Strikethrough Superscript Subscript gt x Cancels bullet Bullets Inserting You can insert a mathematical mathematical expression expressions in textbook format into your note as shown in the figure to the right The Note Editor uses the same 2D editor that the Home and CAS views MYNOTE The Quadtratic Formula
281. erence app 366 371 integer 337 339 Index 603 keyboard 309 312 Linear Explorer 376 Linear Solver 374 number 313 314 plot 346 347 polynomial 339 345 probability 317 322 rewrite 332 337 solve 330 332 Solve app 349 spreadsheet 210 349 363 Statistics 1Var 363 364 Statistics 2Var 365 366 Triangle Solver 374 376 G geometric objects 153 160 geometric transformations 161 164 Geometry app 69 135 193 commands 165 193 creating objects in Plot view 141 in Symbolic view 148 functions 165 193 naming objects 142 objects types of 153 160 Plot view menu buttons 146 selecting an object 143 shortcut keys 147 transforming objects 161 164 undo option 144 variables summary of 430 gestures 17 global variables 512 glossary 587 589 graph bar 220 box and whisker 220 cobweb 281 color for 85 line 220 normal probability 220 pareto 221 stairsteps 281 statistical data one variable 219 two variable 234 graphics storing and recalling 536 variables 428 graphing methods 99 Greek characters 21 H help online 46 hexagesimal format 26 highlight color 34 histogram 219 history Home 14 RPN 48 Home settings 30 428 override 87 Home view 13 horizontal zoom 89 101 HP apps See apps HP 69 hyperbolic functions 317 hypothesis tests 240 245 252 366 369 hypothesis alternative 240 i57 I O commands programming 547 549 implied multiplication 40 increasing powers 57 inequalities 125 inference confidence inte
282. ermination only valid for models 1 6 8 10 sCov Sample covariance only valid for models 1 6 pCov Population covariance only valid for models 1 6 L L parameter for model 7 a a parameter for models 7 11 b b parameter for models 7 11 c c parameter for models 8 11 d d parameter for models 8 10 11 e e parameter for model 11 py place 2 cells one for user input and the other to display the predicted y for the input px place 2 cells one for user input and the other to display the predicted x for the input Example REGRS A25 B37 2 354 Functions and commands PredY PredX Returns the predicted Y for a given x PredY mode x parameters Mode governs the regression model used 1 y sl x int 2 y sl In x int 3 y int exp sl x A y int x sl 5 y int sl x 6 y sl x int 7 y L 1 a exp b x 8 y a sin b x c d 9 y cx 2 bx a 10 y dx 3 cx 2 bx a 11 y ex 4 dx 3 cx 2 bx a Parameters is either one argument a list of the coefficients of the regression line or the n coefficients one after another Returns the predicted x for a given y PredX mode y parameters Mode governs the regression model used 1 y sl x int 2 y sl In x int 3 y int exp sl x A y int x sl 5 y int sl x 6 y sl x int 7 y L 1 a exp b x 8 y a sin b x c d 9 y cx 2 bx a 10 y dx 3 cx 2 bx a 11 y ex 4 dx 3 cx 2 bx a Parameters is either one argument a list of
283. es the next time you select that same result in Home view and open the Edit Integer dialog the value shown in the Was field will be the value you saved not the value of the result Base functions Numerous functions related to integer arithmetic can be invoked from Home view and within programs BITAND BITNOT e BITOR e BITSL e BITSR e BITXOR e B gt R e GETBASE e GETBITS e R B e SETBASE e SETBITS These are described in Integer beginning on page 547 586 Basic integer arithmetic Appendix A Glossary app A small application designed for the study of one or more related topics or to solve problems of a particular type The built in apps are Function Advanced Graphing Geometry Spreadsheet Statistics 1 Var Statistics 2Var Inference DataStreamer Solve Linear Solver Triangle Solver Finance Parametric Polar Sequence Linear Explorer Quadratic Explorer and Trig Explorer An app can be filled with the data and solutions for a specific problem It is reusable like a program but easier to use and it records all your settings and definitions button An option or menu shown at the bottom of the screen and activated by touch Compare with key CAS Computer Algebra System Use the CAS to perform exact or symbolic calculations Compare to calculations done in Home view which often yield numerical approximations You can share results and variables between the CAS and Home view and vice
284. es 109 429 442 558 579 See also variables App menu 307 app views 73 Numeric 77 Numeric Setup 78 Plot 75 Plot Setup 76 Symbolic Setup 74 Symbolic view 73 Application Library 7 1 sorting 7 1 apps See also the separate entry for each individual app Advanced Graphing 69 125 134 DataStreamer 69 71 Finance 69 287 294 Function 69 111 124 Geometry 69 135 193 Inference 69 239 257 Linear Explorer 69 130 299 301 Linear Solver 70 130 267 269 Parametric 70 271 275 Polar 70 277 280 Quadratic Explorer 70 302 303 Sequence 70 281 286 Solve 70 259 266 Spreadsheet 70 195 210 Statistics 1Var 70 211 222 Statistics 2Var 70 223 238 Triangle Solver 70 295 298 Trig Explorer 70 304 306 arithmetic functions 314 316 arithmetic integer 581 autoscale 90 93 B backspace 21 bad argument 592 bar plot 220 base 32 default 582 functions 586 marker 581 battery 16 charging 11 indicator 16 warning 12 binary arithmetic See integer arithmetic 581 block commands 528 Boolean operators 21 box zoom 90 box and whisker plot 220 branch commands 528 556 brightness 13 Build Your Own See custom tables Index 601 buttons command 20 menu 20 See also menu buttons C cables 45 calculations CAS 54 324 347 confidence intervals 253 financial 287 294 geometric 150 in Home view 36 309 323 statistical 218 233 with units 444 calculus functions 326 330 CAS 53 59 calculations using 54 324 347 functions algebra 324 325 ca
285. es 512 logarithmic fit 231 functions 310 loop commands 529 530 532 lowercase characters 23 493 M math constants 449 keys 24 operations 36 enclosing arguments 38 in scientific notation 27 negative numbers in 39 See also calculations template 20 24 Math menu 313 323 matrices 463 487 adding rows 465 arithmetic with 469 472 column norm 478 commands 544 545 condition number 479 create identity 486 creating 464 466 deleting 464 deleting columns 465 deleting rows 465 determinant 475 dot product 485 functions 474 486 inverting 472 linear equations solving of 472 Index 605 matrix calculations 463 negating elements 472 raised to a power 471 reduced row echelon 486 singular value decomposition 485 storing 464 468 469 swap row 545 transposing 486 variables 428 463 maximum real number 36 measurements See units 443 menu App 307 CAS 324 347 Catlg 378 421 context sensitive 20 Math 313 323 shortcuts 28 User 307 menu buttons 20 in Linear Solver app 269 in Numeric view 104 in Plot view general 96 Geometry app 146 in Spreadsheet app 207 in Statistics 1Var app 213 216 in Statistics 2Var app 229 236 in Symbolic view 86 menus 28 closing 29 display format of 33 308 searching through 28 Toolbox 29 messages Solve app 265 minutes symbol 21 mixed numbers 26 MKSA 446 mode exact 56 symbolic 56 user 516 modes See system wide settings 30 N names in Geometry app 142 143 natural logarithm 310 n
286. es are available Fit type Meaning Linear Default Fits the data to a straight line y mx b Uses a least squares fit Logarithmic Fits the data to a logarithmic curve y m lnx b Exponential Fits the data to the natural exponential curve y b e Power Fits the data to a power curve y bx Exponent Fits the data to an exponential curve y b m Inverse Fits the data to an inverse variation y ate Statistics 2Var app 231 To define your own fit Fit type Meaning Continued Logistic Fits the data to a logistic curve L y 1 ae where L is the saturation value for growth You can store a positive real value in L or if L 0 let L be computed automatically Quadratic Fits the data to a quadratic curve y ax bxtc Needs at least three points Cubic Fits the data to a cubic polynomial y ax b x cext d Quartic Fits to a quartic polynomial 4 2 y ax bx cx dxt e Trigonometric Fits the data to a trigonometric curve y a sin bx c d Needs at least three points User Defined Define your own fit see below N On Ol OR 20 Press to display the Symbolic view For the analysis you are interested in S1 through S5 select the Type field Tap the field again to see a menu of fit types Select User Defined from the menu Select the corresponding Fit field Enter an expression and pres
287. esents Auto Fill background color that fills the selected cells the gray dotted option represents Auto Align horizontal alignment Auto Left Center Right Align vertical alignment Auto Top Center Bottom Column lt gt displays an input form for you to specify the required width of the selected columns only available if you have selected the entire spreadsheet or one or more entire columns You can also change the width of a selected column with an open or closed horizontal pinch gesture Row displays an input form for you to specify the required height of the selected rows only available if you have selected the entire spreadsheet or one or more entire rows You can also change the height of a selected row with an open or closed vertical pinch gesture show show quote marks around strings in the body of the spreadsheet Auto Yes No Textbook display formulas in textbook format Auto Yes No Caching turn this option on to speed up calculations in spreadsheets with many formulas only available if you have selected the entire spreadsheet 208 Spreadsheet Format Parameters Each format attribute is represented by a parameter that can be referenced in a formula For example D1 1 returns the formula in cell D1 or nothing if D1 has no formula The attributes that can be retrieved in a formulas by referencing its associated parameter are listed below Parameter Attribute
288. esults interval in Numeric be 2 view Crit T 2 01504837333 a Lower 82 4822875184 numerically ene Upper 16 Return to Numeric view OK 190 coms coe annann SiZ Ea omc COK ns Display 17 Display the confidence 201504837333 scrit T 201504837333 results interval in Plot view graphically The 90 confidence interval is 82 48 83 28 A s st srs Hypothesis tests You use hypothesis tests to test the validity of hypotheses about the statistical parameters of one or two populations The tests are based on statistics of samples of the populations Inference app 245 The HP Prime hypothesis tests use the Normal Z distribution or the Student s tdistribution to calculate probabilities If you wish to use other distributions please use the Home view and the distributions found within the Probability category of the Math menu One Sample Z Test Menu name ZTest 1 u On the basis of statistics from a single sample this test measures the strength of the evidence for a selected hypothesis against the null hypothesis The null hypothesis is that the population mean equals a specified value Ho H Ho You select one of the following alternative hypotheses against which to test the null hypothesis Ho u lt po Ho u gt po Ho u uo Inputs The inputs are Field name Definition x Sample mean n Sample size Lg Hypothetical population mean Population standard deviation Significance
289. eting apps 72 characters 21 lists 455 matrices 464 notes 490 programs 500 statistical data 217 230 determinant 475 dilation 162 display 13 annunciators 14 clearing 13 engineering 31 fixed 31 fraction 31 menu buttons 14 parts of 14 scientific 31 standard 31 DMS format 21 document conventions 9 drag 17 drawing commands 536 544 E editing lists 451 matrices 464 notes 489 programs 498 engineering number format 31 entry format See entry methods entry line 14 entry methods 32 36 47 epsilon 58 evaluation Eval 84 evaluation in Numeric view 102 exam mode 34 61 67 activating 64 canceling 66 configuring 63 expression detining 82 112 extremum 122 132 F Finance app 69 287 294 amortization 293 294 functions 372 373 TVM calculations 287 variables Numeric 571 573 summary of 440 fit types statistical 231 232 fixed number format 31 fixed step dot graphing 99 fixed step segment graphing 99 flick 17 font size general 33 format hexagesimal 26 notes 494 number 31 56 parameters in spreadsheets 209 Spreadsheet cells 208 fractions 26 frequency data 213 full precision display 31 Function app 69 111 124 functions 118 122 348 variables 122 results 579 summary of 429 functions algebra 324 325 apps 347 378 arithmetic 314 316 base 586 calculus 326 330 common 377 creating your own 421 defining 37 82 112 definition of 111 Finance app 372 373 Function app 348 geometric 165 193 hyperbolic 317 Inf
290. etween the square of the distance from the point to the circle s center and the square of the circle s radius powerpc circle point Example powerpc circle point 0 0 point 1 1 point 0 0 point 3 1 returns 8 Returns the line whose points all have the same powerpc values for the two given circles radical_axis circlel circle2 Example radical axis circle x 2 y 8 circle x 2 y 8 returns line x 0 reciprocation Given a circle returns the poles points of given polar lines or the polar lines of given poles points reciprocation circle point or reciprocation circle line or reciprocation circle list Example reciprocation circle x 2 y 2 1 point 1 3 0 line x 2 returns line x 3 point 1 2 0 192 Geometry single_inter vector vertices vertices_abca Geometry Returns the intersection of curvel and curve2 that is closest to point single inter curvel curve2 point Example single inter line y x circle x 2 y 2 1 point 1 1 returns point 1 i V2 2 Creates a vector from point to point2 With one point as argument the origin is used as the tail of the vector vector pointl point2 or vector point Example vector point 1 1 point 3 0 creates a vector from 1 1 to 3 0 Returns a list of the vertices of a polygon vertices polygon Returns the closed list of the vertices of a polygon vertices _abca
291. expressions you Display the Numeric Function Num Setup eal Zoom options with numerous examples are explained in more detail in Zoom on page 88 defined in Symbolic view For each expression selected in Symbolic view Numeric view displays the value that results when the expression is evaluated for various x values Setup view Nom strep Num Step 1 Em EF Setup You can set the starting value and step value that is the increment for Enter table start value the xcolumn as well as the zoom factor for zooming in or out on a row of the table Note that in Numeric view zooming does not affect the size of what is displayed Instead it changes the Num Step setting that is the increment between consecutive x values Zooming in decreases the increment zooming out increases the increment This is further explained in Zoom on page 100 Num Zoom 4 Num Type Automatic Function app 115 13 14 You can also choose whether the table of data in Numeric view is automatically populated or whether it is populated by you typing in the particular x values you are interested in These options Automatic or BuildYourOwn are available from the Num Type list They are explained in detail in Custom tables on page 103 Press defaults Make the Numeric Funetion Num Setup view X column Numstat O settings Num Num Step 0 1 Start and Num Step match the
292. f exp x y x 3 y 2 z is the same as diff exp x y x x x y y Z diff Expr var or diff Expr varlS kl var2Sk2 Example diff x 3 x gives 3 x 2 1 Returns the indefinite integral of an expression With one expression as argument returns the indefinite integral with respect to x With the optional second third and fourth arguments you can specify the variable of integration and the bounds of the integrate int Expr Var x Real a Real b Example int 1 x gives 1n abs x Returns the limit of an expression when the variable approaches a limit point a or infinity With the optional fourth argument you can specify whether it is the limit from below above or bidirectional 1 for limit from below 1 for limit from above and 0 for bidirectional limit If the fourth argument is not provided the limit returned is bidirectional limit Expr Var Val Dir 1 0 1 Example limit n tan x tan n x sin n x n sin x x 0 gives 2 326 Functions and commands Series Summation Differential Curl Divergence Returns the series expansion of an expression in the vicinity of a given equality variable With the optional third and fourth arguments you can specify the order and direction of the series expansion If no order is specified the series returned is fifth order If no direction is specified the series is bidirectional series Expr Equal var limit p
293. f i 3 B 17 58578649 V2 14 26794416 V3 23 23 33 76393436 V5 46 55051449 V6 61 35424464 V7 178 17157481 2 V2 same as the formula in cell B Row vV Row 1 The only difference is that MASS was showing or selected while the ojaan E NA 97 97 r Row V Row 1 formula was being entered in qa TR EEENEEERETINET RSS B thereby forcing the calculation to be performed by the CAS Note that CAS appears in red on the entry line if the cell selected contains a formula that is being calculated by the CAS 206 Spreadsheet Buttons and keys Button or key Purpose Activates the entry line for you to edit the object in the selected cell Only visible if the selected cell has content Converts the text you have entered on the entry line to a name Only visible when the entry line is active Eg A toggle button that is only visible when the entry line is active Both options force the expression to be handled by the CAS but only evaluates it Tap to enter the symbol A shortcut when entering absolute references Only visible when the entry line is active Displays formatting options for the selected cell block column row or the entire spreadsheet See Formatting options on page 208 Displays an input form for you to specify the cell you want to jump to Sets the calculator to select mode so that you can easily select a bloc
294. f just the numbers on stack levels 1 2 and 3 You choose the MIN function from the MATH menu and complete the entry as MIN 3 When you press _ _ the minimum of just the last three items on the stack is displayed 50 Reverse Polish Notation RPN Manipulating the stack PICK ROLL Swap Stack DROPN A number of stack manipulation options are available Most appear as menu items across the bottom the screen To see these items you must first select an item in history Function Copies the selected item to stack level 1 The item below the one that is copied is then highlighted Thus if you tapped Tei four times four consecutive items will be moved to the bottom four stack levels levels 1 4 There are two roll commads Tap EIMA to move the selected item to stack level 1 This is similar to PICK but PICK duplicates the item with the duplicate being placed on stack level However ROLL doesn t duplicate an item It simply moves it e Tap to move the item on stack level 1 to the currently highlighted level You can swap the position of the objects on stack level 1 with those on stack level 2 Just press 2 The level of other objects remains unchanged Note that the entry line must not be active at the time otherwise a comma will be entered Tapping 3 displays further stackmanipulation tools Deletes all items in the stack from the highlighted item down to and including
295. f the seconds Language Contains an integer indicating the system language From Home Settings choose a language for the Language field In a program store one of the following constant numbers into the variable Language 1 gt Language English 2 gt Language Chinese 3 gt Language French 4 gt Language German 5 gt Language Spanish 6 gt Language Dutch 7 gt Language Portuguese 576 Programming in HP PPL Entry Integer Base Bits Signed Contains an integer that indicates the entry mode In Home Settings select an option for Entry In a program enter 0 gt Entry for Textbook 1 gt Entry for Algebraic 2 Entry for RPN Returns or sets the integer base In Home Settings select an option for the first field next to Integers In a program enter 0 gt Base for Binary 1 gt Base for Octal 2 Base for Decimal 3 gt Base for Hexadecimal Returns or sets the number of bits for representing integers In Home Settings enter a value for the second field next to Integers In a program enter nb Bits where n is the number of bits Returns the status of or sets a flag indicating that the integer wordsize is signed or not In Home Settings check or uncheck the field to the right of Integers In a program enter 0 gt Signed for unsigned 1 gt Signed tor signed Programming in HP PPL 577 Symbolic The following variables are found in the
296. f two lists For division of a matrix by a square matrix returns the left multiplication by the inverse of the square matrix Stores the evaluated expression in the variable Note that cannot be used with the graphics variables GO G9 See the command BLIT var expression Example A 3 stores the value 3 in the variable A Strict less than inequality test Returns 1 if the left side of the inequality is less than the right side and O otherwise Note that more than two objects can be compared Thus 6 lt 8 lt 11 returns 1 because it is true whereas 6 lt 8 lt 3 returns O as it is false Less than or equal inequality test Returns 1 if the left side of the inequality is less than the right side or if the two sides are equal and O otherwise Note that more than two objects can be compared See comment above regarding lt 380 Functions and commands lt gt a2q abcuv additionally Inequality test Returns 1 if the inequality is true and O if the inequality is false Equality symbol Connects two members of an equation Equality test Returns 1 if the left side and right side are equal and 0 otherwise Strict greater than inequality test Returns 1 if the left side of the inequality is greater than the right side and O otherwise Note that more than two objects can be compared See comment above regarding lt Greater than or equal inequality test Returns 1 if the left side of the inequali
297. f you choose one of the hypothesis tests you can choose an alternative hypothesis to test against the null hypothesis For each test there are three possible choices for an alternative hypothesis based on a quantitative comparison of two quantities The null hypothesis is always that the two quantities are equal Thus the alternative hypotheses cover the various cases for the two quantities being unequal lt gt and In this section we will conduct a ZTest on one mean on the example data to illustrate how the app works 240 Inference app Select the inference method Enter data 2 5 Hypothesis Test is the default inference method If it is not selected tap on the Method field and select it Choose the type of test In this case select Z Test 1 u from the Type menu Select an alternative hypothesis In this case select u lt po from the Alt Hypoth menu Go to Numeric view to see the sample data Num LSetup Method v Hypothesis test Type Confidence interval Alt Hypoth p lt pz Choose an inferential method Method Hypothesis test Type Z Test 1 p Alt Hypoth Choose a distribution statistic Method Hypothesis test h Type Z Test 1 p Choose the alternative hypothesis e Numeric View 0 461368 n 50 Ho 0 5 o 0 2887 a 0 05 Sample mean Fest _Jimport calc The table below describes the fields
298. fidence interval calculations that the HP Prime can perform are based on the Normal Zdistribution or Student s t distribution One Sample Z Interval Menu name Zint 1 p This option uses the Normal Zdistribution to calculate a confidence interval for p the true mean of a population when the true population standard deviation is known Inputs The inputs are Field Definition name x Sample mean n Sample size Population standard deviation C Confidence level Results The results are Result Description C Confidence level Critical Z Critical values for Z Lower Lower bound for u Upper Upper bound for u Two Sample Z Interval Menu name Zint u4 u2 This option uses the Normal Z distribution to calculate a confidence interval for the difference between the means of two populations u u gt when the population standard deviations 6 and 69 are known Inference app 253 Inputs The inputs are Field Definition name x Sample 1 mean 3 Sample 2 mean ny Sample 1 size n2 Sample 2 size o Population 1 standard deviation o2 Population 2 standard deviation Contidence level Results The results are Result Description C Confidence level Critical Z Critical values for Z Lower Lower bound for A u Upper Upper bound for A u One Proportion Z Interval Menu name Z nt 12 This option uses the Normal Zdistribution to calculate a confidence interval for the proportion of successes in a po
299. fining functions These are labelled x1 T through x9 T and X0 T and Y1 T through Y9 T and Y0 T Each X function is paired with a Y function 2 Highlight which pair of functions you want to use either by tapping on or scrolling to one of the pair If you are entering a new function just start typing If you are editing an existing function tap and make your changes When you have finished defining or changing the function press _ _ 3 Define the two expressions 8 Parametric Symbolic View V X1 T 8 SIN T 8 E Y1 1 8 CcOs T E v20 LM Notice how the E vm key enters xa 1 3 Enter function whatever variable Show is relevant to the current app In the Function app enters an X In the Parametric app it enters a T In the Polar app discussed in chapter16 it enters 0 4 Decide if you want to give one or more function a custom color when it is plotted evaluate a dependent function deselect a definition that you don t want to explore incorporate variables math commands and CAS commands in a definition For the sake of simplicity we can ignore these operations in this example However they can be useful and are described in detail in Common operations in Symbolic view on page 81 272 Parametric app Set the angle measure Set up the plot Plot the functions Set the angle measure to degrees 5 6 Set up the plot by
300. first expression is false and the second expression is true Returns O otherwise Exprl XOR Expr2 Example 0 XOR 1 returns 1 Used in the Symbolic view of the Geometry app In the definition of a geometric object including the statement display yellow specifies that the object defined will be drawn in yellow Applies a bivariate function to the elements of two lists or vectors and returns the results in a vector Without the default value the length of the vector is the minimum of the lengths of the two lists with the default value the shorter list is padded with the default value zip function Listl List2 Default or zip function Vectorl Vector2 Default Example zip a b c d 1 2 3 4 returns a 1 b 2 c 3 d 4 Inserts a template for substituting a value for a variable in an expression Expr Varl Vall Var2 Val2 Returns the square of an expression Expr Inserts pi Inserts a template for a partial derivative expression 420 Functions and commands lA IV Inserts a template for a summation expression Inserts a minus sign Inserts a square root sign Inserts a template for an antiderivative expression Inequality test Returns 1 if the left and right sides are not equal and 0 if they are equal Less than or equal inequality test Returns 1 if the left side of the inequality is less than the right side or if the two sides are equal and O otherwise Greate
301. functions and their syntax are described in Geometry functions and commands on page 165 8 Press to go back to Plot view Now manipulate the circle is some way that changes its area and radius For example select the center point A and use the cursor keys to move it to a new location Remember to press when you have finished 9 Press to go back to Numeric view Notice that the area and radius calculations have been automatically updated If an entry in Numeric view is too long for the screen you can press gt to scroll the rest of the entry into view Press to scroll back to the original view When you are creating a Geometry Numeric View new calculation in Numeric point 5 7 2 9 gt GA 2point 0 2 1 7 gt GB view the menu item EER appears Tapping 4point 5 3 5 5 gt GD 1All gt Stangent GC GD gt GE gives you a list of all the Points sJepoint 6 9 6 3 gt GG SLines gt point 6 5 2 7 gt GH objects in your Geometry ashe E E workspace These are also fpcures P vertices GI I2I gt G 151 Getting object grouped according to their type with each group given its own menu If you are building a calculation you can select an object from one of these variables menus The name of the selected object is placed at the insertion point on the entry line As well as employing functions to make calculations in properties Numer
302. fying each element according to an expression that contains the ampersand character amp Examples EXECON amp 1 1 2 3 returns 2 3 4 Where the amp is followed directly by a number the position in the list is indicated For example EXECON amp 2 amp 1 1 4 3 5 returns 3 1 2 In the example above amp 2 indicates the second element and amp the first element in each pair of elements The minus operator between them subtracts the first from the second in each pair until there are no more pairs In this case with just a single list the numbers appended to amp can only be from 1 to 9 inclusive EXECON can also operate on more than one list For example EXECON amp 1 amp 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 returns 57779 In the example above amp 1 indicates an element in the first list and amp 2 indicates the corresponding element in the 554 Programming in HP PPL HMS HMS ITERATE TICKS TIME second list The plus operator between them adds the two elements until there are no more pairs With two lists the numbers appended to amp can have two digits in this case the first digit refers to the list number in order from left to right and the second digit can still only be from 1 to 9 inclusive EXECON can also begin operating on a specified element in a specified list For example EXECON amp 23 amp 1 1 5 16 4 5 6 7 returns 7 12 In the example above amp
303. g Purpose Recursive Evaluation Specify the maximum number of embedded variables allowed in an interactive evaluation See also Recursive Replacement below Computer algebra system CAS 57 Setting Purpose Cont Recursive Replacement Recursive Function Epsilon Probability Newton Specify the maximum number of embedded variables allowed in a single evaluation in a program See also Recursive Evalua tion above Specify the maximum number of embedded function calls allowed Any number smaller than the value specified for epsilon will be shown as zero Specify the maximum probability of an answer being wrong for non deterministic algorithms Set this to zero for deterministic algo rithms Specify the maximum number of iterations when using the Newto nian method to find the roots of a quadratic Setting the form of menu items One setting that affects the CAS is made outside the CAS Settings screen This setting determines whether the commands on the CAS menu are presented descriptively or by their command name Here are some examples of identical functions that are presented differently depending on what presentation mode you select Descriptive name Command name Factor List Complex Zeros Groebner Basis Factor by Degree Find Roots ifactors cZeros gbasis factor_xn proot The default menu presentation mode is to provide the descript
304. g in HP PPL 543 Matrix ADDCOL ADDROW DELCOL DELROW 4 EXTOUT P K 35 0 2 FFFFFF 100 333399 EXTOUT P A 90 30 2 000000 100 99CC33 sign gt sign i Pt nrreox aiTS92O776 K 1 gt K g UNTIL 0 END END The program executes until the user presses to terminate The matrix commands described in this section are in addition to the matrix functions described in Matrix functions and commands on page 474 Some matrix commands take as their argument the matrix variable name on which the command is applied Valid names are the global variables MO M9 or a local variable that contains a matrix Syntax ADDCOL matrixname vector column_number Inserts the values in vector into a new column inserted before column_number in the specified matrix The number of values in the vector must be the same as the number of rows in the matrix Syntax ADDROW matrixname vector row_number Inserts the values in vector into a new row inserted before row_number in the specified matrix The number of values in the vector must be the same as the number of columns in the matrix Syntax DELCOL name column_number Deletes column column_number from matrix name Syntax DELROW name row_number Deletes row row_number from matrix name 544 Programming in HP PPL EDITMAT REDIM REPLACE SCALE SCALEADD SUB SWAPCOL SWAPROW
305. g in HP PPL L2 roll 1 gt L2 roll END END By omitting the EXPORT command when a function is declared its visibility can be restricted to the program within which it is defined For example you could define the ROLLDTE function inside the ROLLMANY program like this ROLLDIE EXPORT ROLLMANY n Sides BEGIN LOCAL k roll initialize list of frequencies MAKELIST 0 X 1 2 sides 1 gt L2 FOR k FROM 1 TO n DO T ROLLDIE sides ROLLDIE sides gt roll L2 roll 1 gt L2 roll END END ROLLDIE n BEGIN RETURN 1 RANDINT n 1 END In the second version of the ROLLMANY program there is no ROLLDIE function exported from another program Instead ROLLDIE is visible only to ROLLMANY The RO DIE function must be declared before it is called The first line of the program above contains the declaration of the ROLLDIE function The definition of the RO DIE function is located at the end of the program Finally the list of results could be returned as the result of calling ROLLMANY instead of being stored directly in the global list variable L2 This way if the user wanted to store the results elsewhere it could be done easily ROLLDIE EXPORT ROLLMANY n sides BEGIN LOCAL k roll results initialize list of frequencies MAKELIST 0 X 1 2 sides 1 results zJ Programming in HP
306. g objects in Home view Textbook An expression is entered in much the same way was if you were writing it on paper with some arguments above or below others In other words your entry could be two dimensional as in the following example LN 5 LLE e Algebraic An expression is entered on a single line Your entry is always one dimensional The same calculation as above would appear like this is algebraic entry mode LN 5 n e RPN Reverse Polish Notation The arguments of the expression are entered first followed by the operator The entry of an operator automatically evaluates what has already been entered Thus you will need to enter a two operator expression as in the example above in two steps one for each operator Step 1 5 the natural logarithm of 5 is calculated and displayed in history Step 2 m is entered as a divisor and applied to the previous result You choose your preferred entry method from page 1 of the Home Settings screen S EBB See System wide settings starting on page 30 for instructions on how to choose settings RPN is available in Home view but not in CAS view Reverse Polish Notation RPN 47 The same entry line editing tools are available in RPN mode as in algebraic and textbook mode Press to delete the character to the left of the cursor e Press to delete the character to the right of the cursor e Press to clear the
307. global Edit Delete vect_ send __ ___ Once you select a matrix name you can create edit and delete matrices in the Matrix Editor You can also send a matrix to another HP Prime To open the Matrix Catalog press SA 4 Matrix In the Matrix Catalog the size of a matrix is shown beside the matrix name An empty matrix is shown as 1 1 The number of elements in it is shown beside a vector You can also create and store matrices named or unnamed in Home view For example the command POLYROOT 1 0 1 0 gt M1 stores the roots of the complex vector of length 3 into the variable M1 M1 will thus contain the three roots of 3 x x 0 0 1 and 1 The buttons and keys available in the Matrix Catalog are Button or Key Purpose Opens the highlighted matrix for editing or Deletes the content sof the selected matrix Changes the selected matrix into a one dimensional vector Transmits the highlighted matrix to another HP Prime E Clear Clears the contents of the reserved matrix variables MO M9 and deletes any user named matrices 464 Matrices Working with matrices To open the Matrix Editor Matrix Editor Buttons and keys To create or edit a matrix go to the Matrix Catalog and tap on a matrix You could also use the cursor keys to highlight the matrix and then press MET The Matrix Editor opens The buttons and keys available in the Matrix Editor are
308. gned to it elsewhere such as in Home view If F happened to be 5 column D2 is populated with 4 4 20 44 76 You can sort up to three columns of data at a time based on a selected independent column l In Numeric view place the highlight in the column you want to sort and tap ERB Specify the sort order Ascending or Descending Specify the independent and dependent data columns Sorting is by the independent column For instance if ages are in C1 and incomes in C2 and Statistics 1Var app 217 you want to sort by income then you make c2 the independent column and C1 the dependent column 4 Specify any frequency data column 5 Top S The independent column is sorted as specified and any other columns are sorted to match the independent column To sort just one column choose None for the Dependent and Frequency columns Computed statistics Tapping displays the following results for each dataset selected in Symbolic view Statistic Definition n Number of data points Min Minimum value Q1 First quartile median of values to left of median Med Median value Q3 Third quartile median of values to right of median Max Maximum value rX Sum of data values with their frequencies rx Sum of the squares of the data values x Mean sX Sample standard deviation oX Population standard deviation serrX Standard error When the data set contains an odd number of values the median value is no
309. gt X Intercepts Pol gt Y Intercepts Pol gt Horizontal Extrema Pol gt Vertical Extrema Pol gt Inflections Selection Turns tracing off so that you can move the cursor freely in Plot view Constrains the tracer to move within a region where the current relation is true You can move in any direction within the region Use this option for inequalities for example Constrains the tracer to move along an edge of the current relation if one can be found Use this option for functions as well as for inequalities etc Jumps from one x intercept to another on the current graph Jumps from one y intercept to another on the current graph Jumps between the horizontal extrema on the current graph Jumps between the vertical extrema on the current graph Jumps from one inflection point to another on the current graph Opens a menu so you can select which relation to trace This option is needed because and no longer jump from relation to relation for tracing All four cursor keys are needed for moving the tracer in the Advanced Graphing app 130 Advanced Graphing app Numeric The Numeric view of most HP apps is designed to explore 2 view variable relations using numerical tables Because the Advanced Graphing app expands this design to relations that are not necessarily functions the Numeric view of this app becomes significantly different though its purpose is still the same The unique f
310. guage English v Measure field is Decimal Mark Dot r highlighted Choose I Tap on Number Format either the field label or the field This selects the field You could also have pressed to select it Tap on Number Home Settings Format again A Angle Measure Radians v Number Format v Standard menu of number entry Fixed Scientific format options Integers Me Engineering Complex a b i v appears PP Language English Tap on Scientific Decimal aca Dot s Choose format for numbers The option is chosen EDEEDE 7G GEE and the menu closes You can also choose an item by pressing the cursor keys and pressing when the option you want is highlighted Notice that a number Home Settings appears to the right Angle Measure Radians 0 Number Format Scientific 1 of the Number k Entry Textbook Format field This is Integers Hex 32 i the number of Complex a b i s 5 d r lol Language English 6 ecima p aces Decimal Mark Dot currently set To Choose decimal places to display a PD a aa change the number to 2 tap on it twice and then tap on 2 in the menu that appears Press io return to Home view Getting started 35 Mathematical calculations Where to start The most commonly used math operations are available from the keyboard see Math keys on page 24 Access to the rest of the math functions is via various menus see Menus on p
311. hanging the function press ne Polar app 277 Set angle measure Set up the plot 3 Define the expression 5rcos 0 2 cos 8 2 Polar Symbolic View V ERIO senecogs cose Boii E R30 R48 E R5 0 E R6 6 amn Enter function Notice how the key enters whatever variable is relevant to the current app In this app the relevant variable is 8 4 If you wish choose a color for the plot other than its default You do this by selecting the colored square to the left of the function set tapping MEEA and selecting a color from the color picker For more information about adding definitions modifying definitions and evaluating dependent definitions in Symbolic view see Common operations in Symbolic view on page 81 Set the angle measure to radians 5 Ea Settings Angle Measure System Number Format vRadians Degrees y m 6 Tap the Angle Measure field and Complex select Radians For more information on the Symbolic Setup view see Common operations in Symbolic Setup view on page 87 Choose Angle Measure 7 Open the Plot Setup view Setup 278 Polar app Plot the expression Explore the graph 8 Set up the plot by Polar Plot Setup 12 5663706144 specifying Rng 0 6 Step 0 1308996939 appropriate 4 X Rng 15 9 15 9 graphing options In Y Rng 10 9 10 9 this example set the xtick 1 upper
312. he independent variable that is either X T 0 or N depend ing on the app that is currently active 20 Getting started Keys Purpose Continued ena ma en BA clean O00000 Relations palette Displays a palette of comparison operators and Bool ean operators Special symbols palette Displays a palette of common math and Greek characters Automatically inserts the degree minute or second symbol accord ing to the context Backspace Deletes the character to the left of the cursor It will also return the highlighted field to its default value if it has one Delete Deletes the character to the right of the cursor Clears all data on the screen including the history On a set tings screen for example Plot Setup returns all settings to their default values Cursor keys Moves the cursor around the display Press to move to the end of a menu or screen or to move to the start These keys represent the directions of the rocker wheel Getting started 21 Shift keys Keys Purpose Continued Displays all the available characters To enter a character use the cursor keys to highlight it and then tap QB To select multiple characters select one tap ENB and continue likewise before pressing QM There are many pages of characters You can jump to a particular Unicode block by tapping and selecting the block You can also flick from page
313. he other values Moreover at least one value you specify must be a length For example you could specify the lengths of two sides and one of the angles or you could specify two angles and one length or all three lengths In each case the app will calculate the remaining values The HP Prime will alert you if no solution can be found or if you have provided insufficient data If you are determining the lengths and angles of a right angled triangle a simpler input form is available by tapping SE Getting started with the Triangle Solver app The following example calculates the unknown length of the side of a triangle whose two known sides of lengths 4 and 6 meet at an angle of 30 degrees Open the Triangle Solver app 1 Open the Triangle Solver app Select Triangle Solver The app opens in Numeric view Triangle Solver Enter 3 out of 6 values b B c a b Enter length of side a F ecit __ Degree Rect _ solve Triangle Solver app 295 Set angle measure Note Specify the known values 2 If there is unwanted data from a previous calculation you can clear it all by pressing Clear Make sure that your angle measure mode is appropriate By default the app starts in degree mode If the angle information you have is in radians and your current angle measure mode is degrees change the mode to degrees before running the solver Tap or depending on the mode you want
314. he plot of a function given an expression in the independent variable x Note the use of lowercase x plotfunc Expr Example Example plotfunc 3 sin x draws the graph of y 3 sin x circle Draws a circle given the endpoints of the diameter or a center and radius or an equation in x and y circle point1 point2 or circle point1 point 2 point1 or circle equation Examples circle GA GB draws the circle with diameter AB circle GA GB GA draws the circle with center at point A and radius AB circle x 2 y 2 1 draws the unit circle This command can also be used to draw an arc circle GA GB 0 m 2 draws a quarter circle with diameter AB circumcircle Draws the circumcircle of a triangle that is the circle circumscribed about a triangle circumcircle pointl point2 point3 Example circumcircle GA GB GC draws the circle circumscribed about AABC conic Plots the graph of a conic section defined by an expression in x and y conic expr Example conic x 2 y 2 81 draws a circle with center at 0 0 and radius of 9 176 Geometry ellipse excircle hyperbola Geometry Draws an ellipse given the foci and either a point on the ellipse or a scalar that is one half the constant sum of the distances from a point on the ellipse to each of the foci ellipse pointl point2 point3 or ellipse pointl point2 realk Examples ellipse GA GB GC draws the ellipse whose foci are points A and B and which passes thr
315. he unknown variable that makes the expression have a value of zero For brevity the term equation in this chapter will cover both equations and expressions Solve works only with real numbers Getting started with the Solve app The Solve app uses the customary app views Symbolic Plot and Numeric described in chapter 5 though the Numeric view is significantly different from the other apps as it is dedicated to numerical solving rather than to displaying a table of values For a description of the menu buttons common to the other apps that are also available in this app see Symbolic view Summary of menu buttons on page 86 Plot view Summary of menu buttons on page 96 Solve app 259 One equation Suppose you want to find the acceleration needed to increase the speed of a car from 16 67 m s 60 kph to 27 78 m s 100 kph over a distance of 100 m The equation to solve is V U 2AD where V final speed U initial speed A acceleration needed and D distance Open the 1 Open the Solve app WE1 Solve app Select Solve MEQ HES The Solve app starts in a PEF MEG Symbolic view where you aE specify the equation to a solve Enter function EDIT CHK Note In addition to the built in variables you can use one or more variables you created yourself either in Home view or in the CAS For example if you ve created a variable called ME you could include i
316. he value of nz In a program type n gt n Sets the assumed proportion of successes for the One proportion Ztest From the Numeric view set the value of To In a program type n gt To where O lt mo lt 1 Programming in HP PPL 569 Pooled S1 S2 o1 02 Determine whether or not the samples are pooled for tests or intervals using the Student s T distribution involving two means From the Numeric view set the value of Pooled In a program type 0 gt Pooled for not pooled default 1 gt Pooled for pooled Sets the sample standard deviation for a hypothesis test or confidence interval For a test or interval involving the difference of two means or two proportions sets the sample standard deviation of the first sample From the Numeric view set the value of s4 In a program type n gt s For a test or interval involving the difference of two means or two proportions sets the sample standard deviation of the second sample From the Numeric view set the value of S2 In a program type n gt s Sets the population standard deviation for a hypothesis test or confidence interval For a test or interval involving the difference of two means or two proportions sets the population standard deviation of the first sample From the Numeric view set the value of o4 In a program type n gt O For a test or interval involving the difference of two means or two proportions
317. hen is chosen Y 1asiNG the cursor keys simply translate the graph horizontally and vertically When is chosen pressing or f changes the amplitude of the graph that is it is stretched or shrunk vertically and pressing or changes the frequency of the graph that is it is stretched or shrunk horizontally The or button at the far right of the menu determines the increment by which the graph moves with each press of a cursor key By default the increment is set at 2 9 or 20 Tap to switch to manono equation mode In equation mode you use the cursor keys to move 4 between parameters in the equation and change their values You can then qu asec ec RGU ETERS observe the effect on the graph displayed Press or to decrease or increase the value of the selected parameter Press gt or to select another parameter You can switch back to graph mode by tapping EEI The Explorer apps 305 Test mode Tap to enter test mode In test mode you test your skill at matching an equation to the graph shown Test mode is like equation mode in that you use the cursor keys to select and change the value of one or more parameters in the equation The goal is to try to match the graph that is shown The app displays the YAESING X 0 graph of a randomly chosen sinusoidal function Tap a Level button IB
318. hose created via the Note Catalog see chapter 26 an app note is not listed in the Note Catalog It can only be accessed when the app is open An app note remains with the app if the app is sent to another calculator 106 An introduction to HP apps To add a note to an app 1 Open the app 2 Press Info If a note has already been created for this app its contents are displayed 3 Tap and start writing or editing your note The format and bullet options available are the same as those in the Note Editor described in The Note Editor on page 490 4 To exit the note screen press any key Your note is automatically saved Creating an app The apps that come with the HP Prime are built in and cannot be deleted They are always available simply by pressing Qi However you can create any number of customized instances of most apps You can also create an instance of an app that is based on a previously customized app Customized apps are opened from the application library in the same way that you open a built in app The advantage of creating a customized instance of an app is that you can continue to use the built in app for some other problem and return to the customized app at any time with all its data still in place For example you could create a customized version of the Sequence app that enables you to generate and explore the Fibonacci series You could continue to use the built in Sequence app t
319. i imag evalc Expr Example x ivy returns TEE aa 1 evalc E 3 as x y x y Given an expression and a number of significant digits returns the numerical evaluation of the expression to the given number of significant digits With just an expression returns the numerical evaluation based on the CAS settings evalf Expr Integer Example evalf 2 3 gives 0 666666666667 Tests whether or not an integer is even Returns 1 if it is and O if it is not Example even 1251 returns 0 Converts a decimal expression to a rational or real expression exact Expr Example exact 1 4141 gives 14141 10000 Returns the solution to the mathematical constant e to the power of an expression exp Expr Example exp 0 gives 1 390 Functions and commands exponential_ regression EXPR ezgcd f2nd factorial Given a set of points returns a vector containing the coefficients a and b of y b a x the exponential which best fits the set of points The points may be the elements in two lists or the rows of a matrix exponential regression Matrix or exponential regression Listl List2 Example 1 0 2 0 exponential _regression Q 0 1 0 returns 4 0 7 0 1 60092225473 1 10008339351 Parses the string String into a number or expression expr String Examples expr 2 3 returns 5 expr X 10 returns 100 if the variable X has the value 90 Uses the EZ GCD algorithm to retur
320. iables 1 Open Numeric Setup view Choose BuildYourOwn from the NUMTYPE menu Open Numeric view Numeric view will be empty X F1 397 4 In the independent column the left most 438 100 9798 column enter a value of 1000 __ 997998 interest Tap If you still have other values to evaluate repeat from step 4 _ Edit Ins Sort Big Defn Width Deleting To delete one row of data in your custom table place the cursor data in that row and press 8 To delete all the data in your custom table 1 Press A GE or press to confirm your intention An introduction to HP apps 103 Numeric view Summary of menu buttons Button Purpose To modify the increment between consecutive values of the independent variable in the table of evaluations See page 100 To edit the value in the selected cell BuildYourOwn only BuildYourOwn only BuildYourOwn only To overwrite the value in the selected cell you can just start entering a new value without first tapping METS Only visible if NUMTYPE is set to BuildYourOwn See Custom tables on page 103 To create a new row above the currently highlighted cell with zero as the independent value You can immediately start typing a new value Only visible if NUMTYPE is set to BuildYourOwn See Custom tables on page 103 To sort the values in the selected column in ascending or descending order Move the curs
321. iacens we seremivastetenes 585 Boise 1ONGHONS aaee a a EE E AE A 586 A Glossary B Troubleshooting Calculator not responding anc vewsnatne seen yeas scivazenxinvriecisivens 591 Treset i sdsinsmewosbtcn stares neu aes ie E A E I E A 591 If the calculator does not turn on eeceeeeseceeesteeeeetteeeenaes 591 Operdting limits ovsene esrara ens nE EE conc a Ya 592 Status MESSAGES ien e iia eii E E A E a Ss 592 C Product regulatory information Federal Communications Commission notice ssccceeeeeees 595 European Union Regulatory Notice cccceesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 597 ROK eer rc tre het OEEO 601 8 Contents Preface Manual conventions The following conventions are used in this manual to represent the keys that you press and the menu options that you choose to perform operations A key that initiates an unshifted function is represented by an image of that key EEX SN CE GM etc A key combination that initiates a shifted unction or inserts a character is represented by the appropriate shift key ETA or FE followed by the key for that function or character initiates the natural exponential function and inserts the pound character The name of the shifted function may also be given in parentheses after the key combination E3 Clean Setup A key pressed to insert a digit is represented by that digit 5 7 8 etc All fixed on screen text such as screen and field names a
322. ic view you can also get various parameters of objects just by tapping and specifying the object s name For example you can get the coordinates of a point by entering the point and pressing _ _ Another example you can get the formula for a line just by entering its name or the center point and radius of a circle just by entering the name of the circle Displaying To have a calculation made 3 calculations in in Numeric view appear in fadus 60 536 Plot view Plot view just highlight it in ae Numeric view and tap GMB A checkmark appears beside the calculation Repeat the procedure to prevent the calculation being displayed in Plot view The checkmark is cleared Editing a 1 Highlight the calculation you want to delete calculation 2 Top EZIB 3 Make your change and tap Qe Deleting a 1 Highlight the calculation you want to delete calculation 2 Tap GEEZ To delete all calculations press E3 Note that deleting a calculation does not delete any geometric objects from Plot or Symbolic view 152 Geometry Geometric objects Points Point Point On Geometry The geometric objects discussed in this section are those that can be created in Plot view Objects can also be created in Symbolic view more in fact than in Plot view but these are discussed in Geometry functions and commands on page 165 In Plot view you choose a drawing tool to draw an object The tools are listed in this section Note that once y
323. ics 1 Var app could return to the Function app or launch any other app Example The following example illustrates the process of creating a custom app The app is based on the built in Statistics 1Var app It simulates the rolling of a pair of dice each with a number of sides specified by the user The results are tabulated and can be viewed either in a table or graphically 522 Programming in HP PPL 1 In the Application Librray select the E Statistics 1Var app Function fenced Geometry Spreadsheet but don t open it Statistics 1Var Statistics 2Var Inference DataStreamer Select Statistics e Solve Linear Solver Quadratic Trig Explorer iVar Explorer Save Reset sort send start _ 2 Top EIB 3 Enter a name for the new app such as DiceSimulation 4 Tap twice The new app appears in the Application Library 5 Open the Program Catalog 6 Tap the program to DiceSimulation EXPORT DiceSimulation open it BEGIN Each customised END app has one program associated with it Initially this program is empty You customize the app by entering functions into that program COED At this point you decide how you want the user to interact with the app In this example we will want the user to be able to start and initialize the app and display a short note specify the number of sides that is faces on each die specify the number of times to roll the dice graphically di
324. ides of a triangle Tap at each vertex of the triangle pressing after each tap Excircle An excircle is a circle that is tangent to one segment of a triangle and also tangent to the rays through the segment s endpoints from the vertex of the triangle opposite the segment Tap at each vertex of the triangle pressing after each tap The excircle is drawn tangent to the side defined by thelast 4 fen two vertices tapped In the example at the right the last two vertices tapped were A and C or C and A Thus the excircle is drawn tangent to the segment AC Geometry 159 Locus Plot Takes two points as its arguments the first is the point whose possible locations form the locus the second is a point on an object This second point drives the first through its locus as the second moves on its object In the example at the right 7 circle C has been drawn and point D is a point placed on N r5 C using the Point On function described above k Point is a translation of E ft p75 point D Choosing Curve gt w 5 A Pina ii Special gt Locus places locus on the entry line Complete the command as locus GI GD and point l traces a path its locus that parallels point D as it moves around the circle to which it is constrained yo You can plot expressions of the following types in Plot view e Function e Parametric e Polar
325. ighted Functions and commands 373 Linear Solver app functions Solve2x2 Solve3x3 LinSolve The Linear Solver app has 3 functions that offer the user flexibility in solving 2x2 or 3x3 linear systems of equations Solves a 2x2 linear system of equations Solve2x2 a b c d e f Solves the linear system represented by ax by c dx ey f Solves a 3x3 linear system of equations Solve3x3 a b c d e fg h i j k Solves the linear system represented by ax by cz d ex fy gz h ix jy kz l Sohe linear system Solves the 2x2 or 3x3 linear system represented by matrix LinSolve matrix Example LinSolve A B C D E F solves the linear system ax by c dx ey f Triangle Solver app functions The Triangle Solver app has a group of functions which allow you to solve a complete triangle from the input of three consecutive parts of the triangle one of which must be a side length The names of these commands use A to signify an angle and S to signify a side length To use these commands enter three inputs in the specified order given by the command name These commands all return a list of the three unknown values lengths of sides and or measures of angles 374 Functions and commands AAS ASA SAS SSA Angle Angle Side Takes as arguments the measures of two angles and the length of the side opposite the first angle and returns a list containing the length of the side opposite
326. in this view for the sample data Field name Definition x Sample mean n Sample size Ho Assumed population mean Population standard deviation Alpha level for the test Inference app 241 Display the test results Plot the test results The Numeric view is where you enter the sample statistics and population parameters for the situation you are examining The sample data supplied here belong to the case in which a student has generated 50 pseudo random numbers on his graphing calculator If the algorithm is working properly the mean would be near 0 5 and the population standard deviation is known to be approximately 0 2887 The student is concerned that the sample mean 0 461368 seems a bit low and it testing the less than alternative hypothesis against the null hypothesis 6 Display the test X Result ji results TestZ 0 946205374811 Test 0 461368 P Calc 0 172021922639 Crit Z r1 64485362695 Crit amp 0 432843347747 The test distribution value and its associated Fate reject He GeO probability are __ _suz_ __ _0k_ displayed along with the critical value s of the test and the associated critical value s of the statistic In this case the test indicates that one should not reject the null hypothesis Tap to return to Numeric view 7 Display a graphical view of the test results 5 Test 461368 displayed with the GAMANA test Z
327. infinite number of solutions Getting started with the Linear Solver app The following example defines the following set of equations and then solves for the unknown variables 6x 9y 6z 5 7x 10y 8z 10 6x 4y 6 Open the Linear 1 Open the Linear as an Solver app Solver app ke ove Oz o Select OX OY 0Z 0 OX OY 0Z 0 Linear 0 Solver Infinite number of solutions The app opens in Numeric view atta aun Linear Solver app 267 Note Define and solve the equations If the last time you used the Linear Solver app you solved for two equations the two equation input form is displayed To solve a three equation set tap GEREN now the input form displays three equations 2 You define the equations you want to solve by entering the coefficients of each variable in each equation and the constant term Notice that the cursor is positioned immediately to the left of x in the first equation ready for you to insert the coefficient of x 6 Enter the coefficient and either tap or press _fer_ 3 The cursor moves to the next coefficient Enter that co or press _ J efficient and either tap fam Continue doing likewise until you have defined all the equations Once you have Linear Equation Solver entered enough 6X OY 62 5 values for the T Oe oa s ex qw 0Z 0 solver to be able J to generate X 0 Y 1 666666667 Z 3 3333333333 solutions those solutions appe
328. ing L1 when L1 1 2 3 1 2 3 string M1 when M1 T 1 2 3 4 5 6 123 456 Syntax INSTRING s r1 str2 Returns the index of the first occurrence of str2 in str Returns O if str2 is not present in str 1 Note that the first character in a string is position 1 Examples n INSTRING vanilla van returns 1 INSTRING banana na returns 3 INSTRING ab abc returns O Syntax LEFT strn Return the first n characters of string str If n DIM str or n lt O returns str If n O returns the string Example LEFT MOMOGUMBO 3 returns MOM Syntax RIGHT str n Returns the last n characters of string str If n lt O returns empty string If n gt DIM str returns str Example RIGHT MOMOGUMBO 5 returns GUMBO Programming in HP PPL 535 MID ROTATE STRINGFROMID Drawing REPLACE Syntax MID strpos n Extracts n characters from string str starting at index pos n is optional if not specified extracts all the remainder of the string Example MID MOMOGUMBO 3 5 returns MOGUM MID PUDGE 4 returns GE Syntax ROTATE strn Permutation of characters in string str If O lt n lt DIM str shifts n places to left If DIM str lt n lt 1 shifts n spaces to right If n gt DIM str or n lt DIM str returns str Examples ROTATE 12345 2 returns 34512 ROTATE 12345 1 returns 51234 ROTATE
329. ing balance of the loan Using the data from the previous example of a home mortgage with balloon payment see page 291 calculate how much has been applied to the principal how much has been paid in interest and the balance remaining after the first 10 years that is after 12 x 10 120 payments l Make your data Time Value of Money match that shown in N 360 I NR 6 5 the figure to the right PV 150000 PAR 12 FV 0 End y Group Size 12 Enter payment amount or solve Pest Jamon solve Finance app 293 Amortization graph 2 Tap Amort P Principal Interest Balance T 1676 57 9700 63 148323 43 2 3465 42 19288 98 146534 58 3 5374 07 28757 53 144625 93 4 7410 55 38098 25 142589 45 5 9583 41 47302 59 f140416 59 6 11901 8 56361 4 138098 2 7 14375 46 65264 94 135624 54 8 17014 77 74002 83 132985 23 9 19830 85 82563 95 130169 15 10 22835 53 90936 47 127164 47 11 26041 43 99107 77 123958 57 1 annas asnan unnan acia annm anaa 3 Scroll down the table P Principal Interest Balance 1 1676 57 9700 63 148323 43 to payment group 10 2 3465 42 19288 98 146534 58 3 5374 07 28757 53 144625 93 Note that after 10 4 7410 55 38098 25 142589 45 5 9583 41 47302 59 140416 59 6 171901 8 56361 4 f138098 2 years 22 835 53 7 14375 46 65264 94 135624 54 8 17014 77 74002 83 132985 23 has been paid off
330. ing your own functions Nice aue auntie atenides 42 22 Variables Qualifying vetie bleszyiiy tiie vor aseeweel eaves a tet 427 Home vanablesjiivc eee teen ian ute ei aang 428 App vanables iener ai oen Piyush cw eer ev eS 429 Function app variables 2c jeu ita sie We RAR ees 429 Geometry app variables as iwisscusaisudoraterssdoininsveiasinesseagus 430 Spreadsheet app variables cceseeseeeceeeeeteeeeeeentaees 431 Solve app variables atnia bins dua sedenudnsragberudoyratubegelbsuauenaathd 431 Advanced Graphing app variables cceeceeeeeeeeeeees 432 Statistics 1Var app variables 5 cissiscusnssinncenynonaendeibeaddbuiea 433 Statistics 2Var app variables cceesseeeeeeessteeeeeeeeenees 435 Inference app variables ccccccccesseeeeeseceeetseeenseeeeees 437 Parametric app variables scccceeesseeeeeeeetsteeeeeentnees 439 Polar app Variables ondvonsinivseeassoiersadoruadeys itebomlhpuasvnanthn 440 Finance app variables i osinnciserrexedey vigbeandy eaubeaelipsasbonnlns 440 Linear Solver app variables ccccccceeeeeeteceeeeeestnneeees 44 Triangle Solver app variables ccccceesseeeeeeetteeeeeeees 441 Linear Explorer app variables s 0sssessecepaauserossgcvomerdeniaens 441 Quadratic Explorer app variables cccccceeeeesseeeeeeees 441 Trig Explorer app variables 0 lt ssvassaceekeraptpnnetisatpreonaeas 442 Sequence app Variables iccsvavacigacessss
331. inition z Ex IX sX Ox serrx Mean of x independent values Sum of x values Sum of x values The sample standard deviation of the independent column The population standard deviation of the independent column the standard error of the independent column The statistics displayed when you tap are Statistic Definition y xY ry SY oY serry Mean of y dependent values Sum of values Sum of y values The sample standard deviation of the dependent column The population standard deviation of the dependent column The standard error of the dependent column Plotting statistical data Once you have entered your data selected the data set to analyze and specified your fit model you can plot your data You can plot up to five scatter plots at a time 1 In Symbolic view select the data sets you want to plot 2 Make sure that the full range of your data will be plotted You do this by reviewing and adjusting if 234 Statistics 2Var app Tracing a scatter plot Tracing a curve Tracing order necessary the X Rng and Y Rng fields in Plot Setup view Ema e 3 Press EB If the data set and regression line are not ideally positioned Press and select Autoscale Autoscale can be relied upon to give a good starting scale which can then be adjusted later in the Plot Setup view The figures below the plot indicate that the cursor is at the s
332. ion extract_measure ordinate parameq perimeter Geometry Returns the Cartesian equation of a curve in x and y or the Cartesian coordinates of a point equation curve or equation point Example If GA is the point at 0 0 GB is the point at 1 0 and GC is defined as circle GA GB GA then equation GC returns x y 1 Returns the definition of a geometric object For a point that definition consists of the coordinates of the point For other objects the definition mirrors their definition in Symbolic view with the coordinates of their defining points supplied extract_measure Var Returns the y coordinate of a point or the y length of a vector ordinate point or ordinate vector Example Example ordinate GA returns the y coordinate of the point A Works like the equation command but returns parametric results in complex form parameq GeoOb j Returns the perimeter of a polygon or the circumference of a circle perimeter polygon Or perimeter circle Examples If GA is the point at 0 0 GB is the point at 1 0 and GC is defined as circle GA GB GA then perimeter GC returns 27 185 radius Test is_collinear is_concyclic is_conjugate If GA is the point at 0 0 GB is the point at 1 0 and GC is defined as square GA GB GA then perimeter GC returns 4 Returns the radius of a circle radius circle Example If GA is the point at 0 0
333. ion app starts in Symbolic view This is the defining view It is where you symbolically define that is specify the functions you want to explore The graphical and numerical data you see in Plot view and Numeric view are derived from the symbolic expressions defined here There are 10 fields for defining functions These are labeled F1 x through F9 X and FO X 2 Highlight the field you want to use either by tapping on it or scrolling to it If you are entering a new expression just start typing If you are editing an existing expression tap and make your changes When you have finished defining or changing the expression press _ 3 Enter the linear function in F1 X 1 4 Enter the quadratic function in F2 X Function Symbolic View V BEF1 X 1 X WSO Fase soe 3 B F400 E F6 X E FK Enter function Show You can tap the button to assist in the entry of equations In the Function app i has the same effect as pressing Ri In other apps enters a different character 112 Function app Set up the plot Plot the functions 5 Decide if you want to give one or more function a custom color when it is plotted evaluate a dependent function deselect a definition that you don t want to explore incorporate variables math commands and CAS commands in a definition For the sake of simplicity we can ignore these operations in this examp
334. is c 2 E 2 200 20 the landowner for renting oo bo 4 450 5 the space for your stall 5 b 6 25 Enter the label PROFITin amp cell c7 fa b 26 In cell D7 enter a formua BMMCMENECIER ma Acos E to calculate your profit ena D3 kz D5 You could also have named D3 and D5 say TOTCOM and COSTS respectively Then the formula in D7 could have been TOTCOM COSTS 27 Enter the label GOAL in cell 1 You can swipe the screen with a finger or repeatedly press the cursor keys to bring E1 into view 28 Enter 250 in cell F1 29 In cell c9 enter the label Go HOMI This is the minimum profit you want to make on the day Fl 30 In cell D9 enter 31 Gra D7 gt mC You can select gt from the relations palette EA 6 What this formula does is place O in D9 if you have rows amp oso 2 not reached your goal HOTAL COMMIS e r 4 j0 profit and 1 if you have 5 COSTS T00 6 J0 It provides a quick way for 7p PROFIT F100 8 p you to see when you have 20 GOHOME p OK made enough profit and gua een genes em a aS can go home Select C9 and D9 You can select both cells with a finger drag or by highlighting C9 selecting and pressing 198 Spreadsheet 32 Tap and select Color 33 Choose a color for the contents of the selected cell
335. is collinear with its corresponding point on the original triangle and point I Further the distance from point fo each new point will be twice the distance to the original point since the scale factor is 2 1 Tap and select Dilation 2 Tap the point that is to be the center of dilation and press CE 3 Enter the scale factor and press 4 Tap the object that is to be dilated and press _ _ 162 Geometry Rotation More Projection Inversion Geometry A rotation is a mapping that rotates each point by a fixed angle around a center point The angle is defined using the angle command with the vertex of the angle as the first argument Suppose you wish to rotate A t5 K 8 To 5 Pointer GM Zoom Polygon Curve Transfor the square GC around point K GK through LKM in the figure to the right 1 Press and tap MEM 2 Tap and select Transform gt Rotation rotation appears on the entry line 3 Between the parentheses enter GK angle GK GL GM GC 4 Press or tap OK 5 Press to return to W a L M L 5 t 10 10 Pointer 1 11 3 7 Plot view to see the rotated square A projection is a mapping of one or more points onto an object such that the line passing through the point and its image is perpendicular to the object at the image point 1 Tap and select Projection
336. ist or vector and an element returns the index of the first occurrence of the element in the list or vector if the element does not appear in the list or vector returns O contains List Element or contains Vector Element Example contains 0 1 2 3 2 returns 3 Copies the first variable into the second variable without evaluation CopyVar Varl Var2 Returns the correlation of the elements of a list or matrix correlation List or correlation Matrix Example 12 33 correlation returns i y 6 J31 Applies a function to the elements in a list or matrix and returns their sum count Function List or count Function Matrix Example count x gt x 2 12 45 3 7 78 returns 147 Returns the covariance of the elements in a list or matrix covariance List or covariance Matrix Example 2 covariance 7 1 returns a 386 Functions and commands covariance_ correlation cpartfrac crationalroot cumSum cyan Returns a vector containing both the covariance and the correlation of the elements of a list or matrix covariance correlation List or covariance correlation Matrix Example covariance correlation 11 returns 33 3 6 J31 Returns the result of partial fraction decomposition of a rational fraction in the complex field cpartfrac RatFrac Example poe 9 9 cpartfrac 72 returns ETD Returns the list of complex rational roots of a polyno
337. ist3 Example seqsolve 2x n x n 1 gives n 1 2 2 Returns the result of applying a phase shift of pi 2 to a trigonometric expression shift phase Expr Example shift_phase sin x gives cos pit2 x 2 Returns the signature of a permutation signature Vector Example signature 2 1 4 5 returns 1 Functions and commands 415 simult sincos spline sqrt stddev Returns the solution to a system of linear equations or several systems of linear equations presented in matrix form In the case of one system of linear equations takes a matrix of coefficients and a column matrix of constants and returns the column matrix of the solution simult Matrixl Matrix2 Example soep A eve Returns an expression with the complex exponentials rewritten in terms of sin and cos sincos Expr Example sincos exp i x gives cos x i sin x Given two lists or vectors one for the xvalues and one for the y values as well as a variable and an integer degree returns the natural spline through the points given by the two lists The polynomials in the spline are in terms of the given variable and are of the given degree spline ListX ListY Var Integer or spline VectorX VectorY Var Integer Example spline 0 1 2 1 3 0 x 3 returns 5 3 13 5 3 15 2 gt ae taper xt 7 eoD pag xe 3 D 3 Returns the square root of an expression sqrt Expr Example sqrt 50 gives 5 s
338. ith given data The situation is similar if you are using the simpler input form for a right angled triangle and you enter more than two values If you are using the general input form you need to specify at least three values for the Triangle Solver to be able to calculate the remaining i Enter length of side a ay ae specify less than three Not enough data appears on the screen Triangle Solver Not enough data If you are using the simplified input form for a right angled triangle you must specify at least two values 298 Triangle Solver app Triangle Solver app 299 20 The Explorer apps There are three explorer apps These are designed for you to explore the relationships between the parameters of a function and the shape of the graph of that function The explorer apps are e Linear Explorer For exploring linear functions Quadratic Explorer For exploring quadratic functions Trig Explorer For exploring sinusoidal functions There are two modes of exploration graph mode and equation mode In graph mode you manipulate a graph and note the corresponding changes in its equation In equation mode you manipulate an equation and note the corresponding changes in its graphical representation Each explorer app has a number of equations and graphs for to explore and app has a test mode In test mode you test you skills at matching equations to graphs Linear Explorer
339. ith the data from the statistics app starting with the cell selected at step 1 Any data in that column will be overwritten by the data being imported You can also export data from the Spreadsheet app to a statistics app See Entering and editing statistical data on page 215 for the general procedure It can be used in both the Statistics 1Var and Statistics 2Var apps LN ood bel Gal el ad bed Ld D OOT 3 X 2 2 you could enter in a cell ma Roo J 2 a 2 _ The answer displayed is 1 732 You could also have selected a function from a menu For example 1 2 3 6 Press EM J Press and tap HS Select Polynomial gt Find Roots Your entry line will now look like this cAS proot Enter the coefficients of the polynomial in descending order separating each with a comma E 2 JOl 33 Press to see the result Select the cell and tap to see a vector containing both roots 1 732 1 732 Tap to return to the spreadsheet Note that the CAS prefix added to your function is to remind you that the calculation will be carried out by the CAS and thus a symbolic result will be returned if possible You can also force a calculation to be handled by the CAS by tapping in the spreadsheet Spreadsheet 203 There are additional spreadsheet functions that you can use mostly related to finance and statistics calculation
340. ive names for the CAS functions If you prefer the 58 Computer algebra system CAS To use an expression or result from Home view To use a Home variable in CAS functions to be presented by their command name deselect the Menu Display option on the second page of the Home Settings screen see Home settings on page 30 When your are working in CAS you can retrieve an expres sion or result from Home view by tapping and selecting Get from Home Home view opens Press or until the item you want to retrieve is highlighted and press __ _ The highlighted item is copied to the cursor point in CAS You can access Home variables from within the CAS Home variables are assigned uppercase letters CAS variables are assigned lowercase letters Thus SIN x and SIN X will yield different results To use a Home variable in the CAS simply include its name in a calculation For example suppose in Home view you have assigned variable Qto 100 Suppose too that you have assigned variable q to 1000 in the CAS If you are in the CAS and enter 5 q the result is 5000 If you had entered 5 Q instead the result would have been 500 In a similar way CAS variables can be used in calculations in Home view Thus you can enter 5 q in Home view and get 5000 even though q is a CAS variable Computer algebra system CAS 59 60 Computer algebra system CAS Exam Mode The HP Prime can be precisely configured for a
341. k Expr n Example 710 JordanBlock 7 3 returns g 7 4 007 Given a positive integer n returns the n order Hilbert matrix Each element of the matrix is given by the formula 1 j k1 where j is the row number and k is the column number hilbert n Example ee In CAS view hilbert 4 returns 2345 Wil Al On IH ol wd I ol O It oi Matrix of an isometry given by its proper elements mkisom vector sign or 1 Example In CAS view mkisom 1 2 1 returns fae se sin 1 cos 1 Matrices 477 Vandermonde Basic Norm Row Norm Column Norm Returns the Vandermonde matrix Given a vector n n2 nj returns a matrix whose first row is n1 n1 n1 2 n1 F The second row is n2 n2 n2 2 n2 i ete vandermonde vector Example 111 vandermonde 1 3 5 returns 1 39 dk 5 25 Returns the Frobenius norm of a matrix matrix Example returns 5 47722557505 34 Row Norm Finds the maximum value over all rows for the sums of the absolute values of all elements in a row ROWNORM matrix Example romo 2 returns 7 3 4 Column Norm Finds the maximum value over all columns of the sums of the absolute values of all elements in a column COLNORM matrix Example conor returns 6 3 4 478 Matrices Spectral Norm Spectral Radius Condition Rank Pivot Spectral Norm of a square matrix SPECNORM
342. k of cells using the cursor keys It changes to to enable you to deselect cells You can also press hold and drag to select a block of cells COES or A toggle button that sets the direction the cursor moves after content has been entered in a cell Show Displays the result in the selected cell in full screen mode with horizontal and vertical scrolling enabled Only visible if the selected cell has con tent Enables you to select a column to sort by and to sort it in ascending or descending order Only visi ble if cells are selected Cancel the input and clear the entry line Accept and evaluate the input Clears the spreadsheet Spreadsheet 207 Formatting options The formatting options appear when you tap REE They apply to whatever is currently _ znumber Format selected a cell block column scotor row or the entire spreadsheet The options are Show Format 1Name 3 Font Size Align e gt gt S Fill gt gt gt 7 Align T porma SRD Select Go gt Name displays an input o form for you to give a name to whatever is selected Number Format Auto Standard Fixed Scientific or Engineering See Home settings on page 30 for more details Font Size Auto or from 10 to 22 point Color color for the content text number etc in the selected cells the gray dotted option repr
343. keys move the trace cursor along either graph until it nears the intersection Note that the value of A displayed near the bottom left corner a SHIM of the screen closely matches the value of A you calculated above The Plot view provides a convenient way to find an approximation to a solution when you suspect that there are a number of solutions Move the trace cursor close to the solution that is the intersection of interest to you and then open Numeric view The solution given in Numeric view will be will be for the solution nearest the trace cursor 262 Solve app Note By dragging a finger horizontally or vertically across the screen you can quickly see parts of the plot that are initially outside the x and y ranges you set Several equations You can define up to ten equations and expressions in Symbolic view and select those you want to solve together as a system For example suppose you want to solve the system of equations consisting of X24 Y2 16 and X Y Open the 1 Open the Solve app Solve app Select Solve 2 If you have no need for any equations or expressions already defined press Clear Tap to confirm your intention to clear the app Define the 3 Define the equations Solve Symbolle View FD equations AEE x gt EY Vme xve ma 6 Rea maxv BES zaj mes Make sure that both Dial ofc equations are selected as we are looking for values of X and Y that satisty both e
344. l to finish executes the sequence of commands and then adds 1 increment to var Programming in HP PPL 529 Example 1 This program determines which integer from 2 to N has the greatest number of factors EXPORT MAXFACTORS N BEGIN LOCAL cur max k result 1 gt max 1 gt result FOR k FROM 2 TO N DO SIZE CAS idivis k cur IF cur 1 gt max THEN cur 1 gt max k gt result END END SGBOX Max of max factors for result END In Home enter Prose Calon 03 05 Function App OKB MAXFACTORS 100 aaa om MYPROGRAM 1KB Max of 12 factors for 60 oe ee ee ee ee FOR STEP Syntax FOR var FROM start TO finish STEP increment DO commands END Sets variable var to start and for as long as this variable is less than or equal to finish executes the sequence of commands and then adds increment to var Example 2 This program draws an interesting pattern on the screen EXPORT DRAWPATTERN BEGIN LOCAL xincr yincr co lor STARTAPP Function 530 Programming in HP PPL FOR DOWN FOR DOWN STEP WHILE RECT xincr Xmax Xmin 318 yincr Ymax Ymin 218 FOR X FROM Xmin TO Xmax STEP xincr DO FOR Y FROM Ymin TO Ymax STEP yincr DO color RGB X 3 MOD 255 Y 3 MOD 255 TAN 0 1 X 3 Y 3 MOD 255 PIXON X Y color ND ND w w WAIT END Syntax FOR var FROM star
345. layed in base 16 Changing the default base The calculator s default base for integer arithmetic is 16 hexadecimal To change the default base 1 Display the Home Settings screen 2 Choose the base you want Home Settings from the Integers menu Angle Measure Radians Number Format Standard Binary Octal Decimal Entry Textbook or Hex Integers Binary 32 ee Octal 3 The field to the right of Se Decimal g Language ex Integers is the wordsize Decimal Mark Dot field This is the maximum Choose the default base for integers ee ao number of bits that can represent an integer The default value is 32 but you can change it to any value between 1 and 64 4 If you want to allow for signed integers select the option to the right of the wordsize field Choosing this option reduces the maximum size of an integer to one bit less than the wordsize Basic integer arithmetic 583 Examples of integer arithmetic The operands in integer arithmetic can be of the same base or of mixed bases Integer calculation Decimal equivalent 10000b 10100b 16 20 36 100100b 71 o 10100b 57 20 37 450 4Dh 11101b 8B9h 77 x 29 2233 32Ah 50 A2h 810 5 162 Mixed base arithmetic With one exception where you Function have operands of different bases the result of the calculation is presented in the base of the first operand The example at the right
346. lculus 326 330 integer 337 339 plot 346 347 polynomial 339 345 rewrite 332 337 solve 330 332 menu 324 347 settings 30 55 view 13 cash flow 289 Catlg menu 378 421 cells entering content 201 formatting 208 importing data 202 naming 200 referencing 200 204 selecting 199 characters 22 charging 11 chemistry constants 449 cobweb graph 281 coding See programming color highlight 34 of geometric objects 144 of graphs 85 theme 34 commands app 546 branch 556 definition of 546 588 geometric 165 193 See also functions structure in programming 497 variable 533 commenting code 498 common fractions 26 complex numbers 32 44 57 functions for 315 316 storing 44 complex variables 428 computer algebra system See CAS confidence intervals 240 253 257 370 371 conic sections 125 constants chemistry 449 math 449 physical 447 physics 449 quantum science 449 context sensitive menu 20 conventions 9 converting between units 446 copy and paste 204 copying history items 40 notes 496 programs 509 correlation coefficient 236 covariance 233 cover 13 critical values 242 cursor keys 21 curves 158 custom apps 107 134 522 custom functions 421 custom tables 103 custom variables 42 D data set definition 224 data sharing 44 date 34 debugging programs 507 decimal comma 33 602 Index decimal mark 33 decimal zoom 90 93 102 default settings restoring 21 87 100 106 define your own fit 232 degree symbol 21 del
347. le However they can be useful and are described in detail in Common operations in Symbolic view on page 81 You can change the Function Plot Setup Sree range of the x and y axes and the spacing of he tick ks al th xengfis 9 15 9 the tick marks along the Y Rng 10 9 re axes X Tick 1 Y Tick 1 6 Display Plot Setup view Enter minimum horizontal value Edit Page T Setup For this example you can leave the plot settings at their default values If your settings do not match those in the illustration above press Clear to restore the default values See Common operations in Plot Setup view on page 96 for more information about setting the appearance of plots 7 Plot the functions Ploti LSetup tt e pa o F109 1 Function app 113 Trace a By default the trace functionality is active This enables graph you to move a cursor along a graph If more than two graphs are shown the graph that is the highest in the list of functions in Symbolic view is the graph that will be traced by default Since the linear equation is higher than the quadratic function in Symbolic view it is the graph on which the tracing cursor appears by default 8 Trace the linear function Oor Note how a cursor moves along the plot as you press the buttons Note panmi ae too that the coordinates of the cursor appear at the bottom of the screen and change as you move the
348. lify Collect Expand Factor Press to open the Toolbox menus one of which is the CAS menu The functions on Statistics 1Var 1Algebra the CAS menu are those most Calculus 3Solve commonly used Many more Rewrite sInteger functions are available See tional Ctlg menu beginning on page 378 E ap catlg ok Note that the Geometry functions appear on the App menu They are described in Geometry functions and commands beginning on page 165 The result of a CAS command may vary depending on the CAS settings The examples in this chapter assume the default CAS settings unless otherwise noted Returns an expression simplified simplify Expr Example simplify 4 atan 1 5 atan 1 239 yields 1 4 pi Returns a polynomial or list of polynomials factorized over the field of the coefficients collect Poly or LstPoly Example collect x 2 4 gives x 2 x 2 Returns an expression expanded expand Expr Example expand x y z 1 gives y z x z y x Returns a polynomial factorized factor Poly Example factor x 4 1 gives x 1 x y e241 324 Functions and commands Substitute Partial Fraction Extract Numerator Denominator Left Side Right Side Substitutes a value for a variable in an expression Syntax subst Expr Var value Example subst x 4 x 2 x 3 returns 3 5 Performs
349. lue e zX the lower bound of the confidence interval zXh the upper bound of the confidence interval zXm the midpoint of the confidence interval e std the standard deviation Example ConfZ2prop 21 26 50 50 0 95 The one sample Student s T confidence interval for a mean ConfTlmean x s n C configuration Configuration a string that controls what results are shown and the order in which they appear An empty string displays the default all results including headers The options in the configuration string are separated by spaces h header cells will be created DF the degrees of freedom e T the critical T value e Xl the lower bound of the confidence interval e Xh the upper bound of the confidence interval e std the standard deviation 362 Functions and commands Conff2mean Example ConfTlmean 0 461368 0 2776 50 0 95 The two sample Student s T confidence interval for the difference of two means ConfT2mean X11 X27 S1 S2 Ny N2 C pooled configuration Configuration a string that controls what results are shown and the order in which they appear An empty string displays the default all results including headers The options in the configuration string are separated by spaces e h header cells will be created e DF the degrees of freedom e T the critical T value Xl the lower bound of the confidence interval e Xh the upper boun
350. matrix Example S lgo reno returns 5 46498570422 3 4 Spectral Radius of a square matrix SPECRAD matrix Example S as scaffi z returns 5 37228132327 34 Condition Number Finds the 1 norm column norm of a square mairix COND matrix Example con 12 returns 21 34 Rank of a rectangular matrix RANK matrix Example ran 12 returns 2 3 4 Given a matrix a row number n and a column number m uses Gaussian elimination to return a matrix with zeroes in column m except that the element in column m and row n is kept as a pivot pivot matrix n m Example L2 t2 pivot 3 4 1 1 returns g 2 5 6 0 4 Matrices 479 Trace Advanced Eigenvalues Eigenvectors Jordan Finds the trace of a square matrix The trace is equal to the sum of the diagonal elements It is also equal to the sum of the eigenvalues TRACE matrix Example onace 12 returns 5 3 4 Displays the eigenvalues in vector form for matrix E IGENVAL matrix Example srcenvar 12 returns 34 5 37228 0 37228 Eigenvectors and eigenvalues for a square matrix Displays a list of two arrays The first contains the eigenvectors and the second contains the eigenvalues E IGENVV matrix Example EIGE returns the following matrices 3 4 0 4159 0 8369 gt DST So 0 0 9093 0 5742 0
351. me green The angle mode setting is currently degrees T lime green The angle mode setting is currently radians tS Cyan The Shift key is active The function shown in blue on a key will be activated when a key is pressed Press to cancel shift mode Getting started Annunciator Meaning Continued CAS White You are working in CAS view not Home view A Z orange In Home view a z orange tU Yellow The Alpha key is active The charac ter shown in orange on a key will be entered in uppercase when a key is pressed See Adding text on page 23 for more information In CAS view The Alpha Shift key combination is active The character shown in orange ona key will be entered in uppercase when a key is pressed See Adding text on page 23 for more information In Home view The Alpha Shift key combination is active The character shown in orange ona key will be entered in lowercase when a key is pressed See Adding text on page 23 for more information In CAS view The Alpha key is active The charac ter shown in orange on a key will be entered in lowercase when a key is pressed See Adding text on page 23 for more information The user keyboard is active All the following key presses will enter the customized objects associated with the key See The User Keyboard Customizing key presses on page 516 for more information Getting started Navigation
352. menu ER while you are in Numeric view Plot view is displayed with the plots zoomed accordingly In other words the zoom options on the Views menu apply only to Plot view Zooming in Numeric view automatically changes the NUMSTEP value in the Numeric Setup view There are two zoom keys pressing zooms in and pressing zooms out The extent of the scaling is determined by the NUMZOOM setting explained above tap an option i 10 2 E Zoom Width An introduction to HP apps 101 Evaluating The zoom options are explained in the following table Option Result In Out Decimal Integer Trig Undo Zoom The increment between consecutive values of the independent variable becomes the current value divided by the Numzoom setting Shortcut press J The increment between consecutive values of the independent variable becomes the current value multiplied by the Numzoom setting Shortcut press kaz Restores the default NUMSTART and NUMSTEP values O and 0 1 respectively The increment between consecutive values of the independent variable is set to 1 e If the angle measure setting is radians sets the increment between consecutive values of the independent variable to 1 24 approximately 0 1309 e If the angle measure setting is degrees sets the increment between consecutive values of the independent variable to 7 5 Returns the display to the previous zoom
353. mial without indicating the multiplicity crationalroot Poly Example crationalroot 2 x 3 5 7 i x 2 4414 i x 8 4 i returns EE 2 41 Accepts as argument either a list or a vector and returns a list or vector whose elements are the cumulative sum of the original argument cumSum List or cumSum Vector Example cumSum 0 1 2 3 4 returns 0 1 3 6 10 Used in the Symbolic view of the Geometry app In the definition of a geometric object including the statement display cyan specifies that the object defined will be drawn in light blue Functions and commands 387 delcols delrows deltalist Dirac Given a matrix and an integer n deletes the nth column from the matrix and returns the result If an interval of two integers is used instead of a single integer deletes all columns in the interval and returns the result delcols Matrix Integer ordelcols Matrix Intgl Intg2 Example 123 13 delcols 45 6 2 returns 4 6 789 79 Given a matrix and an integer n deletes the nth row from the matrix and returns the result If an interval of two integers is used instead of a single integer deletes all rows in the interval and returns the result delrows Matrix Integer or delrows Matrix Intel Intg2 Example 123 delrows 4 5 6 2 3 returns 1 2 3 789 Returns the list of the differences between consecutive terms in the original list deltalist Lst Example deltalis
354. mple cyclotomic 20 gives 1 0 1 O 1 O 1 O 1 Given a vector of polynomials and a vector of variables returns the Groebner basis of the ideal spanned by the set of polynomials gbasis Polyl Poly2 Varli Varz2 Example gbasis x 2 y 3 x ty 2 x y returns y 4 VAS xtye2 Given a polynomial and both a vector of polynomials and a vector of variables returns the remainder of the division of the polynomial by the Groebner basis of the vector of polynomials greduce Polyl Poly2 Poly3 Varl Varz Example greduce x y 1 x 2 y 2 2 x y y 2 y 3 x y returns 1 2 y 2 1 Returns the Hermite polynomial of degree n where n is an integer less than 1556 hermite Integer Example hermite 3 gives 8 x 3 12 x 344 Functions and commands Lagrange Laguerre Legendre Chebyshev Tn Chebyshev Un Given a vector of abscissas and a vector of ordinates returns the Lagrange polynomial for the points specified in the two vectors This function can also take a matrix as argument with the first row containing the abscissas and the second row containing the ordinates lagrange X1 X2 Y1 Y2 or X1 X2 lagrange Y1 Y2 Example lagrange 1 3 0 1 gives x 1 2 Given an integer n returns the Laguerre polynomial of degree n laguerre Integer Example laguerre 4 returns 1 24 a 4 1 6 a 3 x 5 2 a 3 1 4 a 2 x 2 3 2 a 2 x 35 24 a 2 6
355. mple above in two steps one for each operator Step 1 5 the natural logarithm of 5 is calculated and displayed in history Step 2 mis entered as a divisor and applied to the previous result More information about RPN mode can be found in chapter 2 Reverse Polish Notation RPN starting on page 47 Note that on page 2 of the Home Settings screen you can specify whether you want to display your calculations in Textbook format or not This refers to the appearance of your calculations in the history section of both Home view and CAS view This is a different setting from the Entry setting discussed above Entering expressions The examples that follow assume that the entry mode is Textbook An expression can contain numbers functions and variables To enter a function press the appropriate key or open a Toolbox menu and select the function You can also enter a function by using the alpha keys to spell out its name When you have finished entering the expression press to evaluate it Getting started 37 Example Parentheses If you make a mistake while entering an expression you can e delete the character to the left of the cursor by pressing e delete the character to the right of the cursor by pressing e clear the entire entry line by pressing or E3 2 Calculate 25148 Inqas 0 23 J a 14 E C7 J8 OLAIES3 O45 0B This example illustrates a number
356. n examination with any number of features or functions disabled for a set period of time Configuring a HP Prime for an examination is called exam mode configuration You can create and save multiple exam mode configurations each with its own subset of functionality disabled You can set each configuration for its own time period with or without a password An exam mode configuration can be activated from an HP Prime sent from one HP Prime to another via USB cable or sent to one or more HP Primes via the Connectivity Kit Exam mode Exam Mode Configuration configuration will SystemiApps g i HF HserApps primarily be of interestto H Physics H M Hete teachers proctors and CH units invigilators who want to cH Matrices H _ Complex ensure that the calculator _ cas is used appropriately by pUre students sitting for an iesala ons aas ala faa OK examination In the illustration to the right user customized apps the help system and the computer algebra system have been selected for disabling As part of an exam mode configuration you can choose to activate 3 lights on the calculator that will flash periodically during exam mode The lights are on the top edge of the calculator The lights will help the supervisor of the examination detect if any particular calculator has dropped out of exam mode The flashing of lights on all calculators placed in exam mode will be synchronized so that all will
357. n max Ytick Recenter Yzoom Numeric umIndep NumType umStart NumZoom umStep Modes AAngle ADigits AComplex AFormat 442 Variables 23 Units and constants Units Unit categories A unit of measurement such as inch ohm or Becquerel enables you to give a precise magnitude to a physical quantity You can attach a unit of measurement to any number or numerical result A numerical value with units attached is referred to as a measurement You can operate on measurements just as you do on numbers without attached units The units are kept with the numbers in subsequent operations The units are on the Units menu Press Units and if necessary tap WESS Function gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt sAcceleration The menu is organized by category Each category is listed at the left with the units in the selected category listed at the right length e acceleration electricity area e force e light volume energy angle time power e viscosity speed e pressure radiation mass e temperature Units and constants 443 Prefixes The Units menu includes an entry that is not a unit category namely Prefix Selecting this option displays a palette of prefixes Function Y yotta Z zetta E exa P peta T tera G giga M mega k kilo h hecto D deca d deci c centi m milli pu micro n nano p pico f femto a atto z zepto y octo Unit prefi
358. n your matrix at any time adding columns and rows as you please You can also delete an entire 789 row or column Just ead place the cursor on the symbol at the end of a row or column Then press to insert a new row or column or to delete the row or column You can also press to delete a row or column In the figure above pressing would delete the second row of the matrix 1234 4564 finished press and the matrix will be displayed in the History You can then 123 123 456 456 789 use or name your ma matrix FTE You can store a vector or matrix in a variable You can do this before it is added to History or you can copy it from History When you ve entered a vector or matrix in the Matrices 467 To display a matrix To display one element entry line or copied it from History to the entry line tap ETA enter a name for it and press _ _ The variable names reserved for vectors and matrices are MO through M9 You can always use a variable name you devise to store a vector or matrix The new variable will appear in the Vars menu under MEIS The screen at the right Function shows the matrix 2 5 729 16 2 being stored in M5 Note s 725 us p 723 16 2 16 2 that you can enter an expression like 5 2 for an element of the matrix and it will be evaluated upon entry The figure to the right Function shows the vector 1 2 3 being stored in the
359. n Z Test ccccccseeceeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 248 Two Proportion Z Test ccccccseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 249 One Sample T Test caicinssiashnnehnetossacag ereuthorpavorseccesinreauson s 250 Two Sample Test iss siciuiacius voids teeatsandssedpetions bebeagdbnvatiasuties 251 CONTIEHCSNtELVELS oss icirotessoiuspvansooaadhoandodadms lod nesie seareoiss 253 One Sample Z Interval cccceeecceceeeeeecceeeeeessteeeeeeeenaees 253 Two Sample Z Interval ccceceesceceeeeeseeeeeeesesneeeeeeeeeees 253 One Proportion Zntervall x cssscoinetesceroensravatteesseeoceiraneaguent 254 Two Proportion Z Intervall 43 0ir2 undessstcoeneesueseuerdecaMareatqedee 255 One Sample TMtBrval o cc sini wiataswateouade cyt coeang sveesancannecse 256 Two Sample T Interval 3 04 aur ecretecapteneaeassnvaeesvaonesacdesiaay 256 13 Solve app Getting started with the Solve app eeeeeeeceeseeeeteeeeeeeteteeees 259 ONE QUATION c6 sessie eaan a h E E i 260 Several equations oiia s ic lelcesniorats sxntorseiaernionchutusnteraaaniee 263 Limita ONS eao er Aaa Ea a a R E 264 Solution information lt tsces fiat Madscaadeateoueteaaaisortagrsadiniacties 265 14 Linear Solver app Getting started with the Linear Solver App ecceeeeeeeeseeeees 267 Men Hems tint tater ronet o Ee eri AAE AA AE Aaa Getatiestvaaniees 269 4 Contents 15 Parametric app Getting started with the Parametric App scceeeeese
360. n in this view depends on the hypothesis test or the confidence interval selected in the Symbolic view Alpha Sets the alpha level for the hypothesis test From the Numeric view set the value of Alpha In a program type n gt Alpha where 0 lt n lt 1 Conf Sets the confidence level for the confidence interval From Numeric view set the value of C In a program type n gt Conf where 0 lt n lt 1 568 Programming in HP PPL Mean Mean Ho ny n2 To Sets the value of the mean of a sample for a 1 mean hypothesis test or confidence interval For a 2 mean test or interval sets the value of the mean of the first sample From Numeric view set the value of or x In a program type n Mean For a 2 mean test or interval sets the value of the mean of the second sample From Numeric view set the value of i In a program type n gt Meany Sets the assumed value of the population mean for a hypothesis test From the Numeric view set the value of uo In a program type n uo where O lt p lt 1 Sets the size of the sample for a hypothesis test or confidence interval For a test or interval involving the difference of two means or two proportions sets the size of the first sample From the Numeric view set the value of ni In a program type n n For a test or interval involving the difference of two means or two proportions sets the size of the second sample From the Numeric view set t
361. n the greatest common divisor of two polynomials with at least two variables ezgcd Polyl Poly2 Example ezgcd x 2 2 xyty 2 1 x y returns 1 Returns a vector consisting of the numerator and denominator of an irreducible form of a rational fraction f2nd RatFrac Example rona 5 returns 1 Jx Returns the factorial of an integer or the solution to the gamma function for a non integer factorial Integer or factorial Real Example factorial 4 gives 24 Functions and commands 391 fMax fMin format fracmod froot Given an expression in x returns the value of x for which the expression has its maximum value Given an expression and a variable returns the value of that variable for which the expression has its maximum value fMax Expr Var Example fMax x 2 2 x 1 x gives 1 Given an expression in x returns the value of x for which the expression has its minimum value Given an expression and a variable returns the value of that variable for which the expression has its minimum value fMin Expr Var Example fMin x 2 2 x 1 x gives 1 Returns a real number as a string with the indicated format t float s scientitic e engineering format Real String Example format 9 3456 s3 returns 9 35 For a given integer n representing a fraction and an integer p the modulus returns the fraction a b such that n a b mod p fracmod Integern Integerp Example fracmod
362. n x gives sin x cos x Returns an expression with sin x cos x or tan x rewritten as tan x 2 halftan Expr Example 2 tan halftan sin x returns tan 1 2 Returns an expression simplified using the formulas sin x 2 cos x 2 1 and tan x sin x cos x Sin x is given precedence over cos x and tan x in the result trigsin Expr Example trigsin cos x 4 sin x 2 returns sin x 4 sin x 2 1 Functions and commands 335 trigx gt cosx trigx gt tanx atrig2In tlin tcollect Returns an expression simplified using the formulas sin x 2 cos x 2 1 and tan x sin x cos x Cos x is given precedence over sin x and tan x in the result trigcos Expr Example trigcos sin x 4 sin x 2 returns cos x 4 3 cos x 2 2 Returns an expression simplified using the formulas sin x 2 cos x 2 1 and tan x sin x cos x Tan x is given precedence over sin x and cos x in the result trigtan Expr Example trigtan cos x 4 sin x 2 returns tan x 4 tan x 2 1 tan x 4 2 tan x 2 1 Returns an expression with inverse trigonometric functions rewritten using the natural logarithm function atrig21n Expr Example i pt9 2 i x atrig21n atan x returns Returns a trigonometric expression with the products and integer powers linearized tlin ExprTrig Example tlin sin x 3 gives 2 sin x 4 sin 3 x
363. n_line parallel perpen_bisector Given three points that define a triangle creates the median of the triangle that passes through the first point and contains the midpoint of the segment defined by the other two points median _line pointl point2 point3 Example median _line 0 8i 4 draws the line whose equation is y 2x that is the line through 0 0 and 2 4 the midpoint of the segment whose endpoints are 0 8 and 4 0 Draws a line through a given point that is parallel to a given line parallel point line Examples parallel A B draws the line through point A that is parallel to line B parallel 3 2i x y 5 draws the line through the point 3 2 that is parallel to the line whose equation is x y 5 that is the line whose equation is y x 1 Draws the perpendicular bisector of a segment The segment is defined either by its name or by its two endpoints perpen bisector segment or perpen bisector pointl point2 Examples perpen bisector GC draws the perpendicular bisector of segment C perpen bisector GA GB draws the perpendicular bisector of segment AB perpen bisector 3 2i i draws the perpendicular bisector of a segment whose endpoints have coordinates 3 2 and 0 1 that is the line whose equation is y x 3 1 170 Geometry perpendicular segment tangent Geometry Draws a line through a given point that is perpendicular to a given line The line may be
364. name a cell row or column whether it is empty or not 1 Select the cell row or column 2 Tap and select Name 3 Enter a name and tap The name you give a cell row or column can be used in a formula For example if you name a cell TOTAL you could enter in another cell the formula TOTAL 1 1 200 Spreadsheet The following is a more complex example involving the naming of an entire column 1 Select cell A that is the COST B IC D JE header cell for column A H ou 3 33 10 89 4 36 11 88 2 Enter COST and tap Hits 6 62 20 46 8 0 3 Select cell B that is the 2 b header cell for column B LL Edit_ Format GoTo select Gol 4 Enter Sma cost 0 33 and tap W 5 Enter some values in column A and observe the calculated results in column B Entering content Direct entry You can enter content directly in the spreadsheet or import data from a statistics app A cell can contain any valid calculator object a real number 3 14 a complex number a ib an integer 1Ah a list 1 2 a matrix or vector 1 2 a string text a unit 2_m or an expression that is a formula Move to the cell you want to add content to and start entering the content as you would in Home view Press when you have finished You can also enter content into a number of cells with a single entry Just select the cells enter the content for ex
365. nctionality enables you to move a cursor the trace cursor along the current graph You move the trace cursor by pressing or You can also move the trace cursor by tapping on or near the current plot The trace cursor jumps to the point 8 4 0578905109 R1 8 1 0471975512 on the plot that is closest point to where you tapped The current coordinates of the cursor are shown at the bottom of the screen If menu buttons are hiding the coordinates tap to hide the buttons Trace mode and coordinate display are automatically turned on when a plot is drawn To select a Except in the Advanced Graphing app if there is more than one plot plot displayed press or until the trace cursor is on the plot you are interested in In the Advanced Graphing app tap and hold on the plot you are interested in Either the plot is selected or a menu of plots appears for you select one 94 An introduction to HP apps To evaluate a definition To turn tracing on or off One of the primary uses of the trace functionality is to evaluate a plotted definition Suppose in Symbolic view you have defined F1 X as X 1 3 Suppose further that you want to know what the value of that function is when X is 25 1 Open Plot view EB 2 If the menu at the bottom of the screen is not open tap aden 3 If more than one definition is plotted ensure that the trace cursor is on the plot of the definition you want to evaluate You can press to see the
366. nds Syntax IF test THEN commands END Evaluate test If test is true not O executes commands Otherwise nothing happens Syntax IF fest THEN commands ELSE commands 2 END Evaluate test If test is true non 0 executes commands 1 otherwise executes commands 2 528 Programming in HP PPL Loop CASE IFERR IFERR ELSE FOR Syntax CASE IF fest THEN commands END IF test2 THEN commands2 END DEFAULT commands END Evaluates test If true executes commands1 and ends the CASE Otherwise evaluates test2 If true executes commands2 and ends the CASE Continues evaluating tests until a true is found If no true test is found executes default commands if provided Example CASE IF x lt 0 THEN RETURN negative END IF x lt 1THEN RETURN small END DEFAULT RETURN large END IFERR commands THEN commands2 END Executes sequence of commands If an error occurs during execution of commands executes sequence of commands2 IFERR commands THEN commands2 ELSE commands3 END Executes sequence of commands If an error occurs during execution of commands executes sequence of commands2 Otherwise execute sequence of commands3 Syntax FOR var FROM start TO finish DO commands END Sets variable var to start and for as long as this variable is less than or equa
367. neonssonieaecimas Sinoneyaaees 161 Geometry functions and commands cccseeseeeeeteeeeeeees 165 Symbolic view Cmds menu cccccceceecceeeeeteeeeeeeenseeees 165 Numeric view Cmds menuincgaccsnnseccawaiserecaengaseinapeguseiarsies 182 Other Geometry Munition Siiceissscisucansabsvencspenesiansenuscnsteacaveen 189 9 Spreadsheet Getting started with the Spreadsheet App ccceeesreeeeeeeees 195 Basic operations cccceceeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeceeeeceececceeeeeeeceeenees 199 Navigation selection and gestures ccceessseeeeeeesteeees 199 Cell references ceecceeeseeeeseeeneeceseeeeseeeeesetenseeenseeeeeenss 200 Cell NcinnGs assihedtesasnadeseeenianag wh vaca asta see omananaaete 200 Entering COnteNt sacrae e e a T E 201 Copy and paste 2 1 2048 Lashed tah nang emnanvasteiaddawwantaueuins sneaunertaee 204 External Weterences ois s caiagdntiehidanreaas vmeanvactnumevenaunimanteeweuaaent 204 Referencing variables ccccscccceescceseseeeeeseeeeeseeeeenaes 205 Using the CAS in spreadsheet calculations ceeeeeeeeeees 206 Buttons cel Keys 4csttantacqeduatinnsqanutrinnsatuadenanmcentecdetananiuacns 207 Formatting Options ccccccseccseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 208 SphecelsheSt UNctions xis cassruidarw a tetives Pak vack easement 210 10 Statistics 1Var app Getting started with the Statistics Var app cceeceeseeeeeeeees 211 Entering and editing statisti
368. ngs Home settings control Home view and the apps CAS settings control how calculations are done in the computer algebra system CAS settings are discussed in chapter 3 Although Home settings control the apps you can override certain Home settings once inside an app For example you can set the angle measure to radians in the Home settings but choose degrees as the angle measure once inside the Polar app Degrees then remains the angle measure until you open another app that has a different angle measure You use the Home Home Settings Settings input form to Angle Measure Radians 7 Number Format Standard specify the settings for gt en Home view and the Integers Hex 32 Complex a b i default settings for the anguage Englis Shift EA apps Press em Decimal Mark Dot Settings to open the aena RS en nee eee Home Settings input form There are four pages of settings 30 Getting started Page 1 Setting Options Angle Measure Number Format Degrees 360 degrees in a circle Radians 27 radians in a circle The angle mode you set is the angle setting used in both Home view and the current app This is to ensure that trigonometric calculations done in the current app and Home view give the same result The number format you set is the for mat used in all Home view calcula tions Standard Full precision display Fixed Displays results rounde
369. ns If you prefer the functions to be presented by their command name deselect the Menu Display option on the second page of the Home Settings screen see Home settings on page 30 308 Functions and commands Abbreviations used in this chapter In describing the syntax of functions and commands the following abbreviations and conventions are used Eqn an equation Expr a mathematical expression Enc a function Frac a fraction Intgr an integer Obj signifies that objects of more than one type are allowable here Poly a polynomial RatFrac a rational fraction Val a real value Var a variable Parameters that are optional are given in square brackets as in NORMAL _ICDF u o p For ease of reading commas are used to separate parameters but these are only necessary to separate parameters Thus a single parameter command needs no comma after the parameter even if in the syntax shown below there is a comma between it and an optional parameter An example is the syntax zeros Expr Var The comma is needed only if you are specifying the optional parameter Var Keyboard functions The most frequently used functions are available directly from the keyboard Many of the keyboard functions also accept complex numbers as arguments Enter the keys and inputs shown below and press to evaluate the expression In the examples below shifted functions are represented by the actual keys to be p
370. ns 2 12 Exponent of value That is the integer component of the power of 10 that generates value XPON value Example XPON 123456 returns 5 since 10 gt equals 123456 Maximum The greater of two values MAX valuel value2 Example MAX 8 3 11 4 returns 2 75 Note that in Home view a non integer result is given as a decimal fraction If you want to see the result as a common fraction press J This key cycles through decimal fraction and mixed number representations Or if you prefer 314 Functions and commands Minimum Modulus Find Root Percentage Complex Argument Conjugate press E This opens the computer algebra system If you want to return to Home view to make further calculations press E Minimum The lesser of two values MIN valuel value2 Example MIN 210 25 returns 25 Modulo The remainder of value 1 value2 valuel MOD value2 Example 74 MOD 5 returns 4 Function rootfinder like the Solve app Finds the value for the given variable at which expression most nearly evaluates to zero Uses guess as initial estimate FNROOT expression variable guess Example FNROOT A 9 8 600 1 A 1 returns 61 2244897959 x percent of y that is x 100 y x y Example 20 50 returns 10 Argument Finds the angle defined by a complex number Inputs and outputs use the current angle format set in Home modes ARG x y i Example ARG 3 3 i re
371. nt3 or harmonic _conjugate linel line2 line3 Example harmonic conjugate point 0 0 point 3 0 point 4 0 returns point 12 5 0 Returns the harmonic conjugate of 3 points Specifically returns the harmonic conjugate of point3 with respect to point and point2 and stores the result in the variable var Also accepts three parallel or concurrent lines in this case it returns the equation of the harmonic conjugate line harmonic division pointl point2 point3 var or harmonic _division linel line2 line3 var 189 is_harmonic Example harmonic division point 0 0 point 3 0 point 4 0 p returns point 12 5 0 and stores it in the variable p Tests whether or not 4 points are in a harmonic division or range Returns 1 if they are or O otherwise is_harmonic point1 point2 point3 point4 is_harmonic pointl point2 point3 point4 Example is harmonic point 0 0 point 3 0 point 4 0 point 12 5 0 returns 1 is_harmonic_circle_bundle Returns 1 if the circles build a beam 2 if they have the same center 3 if they are the same circle and O otherwise is_harmonic_circle_bundle circlel circle2 wy Circlen is_harmonic_line_bundle Returns 1 if the lines are concurrent 2 if they are all parallel 3 if they are the same line and 0 otherwise is harmonic _line bundle linel line2 linen is_rhombus Tests whether or not a set of four points are vertices of a rhomb
372. nteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 501 The Program Edito areeni i a 502 The HP Prime programming language scecceeeeeeteeeeeeee 511 The User Keyboard Customizing key presses 00 516 App programs sssseeeeeeessessssssssssesssetestrreetrerereeeeeseeesssest 520 Program COMmmanels 225 5 255 de terwitinniduabwncnpeueisucctrausuenconavensendes 527 Commands under the Tmplt menu ccccceeeetteeeeeeeeees 528 IGE ARNEE eect aac neat hta et tea Sc calolarks teeth Steet 528 sisi eee Cor ee erenT eect nar e a tet teen teat ere 528 LOOP FP Fock EEE E chet onettcettn E T 529 Varia OLS cds ts ot tts datas de Sash Ltd saad Sree Gels abr a aat 533 FUNCHON satsitatteted het AE E opdavesemeconeeeas 533 Commands under the Cmds menu cccccseeeeeeeeeeeeees 534 SHINS 553 So ccstteens cack coat saga acta stad eau acateacontac T 534 BIKO NAA Ge cccattcads thawt taste caaks scanasegn ance sake EATA 536 MATIK eiiieaenii eii e a a a a 544 App Functions asics ais 546 Integer accessi ara saved eii E is 547 VOe enna a a A A S 549 M re ara ri y E EE TA E E S T deadly 554 Variables and Programs s2i i00tincr rater Gena nes 556 Contents 7 28 Basic integer arithmetic Thedefavlt Base cuat eaters doerasae hae air d dua ea a 582 Changing the default bases cs 6 cs aveutvaiwackaceveiteeutareetolaees 583 Examples of integer arithmetic c ccccccceesseeeeesteeeeeneeees 584 Integer met latietics se sskitand tech cheek oeventeaa
373. ntences Graphing Finance Not used Function Specify up to 10 real valued rectangular functions of y in terms of x Geometry View the symbolic definition of geometric constructions Inference Choose to conduct a hypothesis test or test a confidence level and select a type of test Linear Explorer Not used An introduction to HP apps 73 App Use the Symbolic view to Cont Linear Solver Not used Parametric Specify up to 10 parametric functions of x and y in terms of t Polar Specify up to 10 polar functions of r in terms of an angle 9 Quadratics Not used Explorer Sequence Specify up to 10 sequence functions Solve Specify up to 10 equations Spreadsheet Not used Statistics 1Var Specify up to 5 univariate analyses Statistics 2Var Specify up to 5 multivariate analyses Triangle Solver Not used Trig Explorer Not used Symbolic Setup view The Symbolic Setup view is the Polar Symbolic Setup a same for each app It enables E System i j Number Format Radians you to override the system wide forma egress settings for angle measure number format and complex number entry The override applies only to the current app cnoose angle Measure To change the settings for all apps see System wide settings on page 30 74 An introduction to HP apps Plot view The table below outlines what is done in the Plot view of each app App Use the Plot view to Advance
374. nts are vertices of a rectangle Returns O if they are not 1 if they are and 2 if they are vertices of a square is_rectangle pointl point2 point3 point4 Examples is rectangle point 0 0 point 4 2 point 2 6 point 2 4 returns 2 With a set of only three points as argument tests whether or not they are vertices of a right triangle Returns O if they are not If they are returns the number order of the common point of the two perpendicular sides 1 2 or 3 is rectangle point 0 0 point 4 2 point 2 6 returns 2 188 Geometry is_square Tests whether or not a set of four points are vertices of a square Returns 1 if they are and O otherwise is _square pointl point2 point3 point4 Example is square point 0 0 point 4 2 point 2 6 point 2 4 returns 1 Other Geometry functions convexhull The following functions are not available from a menu in the Geometry app but are available from the Catlg menu Returns a vector containing the points that serve as the convex hull for a given set of points convexhull pointl point2 pointn harmonic_conjugate harmonic_division Geometry Returns the harmonic conjugate of 3 points Specifically returns the harmonic conjugate of point3 with respect to point and point2 Also accepts three parallel or concurrent lines in this case it returns the equation of the harmonic conjugate line harmonic _conjugate pointl point2 poi
375. numbers to be calculated according to the sequences specified in Symbolic view and set the zoom factor Not used 78 An introduction to HP apps App Use the Numeric Setup view to Cont Spreadsheet Not used Statistics 1Var Not used Statistics 2Var Not used Triangle Solver Not used Trig Explorer Not used Quick example The following example uses all six app views and should give you an idea of the typical workflow involved in working with an app The Polar app is used as the sample app Open the app 1 Open the Application Library by pressing W 2 Tap once on the icon of the Polar app The Polar app opens in Symbolic View Symbolic view The Symbolic view of the Polar app is where you define or specify the polar equation you want to plot and explore In this example we will plot and explore the equation r 4rcos 0 2 cos 9 3 Define the equation r 4ncos 8 2 cos 8 by entering 42m 200 5 OIL It you are using algebraic entry mode you would enter 4 Sia o 7 2085 EB JC J Polar Symbolic View V E R18 snecod cose mO E R3 6 E R4 0 E R5 8 E R6 0 JaA Enter function Show This equation will draw symmetrical petals provided that the angle measure is set to radians The angle measure for this app is set in the Symbolic Setup view An introduction to HP apps 79 Symbolic Setup view 4
376. ny analysis you are not currently interested in Return to Numeric view In column D2 enter the frequency data shown in the table above 5 Cr a gome 2 ee ier Recalculate the statistics The mean height now is approximately 167 631 cm 5 2 165 3 3 170 a la 175 2 IS 180 j 6 7 8 9 10 160 xX H1 n 19 Min 160 QI 160 Med 170 Q3 170 Max 180 x 3185 De 534525 x 1 676316E2 sX 5 86146101 oX 5 70512721 167 631578947 O TO size Column ok Statistics 1Var app 13 Plot a histogram of Configure a histogram plot for the data ie es gann Statistics 1Var Plot Setup Setu H Width 5 P H Rng 160 180 Enter parameters X Rng 158 182 Y Rng 1 9 appropriote 1o your _____1 data Those shown at vri the right will ensure PAETE Enter horizontal tick spacing that all the data in edit Page tf this particular example are displayed in Plot view the data Press and to move the tracer and see the interval and H1 160 165 FS frequency of each bin You can also tap to select a bin Tap and drag to scroll the Plot view You can also zoom in or out on the cursor by pressing and respectively Entering and editing statistical data Each column in Numeric view is a dataset and is represented by a variable named DO to D9 There are three ways to
377. o another calculator or a PC just as you can apps programs matrices and notes See Sharing data on page 44 for instructions List functions are found on the Math menu You can use them in Home and in programs You can type in the name of the function or you can copy the name of the 1Numbers 2Arithmetic _ gt 3Reverse function from the List sTrigonometry 4Concatenate 4Hyperbolic gt SPosition category of the Math sProbability _ gt Size List 2177 A List menu Matrix 2 8 List 8 Special 2 911 List Press 6 to select the List category in the left column of the Math menu List is the sixth category on the Math menu which is why pressing 6 will take you straight to the List category Tap a function to select it or use the direction keys to highlight it and either tap or press _fue _ J List functions are enclosed in parentheses They have arguments that are separated by commas as in CONCAT L1 L2 An argument can be either a list variable name or the actual list for example REVERSE L1 or REVERSE 1 2 3 Common operators like x and can take lists as arguments If there are two arguments and both are lists then the lists must have the same length since the calculation pairs the elements If there are two arguments and one is a real number then the calculation operates on each element of the list Example 5 1 2 3 returns 5 10 15 Besides
378. o build and explore other sequences and return as needed to your special version of the Sequence app when you next want to explore the Fibonacci series Or you could create a customized version of the Solve app named for example Triangles in which you set up just once the equations for solving common problems involving right angled triangles such as H 0 SIN 0 A H COS 0 O A TAN 0 etc You could continue to use the Solve app to solve other types of problems but use your Triangle app to solve problems involving right angled triangles Just open Triangles select which equation to use you won t need to re enter them enter the variables you know and then solve for the unknown variable An introduction to HP apps 107 Like built in apps customized apps can be sent to another HP Prime calculator This is explained in Sharing data on page 44 Customized apps can also be reset deleted and sorted just as built in apps can as explained earlier in this chapter Note that the only apps that cannot be customized are the Linear Explorer Quadratic Explorer and Trig Explorer apps Example Suppose you want to create a customized app that is based on the built in Sequence app The app will enable you to generate and explore the Fibonacci series 1 Press and use the Application Library cursor keys to highlight the ea Sequence app Don t open Solve Linear Solver rer Trig Explo
379. o functions Finds the intersection if one exists of the two functions Fn and Fm that is closest to the X value guess ISECT Fn Fm guess Example ISECT X 3 X 2 returns 1 5 ROOT Root of a function Finds the root of the function Fn if one exists that is closest to the X value guess ROOT Fn guess Example ROOT 3 X 2 returns 1 732 SLOPE Slope of a function Returns the slope of the function Fn at the X value if the function s derivative exists at that value SLOPE Fn value Example SLOPE 3 X2 2 returns 4 348 Functions and commands Solve app functions The Solve app has a single function that solves a given equation or expression for one of its variables En may be an equation or expression or it may be the name of one of the Solve Symbolic variables EO E9 SOLVE Solve Solves an equation for one of its variables Solves the equation En for the variable var using the value of guess as the initial value for the value of the variable var If En is an expression then the value of the variable var that makes the expression equal to zero is returned SOLVE En var guess Example SOLVE X 2 X 2 X 3 returns 2 This function also returns an integer that is indicative of the type of solution found as follows 0 an exact solution was found 1 an approximate solution was found 2 an extremum was found that is as close to a solution as p
380. o need to tap first e Ifa field allows you to choose an item from a menu you can tap on it the field or the label for the field tap on it again to display the options and tap on the item you want You can also choose an item from an open list by pressing the cursor keys and pressing when the option you want is highlighted e Ifa field is a toggle field one that is either selected or not selected tap on it to select the field and tap on it again to select the alternate option Alternatively select the field and tap RB The illustration at the right Home settings Font Size Medium Font shows an input form with A Calculator Name SSS E all three types of field Textbook Display v Menu Display V Calculator Name is a Time 6 52 PM A Date 2013 4 19 YYY free form data entry field a Color Theme Light Font Size provides a Appeare Enter a name for your calculator menu of options and Paes Textbook Display is a toggle field Getting started 29 Reset input form fields To reset a field to its default value highlight the field and press To reset all fields to their default values press Clear System wide settings Home settings System wide settings are values that determine the appearance of windows the format of numbers the scale of plots the units used by default in calculations and much more There are two system wide settings Home settings and CAS setti
381. o reflect the new properties of that object Consider circle c in the illustration at the right To calculate the area and radius of C 1 Press to open CN laa Numeric view to Pointer 9 2 5 3 2 Tap Gum Zoom Point Line Polygo Curve Transfo 3 Tap and choose Geometry Numeric View Measure gt Area tabscissa 2 affix Note that area Sangle 4arcLen appears on the entry m coordinates line ready for you to elena cee distance specify the object whose _ measure sJedistance2 area you are interested eaistanceat A cmos MEDCT in 4 Tap ME choose Curves and then the curve whose area you are interested in The name of the object is placed between the parentheses 150 Geometry Note Listing all objects Geometry You could have entered the command and object name manually that is without choosing them from menus If you enter object names manually remember that the name of the object in Plot view must be given a G prefix if it is used in any calculation Thus the circle named C in Plot view must be referred to as GC in Numeric view and Symbolic view 5 Press or tap Top MEB Enter radius GC and tap I The radius is displayed The area is displayed Note that the syntax used here is the same as you use in the CAS to calculate the properties of geometric objects Peat v New 1 elete The Geometry
382. ode By default the entry mode is textbook which means that you enter operands and operators just as you would if you were writing the expression on paper If your preferred entry mode is Reverse Polish Notation the order of entry is different See chapter 2 Reverse Polish Notation RPN starting on page 47 Math The math template key uz template helps you insert the framework for common calculations and for vectors matrices and hexagesimal numbers It displays a palette of pre formatted outlines to which you add the constants variables and so on Just tap on the template you want or use the arrow keys to highlight it and press _ _ Then enter the components needed to complete the calculation 24 Getting started Math shortcuts Example Suppose you want to find the cube root of 945 1 In Home view press E 2 Select VO The skeleton or framework for your calculation now appears on the entry line 2m 3 Each box on the template needs to be completed 30 945 A Press to display the result 9 813 The template palette can save you a lot of time especially with calculus calculations You can display the palette at any stage in defining an expression In other words you don t need to start out with a template Rather you can embed one or more templates at any point in the definition of an expression As well as the math template there are other similar screens that offer
383. of the calculator always place the cover over the display and keyboard when you are not using the calculator To adjust the brightness of the display press and hold then press the or key to increase or decrease the brightness The brightness will change with each press of the or key e Press or to clear the entry line e Press Clear to clear the entry line and the history Getting started Sections of the display Title bar Function History Sen 3 96332729761 T n anl 1 73205080758 3 988984046561 7 97796809312 Entry line Menu buttons Home view has four sections shown above The title bar shows either the screen name or the name of the app you are currently using Function in the example above It also shows the time a battery power indicator and a number of symbols that indicate various calculator settings These are explained below The history displays a record of your past calculations The entry line displays the object you are currently entering or modifying The menu buttons are options that are relevant to the current display These options are selected by tapping the corresponding menu button You close a menu without making a selection from it by pressing Ea Annunciators Annunciators are symbols or characters that appear in the title bar They indicate current settings and also provide time and battery power information Annunciator Meaning lt li
384. oint Orde r Dir 1 0 1 Example series x 4 x 2 x 2 1 x 0 5 gives 2 x 2x 2 x 3 3x 4 x 5 x 6o order size x Returns the discrete sum of Expr with respect to the variable Var from Reall to Real2 You can also use the summation template in the Template menu With only the first two arguments returns the discrete antiderivative of the expression with respect to the variable sum Expr Var Reall Real2 Step Example sum n 2 n 1 5 returns 55 Returns the rotational curl of a vector field Curl A B C x y z is defined to be dC dy dB dz dA dzdC dx dB dx dA dy curl Exprl Expr2 ExprN Varl Var2 VarN Example curl 2 x y x z y z x y z returns z x 0 z 2 x Returns the divergence of a vector field defined by divergence A B C x y z dA dx dB dy dC dz divergence Exprl Expr2 ExprN Varl Var2 VarN Example divergence x 2 y x zty z 3 x 2 x y Z gives 2 x 3 z 2 1 Functions and commands 327 Gradient Hessian Integral By Parts u By Parts v Returns the gradient of an expression With a list of variables as second argument returns the vector of partial derivatives grad Expr LstVar Example gGrad 2 x 2 y x Z43 ER Yna gives 2 2 xty ZB pf QERSLZEAHRE SEZ SZ Returns the Hessian matrix of an expression hessian Expr LstVar Example hessian 2 x 2 y x z x y z gi
385. olor c on G between points x y1 and x2 y2 G can be any of the graphics variables and is optional The default is GO c can be any color specified as RRGGBB The default is black Syntax PIXOFF G x y PIXOFF_P G x y Sets the color of the pixel G with coordinates x y to white G can be any of the graphics variables and is optional The default is GO the current graphic 540 Programming in HP PPL PIXON_P PIXON RECT_P RECT Syntax PIXON G x y color PIXON _P G x y color Sets the color of the pixel G with coordinates x y to color G can be any of the graphics variables and is optional The default is GO the current graphic Color can be any color specified as RRGGBB The default is black Syntax RECT G x yl x2 y2 edgecolor fillcolor RECT P G xl yl x2 y2 edgecolor fillcolor Draws a rectangle on G between points x1 y and x2 y2 using edgecolor for the perimeter and fillcolor for the inside G can be any of the graphics variables and is optional The default is GO the current graphic xl y1 are optional The default values represent the top left of the graphic x2 y2 are optional The default values represent the bottom right of the graphic edgecolor and fillcolor can be any color specified as RRGGBB Both are optional and fillcolor defaults to edgecolor if not specified To erase a GROB execute RECT G To clear the screen execute RECT
386. olyl Poly2 Examples igcd 24 36 returns 12 igced 2 3 3 4 returns 1 12 Returns the center of an interval interval2center Interval Example interval2center 2 5 returns 7 2 Returns the inverse of an expression or matrix inv Expr or inv Matrix Example inv 9 5 returns 5 9 396 Functions and commands iPart iquorem jacobi_symbol laplacian Icoeff legendre_symbol Returns a real number without its fractional part or a list of real numbers each without its fractional part iPart Real or iPart List Example iPart 4 3 returns 4 Returns the Euclidean quotient and remainder of two integers iquorem Integerl Integer2 Example iquorem 63 23 returns 2 17 Returns the Jacobi symbol of the given integers jacobi_ symbol Integerl Integer2 Example jacobi_symbol 132 5 gives 1 Returns the Laplacian of an expression with respect to a vector of variables laplacian Expr Vector Example laplacian exp z cos x y x y z returns x 2 cos x y exp z y 2 cos x y exp z cos x y exp z Returns the coefficient of the term of highest degree of a polynomial The polynomial can be expressed in symbolic form or as a list lcoeff Poly or lcoeff List or lcoeff Vector Example lcoeff 2 x 3 x 2 7 x returns 2 With a single integer n returns the Legendre polynomial of degree n With two integers returns the Legendre symbol of the second int
387. om matrix functions in that they do not return a result For this reason these functions can be used in an expression and matrix commands cannot 474 Matrices Argument conventions The matrix commands are designed to support programs that use matrices The matrix commands are listed in the Matrix category of the Commands menu in the Program Editor They are also listed in the Catalog menu one of the Toolbox menus Press and tap to display the commands catalog The matrix functions are described in the following sections of this chapter the matrix commands are described in the chapter Programming see page 544 e For row or column supply the number of the row counting from the top starting with 1 or the number of the column counting from the left starting with 1 The argument matrix can refer to either a vector or a matrix Matrix functions Transpose Determinant The matrix functions are available in the Matrix category on the Math menu Select Mat rix Select a function Transposes matrix For a complex matrix TRN finds the conjugate transpose TRN matrix Example oa 12 returns 13 34 24 Determinant of a square matrix DET matrix Example pen 12 returns 2 34 Matrices 475 RREF Reduced Row Echelon Form Changes a rectangular matrix to its reduced row echelon form RREF matrix Example nae 1 2 1 returns 10 0 2 3 4 1 01 0 4 Create Make Cr
388. on gt Results gt SignedArea Numerous system variables are also available For example you could enter to get the last answer calculated in Home view You could also enter FR E i JL Fue to get the last answer calculated in Home view and have the value automatically updated as new calculations are made in Home view Note that this works only with the Ans from Home view not the Ans from CAS view All the variables available to you are listed on the variables menus displayed by pressing 225 A comprehensive list of these variables is provided in chapter 22 Variables beginning on page 423 Spreadsheet 205 Using the CAS in spreadsheet calculations You can force a spreadsheet calculation to be performed by the CAS thereby ensuring that results are symbolic and thus exact For example the formula VRow in row 5 gives 2 2360679775 if not calculated by the CAS and V5 if it is You choose the calculation engine when you are entering the formula As soon as you begin entering a formula the key changes to or depending on the last selection This is a toggle key Tap on it to change it from one to the other When is showing the calculation will be numeric with the number of significant digits limited by the precsion of the calculator When is showing the calculation will be performed by CAS and be exact In the example at the right the Tf DIA IB IC D IE formula in cell A is exaclty the r
389. on using x f xth f x h 2 h Without a third argument the value of h is set to 0 001 with a real as third argument it is the value of h With a variable as the third argument returns the expression above with that variable in place of h nDeriv Expr Var Real or nDeriv Expr Varl Var2 Example nDeriv f x x h returns f x h x h 0 5 h Unary minus Enters the negative sign Returns the expanded irreducible form of an expression normal Expr Example normal 2 x 2 gives 4 x Given a vector returns it divided by its norm where the norm is the square root of the sum of the squares of the vector s coordinates Given a complex number returns it divided by its modulus normalize Vector or normalize Complex Example normalize 3 4 i gives 3 4 i 5 Returns the logical inverse of a Boolean expression not Expr Returns 1 if a given integer is odd and returns O otherwise odd Integer Example odd 6 gives 0 Logical Or Returns 1 if either or both sides evaluates to true and 0 otherwise Exprl OR Expr2 Example 3 1 4 OR 8 lt 5 returns 1 Functions and commands 403 order_size pa2b2 pade PI PIECEWISE plotinequation Returns the remainder O term of a series expansion limit x a order_size x x 0 0 if a gt 0 order_size Expr Takes a prime integer n congruent to 1 modulo 4 and returns a b such that a 2 b 2 n pa2b2 Integer
390. on the screen and then use the cursor keys to accurately position the point before pressing eee Note that there are on screen instructions to help you For example Hit Center means tap where you want the center of your object to be and Hit Point 1 means tap at the location of the first point you want to add You can draw any number of geometric objects in Plot view See Geometric objects on page 153 for a list of the objects you can draw The drawing tool you choose line circle hexagon etc remains selected until you deselect it This enables you to quickly draw a number of objects of the same type such as a number of hexagons Once you have finished drawing objects of a particular type deselect the drawing tool by press ER You can tell if a drawing tool is still active by the presence of on screen help at the top left side corner of the screen help such as Hit Point 1 An object in Plot view can be manipulated in numerous ways and its mathematical properties can be easily determined see page 150 Object naming Each geometric object you create is given a name In the example shown on page 141 note that the circle has been named C Each defining point is also been named the center point has been named A and the point tapped to set the radius of the circle has been named B It is not only the points that define a geometric object that are given a name Every component of the object that
391. ons of GROB G to w x h Initializes the graphic G with color or with the graphic data provided in list Ifthe graphic is initialized using graphic data then list is a list of integers Each integer as seen in base 16 describes one color every 16 bits Colors are in A1R5G5B5 format that is 1 bit for the alpha channel and 5 bits for R G and B Syntax GETPIX G x y GETPIX P G x y Returns the color of the pixel G with coordinates x y G can be any of the graphics variables and is optional The default is GO the current graphic Syntax GROBH G GROBH_P G Returns the height of G G can be any of the graphics variables and is optional The default is GO Programming in HP PPL 539 GROBW_P GROBW INVERT_P INVERT LINE_P LINE PIXOFF_P PIXOFF Syntax GROBW G GROBW_P G Returns the width of G G can be any of the graphics variables and is optional The default is GO Syntax INVERT G x yl x2 y2 INVERT P G xl yl x2 y2 Executes a reverse video of the selected region G can be any of the graphics variables and is optional The default is GO x2 y2 are optional and if not specified will be the bottom right of the graphic xl yl are optional and if not specified will be the top left of the graphic If only one x y pair is specified it refers to the top left Syntax LINE G xl yl x2 y2 c INE _P G x yl x2 y2 c Draws a line of c
392. oon as you create a definition So if you don t want to plot or evaluate a particular definition highlight it and tap QRZ Do likewise if you want to re select a deselected function Choose a color for plots Each function and open Parametric Symbolic View sentence can be plotted in a different color If you want to change the default color of a plot E vm 1 Tap the colored square to xaT the left of the function s Select graph color definition You can also select the square by pressing while the definition is selected Pressing moves the selection from the definition to the colored square and from the colored square to the definition 2 tap GRRE 3 Select the desired color from the color picker Delete a definition To delete a single definition 1 Tap once on it or highlight it using the cursor keys 2 Press 8 To delete all the definitions 1 Press A G3 2 Tap or press to confirm your intention An introduction to HP apps 85 Symbolic view Summary of menu buttons Button Purpose Copies the highlighted definition to the entry line for editing Tap Barg when done To add a new definition even one that is replacing an existing one highlight the field and just start entering your new definition Selects or deselects a definition om Enters the independent variable in the Function only Function app You can also press Ge Enters an X in the Advanced Graphing Ad
393. or another cell deselects the selection Spreadsheet 199 Cell references Cell naming Method 1 Method 2 Using names in calculations You can refer to the value of a cell in formulas as if it were a variable A cell is referenced by its column and row coordinates and references can be absolute or relative An absolute reference is written as C R where Cis the column number and R the row number Thus B 7 is an absolute reference In a formula it will always refer to the data in cell B7 wherever that formula or a copy of it is placed On the other hand B7 is a relative reference It is based on the relative position of cells Thus a formula in say B8 that references B7 will reference C7 instead of B7 if it is copied to C8 Ranges of cells can also be specified as in C6 E12 as can entire columns E E or entire rows 3 5 Note that the alphabetic component of column names can be uppercase or lowercase except for columns g m and z These must be in lowercase if not preceded by Thus cell B1 can be referred to as B1 b1 B 1 or b 1 whereas M1 can only be referred to as m1 m 1 or M 1 G L M and Z are names reserved for graphic objects lists matrices and complex numbers Cells rows and columns can be named The name can then be used in a formula A named cell is given a blue border To name an empty cell row or column go the cell row header or column header enter a name and tap EEB To
394. or help see page 501 Then enter the code in the Program Editor EXPORT ROLLDIE N BEGIN RETURN 1 RANDINT N 1 END The first line is the heading of the function Execution of the RETURN statement causes a random integer from 1 to N to be calculated and returned as the result of the function Note that the RETURN command causes the execution of the function to terminate Thus any statements between the RETURN statement and END are ignored In Home view in fact anywhere in the calculator where a number can be used you can enter ROLLDIE 6 anda random integer between 1 and 6 inclusive will be returned Because of the EXPORT command in ROLLDIE another program could use the ROLLDIE function and generate n rolls of a die with any number of sides In the following program the ROLLDIE function is used to generate n rolls of two dice each with the number of sides given by the local variable sides The results are stored in list L2 so that L2 1 shows the number of times the dies came up with a combined total of 1 L2 2 shows the number of times the dies came up with a combined total of 2 etc L2 1 should be O since the sum of the numbers on 2 dice must be at least 2 EXPORT ROLLMANY n sides BEGIN LOCAL k roll initialize list of frequencies MAKELIST 0 X 1 2 sides 1 gt L2 FOR k FROM 1 TO n DO ROLLDIE sides ROLLDIE sides gt roll 514 Programmin
395. or to the column of interest tap EENS select Ascending or Descending and tap 3 Only visible if NumTYPE is set to BuildYourOwn See Custom tables on page 103 Lets you choose between small medium and large font Toggles between showing the value of the cell and the definition that generated the value 104 An introduction to HP apps Button Purpose Cont Displays a menu for you to choose to display the evaluations of 1 2 3 or 4 defintions If you have more than four definitions seelcted in Symbolic view you can press to scroll rightwards and see more columns Pressing scrolls the columns leftwards Common operations in Numeric Setup view Scope Advanced Graphing Function Parametric Polar Sequence Press to open Numeric Setup view The Numeric Setup view is used Function Num Setup 07 497 gt numsp oo Num Step 1 e set the starting number for the independent variable in NumZoom 4 automatic tables displayed in Numeric view the Num Start field Enter table start value ea Edita ee ee es es Num Type Automatic e set the increment between consecutive numbers in automatic tables displayed in Numeric view the Num Step field e specify whether the table of data to be displayed in Numeric view is to be based on the specified starting number and increment automatic table or to based on particular numbers for the independent variable that your
396. ossible 3 neither a solution an approximation nor an extremum was found See chapter 13 Solve app beginning on page 259 for more information about the types of solutions returned by this function Spreadsheet app functions The spreadsheet app functions can be selected from the App Toolbox menu press tap and select Spreadsheet They can also be selected from the View menu E when the Spreadsheet app is open Functions and commands 349 The syntax for many but not all the spreadsheet functions follows this pattern functionName input optional parameters Input is the input list for the function This can be a cell range reference a simple list or anything that results in a list of values One useful optional parameter is Configuration This isa string that controls which values are output Leaving the parameter out produces the default output The order of the values can also be controlled by the order that they appear in the string For example DIA IB IC D IE STAT1 A25 A37 1 STATI roduces the followin ee s p g 3 x 6006 EX2 2790298 default output based on the x sa numerical values in cells Sea a 8 jox2 1194 307 A25 through A37 9 serrx 19 976253 10FXi 2P 115526 Pa However if you just wanted to see the number of data P E i P i points the mean and the H
397. ot to return to the E number of rolls and execute a simulation SEBEDE 3 Select Set Rolls and enter 100 Select Set Sides and enter 6 5 Select Roll Dice You will see a histogram similar to the own shown in the figure 6 Press to see the data and to return to the histogram 7 To run another simulation press and select Roll Dice Program commands This section describes each program command The commands under the menu are described first The commands under the menu are described in Commands under the Cmds menu on page 534 Programming in HP PPL 527 Commands under the Tmplt menu Block BEGIN END RETURN KILL Branch IF THEN IF THEN ELSE The block commands determine the beginning and end of a sub routine or function There is also a Return command to recall results from sub routines or functions Syntax BEGIN commandl command2 commandN END Defines a command or set of commands to be executed together In the simple program EXPORT SQM1 X BEGIN RETURN X 2 1 END the block is the single RETURN command If you entered SQM1 8 in Home view the result returned would be 63 Syntax RETURN expression Returns the current value of expression Syntax KILL Stops the step by step execution of the current program with debug In what follows the plural word commands refers to both a single command or a set of comma
398. ot used Linear Explorer Not used Linear Solver Not used Parametric Polar Quadratics Explorer Sequence Solve Spreadsheet Statistics 1 Var Statistics 2Var Triangle Solver Trig Explorer Modify the appearance of plots and the plot environment Modify the appearance of plots and the plot environment Not used Modify the appearance of plots and the plot environment Modify the appearance of plots and the plot environment Not used Modify the appearance of plots and the plot environment Modify the appearance of plots and the plot environment Not used Not used 76 An introduction to HP apps Numeric view The table below outlines what is done in the Numeric view of each app App Use the Numeric view to Advanced View a table of numbers generated by the Graphing open sentences selected in Symbolic view Finance Enter values for time value of money calculations Function View a table of numbers generated by the functions selected in Symbolic view Geometry Perform calculations on the geometric objects drawn in Plot view Inference Specify the statistics needed to perform the Linear Explorer Linear Solver Parametric Polar Quadratics Explorer Sequence Solve Spreadsheet Statistics 1 Var Statistics 2Var test selected in Symbolic view Not used Specify the coefficients of the linear equations to be solved View a table of numbers generated by the functions
399. ou select a drawing tool it remains selected until you deselect it This enables you to quickly draw a number of objects of the same type such as a number of circles To deselect the current drawing tool press RM You can tell if a drawing tool is still active by the presence of on screen help in the top left side corner of the screen help such as Hit Point 1 The steps provided in this section are based on touch entry For example to add a point the steps will tell you to fap on the screen where you want the point to be and press _ _ However you can also use the cursor keys to position the cursor where you want the point to be and then press The drawing tools for the geometric objects listed in this section can be selected from the menu buttons at the bottom of the screen Some objects can also be entered using a keyboard shortcut For example you can select the triangle drawing tool by pressing Keyboard shortcuts are only available if they have been turned on in Plot Setup view See page 146 Tap to display a menu and submenus of options for entering various types of points The menus and submenus are Tap where you want the point to be and press _ Keyboard shortcut Tap the object where you want the new point to be and press _ far If you select a point that has been placed on an object and then move that point the point will be constrained to the object on which it was placed For example a point
400. ou would need to gain sales of a specified amount However a more accurate method is available return to Home view and enter Predx s where s is the sales figure Predy and Predx are app functions They are discussed in detail in Statistics 2Var app functions on page 365 Entering and editing statistical data Note Each column in Numeric view is a dataset and is represented by a variable named CO to C9 There are three ways to get data into a column Go to Numeric view and enter the data directly See Getting started with the Statistics 2Var app on page 223 for an example Go to Home view and copy the data from a list For example if you enter L1 C1 in Home view the items in list L1 are copied into column C1 in the Statistics 1Var app Go to Home view and copy the data from a the Spreadsheet app For example suppose the data of interest is in A1 A10 in the Spreadsheet app and you want to copy it into column c7 With the Statistics 2Var app open return to Home view and enter Spreadsheet Al A10 oo ae A data column must have at least four data points to provide valid two variable statistics 228 Statistics 2Var app Whichever method you use the data you enter is automatically saved You can leave this app and come back to it later You will find that the data you last entered is still available After entering the data you must define data sets and the way they are to be plotted
401. ough a few are global by design For example c1 is used by the Statistics 2Var app to store statistical data This variable is global so that you can access that data from anywhere in the system Again these names cannot be used to name a program or store data of a type other than their design allows A full list of system and app Programming in HP PPL 511 variables is given in chapter 22 Variables beginning on page 423 In a program you can declare variables for use only within a particular function This is done using a LOCAL declaration The use of local variables enables you to declare and use variables that will not affect the rest of the calculator Local variables are not bound to a particular type that is you can store floating point numbers integers lists matrices and symbolic expressions in a variable with any local name Although the system will allow you to store different types in the same local variable this is poor programming practice and should be avoided Variables declared in a program should have descriptive names For example a variable used to store the radius of a circle is better named RADIUS than VGFTRFG You are more likely to remember what the variable is used for if its name matches its purpose If a variable is needed after the program executes it can be exported from the program using the EXPORT command To do this the first command in the program that is on a line above the prog
402. ough point C ellipse GA GB 3 draws an ellipse whose foci are points A and B For any point P on the ellipse AP BP 6 Draws one of the excircles of a triangle a circle tangent to one side of the triangle and also tangent to the extensions of the other two sides excircle pointl point2 point3 Example excircle GA GB GC draws the circle tangent to BC and to the rays AB and AC Draws a hyperbola given the foci and either a point on the hyperbola or a scalar that is one half the constant difference of the distances from a point on the hyperbola to each of the foci hyperbola pointl point2 point3 or hyperbola pointl point2 realk Examples hyperbola GA GB GC draws the hyperbola whose foci are points A and B and which passes through point C hyperbola GA GB 3 draws a hyperbola whose foci are points A and B For any point P on the hyperbola AP BP 6 177 incircle locus parabola Transform dilation Draws the incircle of a triangle the circle tangent to all three sides of the triangle incircle pointl point2 point3 Example incircle GA GB GC draws the incircle of AABC Given a first point and a second point that is an element of a point on a geometric object draws the locus of the first point as the second point traverses its object locus point element Draws a parabola given a focus point and a directrix line or the vertex of the parabola and a real number that
403. ould modify a plot by changing its definition in Symbolic view However you can modify some plots by changing the Plot Setup parameters For example you can plot a triangle instead of a circle simply by changing two plot setup parameters The definitions in Symbolic view remain unchanged Here is how it is done 10 Press Setup 11 Change T Step to 120 12 Top SEZSA 13 From the Method menu select Fixed Step Segments 14 Press EB A triangle is displayed instead of a circle This is because the new value of T Step makes the points being plotted 120 apart instead of the T 0 0 08 nearly continuous 5 And by selecting Fixed Step Segments the points 120 apart are connected with line segments 274 Parametric app Y1 8 7 999987815 7 999951261 7 999890338 7 999805046 17 999695385 7 999561355 7 999402957 17 999220192 7 999013060 7 998781561 e Display the 15 Display the T XI 0 0 numeric view Numeric view 0 1 1 396263E 2 0 2 2 792521E 2 0 3 4 1887716 2 0 4 I5 585008E 2 0 5 6 981228E 2 1 i 0 6 I8 377427E 2 16 With the cursor in p Feiler 10 8 1 116974E 1 the T column type 0 9 1 256585E 1 a new value and i 13961931 D tap EI The Zoom table scrolls to the value you entered Size Defn Column You can also zoom in or out on the independent variable thereby decreasing or increasing the increment between consecutive values This
404. ower bound for u Upper bound for u Two Sample T Interval Menu name T Int wy u2 This option uses the Student s t distribution to calculate a confidence interval for the difference between the means of two populations u1 u2 when the population standard deviations ojand o are unknown 256 Inference app Inputs The inputs are Result Definition Ry Sample 1 mean X Sample 2 mean S Sample 1 standard deviation S2 Sample 2 standard deviation ny Sample 1 size n2 Sample 2 size C Confidence level Pooled Whether or not to pool the samples based on their standard deviations Results The results are Result Description C Confidence level DF Degrees of freedom Critical T Critical values for T Lower Lower bound for A u Upper Upper bound for Au 257 Inference app 258 Inference app 13 Solve app The Solve app enables you to define up to ten equations or expressions each with as many variables as you like You can solve a single equation or expression for one of its variables based on a seed value You can also solve a system of equations linear or non linear again using seed values Note the differences between an equation and an expression e An equation contains an equals sign Its solution is a value for the unknown variable that makes both sides of the equation have the same value e An expression does not contain an equals sign Its solution is a root a value for t
405. p but app variables give you a quick way of doing these tasks either from Home or within a program For example you can store the expression SIN X in the Function app variable F1 in Home View or you could open the Function app navigate to F1 X and enter SIN X in that field CAS and user variables can be created by the user and they have no particular type Their names may be of any length as well Thus diff t2 t returns 2 t and diff bt 2 bt returns 2 bt for the CAS variables t and bt Further evaluation of 2 bt will only return 2 bt unless an object has been stored in bt For example if you enter bt 1 2 3 and then enter diff bt 2 bt the CAS will still return 2 bt But if Variables 423 you evaluate that result using the EVAL command the CAS will now return 2 4 6 User variables are explicitly created by the user You create user variables either in a program or by assignment in Home view User variables created in a program are either declared as local or exported as global User variables created by assignment or exported from a program will show up in the Vars User menu Local variables exist only within their own program The following sections describe the various processes associated with variables such as creating them storing objects in them and retrieving their contents The rest of the chapter contains tables that list all the Home and app variable names
406. p enter a value for FV In a program type n FV Positive values represent return on an investment or loan Programming in HP PPL 571 IPYR Interest per year Sets the annual interest rate for a cash flow From the Numeric view of the Finance app enter a value for SYR In a program type nhPIPYR where n gt 0 NbPmt Number of payments Sets the number of payments for a cash flow From the Numeric view of the Finance app enter a value for N In a program type nh gt NbPmt where n gt 0 PMTV Payment value Sets the value of each payment in a cash flow From the Numeric view of the Finance app enter a value for PMTV In a program type n PMTV Note that payment values are negative if you are making the payment and positive if you are receiving the payment PPYR Payments per year Sets the number of payments made per year for a cash flow calculation From the Numeric view of the Finance app enter a value for P YR In a program type nPPPYR where n gt 0 PV Present value Sets the present value of an investment From the Numeric view of the Finance app enter a value for PV In a program type nhPV Note negative values represent an investment or loan 572 Programming in HP PPL GSize Linear Solver app variables LSystem Triangle Solver app variables SideA SideB Group size Sets the size of each group for the amortization table From the Numeric view of the Finance app enter a value for
407. partial fraction decomposition on a fraction partfrac RatFrac or Opt Example partfrac x 4 x 2 returns 1 2 x 2 1 2 x 2 Simplified Numerator For the integers a and b returns the numerator of the fraction a b after simplification numer a b Example numer 10 12 returns 5 Simplified Denominator For the integers a and b returns the denominator of the fraction a b after simplification denom a b Example denom 10 12 returns 6 Returns the left side of an equation or the left end of an interval left Exprl Expr2 or left Reall Real2 Example left x 2 1 2 x 3 returns x 2 1 Returns the right side of an equation or the right end of an interval right Exprl Expr2 or right Reall Real2 Example right x 2 1 2 x 3 returns 2 x 3 Functions and commands 325 Calculus Differentiate Integrate Limit With one expression as argument returns derivative of the expression with respect to x With one expression and one variable as arguments returns the derivative or partial derivative of the expression with respect to the variable With one expression and more than one variable as arguments returns the derivative of the expression with respect to the variables in the second argument These arguments can be followed by k k is an integer to indicate the number of times the expression should be derived with respect to the variable For example dif
408. pe nbAngleA where n gt 0 AngleB The measure of angle B Sets the measure of angle B The value of this variable will be interpreted according to the angle mode setting Degrees or Radians From the Triangle Solver Numeric view enter a positive value for angle B In a program type nbAngleB where n gt 0 AngleC The measure of angle C Sets the measure of angle C The value of this variable will be interpreted according to the angle mode setting Degrees or Radians From the Triangle Solver Numeric view enter a positive value for angle C In a program type nbAnglec where n gt 0 574 Programming in HP PPL RECT Home Settings variables Ans HAngle HDigits HFormat Corresponds to the status of S in the Numeric view of the Triangle Solver app Determines whether a general triangle solver or a right triangle solver is used From the Triangle Solver view tap SPEB In a program type 0 gt RECT for the general Triangle Solver 1 gt RECT for the right Triangle Solver The following variables except Ans are found in Home Settings The first four can all be over written in an app s Symbolic Setup view Contains the last result calculated in the Home view Sets the angle format for the Home view In Home Settings choose Degrees or Radians for angle measure In a program type 0 gt HAngle for Degrees 1 gt HAngle for Radians Sets the number of digits for a number format other than Standar
409. pen the Geometry app press and select Geometry The app opens in Plot view Getting started with the Geometry app Geometry The following example shows how you can graphically represent the derivative of a curve and have the value of the derivative automatically update as you move a point of tangency along the curve The curve to be explored is y 3sin x Since the accuracy of our calculation in this example is not too important we will first change the number format to fixed at 3 decimal places This will also help keep our geometry workspace uncluttered 135 Preparation Open the app and plot the graph Press Si ay On the Home Setting screen set the number format to Fixed and the number of decimal places to 3 Press and select Geometry If there are objects showing that you don t need press and confirm your intention by tapping HB Select the type of graph you want to plot In this example we are plotting a simple sinusoidal function so choose gt Plot gt Function With plotfunc on the entry line enter 3 sin x Note that x must be entered in lowercase in the Geometry app If your graph doesn t resemble the illustration i at the right adjust the X A f 2 Rng and Y Rng values ho in Plot Setup view L w l gt EB f i 6 4 2 Pointer 4 25 2 42 We HOW Bec a pain to the curve a point that will be constrained always to follow the contour of the curve
410. pend 1 2 3 gives 3 1 2 Returns a polynomial divided by the greatest common divisor of its coefficients primpart Poly Var Example primpart 2x 2 10x 6 gives x 2 5 x 3 With an expression as the first argument returns the product of solutions when the variable in the expression goes from a minimum value to a maximum value by a given step If no step is provided it is taken as 1 With a list as the first argument returns the product of the values in the list With a matrix as the first argument returns the element by element product of the matrix product Expr Var Min Max Step or product List or product Matrix Example product n n 1 10 2 gives 945 408 Functions and commands propfrac ptayl purge q2a quantile quartile1 Returns a fraction or rational fraction A B simplified to Q r B where R lt B or the degree of R is less than the degree of B propfrac Fraction or propfrac RatFrac Example propfrac 28 12 gives 2 1 3 Given a polynomial P and a value a returns the Taylor polynomial Q such that P x Q x a ptayl Poly Value Var Example ptayl x 2 2 x 1 1 gives x 2 4 x 4 Unassigns a variable name purge Var Given a quadratic form and a vector of variables returns the matrix of the quadratic form with respect to the given variables q2a Expr Vector Example q2a x 2 2 x y 2 y 2 x y returns J Given a list or vector
411. ple append 1 2 3 4 gives 1 2 3 4 Returns a vector containing the results of applying a function to the elements in a list apply Var f Var List Example apply x x 3 1 2 3 gives 1 8 27 Used in programming to state an assumption about a variable assume Var Expr Example assume n integer 382 Functions and commands basis black blue bounded_function breakpoint canonical_form cat cFactor Given a matrix returns the basis of the linear subspace defined by the set of vectors in the matrix basis Matrix Example basis 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 gives 3 0 3 0 3 6 Used in the Symbolic view of the Geometry app In the definition of a geometric object including the statement display black specifies that the object defined will be drawn in black Used in the Symbolic view of the Geometry app In the definition of a geometric object including the statement display blue specifies that the object defined will be drawn in dark blue Returns the argument returned by a limit function thereby indicating that the function is bounded Used in programming to insert an intentional stopping or pausing point Returns a second degree trinomial in canonical form canonical form QuadraticExpr Var Example canonical _form 2 x 2 12 x 1 gives 2 x 3 2 17 Evaluates the objects in a sequence then returns them concatenated as a string cat
412. ppear in bold CAS Settings XSTEP Decimal Mark etc A menu item selected by touching the screen is represented by an image of that item Note that you must use your finger to select a menu item Using a stylus or something similar will not select whatever is touched Preface Notice e Items you can select from a list and characters on the entry line are set in a non proportional font as follows Function Polar Parametric Ans etc Cursor keys are represented by and You use these keys to move from field to field on a screen or from one option to another in a list of options e Error messages are enclosed in quotation marks Syntax Error This manual and any examples contained herein are provided as is and are subject to change without notice Except to the extent prohibited by law Hewlett Packard Company makes no express or implied warranty of any kind with regard to this manual and specifically disclaims the implied warranties and conditions of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose and Hewlett Packard Company shall not be liable for any errors or for incidental or consequential damage in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this manual and the examples herein 1994 1995 1999 2000 2003 2006 2010 2013 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P The programs that control your HP Prime are copyrighted and all rights are reserved Reproduction adap
413. pressions the first for x and the second for y in terms of a third independent variable arcLen expr reall real2 Examples arcLen x 2 x 2 2 returns 9 29 arcLen sin t cos t t 0 m 2 returns 1 57 Returns the area of a circle or polygon area circle or area polygon This command can also return the area under a curve between two points area expr x valuel value2 183 Examples If GA is defined to be the unit circle then area GA returns T area 4 x 2 4 x 4 4 returns 14 666 coordinates Given a vector of points returns a matrix containing the x and y coordinates of those points Each row of the matrix defines one point the first column gives the x coordinates and the second column contains the y coordinates coordinates pointl point2 pointn distance Returns the distance between two points or between a point and a curve distance pointl point2 or distance point curve Examples distance 1 i 3 3i returns 2 828 or 2V2 if GA is the point at 0 0 and GB is defined as plotfunc 4 x 2 4 then distance GA GB returns 3 464 or 2V3 distance2 Returns the square of the distance between two points or between a point and a curve distance2 pointl point2 or distance2 point curve Examples distance2 1 i 3 3i returns 8 If GA is the point at 0 0 and GB is defined as plottunc 4 x 2 4 then distance2 GA GB returns 12 184 Geometry equat
414. pulation for the case in which a sample of size n has a number of successes x Inputs The inputs are Field Definition name x Sample success count Sample size Confidence level 254 Inference app Results The results are Result Description C Confidence level Critical Z Critical values for Z Lower Lower bound for x Upper Upper bound for x Two Proportion Z Interval Menu name Zlnt 11 72 This option uses the Normal Zdistribution to calculate a confidence interval for the difference between the proportions of successes in two populations Inputs The inputs are Field Definition name x Sample 1 success count Ry Sample 2 success count ny Sample 1 size Ny Sample 2 size c Confidence level Results The results are Result Description C Confidence level Critical Z Critical values for Z Lower Lower bound for Ar Upper Upper bound for Ar Inference app 255 One Sample T Interval Menu name TInt 1 u This option uses the Student s t distribution to calculate a confidence interval for p the true mean of a population for the case in which the true population standard deviation o is unknown Inputs The inputs are Field name X s n C Results The results are Definition Sample mean Sample standard deviation Sample size Confidence level Result Description C DF Critical T Lower Upper Confidence level Degrees of freedom Critical values for T L
415. qrt 2 Returns the standard deviation of the elements of a list or a list of the standard deviations of the columns of a matrix The optional second list is a list of weights stddev Listl List2 or stddev Vectorl Vector2 or stddev Matrix Example stddev 1 2 3 returns 416 Functions and commands stddevp sto sturmseq subMat suppress surd Returns the population standard deviation of the elements of a list or a list of the population standard deviations of the columns of a matrix The optional second list is a list of weights n tddevp Listl List2 or tddevp Vectorl Vector2 or stddevp Matrix n Example stddevp 1 2 3 gives 1 Stores a real or string in a variable sto Real or Str Var Returns the Sturm sequence for a polynomial or a rational fraction sturmsegq Poly Var Example sturmseg x 3 1 x gives 1 1 0 0 1 3 0 0 9 1 Extracts from a matrix a sub matrix whose diagonal is defined by four integers The first two integers define the row and column of the first element and the last two integers define the row and column of the last element of the sub matrix subMat Matrix Intl Int2 Int3 Int4 Example te 34 subMat 3 4 2 1 3 2 returns 56 56 Given a list and an element deletes the first occurrence of the element in the list if there is one and returns the result suppress List Element Example suppress 0 1 2
416. quations Enter a seed 4 Display Numeric view value solve Numeric View Unlike the example above in this example we have no values for any variable You can either enter a seed value for one of the Enter value or press SOLVE DEEN SOLVE Solve app 263 Solve the unknown variables Limitations variables or let the calculator provide a solution Typically a seed value is a value that directs the calculator to provide if possible a solution that is closest to it rather than some other value In this example let s look for a solution in the vicinity of X 2 5 Enter the seed value in the X field The calculator will provide one solution if there is one and you will not be alerted if there are multiple solutions Vary the seed values to find other potential solutions 6 Select the variables you want solutions for In this example we want to find values for both X and Y so make sure that both variables are selected Note too that if you have more than two variables you can enter seed values for more than one of them SOVE NOMEE View i X2 28388218142 v 3 28388218142 7 Tap to find a solution near X 2 that satisfies each selected equation Solutions if found are displayed beside each selected variable Enter value or press SOLVE DEFN SOLVE You cannot plot equations if more than one is selected in Symbolic view The HP Prime will not
417. r or lists or an ordered pair X Y for graphics SUB M1 1 2 2 2 Syntax SWAPCOL name column column2 Swaps column and column2 of the specified matrix name Syntax SWAPROW name row row2 Swaps row and row2 in the specified matrix name Programming in HP PPL 545 App Functions STARTAPP STARTVIEW These commands allow you to launch any HP app bring up any view of the current app and change the options in the View menu Syntax STARTAPP name Starts the app with name This will cause the app program s START function to be run if it is present The app s default view will be started Note that the START function is always executed when the user taps in the Application Library This also works for user defined apps Example STARTAPP Function launches the Function app Syntax STARTVIEW n draw Starts the nth view of the current app If draw is true that is not 0 it will force an immediate redrawing of the screen for that view The view numbers n are as follows Symbolic 0 Plot 1 Numeric 2 Symbolic Setup 3 Plot Setup 4 Numeric Setup 5 App Info 6 View Menu 7 First special view Split Screen Plot Detail 8 Second special view Split Screen Plot Table 9 Third special view Autoscale 10 Fourth special view Decimal 11 Fifth special view Integer 12 Sixth special view Trig 13 The special views in parentheses refer to the Function app
418. r regulatory matters is Hewlett Packard GmbH Dept MS HQ TRE Herren berger Strasse 140 71034 Boeblingen GERMANY Product regulatory information 597 Japanese Notice CORE 77ABBRRMHRE CT CORE RR CEA FECEEBNECLTWETD COREPIVAPTLEYaY SRK TEL CEA ANS C BEBE CSSMCTCEPSVETF PIRSA tes CIEL RW RUELT RAL VCCI B Korean Class Notice 0 IIE AWEZCSHC2 HAMARS H INNA F 2 WBA ASSE AS SACS oH PE AAAA At SH Such BS 2121 Os S5422 Disposal of Waste Equipment by Users This symbol on the product or on its in Private Sa Leda a this iin must A not be disposed of with your other Household in the household waste Instead it is your European Union responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by handing it over to a designated collection point for the Lz recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling please contact your local city office your household waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product 598 Product regulatory information Chemical Substances HP is committed to providing our customers with informa tion about the chemical substances in our products as
419. r than or equal inequality test Returns 1 if the left side of the inequality is greater than the right side or if the two sides are equal and O otherwise Evaluates the expression then stores the result in variable var Note that cannot be used with the graphics GO G9 See the command BLIT expression P var Inserts the imaginary number i Returns the inverse of an expression Expr 7 Creating your own functions You can create your own function by writing a program see chapter 27 or by using the simpler DEFINE functionality Functions you create yourself appear on the User menu one of the Toolbox menus Suppose you wanted to create the function SINCOS A B SIN A COS B C 1 Press Define 2 Inthe Name field enter a name for the function for example SINCOS and tap Narre Function Enter the name for your user function Functions and commands 421 3 In the Function field enter the function SX BBA 25 BO Bic New fields appear below your function one for each variable used in defining it You need to decide which ones are to be input arguments for your functions and which ones are global variables whose values are not input within the function In this example we ll make A and B input variables so our new function takes two arguments The value of C will be provided by global variable C which by default is zero Name SINC
420. r2 var1 when the sum is looked at as a Riemann sum associated with a continuous function defined on 0 1 sum_riemann Expr Xpr Lst varl var2 Example sum_riemann 1 n k n k gives 1n 2 Returns the Taylor series expansion of an expression at a point or at infinity by default at x 0 and with relative order 5 taylor Expr Var Value Order Example taylor sin x x x 0 returns 1 1 6 x 2 1 120 x 4 x 6 order size x Returns the n degree Taylor polynomial for the quotient of 2 polynomials divpc Polyl Poly2 Integer Example d divpe x 4 x 2 x 2 1 5 returns the 5th degree polynomial x 5 3 x 4 x 3 2 x 2 x 2 Returns the Laplace transform of an expression laplace Expr Var LapVar Example laplace exp x sin x gives 1 x 2 2 x 2 Functions and commands 329 Inverse Laplace FFT Inverse FFT Solve Solve Returns the inverse Laplace transform of an expression invlaplace Expr Var IlapVar Example ilaplace 1 x 2 1 2 returns x cos x 2 sin x 2 With one argument a vector returns the discrete Fourier transform in R fft Vect With two additional integer arguments a and p returns the discrete Fourier transform in the field Z pZ with a as primitive nth root of 1 n size vector fft Vector a p Example fft 1 2 3 4 0 0 0 0 gives 10 0 0 414213562373 7 24264068712 i 2 0 2 0 1 2 41421356237 1 2426406
421. ram type LIST gt Dn where n 0 1 2 3 9 and LIST is either a list or the name of a list Numindep Specifies the list of independent values or two value sets Function of independent values to be used by Build Your Own Parametric Table Enter your values one by one in the Numeric view Polar In a program type Sequence Advanced LIST gt NumIndep Graphing List can be either a list itself or the name of a list In the case of the Advanced Graphing app the list will be a list of pairs a list of 2 element vectors rather than a list of numbers NumStart Sets the starting value for a table in Numeric view Honan A From Numeric Setup view enter a value for NUMSTART Parametric Polar In a program type Sequence n gt NumStart NumXStart Sets the starting number for the X values in a table in Advanced Graphing Numeric view From Numeric Setup view enter a value for NUMXSTART In a program type n gt NumXStart 566 Programming in HP PPL NumYStart Advanced Graphing NumStep Function Parametric Polar Sequence NumXStep Advanced Graphing NumYStep Advanced Graphing NumType Function Parametric Polar Sequence Advanced Graphing NumZoom Function Parametric Polar Sequence Sets the starting value for the Y values in a table in Numeric view From Numeric Setup view enter a value for NUMYSTART In a program type n gt NumYStart Sets the step size increment value for the independent variable in
422. ram name would be EXPORT RADIUS Then if a value is assigned to RADIUS the name appears on the variables menu amp 5 and is visible globally This feature allows for extensive and powerful interactivity among different environments in the HP Prime Note that if another program exports a variable with the same name the most recently exported version will be active The program below prompts the user for the value of RADIUS and exports the variable for use outside the program EXPORT RADIUS EXPORT GETRADIUS BEGIN INPUT RADIUS END 512 Programming in HP PPL Qualifying the name of a variable Functions their arguments and parameters Note that EXPORT Function command for the variable RADIUS appears before the heading of the function where RADIUS is assigned After you 1 GETRADIUS ERAD execute this program a GBT new variable named RADIUS appears on the USER GETRADIUS section of the Variables menu The HP Prime has many system variables with names that are apparently the same For example the Function app has a variable named Xmin but so too does the Polar app the Parametric app the Sequence app and the Solve app In a program and in the Home view you can refer to a particular version of these variables by qualifying its name This is done by entering the name of the app or program that the variable belongs to followed by a dot
423. relations palette EL Factorial Returns the factorial of a positive integer For non integers x 1 This calculates the Gamma function value Example 6 returns 720 x percent of y Returns x 100 y s x y Example 20 50 returns 10 Percent change from x to y Returns 100 y x x CHANGE x y Example CHANGE 20 50 returns 150 Percent total the percentage of x that is y Returns 100 y x STOTAL x y Example STOTAL 20 50 returns 250 Inserts opening parenthesis Multiplication symbol Returns the product of two numbers or the scalar product of two vectors Functions and commands 379 Addition symbol Returns the sum of two numbers the term by term sum of two lists or two matrices or adds two strings together Subtraction symbol Returns the difference of two numbers or the term by term subtraction of two lists or two matrices List or matrix multiplication symbol Returns the term by term multiplication of two lists or two matrices List1l List2 orMatrixl Matrix2 Example 1 21 3 41 013 41 5 6 gives 3 8 15 24 List or matrix division symbol Returns the term by term division of two lists or two matrices Returns the list or matrix where each term is the corresponding term of the list or matrix given as argument raised to the power n List Integer or Matrix Integer Division symbol Returns the quotient of two numbers or the term by term quotient o
424. rem Polyl Poly2 Var Example rem 1 2 3 4 1 2 returns 26 342 Functions and commands Degree Factor by Degree Coef GCD Zero Count Chinese Remainder Returns the degree of a polynomial degree Poly Example degree x 3 x gives 3 For a given polynomial in x of degree n factors out x and returns the resulting product factor _xn Poly Example factor_xn x 4 1 gives x 4 1 x 4 Returns the greatest common divisor GCD of the coefficients of a polynomial content Poly Var Example content 2 x 2 10 x 6 gives 2 If a and bare real this returns the number of sign changes in the specified polynomial in the interval a b If a or b are non real it returns the number of complex roots in the rectangle bounded by a and b If Var is omitted it is assumed to be x sturmab Poly Var a b Examples sturmab x 2 x 3 2 2 0 returns 1 sturmab n 3 1 n 2 i 5 3i returns 3 Given a matrix whose 2 rows each contain the coefficients of a polynomial returns the Chinese remainder of the polynomials also written as a matrix chinrem Lst Expr Lst Expr Lst Expr Lst Expr Example chinrem es returns 101111 HE2 24i ELSE ze Sr Functions and commands 343 Special Cyclotomic Groebner Basis Groebner Remainder Hermite Returns the list of coefficients of the cyclotomic polynomial of an integer cyclotomic Integer Exa
425. represents the focal length parabola point line or parabola vertex real Examples parabola GA GB draws a parabola whose focus is point A and whose directrix is line B parabola GA 1 draws a parabola whose vertex is point A and whose focal length is 1 Dilates a geometric object with respect to a center point by a scale factor homothety point realk object Example homothety GA 2 GB creates a dilation centered at point A that has a scale factor of 2 Each point P on geometric object B has its image P on ray AP such that AP 2AP 178 Geometry inversion projection reflection Geometry Draws the inversion of a point with respect to another point by a scale factor inversion pointl realk point2 Example inversion GA 3 GB draws point C on line AB such that AB AC 3 In this case point A is the center of the inversion and the scale factor is 3 Point B is the point whose inversion is created In general the inversion of point A through center C with scale factor k maps A onto A such that A is on line CA and CA CA k where CA and CA denote the lengths of the corresponding segments If k 1 then the lengths CA and CA are reciprocals Draws the orthogonal projection of a point onto a curve projection curve point Reflects a geometric object over a line or through a point The latter is sometimes referred to as a halfturn reflection line object or reflec
426. rer the app o g F Triangle Solver B B 2 Tap E This enables you to create a copy of the builtin app and sove it ge gers gerne RET under a new name Any data already in the built in app is retained and you can return to it later by opening the Sequence app 3 In the Name field enter a name for your new app say Fibonacci and press twice Your new app is added to Application Library the Application Library ea Note that it has the same Solve Linear Solver quaeri Trig Explorer icon as the parent g B app Sequence but with Triangle Solver Finance Linear Explore Parametric the name you gave it 4 Fibonacci in this Polar Sequence Fibonacci example Save Delete sort_ Send __ start_ 4 You are now ready to use this app just as you would the built in Sequence app Tap on the icon of your new app to open it You will see in it all the same views and options as in the parent app In this example we have used the Fibonacci series as a potential topic for a customized app To see how to create the Fibonacci series once inside the Sequence app or an app based on the 108 An introduction to HP apps Sequence app see chapter 17 Sequence app beginning on page 281 As well as cloning a built in app as described above you can modify the internal workings of a customized app using the HP Prime programming language See Customizing an app on page 522 App functions and variables Functions Variables App fun
427. res not accessible to the user of that calculator 9 Repeat from step 7 for each calculator that needs to have its functionality limited Cancelling exam mode If you want to cancel exam mode before the set time period has elapsed you will need to enter the password for the current exam mode activation 1 If the Exam Mode screen is not showing press meN op MES ond top CE 2 Enter the password for the current exam mode activation and tap twice You can also cancel exam mode using the Connectivity Kit See the HP Connectivity Kit User Guide for more details Modifying configurations Exam mode configurations can be changed You can also delete a configuration and restore the default configuration To change a configuration 1 If the Exam Mode screen is not showing press em EN tap and tap EES 2 Select the configuration you want to change from the Configuration list 3 Top EIM 4 Make whatever changes are necessary and then tap ca 66 Exam Mode To return to the default configuration l Press EB The Home Settings screen appears Top MEA Top OEA The Exam Mode screen appears Choose Default Exam from the Configuration list Tap EGE select Reset from the menu and tap to confirm your intention to return the configuration to its default settings Deleting configurations You cannot delete the default exam configuration even if you have modified it You can only delete those that
428. ress the new integer represented appears in the Out field and in the hex and decimal fields below it or Bits these keys increase or decrease the wordsize The new wordsize is appended to the value shown in the Out field Neg returns the two s complement that is each bit in the specified wordsize is inverted and one is added The new integer represented appears in the Out field and in the hex and decimal fields below it field in another base or Cycle base displays the integer in the Out Menu buttons provide some additional options EZB returns all changes to their original state EZES cycles through the bases same as pressing GE toggles the wordsize between signed and unsigned Basic integer arithmetic 585 GSB returns the one s complement that is each bit in the specified wordsize is inverted a O is replaced by 1 anda 1 by O The new integer represented appears in the Out field and in the hex and decimal fields below it GND activates edit mode A cursor appears and you can move abut the dialog using the cursor keys The hex and decimal fields can be modified as can the bit representation A change in one such field automatically modifies the other fields GSM closes the dialog and saves your changes If you don t want to save your changes press instead 3 Make whatever changes you want otherwise press Ea 4 To save your changes tap Note Ifyou save chang
429. ressed with the function name shown in parentheses For example SIN ASIN means that to make an arc sine calculation ASIN you press em Functions and commands 309 e LOG wt kK em 95 10 The examples below show the results you would get in Home view If you are in the CAS the results are given in simplified symbolic format For example 320 returns 17 88854382 in Home view and 8 V5 in the CAS Add subtract multiply divide Also accepts complex numbers lists and matrices value value2 etc Natural logarithm Also accepts complex numbers LN value Example LN 1 returns 0 Natural exponential Also accepts complex numbers evalue Example e5 returns 148 413159103 Common logarithm Also accepts complex numbers LOG value Example LOG 100 returns 2 Common exponential antilogarithm Also accepts complex numbers ALOG value Example ALOG 3 returns 1000 310 Functions and commands LN ASIN S28 Acos ATAN x Sine cosine tangent Inputs and outputs depend on the current angle format degrees or radians SIN value cos value TAN value Example TAN 45 returns 1 degrees mode Arc sine sin x Output range is from 90 to 90 or 7 2 to 2 2 Inputs and outputs depend on the current angle format Also accepts complex numbers ASIN value Example ASIN 1 returns 90 degrees mode Arc cosine cos x Output rang
430. ring data on page 44 for instructions Matrix arithmetic You can use the arithmetic functions x and powers with matrix arguments Division left multiplies by the inverse of the divisor You can enter the matrices themselves or enter the names of stored matrix variables The matrices can be real or complex For the next examples store 1 2 3 4 in M1 and 5 6 7 8 in M2 Matrices 469 Example To multiply and divide by a scalar 1 Select the first matrix Matrix Tap M1 or highlight it and press __er_ J 2 Enter the matrix MI 7 2 1 1 2 elements 2 b 4 E CB o gt r3 C 4 3 Select the second matrix Matrix Tap M2 or highlight it and press _ 4 Enter the matrix MZ 1 2 1 5 6 elements 2 amp 8 5 6 Enter 7 Enter 8 ims _ Size Go Column 5 In Home view add Eni 2 the two matrices you have just created KAj Settings w m Ans i Enter ABS 752 fe M1 M2 5 1012 CE a a For division by a scalar enter the matrix first then the operator then the scalar For multiplication the order of the operands does not matter The matrix and the scalar can be real or complex For example to divide the result of the previous example by 2 press the M1 M2 l5 following keys Ans f 2 56 20 ED a SS 470 Matrices To multiply two matrices To r
431. rogram Programming in HP PPL 509 ETE Cut the selection EIB Copy the selection 4 Select what you want to copy or cut using the options listed immediately above Tap or EIS 6 Return to the Program Catalog and open the target program oi 7 Move the cursor to where you want to insert the copied or cut code 8 Press E Paste The clipboard opens What you most recently copied or cut will be first in the list and highlighted already so just tap SBM The code will be pasted into the program beginning at the cursor location Delete a To delete a program program 1 Open the Program Catalog 2 Highlight a program to delete and press 3 At the prompt tap to delete the program or E to cancel Delete all To delete all programs at once programs 1 Open the Program Catalog 2 Press Clear 3 At the prompt tap to delete all programs or E to cancel Delete the You can clear the contents of a program without deletin prog g contents of a the program The program then just has a name and program nothing else 1 Open the Program Catalog 2 Tap the program to open it 3 Press Clear 510 Programming in HP PPL To share a program You can send programs between calculators just as you can send apps notes matrices and lists See Sharing data on page 44 The HP Prime programming language Variables and visibility The HP Prime programming language allows you to extend the
432. rom Symbolic View make a selection for Type Or in a program store the constant number from the list below into the variable Type With Method 0 the constant values and their meanings are as follows O Z Test 1 u 1 Z Test u p2 2 Z Test 1 x 3 Z Test 2 T 4 T Test 1 u 5 T Test u Hy With Method 1 the constants and their meanings are O Z hnt u 1 Z hnt u u gt 2 Z nt 1 2 3 ZAnt 2 T 4 T Int 1 u 5 T lnt y u Contains two expressions in T X T and Y T In Symbolic view select any of X0 y0 through x9 Y9 and enter expressions in T In a program store expressions in T in Xn and Yn where n is an integer from 0 to 9 Example SIN 4 T Y1 2 SIN 6 T DP X1 Contains an expression in N In Symbolic view select any of U0 through U9 and enter an expression in N Un N 1 or Un N 2 In a program use the RECURSE command to store the expression in Un where n is an integer from 0 to 9 Example RECURSE U U N 1 N 1 2 gt U1 Programming in HP PPL 565 Numeric view variables CO Cc9 Statistics 2Var DO D9 Statistics 1Var Contain lists of numerical data In Numeric view enter numerical data in CO through C9 In a program type LIST gt Cn where n 0 1 2 3 9 and LIST is either a list or the name of a list Contain lists of numerical data In Numeric view enter numerical data in DO through D9 In a prog
433. rteeeeeeees 271 16 Polar app Getting started with the Polar Opp ccccecssseeeeeesetteeeeeenees 277 17 Sequence app Getting started with the Sequence app cssseeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees 281 Another example Explicitly defined sequences ceceeeee 285 18 Finance app Getting Started with the Finance Opp ccccesseeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees 287 Time value of money TVM x5 ssssdsedesa saaitleds daveveescteshedemsany aust 290 TVM calculations Another example cccccceeeeeeeteeeeeeees 291 Calculating GMOMIZANONS sr ju14s Acarcessmermsaanieaereamnpenras syenenseoas 293 19 Triangle Solver app Getting started with the Triangle Solver app cesceeeeeeeees 295 Choosing triangle sty Ges sse c jualin casniygvab ein antomenciaaneonsacnnaneeinuase 297 Special cases east ven ve iaa ae A a a 298 20 The Explorer apps Linear Explorer GP pd cacsciacg suas stucn eautnincsa monks vininnds ehedatdudsitbees 299 Quadratic Explorer app sisadsitscincsheressstayaners wath meer nemeaweniaedne 302 Trig Explorer app saaimcnnnanrmchviauitedend duinietaatamearmunsanee 304 21 Functions and commands Keyboard tunctionss cu in menace wee ewe 309 Math ment cnc ten nah ee naa Gaia 313 INUMDES ac cage ee ee ae 313 Arithimetie eese n a eae eee es 314 TLIGONOMEHNY ves sevvier weet aes iiri n e E e s 316 Hyperbolic rcsniioenuiesr e a a aS 317 Probability ancesa itis sianeuera aan n e a 317 lishe A jk A E A ee 322 Matik i ineei goni E E EEEE E 32
434. rtex and press a Tap at another vertex and press _ _ Tap at a third vertex and press e _ The location of the fourth vertex is automatically calculated and the parallelogram is drawn Tap at the center of the circle and press _ _ Tap at a point on the circumference and press _ _ A circle is drawn about the center point with a radius equal to the distance between the two tapped points Keyboard shortcut You can also create a circle by first defining it in Symbolic view The syntax is circle GA GB where A and B are two points A circle is drawn in Plot view such that A and B define the diameter of the circle Tap at one focus point and press _ _ Tap at the second focus point and press _ _ Tap at point on the circumference and press _ e _ Tap at one focus point and press __ _ Tap at the second focus point and press __ _ Tap at point on one branch of the hyperbola and press _ _ Tap at the focus point and press _ _ Tap either on a line the directrix or a ray or segment nd press Eer 158 Geometry Special Circumcircle A circumcircle is the circle that passes through each of the triangle s three vertices thus enclosing the triangle Tap at each vertex of the triangle pressing after each tap Incircle An incircle is a circle that is tangent to each of a polygon s sides The HP Prime can draw an incircle that is tangent to the s
435. rtising were to go up to 6 minutes 14 Return to the Plot view The trace option is active by default This option will move the cursor from data 1 3 X 3 1100 point to data point as you press or As you move from data point to data point the corresponding x and y values appear at the bottom of the screen In this example the xaxis represents minutes of advertising and the y axis represents sales However there is no data point for 6 minutes Thus we cannot move the cursor to x 6 Instead we need to predict what y will be when x 6 based on the data we do have To do that we need to trace the regression curve not the data points we have 15 Press or to set the cursor to trace the regression line rather than the data points PREDY 1653 875 Statistics 2Var app 227 The cursor jumps from whatever data point it was on to the regression curve 16 Tap on the regression line near x 6 near the right edge of the display Then press gt until x 6 If the x value is not shown at the bottom left of the screen tap ME When you reach x 6 you will see that the PREDY value also displayed at the bottom of the screen reads 2931 5 Thus the model predicts that sales would rise to 2 931 50 if advertising were increased to 6 minutes You could use the same tracing technique to predict although roughly how many minutes of advertising y
436. rvals 253 257 hypothesis tests 245 252 One Proportion Z Interval 254 One Proportion Z Test 248 One Sample T Interval 256 One Sample T Test 250 One Sample Z Interval 253 One Sample Z Test 246 Two Proportion Z Interval 255 Two Proportion Z Test 249 Two Sample T Interval 256 Two Sample T Test 251 Two Sample Z Test 247 Two Sample Z Interval 253 604 Index Inference app 69 239 257 confidence intervals 253 257 functions 366 371 hypothesis tests 245 252 importing statistics 243 variables Numeric 568 Results 438 summary of 437 Info Solve app 265 input form 29 insufficient memory 592 insufficient statistics data 592 integer 32 integer arithmetic 581 integer base 56 integer commands programming 547 integer functions 337 339 integer zoom 90 93 102 integer editing 585 586 intercepts 132 invalid dimension 592 statistics data 592 K keyboard 18 customizing 516 editing keys 20 entry keys 20 functions on 309 312 keys edit 20 entry 20 internal name of 518 math 24 shift 22 user defined 516 variables 25 L language select 32 Library Application 588 line plot 220 linear equations solving 267 472 Linear Explorer app 69 130 299 301 functions 376 linear fit 231 Linear Solver 70 130 267 269 functions 374 menu buttons 269 variables Numeric 573 summary of 44 lines 156 lists creating 455 deleting 455 editing 454 functions for 457 operating on 455 457 variables 428 451 local variabl
437. s 34 Tap and select Fill 35 Choose a color for the background of the selected cells The most important cells in the spreadsheet will now stand out from the rest The spreadsheet is complete P PRICE COMMIS C D JE but you may want to checkall Per e Ens a the f las by addi He e formulas by aading some fsfs 6 5 TOTAL COMMIS 379 5 4 750 75 dummy data to the PRICE 5 1560 156 COSTS 100 g 6 lo column When the profit 7 p PROFIT 279 5 8 reaches 250 you should see f b konom h V he value in D9 change from O ee tne value in D9 changetrom O Werren to 1 Basic operations Navigation selection and gestures You can move about a spreadsheet by using the cursor keys by swiping or by tapping and specifying the cell you want to move to You select a cell simply by moving to it You can also select an entire column by tapping the column letter and select an entire row by tapping the row number You can also select the entire spreadsheet just tap on the unnumbered cell at the top left corner of the spreadsheet It has the HP logo in it A block of cells can be selected by pressing down on a cell that will be a corner cell of the selection and after a second dragging your finger to the diagonally opposite cell You can also select a block of cells by moving to a corner cell tapping and using the cursor keys to move to the diagonally opposite cell Tapping on
438. s See Spreadsheet app functions on page 349 Copy and paste To copy one or more cells select them and press Copy Move to the desired location and press Paste You can choose to paste either the value formula L__ show dear Delete OK format both value and format or both formula and format sS gt o a o m 1Value SUM B1 C6 2Formula REGRS J1 A25 3 Format REGRS E1 A294Value Format REGRS E1 A255Formula Format Beene FENT External references You can refer to data ina Savings spreadsheet from outside the Spreadsheet app by using the reference SpreadsheetName CR For _ lspreadsheet a6 6 Fo A 5 Savings A6 225 example in Home view you ESAE TOTAL can refer to cell A in the built ES LS LN P in spreadsheet by entering Spreadsheet A6 Thus the formula 6 Spreadsheet A6 would multiply whatever value is currently in cell A in the built in app by 6 If you have created a customized spreadsheet called say Savings you simply refer to it by its name as in 5 Savings A6 An external reference can also be to a named cell as in 5 Savings TOTAL In the same way you can also enter references to spreadsheet cells in the CAS If you are working outside a spreadsheet you cannot refer to a cell by its absolute reference Thus Spreadsheet A 6 produces an error message
439. s _F _ The independent variable must be X and the expression must not contain any unknown variables Example 1 5 cos x 0 3 sin x Note that in this app variables must be entered in uppercase 232 Statistics 2Var app Computed statistics When you tap ER three sets of statistics become available By default the statistics involving both the independent and dependent columns are shown Tap to see the statistics involving just the independent column or to display the statistics derived from the dependent column Tap to return to the default view The tables below describe the statistics displayed in each view The statistics computed when you tap are Statistic n ey sCOV o COV XY Definition The number of data points Correlation coefficient of the independent and dependent data columns based only on the linear fit regardless of the fit type chosen Returns a value between 1 and 1 where 1 and 1 indicate best fits The coefficient of determination that is the square of the correlation coefficient The value of this statistics is dependent on the Fit type chosen A measure of 1 indicates a perfect fit Sample covariance of independent and dependent data columns Population covariance of independent and dependent data columns Sum of all the individual products of of x and y Statistics 2Var app 233 The statistics displayed when you tap are Statistic Def
440. s 1 Returns an expression with hyperbolic terms rewritten as exponentials hyp2exp Expr Example 1 exp x X hyp2exp cosh x returns ng SRL Returns u v such as au bv c for three integers a b and c Note that c must be a multiple of the greatest common divisor of a and b for there to be a solution iabcuv Intgra Intgrb Intgrc Example iabcuv 21 28 7 gives 1 1 Given two matrices interprets them as two vector spaces and returns the vector basis of their intersection ibasis Matrixl Matrix2 Example ivasis 1 0 ol 010 Returns the greatest common divisor of the integer coefficients of a polynomial 11 T returns 1 1 0 001 icontent Poly Var Example icontent 24x 3 6x 2 12x 18 gives 6 Functions and commands 395 identity iegcd igcd interval2center inv Returns a vector containing the solution to the identity function for the argument s id Objectl Object2 Example id 1 2 3 4 returns 1 2 3 4 Given an integer n returns the identity matrix of dimension n identity Integer Example 100 identity 3 returns 010 001 Returns the extended greatest common divisor of two integers iegcd Integerl Integer2 Example iegcd 14 21 returns 1 1 7 Returns the greatest common divisor of two integers or two rational numbers or two polynomials of several variables igcd Integerl Integer2 or igcd Ratnll Ratnl2 or igcd P
441. s 237 results 233 sorting data 230 tracing a scatter plot 235 troubleshooting plots 238 variables summary of 435 storing 42 symbolic calculations 56 Symbolic Setup view 74 common operations in 87 Symbolic view 73 common operations in 81 85 in Geometry app 148 menu buttons 86 symbols in title bar 14 system wide settings 30 428 override 87 608 Index T tables custom 103 template key 24 templates 20 test mode See exam mode text 23 textbook entry 32 33 36 47 theme 34 time 16 34 time value of money problems 287 title bar 14 Toolbox menus 29 307 touch options 16 trace 94 95 129 transformations geometric 161 164 Triangle Solver app 70 295 298 functions 374 376 variables Numeric 573 summary of 441 Trig Explorer app 70 304 306 trig zoom 90 94 102 trigonometric fit 232 functions 316 troubleshooting 591 turn on and off 12 TVM problems 287 Two Proportion Z Interval 255 Two Proportion Z Test 249 Two Sample T Interval 256 Two Sample T test 251 Two Sample Z Interval 253 Two Sample Z Test 247 U undo a zoom 90 in Geometry 144 units 443 449 calculating with 444 converting between 446 prefixes for 444 tools for manipulating 446 uppercase characters 23 493 Upper Tail Chi Square probability 319 USB cables 45 user defined keys 516 regression fit 232 variables 513 user keyboard 516 User menu 307 user modes 516 V variables Advanced Graphing app 432 app 109 558 579 CAS 59
442. s can also take complex numbers as arguments Hyperbolic sine SINH value Inverse hyperbolic sine sinh x ASINH value Hyperbolic cosine COSH value Inverse hyperbolic cosine cosh x ACOSH value Hyperbolic tangent TANH value Inverse hyperbolic tangent tanh7 x ATANH value Factorial of a positive integer For non integers x T x 1 This calculates the gamma function value Example 5 returns 120 Functions and commands 317 Com bination Permutation The number of combinations without regard to order of n things taken r at a time COMB n r Example Suppose you want to know how many ways five things can be combined two at a time COMB 5 2 returns 10 Number of permutations with regard to order of n things taken r at a time n n r PERM n r Example Suppose you want to know how many permutations there are for five things taken two at a time PERM 5 2 returns 20 Random Number Random number With no argument this function returns a random number between zero and one With one argument a it returns a random number between O and a With two arguments a and b returns a random number between a and b With three arguments n a and b returns n random number between a and b RANDOM RANDOM a RANDOM a b RANDOM n a b Integer Random integer With no argument this function returns either O or 1 randomly With one integer argumen
443. s no second integer the bits are shifted to the left by one place Examples BITSL 28 2 returns 112 BITSL 5 returns 10 Syntax BITRL intl int2 Bitwise Shift Right Takes one or two integers as input and returns the result of shifting the bits in the first integer to the right by the number places indicated by the second integer If there is no second integer the bits are shifted to the right by one place Examples BITSR 112 2 returns 28 BITSR 10 returns 5 Syntax BITXOR intl int2 intn Returns the bitwise logical exclusive OR of the specified integers Example BITXOR 9 26 returns 19 Syntax B gt R integerm Converts an integer in base m to a decimal integer base 10 The base marker m can be b for binary o for octal or h for hexadecimal Example B R 1101b returns 13 Syntax GETBASE integer m Returns the base for the specified integer in whatever is the current default base O default 1 binary 2 octal 3 hexadecimal Examples GETBASE 1101b returns 1h if the default base is hexadecimal while GETBASE 1101 returns 0h 548 Programming in HP PPL GETBITS R B SETBITS SETBASE I O CHOOSE Syntax GETBITS integer Returns the number of bits used by integer expressed in the default base Example GETBITS 22122 returns 20h or 32 Syntax R B integer Converts a de
444. s of the three sides of a triangle and returns the measures of the angles opposite them in order SSS side side side Example Sss 3 4 5 in degree mode returns 36 8 53 1 90 Solves the current problem in the Triangle Solver app The Triangle Solver app must have enough data entered to ensure a successful solution that is there must be at least three values entered one of which must be a side length Returns a list containing the unknown values in the Numeric view in their order of appearance in that view left to right and top to bottom DoSolve Linear Explorer functions SolveForSlope SolveForYIntercept Solve for slope Takes as input the coordinates of two points x y and xz yz and returns the slope of the line containing those two points SolveForSlope x1 X2 Y Yo Example SolveForSlope 3 2 4 2 returns 2 Solve for y intercept Takes as input the coordinates of a point x y and a slope m and returns the y intercept of the line with the given slope that contains the given point SolveForYIntercept x y m Example SolveForYIntercept 2 3 1 returns 5 376 Functions and commands Quadratic Explorer functions SOLVE Solve quadratic Given the coefficients of a quadratic equation ax bx c 0 returns the real solutions SOLVE a b c Example SOLVE 1 0 4 returns 2 2 DELTA Discriminant Given the coefficients of a quadratic equation ax bx c 0 ret
445. s on the screen Tap anywhere along the interval bar or press or The value of GA and the shape of the graph change to match the value along the at which you tapped Tap one object other than a point and press _ _ Tap another object and press _ _ The point s where the two objects intersect are created and named Note that an intersections object is created in Symbolic view even if the two objects selected do not intersect Displays a palette for you to choose to add 1 2 3 or 4 points The points are placed randomly 155 Line Segment Ray Line Vector Angle bisector 1 4 Bisector Perpendicular bisector 2 L Bisector Tap where you want one endpoint to be and press _ _ Tap where you want the other endpoint to be and press Fer _ A segment is drawn between the two end points Keyboard shortcut Tap where you want the endpoint to be and press _ er_ Tap a point that you want the ray to pass through and press fret A ray is drawn from the first point and through the second point Tap at a point you want the line to pass through and press Ete Tap at another point you want the line to pass through and press _ _ A line is drawn through the two points Keyboard shortcut Tap where you want one endpoint to be and press L Tap where you want the other endpoint to be and press _Ete_ A vector is drawn between the two end points
446. s set equal to zero With a list of expressions as argument returns the matrix where the rows are the complex solutions of the system formed by setting each expression equal to zero cZeros Expr Var or cZeros Exprl Expr2 Varl Var2 Example cZeros x 4 1 returns 1 1 i i Returns the numerical solution of an equation or a system of equations nSolve Eq Var or nSolve Expr Var Guess Example nSolve cos x x x 1 3 gives 0 739085133215 Functions and commands 331 Differential Equation ODE Solve Linear System Rewrite Incollect powexpand Returns the solution to a differential equation deSolve Eq TimeVar Var Example desolve y y 0 y returns G 0 cos x G _ 1 sin x Ordinary Differential Equation solver Solves an ordinary differential equation given by Expr with variables declared in VectrVar and initial conditions for those variables declared in Vectrlnit For example odesolve f ty ty tO yO t1 returns the approximate solution of y f t y for the variables t and y with initial conditions t t0 and y y0 odesolve Expr VectVar VectInitCond Final Val tstep Val curve Example odesolve sin t y t y 0 1 2 returns 1 82241255674 Given a vector of linear equations and a corresponding vector of variables returns the solution to the system of linear equations linsolve LinEgl LinEq2 Varl
447. s the increment between tickmarks on the xaxis YTICK Sets the increment between tickmarks on the y axis Page 2 Setup field Purpose AXES Shows or hides the axes LABELS Places values at the ends of each axis to show the current range of values GRID DOTS Places a dot at the intersection of each horizontal and vertical grid line GRID LINES Draws a horizontal and vertical grid line at each integer xvalue and y value CURSOR Sets the appearance of the trace cursor standard inverting or blinking CONNECT Connects the data points with straight Stats 2 Var segments only 98 An introduction to HP apps Setup field Purpose Cont METHOD Sets the graphing method to adaptive Not in either _fixed step segments or fixed step dots statistics app Explained below Graphing methods The HP Prime gives you the option of choosing one of three graphing methods The methods are described below with each to plot In these cases applied to the function f x 9 sin e appears on the menu bar enabling you to 0 E100 7 973238806327 MENU stop the plotting process if you wish e adaptive this gives very accurate results and is used by default With this method active some complex functions may take a while II I e fixed step segments this method samples x values computes their corresponding y values and oj then plots and connects the points i 4 amp 0 E10
448. s the sample standard deviation of the data set in the current 1 variable analysis H1 H5 Contains the population standard deviation of the data set in the current 1 variable analysis H1 H5 Contains the standard error of the data set in the current variable analysis H1 H5 434 Variables Statistics 2Var app variables Category Names Results Nbltem sX explained Corr ox below CoefDet serrX sCov MeanY oCov Y xXY D2 MeanX sY X oY 2X2 serrY Symbolic S1 S1Type S2 S2Type S3 S3Type S4 S4Type 5 S5Type Plot Axes Xmin Cursor Xtick GridDots Xzoom GridLines Ymax Labels Ymin Method Ytick Recenter Yzoom xmax Numeric C1 c6 ee C7 C3 c8 C4 c9 C5 co Modes AAngle ADigits AComplex AFormat 435 Results Nbltem Corr CoefDet sCov oCov XY MeanX X X2 sX oX serrX MeanY Contains the number of data points in the current 2 variable analysis S1 S5 Contains the correlation coefficient from the latest calculation of summary statistics This value is based on the linear fit only regardless of the fit type chosen Contains the coefficient of determination from the latest calculation of summary statistics This value is based on the fit type chosen Contains the sample covariance of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 Contains the population covariance of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 Contains the sum of the X Y pro
449. s the selected entry in full screen mode with horizontal and vertical scrolling enabled The entry is also presented in textbook format CAS calculations With one exception you perform calculations in CAS view just as you do in Home view The exception is that there is no RPN entry mode in CAS view just algebraic and textbook modes All the operator and function keys work in the same way in CAS view as Home view although all the alpha characters are lowercase rather than uppercase But the primary difference is that the default display of answers is symbolic rather than numeric You can also use the template key L3 to help you insert the framework for common calculations and for vectors and matrices This is explained in detail in Math template on page 24 The most commonly used Function CAS functions are available from the CAS menu one of the Toolbox menus To display the menu press E If the CAS menu is not open by default tap Wes Other CAS a commands are available from the Catlg menu another of the Toolbox menus To choose a function select a category and then a command 54 Computer algebra system CAS Example 1 Example 2 Settings To find the roots of 2x 3x 2 1 With the CAS menu open select Polynomial and then Find Roots The function proot appears on the entry line 2 Between the parentheses enter 20H ICFIS peole BAe 3 Press _fe _
450. s views All this information is automatically saved in the app You can come back to the app at any time and all the information is still there You can also save a version of the app with a name you give it and then use the original app for another problem or purpose See Creating an app on page 107 for more information about customizing and saving apps 70 An introduction to HP apps With one exception all the apps mentioned above are described in detail in this user guide The exception is the DataStreamer app A brief introduction to this app is given in the HP Prime Quick Start Guide Full details can be found in the HP StreamSmart 410 User Guide Application Library To open an app To reset an app To sort apps Apps are stored in the Application Library displayed by pressing Ga 1 Open the Application Application Library 15 287 Library B 3 2 Find the app s icon and tap Graphing try on it m el et Inference Linear Explore Linear Solver n Geom You can also use the cursor keys to scroll to the app and when it is highlighted either tap or press You can leave an app at any time and all the data and settings in it are retained When you return to the app you can continue as you left off However if you don t want to use the previous data and settings you can return the app to its default state that is the state it was in when you opened it for the first time To do this 1
451. s well as and decrease and increase the slope Press to change the sign of the slope The form of the linear function is shown at the top right of the display with the current equation that matches the graph just below it As you manipulate the graph the equation updates to reflect the changes 300 The Explorer apps Equation mode Test mode Tap to enter equation mode A dot en will appear on the Eq ett button at the bottom of the screen 7 CIWO In equation mode you use the cursor keys to Ege Graph incr i tev2 Test _ move between parameters in the equation and change their values observing the effect on the graph displayed Press or to decrease or increase the value of the selected parameter Press or to select another parameter Press 7 to change the sign of a Tap to enter test 2 Y 1 X mode In Test mode you test your skill at matching est H an equation to the graph shown Test mode is like equation mode in that you use the cursor keys to qu gu GEEPREEERETETREETS select and change the value of each parameter in the equation The goal is to try to match the graph that is shown The app displays the graph of a randomly chosen linear function of the form dictated by your choice of level Tap or to change the level Now press the cursor keys to select a parameter and set its value When you are ready tap to see if you hav
452. se exam mode configuration created any exam mode configurations before the only base configuration will be Default Exam Exam Mode 63 5 Tap BEERS select copy from the menu and enter a name for the new configuration See Adding text on page 23 if you need help with entering alphabetic characters 6 Tap twice Tap EHA The Exam Mode Configuration screen appears 8 Select those features you want disabled and make sure that those features you don t want disabled are not selected 9 When you have finished selecting the features to be disabled tap GE Note that you can create exam mode configurations using the Connectivity Kit in much the same way you create them on an HP Prime You can then activate them on multiple HP Primes either via USB or by broadcasting them to a class using the wireless modules For more information install and launch the HP Connectivity Kit that came on your product CD From the Connectivity Kit menu click Help and select HP Connectivity Kit User Guide If you want to activate exam mode now continue with Activating Exam Mode below Activating Exam Mode When you activate exam mode you prevent users of the calculator from accessing those features you have disabled The features become accessible again at the end of the specitied time out period or on entry of the exam mode password whichever occurs sooner 64 Exam Mode To activate exam mode l
453. specify build your own table the Num Type field set the zoom factor for zooming in or out on the table displayed in Numeric view the Num Zoom field Modifying Numeric Setup Select the field you want to change and either specify a new value or if you are choosing a type of table for Numeric view automatic or build yourown choose the appropriate option from the Num Type menu An introduction to HP apps 105 To help you seta starting Function Num Setup number and increment that Num start f15 9 oo Num Step 1 matches the current Plot view Num Start 31 8 tap Plot gt B Num Zoom Num Step 2 Num Type Automatic Enter table start value mme Restore default settings To restore one field to its default setting 1 Select the field 2 Press 8 To restore all default settings press Ea Combining Plot and Numeric Views You can display Plot view and Numeric view side by side Moving the tracing cursor causes the table of values in Numeric view to scroll You can also enter a value in the X column The table scrolls to that value and the tracing cursor jumps to the corresponding point on the selected plot To combine Plot and Numeric view in a split screen press and select Split Screen Plot Table To return to Plot view press B To return to Numeric view by pressing EB Adding a note to an app You can add a note to an app Unlike general notes t
454. splay the results of the simulation numerically display the results of the simulation With that in mind we will create the following views START ROLL DICE SET SIDES and SET ROLLS The START option will initialize the app and display a note that gives the user instructions The user will also interact with the app through the Numeric view and the Plot view Programming in HP PPL 523 These views will be activated by pressing and amp but the function Plot in our app program will actually launch the latter view after doing some configuration DiceSimulation Before entering the This is a simulation involving 2 dice Press the following progra m press View key and select Set Rolls Enter the number Sma eo of times you want the dice to be rolled Then to open the select Set Sides and enter the number of sides on f di d h each die Finally select Dice Roll to see the Info editor and enter the histogram of your simulation text shown in the figure After the simulation you can press Num to see R R the numerical results of the simulation or press This note will be Plot to return to the histogram attached to the app and will be displayed when CRESS GETS the user selects the Start option from the View menu or presses Ga The program discussed earlier in this chapter to get the number of sides for a dice is expanded here so that the possible sums of two such die are stored in dataset D1 Enter the following su
455. ssed the gradient at X 3 of whatever function is currently defined as F1 X in the Function app would be returned Programming in HP PPL 517 Key names A quick way to write a program to re assign a key is to press and select Create user key when you are in the Program Editor You will then be asked to press the key or key combination you want to re assign A program template appears with the internal name of the key or key combination added automatically The first line of a program that re assigns a key must specify the key to be reassigned using its internal name The table below gives the internal name for each key Note that key names are case sensitive Internal name of keys and key states Key Name cm m en key key key loa 0 KS_O KA_O KSA_O ee 1 KS_1 KA_1 KSA_1 pF 2 KS_2 KA_2 KSA_2 nos 3 KS_3 KA_2 KSA_2 4 KS_4 KA_4 KSA_4 uv 5 KS_5 KA_5 KSA_5 ow 6 KS_6 KA_6 KSA_6 ae 7 KS_7 KA_7 KSA_7 oy 8 KS_8 KA_8 KSA_8 lens 9 KS_9 KA9 KSA_9 K_Abe KS Abe KA Abe KSA_Abc lt K_Alpha KS_Alpha KA_Alpha KSA_Alpha K_Apps KS_Apps KA_Apps KSA_Apps oo K_Bksp KS_Bksp KA_Bksp KSA_Bksp K_Comma KS_Comma KA_Comma KSA_Comma K_Cos KS_Cos KA_Cos KSA_Cos 518 Programming in HP PPL Internal name of keys and key states Continued Continued Continued Key Name axa faa m en ke
456. st 1 2 3 You can now use that variable in subsequent calculations For example you 60 will return 61 62 63 Just as you can assign values to Home and user variables you can assign values to app variables You can modify Home settings on the Home Settings screen SA EA But you can also modify a Home setting from Home view by assigning a value to the variable that represents that setting For example entering Base 0 in Home view forces the Home settings field Integer for the integer base to binary A value of 1 would force it to octal 2 to decimal and 3 to hex Another example you can change the angle measure setting from radians to degrees by entering HAngle 1 in Home view Variables 425 More about the Vars menu Entering HAngle 0 forces the setting to return to radians You can see what value has been assigned to a variable whether Home app or user by entering its name in Home view and pressing Emer _ You can enter the name letter by letter or choose the variable from the Variables menu by pressing 4 Besides the four variable menus the Vars menu contains a toggle If you want the value of a variable instead of its name when you choose it from the Vars menu tap A white dot will appear next to the menu button label to indicate that it is active and that variable values rather than names will be returned upon selection For the Home and app variables use the Vars menu to get help on
457. states that If A X B X C 0 B B 4 A C then X 2 A Format sye J insert employ activated via the menu button 1 Enter the text you want When you come to the point where you want to start a mathematical expression top Ea 2 Enter the mathematical expression just as you would in Home or CAS views You can use the math template as well as any function in the Toolbox menus 3 When you have finished entering your mathematical expression press 2 or 3 times depending on the complexity of your expression to exit the editor You can now continue to enter text Notes and Info 495 To import a note Sharing notes You can import a note from the Note Catalog into an app s Info view and vice versa Suppose you want to copy a note named Assignments from the Note Catalog into the Function Info view 1 Open the Note Catalog 2 Select the note Assignments and tap 3 Open the copy options for copying to the clipboard Copy The menu buttons change to give you options for copying EEI Marks where the copying or cutting is to begin EEIE Marks where the copying or cutting is to end EIE Select the entire program ETE Cut the selection EID Copy the selection Select what you want to copy or cut using the options listed immediately above Top EID or ETB 6 Open the Info view of the Function app 8 tap the Function app icon press Ga Move the cursor to
458. step value consecutive integers starting from zero and the corresponding values calculated by the equation specified in Symbolic view are listed in the R1 column Common operations in Symbolic view Scope Advanced Graphing Function Parametric Polar Sequence Solve See dedicated app chapters for information about the other apps Symbolic view is typically used to define a function or open sentence that you want to explore by plotting and or evaluating In this section the term definition will be used to cover both functions and open sentences Press to open Symbolic view An introduction to HP apps 81 Add a definition With the exception of the Parametric app there are 10 fields for entering definitions In the Parametric app there are 20 fields two for each paired definition 1 Highlight an empty field you want to use either by tapping on it or scrolling to it 2 Enter your definition If you need help see Definitional building blocks on page 82 3 Tap or press when you have finished Your new definition is added to the list of definitions Note that variables used in definitions must be in uppercase A variable entered in lowercase will cause an error message to appear Modify a definition 1 Highlight the definition you want to modify either by tapping on it or scrolling to it 2 Tap GET The definition is copied to the entry line 3 Modify the definition 4 Tap or press
459. t 1 4 8 9 gives 3 4 1 Returns the value of the Dirac delta function for a real number Dirac Real Example Dirac 1 gives 0 Enters the mathematical constant e Euler s number 388 Functions and commands egcd eigenvals eigenvects eigVI EVAL Given two polynomials A and B returns three polynomials U V and D such that U x A x V x B x D x where D x GCD A x B x the greatest common divisor of polynomials A and B The polynomials can be provided in symbolic form or as lists of coefficients in descending order Without a third argument it is assumed that the polynomials are expressions of x With a variable as third argument the polynomials are expressions of it egcd PolyA PolyB Var oregcd ListA ListB Var Example egcd x 1 2 x 3 1 gives x 2 1 3 x 3 Returns the sequence of eigenvalues of a matrix eigenvals Matrix Example 2 2 1 eigenvals 2 1 2 returns 3 3 3 1 2 2 Returns the eigenvectors of a diagonalizable matrix eigenvects Matrix Example 2 2 1 1 3 3 eigenvects _2 1 _9 returns _2 0 3 1 2 2 1 3 3 Returns the Jordan matrix associated with a matrix when the eigenvalues are calculable eigVl Matrix Evaluates an expression eval Expr Example eval 2 3 returns 5 Functions and commands 389 evalc evalf even exact EXP Returns a complex expression written in the form realt
460. t DOWNTO finish DO commands END Sets variable var to start and for as long as this variable is more than or equal to finish executes the sequence of commands and then subtracts 1 decrement from var Syntax FOR var FROM start DOWNTO finish STEP increment DO commands END Sets variable var to start and for as long as this variable is more than or equal to finish executes the sequence of commands and then subtracts increment from var Syntax WHILE test DO commands END Evaluates test If result is true not 0 executes the commands and repeats Example A perfect number is one that is equal to the sum of all its proper divisors For example 6 is a perfect number because 6 1 2 3 The example below returns true when its argument is a perfect number EXPORT ISPERFECT n BEGIN OCAL d sum 2 gt d gt sum WHILE sum lt n AND d lt n DO IF irem n d 0 THEN sumtd gt sum Programming in HP PPL 531 wH a w OF wo v Q RETURN sum n END The following program displays all the perfect numbers up to 1000 EXPORT PERFECTNUMS BEGIN LOCAL k FOR k FROM 2 TO 1000 DO IF ISPERFECT k THEN MSGBOX k is perfect press OK END REPEAT Syntax REPEAT commands UNTIL test Repeats the sequence of commands until test is true not 0 The example below prompts for a positive value for
461. t a it returns a random integer between 0 and a With two arguments a and b returns a random integer between a and b With three integer arguments n a and b returns n random integers between a and b RANDINT RANDINT a RANDINT a b RANDINT n a b Normal Random real number with normal distribution N u1 o RANDNORM p 318 Functions and commands Seed Density Normal Sets the seed value on which the random functions operate By specifying the same seed value on two or more calculators you ensure that the same random numbers appear on each calculator when the random functions are executed RANDSEED value Normal probability density function Computes the probability density at value x given the mean p and standard deviation o of a normal distribution If only one argument is supplied it is taken as x and the assumption is that u 0 and o 1 NORMALD H 6 x Example NORMALD 0 5 and NORMALD 0 1 0 5 both return 0 352065326764 Student s t probability density function Computes the probability density of the Student s t distribution at x given n degrees of freedom STUDENT n x Example STUDENT 3 5 2 returns 0 00366574413491 x probability density function Computes the probability density of the x distribution at x given n degrees of freedom CHISQUARE n x Example CHISQUARE 2 3 2 returns 0 100948258997 Fisher or Fisher Snedecor probability density function Comp
462. t and press x y ho to see its polar _ line k f gt 4 Tap a line and press 4 to see its pole Le In the illustration to the i i 15 _ 10 _ 5 O Pointer 16 8 3 7 right point K is the reciprocation of line DE G and Line at the bottom of the display is the reciprocation of point H 164 Geometry Geometry functions and commands The list of geometry specific functions and commands in this section covers those that can be found by tapping in both Symbolic and Numeric view and those that are only available from the Catlg menu The sample syntax provided has been simplified Geometric objects are referred to by a single uppercase character such as A B C and so on However calculations referring to geometric objects in the Numeric view of the Geometry app and in the CAS must use the G prefixed name given for it in Symbolic view For example altitude A B C is the simplified form given in this section altitude GA GB GC is the form you need to use in calculations Further in many cases the specified parameters in the syntax below A B C etc can be the name of a point such as GA or a complex number representing a point Thus angle A B C could be e angle GP GR GB angle 3 2i 1 2i 5 i or e a combination of named points and points defined by a complex number as in angle GP i1 2i i Symbolic view Cmds menu Point barycenter Geometry Calculates the hypothetical center of m
463. t in an equation such as this Y G ME Functions defined in other apps can also be referenced in the Solve app For example if you have defined F1 X to be X 10 in the Function app you can enter F1 X 50 in the Solve app to solve the equation X2 10 50 Clear the 2 If you have no need for any equations or expressions already app and defined press Clear Tap to confirm your define the intention to clear the app equation a 3 Define the equation eoe Sya Ven TT VIEI Y2 U2 2A D ASV ea eu aJa 223 4 BSD 260 Solve app Enter known variables Note Solve the unknown variable 4 Display the Numeric view Num Setup SOVE NOMEE view ei v 0 Here you specify the values u0 of the known variables AO D 0 highlight the variable that you want to solve for and tap EITS 5 Enter the values for the Enter value or press SOLVE DEEN SOLVE known variables 27L 78L Ji 6L 36 7 M100 LB Some variables may already have values against them when you display the Numeric view This occurs if the variables have been assigned values elsewhere For example in Home view you might have assigned 10 to variable U 10 U Then when you open the Numeric view to solve an equation with U as a variable 10 will be the default value for U This also occurs if a variable has been given a value in some previous calculation in an app or program To reset all pre populated variables to
464. t menu displays a second field for you to enter the required number of significant digits You could also select a field tap GRRE and select the new setting Restore default settings To restore default settings is to return precedence to the settings on the Home Settings screen To restore one field to its default setting 1 Select the field 2 Press 8 To restore all default settings press i ER An introduction to HP apps 87 Common operations in Plot view Plot view functionality that is common to many apps is described in detail in this section Functionality that is available only in a particular app is described in the chapter dedicated to that app Press to open Plot view Zoom Scope Advanced Graphing Function Parametric Polar Sequence Solve Statistics 1 Var and Statistics 2Var Also to a limited degree Geometry Zooming redraws the plot on a larger or smaller scale It is a shortcut for changing the range settings in Plot Setup view The extent of most zooms is determined by two zoom factors a horizontal and a vertical factor By default these factors are both 2 Zooming out multiplies the scale by the factor so that a greater scale distance appears on the screen Zooming in divides the scale by the factor so that a shorter scale distance appears on the screen Zoom factors To change the default zoom factors 1 Open the Plot view of the app EB 2 Tap to open the Plot view menu 3
465. t used when calculating Q1 and Q3 For example for the data set 3 5 7 8 15 16 17 only the first three items 3 5 and 7 are used to calculate Q1 and only the last three terms 15 16 and 17 are used to calculate Q3 218 Statistics 1Var app Plotting To plot statistical data Plot types Histogram You can plot Histograms Box and Whisker plots Normal Probability plots Line plots Bar graphs Pareto charts Once you have entered your data and defined your data set you can plot your data You can plot up to five box and whisker plots at a time however with the other types you can only plot one at a time l The first set of numbers pe below the plot indicate where the cursor is In the example at the right the cursor is in the bin for data between 5 and 6 but not including 6 f and the frequency for 1856 Ee In the Symbolic view select the data sets you want to plot From the Plotn menu select the plot type For any plot but especially for a histogram adjust the plotting scale and range in the Plot Setup view If you find histogram bars too fat or too thin you can adjust them by changing the HWIDTH setting See Setting up the plot Plot Setup view on page 221 Press Mg If the scaling is not to your liking press and select Autoscale Autoscale can be relied upon to give a good starting scale which can then be adjusted either directly in the Plot view or in the
466. tal h hexadecimal Thus 11b represents 319 The base marker b indicates that the number is to interpreted as a binary number 11 gt Likewise E4h Basic integer arithmetic 581 represents 22849 In this case the base marker h indicates that the number is to interpreted as a hexadecimal number E4 Note that with integer arithmetic the result of any calculation that would return a remainder in floating point arithmetic is truncated only the integer portion is presented Thus 100b 10b gives the correct answer 10b since 449 219 is 219 However 100b 11b gives just the integer component of the correct result 1b Note too that the accuracy of integer arithmetic can be limited by the integer wordsize The wordsize is the maximum number of bits that can represent an integer You can set this to any value between 1 and 64 The smaller the wordsize the smaller the integer that can be accurately represented The default wordsize is 32 which is adequate for representing integers up to approximately 2 x 10 However integers larger than that would be truncated that is the most significant bits that is the leading bits would be dropped thus the result of any calculation involving such a number would not be accurate The default base Setting a default base only affects the entry and display of numbers being used in integer arithmetic If you set the default base to binary 27 and 44 will still be represented that way in
467. talog Program Catalog The Program Catalog displays a list of program names The first item in the Program Catalog is a built in entry that has the same name as the active app This entry is the app program for the active app if such a program exists See App programs on page 520 for more information Program Catalog buttons and keys Button or Key Purpose Opens the highlighted program for editing Prompts for a new program name then opens the Program Editor Opens further menu options for the selected program Save Rename Sort Delete Clear These options are described immediately below To redisplay the initial menu press or Clear E Programming in HP PPL 499 Button or Key Purpose Continued Save creates a copy of the selected program with a new name you are prompted to give Rename renames the selected program Sort sorts the list of programs Sort options are alphabetical and chronological Delete deletes the selected program Clear deletes all programs Transmits the highlighted program to another HP Prime Debugs the selected program Runs the highlighted program or Moves to the beginning or end of the Program Catalog 2 Deletes the selected program Deletes all programs 500 Programming in HP PPL Creating a new program In the following few sections we will create a simple program that counts to
468. tation or translation of those programs without prior written permission from Hewlett Packard Company is also prohibited For hardware warranty information please refer to the HP Prime Quick Start Guide Product Regulatory and Environment Information is provided on the CD shipped with this product Preface Getting started The HP Prime Graphing Calculator is an easy to use yet powertul graphing calculator designed for secondary mathematics education and beyond It offers hundreds of functions and commands and includes a computer algebra system CAS for symbolic calculations In addition to an extensive library of functions and commands the calculator comes with a set of HP apps An HP app is a special application designed to help you explore a particular branch of mathematics or to solve a problem of a particular type For example there is a HP app that will help you explore geometry and another to help you explore parametric equations There are also apps to help you solve systems of linear equations and to solve time value of money problems The HP Prime also has its own programming language you can use to explore and solve mathematical problems Functions commands apps and programming are covered in detail later in this guide In this chapter the general features of the calculator are explained along with common interactions and basic mathematical operations Before starting Charge the battery fully before
469. tatus messages The table below lists the most common general error messages and their meanings Some apps and the CAS have more specific error messages that are self explanatory Message Meaning Bad argument type Insufficient memory Insufficient statistics data Invalid dimension Statistics data size not equal Incorrect input for this operation You must recover some memory to continue operation Delete one or more customized apps matrices lists notes or programs Not enough data points for the calculation For two variable statistics there must be two columns of data and each column must have at least four numbers Array argument had wrong dimensions Need two columns with equal numbers of data values 592 Troubleshooting Message Meaning Continued Syntax error No functions checked Receive error Undefined name Out of memory Two decimal separators input x 0 0 0 LN O Inconsistent units The function or command you entered does not include the proper arguments or order of arguments The delimiters parentheses commas periods and semi colons must also be correct Look up the function name in the index to find its proper syntax You must enter and check an equation in the Symbolic view before entering the Plot view Problem with data reception from another calculator Re send the data The global variable named does not exist
470. ted Select the level of automatic sim plification None do not simplify automati cally use for manual sim plification Minimum do basic simplifications Maximum always try to simplify If checked the calculator is in exact mode and solutions will be symbolic If not checked the calcu lator is in approximate mode and solutions will be approximate For example 26 1 5 yields in exact mode and 5 2 in approxi mate mode 56 Computer algebra system CAS Setting Purpose Cont Complex Use V Use i Principal Increasing Select this to allow complex results in variables If checked second order polyno mials are factorized in complex mode or in real mode if the dis criminant is positive If checked the calculator is in complex mode and complex solu tions will be displayed when they exist If not checked the calculator is in real mode and only real solu tions will be displayed For exam ple factors x 1 yields x 1 x 1 x i x i in complex mode and x 1 x 1 x2 1 in real mode If checked the principal solutions to trigonometric functions will be displayed If not checked the gen eral solutions to trigonometric func tions will be displayed If checked polynomials will be displayed with increasing powers for example 4 x 3x x If not checked polynomials will be dis played with decreasing powers for example x3 3x x 4 Page 2 Settin
471. ted list to another HP Prime Clears all lists Moves to the top or bottom of the catalog respectively 452 Lists The List Editor List Editor Buttons and keys The List Editor is a special environment for entering data into lists There are two ways to open the List Editor once the List Catalog is open Highlight the list and tap or Tap the name of the list When you open a list the following buttons and keys are available to you Button or Key Purpose Ins a Clear EH or Copies the highlighted list item into the entry line Inserts a new value with default zero before the highlighted item Deletes the highlighted item Displays a menu for you to choose the small font medium font or large font Displays a menu for you to choose how many lists to display at one time one two three or four For example if you have only L4 displayed and you choose 3 from the Lists menu lists L5 and L6 will be displayed in addition to L4 Clears all items from the list Moves the cursor to the start or the end of the list Lists 453 To edit a list 1 Open the List Catalog 7 2J List 2 Tap on the name of the list L1 L1 etc The List Editor appears 3 Tap on the element you want to edit Alternatively press or until the element you want to edit is highlighted In this example edit the third element so w cooocococc OW o
472. ten data sets at one time It can perform two variable statistical analysis of one or more sets of data The Statistics 2Var app starts with the Numeric view which is used to enter data The Symbolic view is used to specify which columns contain data and which column contains frequencies You can also compute statistics in Home and in the Spreadsheet app The values computed in the Statistics 2Var app are saved in variables These can be referenced in Home view and in other apps Getting started with the Statistics 2Var app The following example uses the advertising and sales data in the table below In the example you will enter the data compute summary statistics fit a curve to the data and predict the effect of more advertising on sales Advertising minutes Resulting sales independent x dependent y 2 1400 920 3 1100 5 2265 5 2890 4 2200 Statistics 2Var app 223 Open the Statistics 2Var app Enter data Choose data columns and fit 1 Open the Statistics 2Var app Select Statistics 2Var ARR REEESE 9 Enter value or expression CODED 2 Enter the advertising minutes data in column C1 2 Enter 1 Enter 3 Enter 15 Enter 5 Enter 4 3 Enter the resulting sales data in column C2 1400 _ fuer 920 __ fer nool e 2 265 Enter 2890 _ Ete 2200 _ f 920 1100 2265 2890 2200 PUn N 1400
473. tered the arguments separately and then with a blank entry line entered the operator Your history would look like this before entering the operator aon 3 14159265359 13 3 If there are no entries in history and you enter an operator or function an error message appears An error message will also appear if there is an entry on a stack level that an operator needs but it is not an appropriate argument for that operator For example pressing when there is a string on level 1 displays an error message An operator or function will work only on the minimum number of arguments necessary to produce a result Thus if you enter on the entry line 2 4 6 8 and press J stack level 1 shows 48 Multiplication needs only two arguments so the two arguments last entered are the ones that get multiplied The entries 2 and 4 are not ignored 2 is placed on stack level 3 and 4 on stack level 2 Where a function can accept a variable number of arguments you need to specify how many arguments you want it to include in its operation You do this by specifying the number in parentheses straight after the function name You then press to evaluate the function For example suppose your stack looks like this 2254 2665 2665 25547 25547 25557 255957 2 25117 25117 25993 25993 25547 25547 255743 255743l SPS SF Te e 25514 25514 Suppose further that you want to determine the minimum o
474. that is hot keys in Plot view With this option enabled the following shortcuts become available Key Result in Plot view Hide or reshow the axes an Selects the circle drawing tool Follow the B instructions on the screen or see page 158 Erases all trace lines see page 154 147 Key Result in Plot view Continued TAN Selects the intersection drawing tool Fol low the instructions on the screen or see page 154 z Selects the line drawing tool Follow the instructions on the screen or see page 156 E Selects the point drawing tool Follow the instructions on the screen or see page 153 od Selects the segment drawing tool Follow the instructions on the screen or see page 156 Selects the triangle drawing tool Follow the instructions on the screen or see page 157 7 Undo Symbolic view in detail Every object whether a Geometry Symbolic View point segment line i AA polygon or curve is given V SC tircle Ga c8 Ga a name and its definition is displayed in Symbolic view EB The name is the name for it you see in Plot view but prefixed by G _tdit _v_ New _ _ _ Delete Thus a point labeled A in Plot view is given the name GA in Symbolic view The G prefixed name is a variable that can be read by the computer algebra system CAS Thus in the CAS you can include such variables in calculations Note in the illustration
475. the second angle the length of the third side and the measure of the third angle in that order AAS angle angle side Example AAS 30 60 1 in degree mode returns 1 732 2 90 Angle Side Angle Takes as arguments the measure of two angles and the length of the included side and returns a list containing the length of the side opposite the first angle the length of the side opposite the second angle and the measure of the third angle in that order ASA angle side angle Example ASA 30 2 60 in degree mode returns 1 1 732 90 Side Angle Side Takes as arguments the length of two sides and the measure of the included angle and returns a list containing the length of the third side the measure of the angle opposite the third side and the measure of the angle opposite the second side SAS side angle side Example SAS 2 60 1 in degree mode returns 1 732 30 90 Side Side Angle Takes as arguments the lengths of two sides and the measure of a non included angle and returns a list containing the length of the third side the measure of the angle opposite the second side and the measure of the angle opposite the third side Note In an ambiguous case this command will only give you one of the two possible solutions SSA side side angle Example SSA 1 2 30 returns 1 732 90 60 Functions and commands 375 SSS DoSolve Side Side Side Takes as arguments the length
476. the CAS variable a 172 Geometry isosceles_triangle isopolygon parallelogram Geometry Draws an isosceles triangle defined by two of its vertices and an angle The vertices define one of the two sides equal in length and the angle defines the angle between the two sides of equal length Like equilateral triangle you have the option of storing the coordinates of the third point into a CAS variable isosceles triangle pointl point2 angle Example isosceles triangle GA GB angle GC GA GB defines an isosceles triangle such that one of the two sides of equal length is AB and the angle between the two sides of equal length has a measure equal to that of lt ACB Draws a regular polygon given the first two vertices and the number of sides where the number of sides is greater than 1 If the number of sides is 2 then the segment is drawn You can provide CAS variable names for storing the coordinates of the calculated points in the order they were created The orientation of the polygon is counterclockwise isopolygon pointl point2 realn where realn is an integer greater than 1 Example isopolygon GA GB 6 draws a regular hexagon whose first two vertices are the points A and B Draws a parallelogram given three of its vertices The fourth point is calculated automatically but is not detined symbolically As with most of the other polygon commands you can store the fourth point s coordinates into a CA
477. the Function result to kilometers per hour 32 7_cm 8 175_ cm s Select Speed Select km h The result is shown as 0 2943 kilometers Function per hour PTER Ans as 8 175 _ cm s converfe 17s forms E km 2943 m There are a number of tools for managing and operating on units These are available by pressing and tapping fiz Converts one unit to another unit of the same category CONVERT 5 _m 1_ ft returns 16 4041994751 ft You can also use the last answer as the first argument in a new conversion calculation Pressing places the last answer on the entry line You can also select a value from history and tap to copy it to the entry line with a measurement calls the convert command as well and converts to whatever unit follows the Store symbol Meters kilograms seconds amperes Converts a complex unit into the base components of the MKSA system MKSA 8 175 cm s returns 08175 m s 1 446 Units and constants UFACTOR USIMPLIFY Unit factor conversion Converts a measurement using a compound unit into a measurement expressed in constituent units For example a Coulomb a measure of electric charge is a compound unit derived from the SI base units of Ampere and second 1 C 1 A 1 s Thus UFACTOR 100_C 1 _A returns 100 A s Unit simplification For example a Joule is defined as one kg m s Thus USIMPLIFY 5_kg m 2 s 2 returns 5 J Physical const
478. the arrow keys to highlight the item you want and then either tapping or pressing Fer Note that the menu of buttons along the bottom of the screen can only be activated by tapping Shortcuts Press when you are at the top of the menu to immediately display the last item in the menu Press when you are at the bottom of the menu to immediately display the first item in the menu e Press to jump straight to the bottom of the menu e Press to jump straight to the top of the menu Enter the first few characters of the item s name to jump straight to that item Enter the number of the item shown in the menu to jump straight to that item 28 Getting started To close a menu Toolbox menus Input forms A menu will close automatically when you select an item from it If you want to close a menu without selecting Esc anything from it press or B3 The Toolbox menus are a collection of menus offering functions and commands useful in mathematics and programming The Math CAS and Catlg menus offer over 400 functions and commands The items on these menus are described in detail in chapter 21 Functions and commands starting on page 307 An input form is a screen that provides one or more fields for you to enter data or select an option It is another name for a dialog box Ifa field allows you to enter data of your choice you can select it add your data and tap QS There is n
479. the page for solving a system of 3 linear equations in 3 variables changes to when active Linear Solver app 269 270 Linear Solver app 15 Parametric app The Parametric app enables you to explore parametric equations These are equations in which both x and y are defined as functions of t They take the forms x f t and y g t Getting started with the Parametric app The Parametric app uses the customary app views Symbolic Plot and Numeric described in chapter 5 Open the Parametric app For a description of the menu buttons available in this app see Symbolic view Summary of menu buttons on page 86 Plot view Summary of menu buttons on page 96 and Numeric view Summary of menu buttons on page 104 Throughout this chapter we will explore the parametric equations x T 8sin 7 and y T 8cos 7 These equations produce a circle l Open the Parametric Symbolic View Parametric app x m r7 E vim Select X2 T Parametric H vm X3 T The Parametric E m app starts in XAT j 3 Enter function Symbolic view 7 This is the defining view It is where you symbolically define that is specify the parametric expressions you want to explore Show Parametric app 271 Define the functions The graphical and numerical data you see in Plot view and Numeric view are derived from the symbolic functions defined here There are 20 fields for de
480. the statistical analyses H1 H5 defined in the Symbolic view of the Statistics 1 Var app Sets the data column to one of the column variables DO D9 for one of the statistical analyses H1 H5 SetSample Hn Dn Example SetSample H2 D2 sets the Independent Column field for the H2 analysis to use the data in the list D2 364 Functions and commands Statistics 2Var app functions PredX PredY Resid Do2VStats SetDepend The Statistics 2Var app has a number of functions Some are designed to calculate summary statistics based on one of the statistical analyses S1 S5 defined in the Symbolic view of the Statistics 2Var app Others predict X and Y values based on the fit specified in one of the analyses Predict X Uses the fit from the first active analysis S1 S5 found to predict an x value given the y value PredxX value Predict Y Uses the fit from the first active analysis S1 S5 found to predict a y value given the x value PredyY value Residuals Returns the list of residuals for the given analysis S1 S5 based on the data and a fit defined in the Symbolic view for that analysis Resid Sn or Resid Resid looks for the first defined analysis in the Symbolic view S1 S5 Do 2 variable statistics Performs the same calculations as tapping in the Numeric view of the Statistics 2Var app and stores the results in the appropriate Statistics 2Var app results variables Sn must be one of th
481. tics CT ve z The statistics iat y n Q1 82 5 calculated will now Mea b28 f Q3 83 1 be imported into the Max 83 7 X 4497 3 X 41219 07 Inference app z BOOT sX 44 875107E 1 5 Tap to close s Mitaa the statistics window Qa a Erna Open the 6 Open the Inference Inference Symbolic View I Inference app and clear the Method Hypothesis test a current settings ype iZ Test 1 y app n g Alt Hypoth u lt po Select Inference Choose an inferential method a a ee Select 7 Tap on the Method inference field and select wethot Coniderce menal E Confidence IYpaZ Int 1 p 3 method and Interval type Choose an inferential method Choose mnn a 8 Tap on Type and select T Int 1 u Method Confidence interval Type T int tp Choose a distribution statistic Choose n a a Import the 9 Open Numeric view data 10 Specify the data you want to import Top EIM 244 Inference app 11 From the App field Import Sample Statistics select the statistics app 3 82 8833333333 n6 that has the data you ET want to import App Statistics 1Var 12 In the Column field a S specify the column in that app where the Choose column to import data is stored D1 is GHBCYMADEBCmnD the default 13 Top E 14 Specify a 90 Inference Numeric View confidence interval in 82 8833333333 the C field s 0 487510683644 n 6 Confidence Level edit import calc e a Display 15 Display the confidence x r
482. ting each with a comma Lists 455 To store a list To display a list To display one element To store one 4 When you have finished entering the elements press Eter The list is added to History with any expressions among the elements evaluated You can store a list in a variable You can do this before the list is added to History or you can copy it from History When you ve entered a list in the entry line or copied it from History to the entry line tap ETJ enter a name for the list and press _f _ The reserved list variable names available to you are LO through L9 however you can create a list variable name of your own as well For example to store the list 25 147 8 in L7 1 Create the list on the entry line 2 Press gt to move the cursor outside the 52 3 49 8 gt L7 25 1478 Ee ee ee es ee list 3 Tap ESA 4 Enter the name L J7 5 Complete the operation r_ To display a list in Home view type its name and press _ tr If the list is empty a pair of empty braces is returned To display one element of a list in Home view enter listname element For example if L6 is 3 4 5 6 then L6 2 _ Ets _ returns 4 To store a value in one element of a list in Home view element enter value listname element For example to store 148 as the second element in L2 type 148 TACEN 456 Lists To send a list List functions You can send lists t
483. tion point object Examples reflection line x 3 point 1 1 reflects the point at 1 1 over the vertical line x 3 to create a point at 5 1 reflection 1 i 3 2i reflects the point at 3 2 through the point at 1 1 to create a point at 1 4 179 rotation similarity translation Rotates a geometric object about a given center point through a given angle rotate point angle object Example rotate GA angle GB GC GD GK rotates the geometric object labeled K about point A through an angle equal to lt CBD Dilates and rotates a geometric object about the same center point similarity point realk angle object Example Similarity 0 3 angle 0 1 i point 2 0 dilates the point at 2 0 by a scale factor of 3 a point at 6 0 then rotates the result 90 counterclockwise to create a point at 0 6 Translates a geometric object along a given vector The vector is given as the difference of two points head tail translation vector object Examples translation 0 i GA translates object A down one unit translation GB GA GC translates object C along the vector AB 180 Geometry Measure Plot angleat angleatraw areaat areaatraw distanceat Geometry Used in Symbolic view Given the three points of an angle and a fourth point as a location displays the measure of the angle defined by the first three points The measure is displayed with a lab
484. tional if not supplied PPYR 12 CPYR PPYR and BEG 0 CalcFV Solves for the future value of an investment or loan CalcFV NbPmt IPYR PV PMTV PPYR CPYR BEG Example CalcFV 360 6 5 150000 948 10 returns 2 25 372 Functions and commands CalcIPYR CalcNbPmt CalcPMT CalcPV DoFinance Solves for the interest rate per year of an investment or loan CalcIPYR NbPmt PV PMTV FV PPYR CPYR BEG Example CalcIPYR 360 150000 948 10 2 25 returns 6 50 Solves for the number of payments in an investment or loan CalcNbPmt IPYR PV PMTV FV PPYR CPYR BEG Example CalcNbPmt 6 5 150000 948 10 2 25 returns 360 00 Solves for the value of a payment for an investment or loan CalcPMT NbPmt IPYR PV FV PPYR CPYR BEG Example CalcPMT 360 6 5 150000 2 25 returns 948 10 Solves for the present value of an investment or loan CalcPV NbPmt IPYR PMTV FV PPYR CPYR BI a Q Example CalcPV 360 6 5 948 10 2 25 returns 150000 00 Calculate TVM results Solves a TVM problem for the variable TVMVar The variable must be one of the Finance app s Numeric view variables Performs the same calculation as tapping in the Numeric view of the Finance app with TVMVar highlighted DoFinance TVMVar Example DoFinance FV returns the future value of an investment in the same way as tapping in the Numeric view of the Finance app with Fv highl
485. top Trace does not erase any existing trace lines It merely prevents any further tracing should the point be moved again 154 Geometry Erase Trace Center Element O 1 Intersections Random pts Geometry Erases all trace lines but leaves the definition of the trace points in Symbolic view While a Trace definition is still in Symbolic view if you move the point again a new trace line is created Tap a circle and press _ _ A point is created at the center of the circle Element 0 1 has a number of uses You can use it to place a constrained point on a object whether previously created or not For example if in Symbolic view you define GA as element circle 2 go to Plot view turn on tracing select GA and move it you will see that GA is constrained to move in a circle centered on the origin and of radius 2 You can also use Element 5 0 1 to generate values lem T that can then be used as coefficients in functions you 0 subsequently plot For example in Plot view select Element 0 1 Notice A Move GA that a label is added to the screen GA for example and given a value of 0 5 You can now use that label as a coefficient in a function to be plotted For example you could choose Curve gt Plot gt Function and define a function as GA x2 7 A plot of 0 5x2 7 appears in Plot view Now select the label GA in this example and press _ _ An interval bar appear
486. trix 1 0 0 1 You can also create an identity matrix using the MAKEMAT make matrix function For example entering MAKEMAT I J 4 4 creates a 4 x 4 matrix showing the numeral 1 for all elements except zeros on the diagonal The logical operator returns O when the row number and J the column number are equal and returns 1 when they are not equal You can insert by choosing it from the relations palette eSa The TRN function swaps the row column and column row elements of a matrix For instance element 1 2 row 1 column 2 is swapped with element 2 1 element 2 3 is swapped with element 3 2 and so on For example TRN 1 2 3 4 creates the matrix 1 3 2 4 The set of equations x 2y 3z 14 2x y z 3 4x 2y 2z 14 can be written as the augmented matrix 1 2 3 14 2 1 1 3 4 2 2 14 486 Matrices which can then be stored as a 3 x4 real matrix in any matrix variable M1 is used in this example You can then use the RREF function to change this to reduced row echelon form storing it in any matrix variable M2 is used in this example The reduced row echelon matrix gives the solution to the linear equation in the fourth column An advantage of using the RREF function is that it will also work with inconsistent matrices M1 1 2 3 4 1 1 2 3 14 2 2 1 1 3 3 4 2 2 14 m TOTER Go_ column Function 16 141 RREF M1 gt
487. try Symbolic View i v terms of the attributes of V GB element GA 7 70265434582 other geometric objects V GC tangent GA GB display green you need to go to Symbolic view Note that each objet EDERDEDEPRCHEE you have so far created is listed in Symbolic view Note too that the name for an object in Symbolic view is the name it was given in Plot view but prefixed with a G Thus the graph labeled A in Plot view is labeled GA in Symbolic view 17 Highlight Gc and tap GEN When creating objects that are dependent on other objects the order in which they appear in Symbolic view is important Objects are drawn in Plot view in the order in which they appear in Symbolic view Since we are about to create a new point that is dependent on the attributes of GB and GC it is important that we place its definition after that of both GB and Gc That is why we made sure we were at the bottom the list of definitions before tapping EMM f our new definition appeared higher up in Symbolic view the point we are about to create wouldn t be drawn in Plot view 18 Tap and choose Point gt point You now need to specify the x and y coordinates of the new point The former is to be constrained to abscissa of 138 Geometry Add some calculations Geometry point B referred to as GB in Symbolic view and the later is to constrained to the slope of c referred to as GC in Symbolic view 19 You should ha
488. ts and calculations Shortcut keys To quickly add an object and undo what you ve done See page 147 Plot Setup view The Plot Setup view enables Geometry Plot Setup you to configure the RNG E13 5 8 YRNG 7 1 13 1 appearance of Plot view and a to take advantage of Taney keyboard shortcuts FUNCTION LABELS SHORTCUTS Enter minimum horizontal value 146 Geometry Geometry The fields and options are X Rng Two fields for entering the minimum and maximum x values thereby giving the default horizontal range As well as changing this range on the Geometry Plot Setup screen you can change it by panning and zooming Y Rng Two fields for entering the minimum and maximum y values thereby giving the default vertical range As well as changing this range on the Geometry Plot Setup screen you can change it by panning and zooming Axes A toggle option to hide or reshow the axes in Plot view Keyboard shortcut Labels A toggle option to hide or reshow the names of the geometric objects A B C etc in Plot view Function Labels A toggle option to hide or reshow the expression that generated a plot with the plot These should not be confused with calculation labels You can show function labels without also showing calculation labels and vice versa AX 2 1 2 Zoom Point Shortcuts A toggle option to enable or disable keyboard shortcuts
489. ts of a variable that is used in more than one app by entering just its name in Home view you will get the contents of that version of the variable in the current app For example if the Function app is active and you enter Xmin in Home view you will get the value of Xmin from the Function app If you want the value of Xmin from say the Sequence app you must qualify the variable name Enter Sequence Xmin to retrieve the value of Xmin from the Sequence app In the figure to the right Function the value of Xmin from the Function app was retrieved first 10 4 The qualitied variable Xmin 10 4 Sequence Xmin 1 8 retrieved the value of mpamapanamam Xmin from the Sequence app 1 8 name entered second Note the syntax required app_name variable name The app can be any of the 18 HP apps or one you have created based on a builtin app The name of the app variable must match a name listed in the app variables tables below Spaces are not allowed in an app name and must be represented by the underscore character m Non standard characters in variables name such as and o can be entered by selecting them from the special symbols palette ii D or from the characters menu Ea Variables 427 Home variables The Home variables are accessed by pressing and tapping EES Category Names Real Complex List Matrix Graphics Settings A to Z and 6 For
490. turns 45 degrees mode Complex conjugate Conjugation is the negation sign reversal of the imaginary part of a complex number CONJ xty i Example CONJ 3 4 i returns 3 4 i Functions and commands 315 Real Part Real part x of a complex number x y i RE x y i Example RE 3 4 i returns 3 Imaginary Part Imaginary part y of a complex number x y i IM xty i Example IM 3 4 i returns 4 Unit Vector Sign of value If positive the result is 1 If negative 1 If zero result is zero For a complex number this is the unit vector in the direction of the number SIGN value SIGN x y Examples SIGN POLYEVAL 1 2 25 26 2 2 returns 1 SIGN 3 4 returns 6 8i Exponential ALOG Antilogarithm exponential ALOG value EXPM1 Exponential minus 1 e 1 EXPM1 value LNP1 Natural log plus 1 In x J LNP1 value Trigonometry The trigonometry functions can also take complex numbers as arguments For SIN COS TAN ASIN ACOS and ATAN see Keyboard functions on page 309 CSC Cosecant 1 sinx CSC value ACSC Arc cosecant ACSC value 316 Functions and commands SEC ASEC COT ACOT Hyperbolic SINH ASINH COSH ACOSH TANH ATANH Probability Factorial Secant 1 cosx SEC value Arc secant ASEC value Cotangent cosx sinx COT value Arc cotangent ACOT value The hyperbolic trigonometry function
491. turns the lowest common multiple of two or integers lem Intgrl Intgr2 Example lem 6 4 returns 12 Tests whether or not a given integer is a prime number isPrime Integer Example isPrime 19999 returns false Returns the nth prime number ithprime Intg n where n is between 1 and 200 000 Example ithprime 5 returns 11 Returns the next prime or pseudo prime after an integer nextprime Integer Example nextprime 11 returns 13 Returns the prime or pseudo prime number closest to but smaller than an integer prevprime Integer Example prevprime 11 returns 7 Compute s Euler s totient for an integer euler Integer Example euler 6 returns 2 338 Functions and commands Division Quotient Remainder a MOD p Chinese Remainder Polynomial Find Roots Returns the integer quotient of the Euclidean division of two integers iquo Intgrl Intgr2 Example iquo 63 23 returns 2 Returns the integer remainder from the Euclidean division of two integers irem Intgrl Intgr2 Example irem 63 23 returns 17 For the three integers a n and p returns a modulo p in 0 p 1 powmod a n p Expr Var Example powmod 5 2 13 returns 12 Integer Chinese Remainder Theorem for two equations Takes two vectors a p and b ql and returns a vector of two integers r_n such that x r mod n In this case x is such that x a mod pand x b mod
492. ty is greater than the right side or if the two sides are equal and O otherwise Note that more than two objects can be compared See comment above regarding lt Power symbol Raises a number to a power or a matrix to an integer power Given a symmetric matrix and a vector of variables returns the quadratic form of the matrix using the variables in the vector a2q Matrix Varl Vard2 Example a2q 1 2 4 41 x y returns x 2 6 x y 4 y 2 Given three polynomials A B and C returns U and V such that A U B V C With a variable as the final argument U and V are expressed in terms of that variable if needed otherwise x is used abcuv PolyA PolyB PolyC Var Example abcuv x 2 2 x 1 x 2 1 x 1 returns 1 2 1 2 Used in programming with assume to state an additional assumption about a variable Example assume n integer additionally n gt 5 Functions and commands 381 algvar AND append apply assume Returns the matrix of the symbolic variable names used in an expression The list is ordered by the algebraic extensions required to build the original expression algvar Expr Example algvar sqrt x y gives y X Logical And Returns 1 if the left and right sides both evaluate to true and returns O otherwise Exprl AND Expr2 Example 3 1 4 AND 4 lt 5 returns 1 Appends an element to a list or vector append List Element or append Vector Element Exam
493. ull hypothesis The test Zvalue The input x value The upper tail probability The upper critical Zvalue associated with the input a level e The critical value of the statistic associated with the critical Z value HypZlmean X N Uo O Q mode Mode Specifies which alternative hypothesis to use e E lt e 2 E gt Ho e 3 Ub Uo 366 Functions and commands HYPZ2mean HypZ1prop Example HypZlmean 0 461368 50 0 5 0 2887 0 05 1 returns 1 9462 0 4614 0 8277 1 6448 0 5671 The two sample Z test for means Returns a list containing in order e Oor 1 to reject or fail to reject the null hypothesis The test Zvalue The test Ax value The upper tail probability The upper critical Z value associated with the input a level e The critical value of Ax associated with the critical Z value HypZ2mean X Xo Ny N2 O1 O2 A MOde Mode Specifies which alternative hypothesis to use e Em lt m e 2 gt He e 3 wh be Example HypZ2mean 0 461368 0 522851 50 50 0 2887 0 2887 0 05 1 returns 1 1 0648 0 0614 0 8565 1 6448 0 0334 The one proportion Zest Returns a list containing in order e Oor 1 to reject or fail to reject the null hypothesis The test Zvalue The test x value The upper tail probability The upper critical Zvalue associated with the input a level The critical value of z associated with the critical Zvalue
494. ult O or 1 to reject or fail to reject the null hypothesis 1T the test T value tM the input Ax value e prob the lower tail probability cT the critical T value associated with the input a level e cx the lower critical value of Az associated with the critical T value cx2 the upper critical value of Ax associated with the critical T value Example HypT2mean 0 461368 0 522851 0 2776 0 2943 50 50 0 0 05 1 The one sample Normal confidence interval for a mean ConfZlmean xX n s C configuration Configuration is a string that controls what results are shown and the order in which they appear An empty string displays the default all results including headers The options in the configuration string are separated by spaces 360 Functions and commands ConfZ2mean ConfZ1prop h header cells will be created Z the critical Zvalue XI the lower bound of the confidence interval zXh the upper bound of the confidence interval e std the standard deviation Example ConfZ1lmean 0 461368 50 0 2887 0 95 The two sample Normal confidence interval for the difference of two means ConfZ2mean Ry X27 Ny 09 8 17 897C y configuration Configuration a string that controls what results are shown and the order in which they appear An empty string displays the default all results including headers The options in the configuration string are separated
495. umeric ViewS cccessseeeeeeeeeeseteeees 106 Adding a note tociiGpps ic ateaeamenimcareetinialerhadeacohiandttones 106 Creating AN APP ceeecceeeeseeneeeeeteeeeseeeeeeeeeceeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeess 107 App functions and variables c cccccecceceeseeeeesseeeenteeeeaes 109 2 Contents 6 Function app Getting started with the Function app cccescceeeeeeerteeeeeeeees 111 Analyzing functions 4 taatsrchon chia cxwmiveneuek opiwetelwantdugrimebetneved 118 The Function Vetriables tii tcuis caesansnnreeedcareiecahoateeormwmarveeed 122 Summary of FCN operations ctiavioran dra cetsgeevemmomiveeantneunslutel 124 7 Advanced Graphing app Getting started with the Advanced Graphing app 05 126 Plok Gallletiyencctoncecerceca ctaniiacavectast sane naan 134 Exploring a plot from the Plot Gallery cccesseeesteeenees 134 8 Geometry Getting started with the Geometry app seseeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 135 Plot view in details lt axiattqencutacinssclensatnsueerancnyacersiwuyiiaersinavns 141 Plof Setup VieWrianiniii eieiei gee A E A 146 Symbolic view in detail vi verAsetraweiasvernencnds sense yceranciyencerotenvas 148 Symbolic Setup VIEWS wi cctiusnatiesleiudineity Codi legend eatexincivsucemmarnt 150 Numeric view in details ususetsercitecauueeisecnisucerineryoucemsuavns 150 Geometric objects aria tacch vnraasasstiazeons te mimponnehiesiananiueborntees 153 Geometric transtormations lt siseeueh gussarnace
496. umns are multiplied to generate a data point If more than one column is specified they are each treated as a different input data set If only one row is selected it is treated as 1 data set If two columns are selected the mode defaults to frequency Outlier Removal Factor This allows for the removal of any datapoint that is more than n times the standard deviation where n is the outlier removal factor By default this factor is set to 2 Configuration indicates which values you want to place in which row and if you want row or columns headers Place the symbol for each value in the order that you want to see the values appear in the spreadsheet The valid symbols are H Place column headers h Place row headers x x a s s o o serr Fao n min ql med q3 max 352 Functions and commands REGRS For example if you specify h n X x the first column will contain row headers the first row will be the number of items in the input data the second the sum of the items and the third the mean of the data If you do not specify a configuration string a default string will be used Notes The STAT1 f function only updates the content of the destination cells when the cell that contains the formula is calculated This means that if the spreadsheet view contains at the same time results and inputs but not the cell that contains the call to the STAT1 function updating the data will not update the results as the cell th
497. under a new name See Creating an app on page 107 Enables you to send an app to another HP Prime See Sharing data on page 44 72 An introduction to HP apps App views Most apps have three major views Symbolic Plot and Numeric These views are based on the symbolic graphic and numeric representations of mathematical objects They are accessed through the fs GB and keys near the top left of the keyboard Typically these views enable you to define a mathematical object such as an expression or an open sentence plot it and see the values generated by it Each of these views has an accompanying setup view a view that enables you to configure the appearance of the data in the accompanying major view These views are called Symbolic Setup Plot Setup and Numeric Setup They are accessed by pressing ES Gs BE ond SBS Not all apps have all the six views outlined above The scope and complexity of each app determines its particular set of views For example the Spreadsheet app has no Plot view or Plot Setup view and the Quadratic Explorer has only a Plot view What views are available in each app is outlined in the next six sections Note that the DataStreamer app is not covered in this chapter See HP StreamSmart 410 User Guide for information about this app Symbolic view The table below outlines what is done in the Symbolic view of each app App Use the Symbolic view to Advanced Specify up to 10 open se
498. ur or AM PM format The checkbox at the far right lets you choose whether to show or hide the time on the title bar of screens Date Set the date and choose a format YYYY MM DD DD MM YYYY or MM DD YYYY Color Theme Light black text on a light back ground Dark white text on a dark back ground At the far right is a option for you to choose a color for the shading such as the color of the highlight Page 3 of the Home Settings input form is for setting Exam mode This mode enables certain functions of the calculator to be disabled for a set period with the disabling controlled by a password This feature will primarily be of interest to those who supervise examinations and who need to ensure that the calculator is used appropriately by students sitting an examination It is described in detail in chapter 4 Exam Mode starting on page 61 Page 4 of the Home Settings input form is for configuring your HP Prime to work with the HP Prime Wireless Kit Visit www hp com support for further information 34 Getting started Specifying a Home setting This example demonstrates how to change the number format from the default setting Standard to Scientific with two decimal places l i ys Press Home Settings iai Settings to open the Angle Measure Radians m Number Format Standard Home Settings Entry Textbook v input form Integers Hex B32 it Complex a b i The Angle Lan
499. ure that GEME those features you don t want disabled are not selected screen appears 5 Select those features 62 Exam Mode An expand box at the left of a feature indicates that it is a category with sub items that you can individually disable Notice that there is an expand box beside System Apps in the example shown above Tap on the expand box to see the sub items You can then select the sub items individually If you want to disable all the sub item just select the category You can select or deselect an option either by tapping on the check box beside it or by using the cursor keys to scroll to it and tapping GB 6 When you have finished selecting the features to be disabled tap GS If you want fo activate exam mode now continue with Activating Exam Mode below Creating a new configuration You can modify the default exam configuration when new circumstances require a different set of disabled functions Alternatively you can retain the default configuration and create a new configuration When you create a new configuration you choose an existing configuration on which to base it l Press EB The Home Settings screen appears Top GES Tap i Pagey TH The Exam Mode Exam Mode si screen appears Configuration Defaut am 7 Timeout 15 Minutes v Choose a base Password Erase memory configuration from Blink LED the Configuration list If you have not R Choo
500. urns the value of the discriminant in the Quadratic Formula DELTA a b Cc Example DELTA 1 0 4 returns 16 Common app functions In addition to the app functions specific to each app there are three functions common to the following apps These use as an argument an integer from 0 to 9 which corresponds to one of the Symbolic view variables for that app Function FO F9 Solve EO E9 Statistics 1 Var H1 H5 Statistics 2Var S1 S5 Parametric XO YO X9 Y9 e Polar RO R9 Sequence UO U9 e Advanced Graphing VO V9 CHECK Check Checks that is selects the Symbolic view variable corresponding to Digit Used primarily in programming to activate Symbolic view definitions in apps CHECK Digit Functions and commands 377 UNCHECK ISCHECK Ctlg menu Example With the Function app as the current app CHECK 1 checks the Function app Symbolic view variable F1 The result is that F1 X is drawn in the Plot view and has a column of function values in the Numeric view of the Function app With another app as the current app you would have to enter Function CHECK 1 Un Check Un checks that is deselects the Symbolic view variable corresponding to Digit Used primarily in programming to de activate symbolic view definitions in apps UNCHECK Digit Example With the Sequence app as the current app UNCHECK 2 un checks the Sequence app Symbolic view
501. us Returns O if they are not 1 if they are and 2 if they are vertices of a square is rhombus pointl point2 point3 point4 Example is rhombus point 0 0 point 2 2 point 0 4 point 2 2 returns 2 190 Geometry LineHorz LineVert open_polygon polar polar_coordinates Geometry Draws the horizontal line y a LineHorz a Example LineHorz 2 draws the horizontal line whose equation is yoo Draws the vertical line x a LineVert a Example LineVert 3 draws the vertical line whose equation is x 3 Connects a set of points with line segments in the given order to produce a polygon If the last point is the same as the first point then the polygon is closed otherwise it is open open _polygon pointl point2 point1 or open _polygon pointl point2 pointn Returns the polar line of the given point as pole with respect to the given circle polar circle point Example polar circle x 2 y 2 1 point 1 3 0 returns x 3 Returns a vector containing the polar coordinates of a point or a complex number polar coordinates point or polar coordinates complex Example polar coordinates V2 V2 returns 2 m 4 191 pole powerpc radical_axis Returns the pole of the given line with respect to the given circle pole circle line Example pole circle x 2 y 2 1 line x 3 returns point 1 3 0 Given a circle and a point returns the difference b
502. us aunprswaesua ge bane 36 Entering Expressions sseseeeeeeeeeeeeececcecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaneaea 37 Reusing previous expressions and results 0 ccceeeeeeeeeeees 40 Storing a value in a Variables incisssigesdus sus kdvcwcruecnascraws 42 Complex numbers a casasstugs aagusaugatniage nds cesctvande wid vase owen wiee ius 44 Sharing ales wcmuss ets sasha isags sea adraade tr aiemunmietaabele 44 Online Helpman ae edan gii i coh E E wilds 46 2 Reverse Polish Notation RPN History in RPN MOE yee reen ena E E EA 48 Sample caleulaiions s cyeceurewscesepnceatnns rise preunsaeaiaratiuuseymeneiadeeta 49 Manipulating the stac ke a5 css asuyariwsrpee cana apsaasanra deaesnaeweneuncantnes 51 3 Computer algebra system CAS CAS VIEW dt a e a a e a i 53 CAS Cole nlationss isiseitiac tae ohtceakt atte elena teal snebtecesta 54 Seti Seeds Se E stts cacasnateah ad ab aaeas testa A TE 55 Contents 1 4 Exam Mode Modifying the default configuration ccccceeseeesteeetteeenees 62 Creating a new configuration cccccceesseceesceeeeeteeeeeteeeees 63 Activating Exam Mode 2 cceisnconttacacurnvece Maun rma irnenar tats 64 Cancelling exanimod es calstieseacdsnvicdacaiveuslseesrn neo Rerwters 66 Modifying configurations ieccuis sud cth enki area ineaeeaeteartee 66 To change a configuration oc ienaceve iver gueevartepediwauids Quacetors 66 To return to the default configuration ccccceeeseeeeteeeeees 67 Deleting contig htations
503. us meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regula tions Avis Canadien Cet appareil num rique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Can ada Product regulatory information European Union Regulatory Notice Products bearing the CE marking comply with the follow ing EU Directives Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC e EMC Directive 2004 108 EC Ecodesign Directive 2009 125 EC where applicable CE compliance of this product is valid if powered with the correct CE marked AC adapter provided by HP Compliance with these directives implies conformity to applicable harmonized European standards European Norms that are listed in the EU Declaration of Confor mity issued by HP for this product or product family and available in English only either within the product docu mentation or at the following web site www hp eu cer tificates type the product number in the search field The compliance is indicated by one of the following con formity markings placed on the product For non telecommunications products and for EU harmonized telecommunications products such as Bluetooth within power class below 10mW For EU non harmonized telecommunications products If applicable a 4 digit notified body number is inserted between CE and Please refer to the regulatory label provided on the prod uct The point of contact fo
504. using the calculator for the first time To charge the battery either Connect the calculator to a computer using the USB cable that came in the package with your HP Prime The PC needs to be on for charging to occur Connect the calculator to a wall outlet using the HP provided wall adapter Getting started A Battery Warning A Adapter Warning When the calculator is on a battery symbol appears in the title bar of the screen Its appearance will indicate how much power the battery has A flat battery will take approximately 4 hours to become fully charged To reduce the risk of fire or burns do not disassemble crush or puncture the battery do not short the external contacts and do not dispose of the battery in fire or water To reduce potential safety risks only use the battery provided with the calculator a replacement battery provided by HP or a compatible battery recommended by HP Keep the battery away from children e If you encounter problems when charging the calculator stop charging and contact HP immediately To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to equipment only plug the AC adapter into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times To reduce potential safety risks only use the AC adapter provided with the calculator a replacement AC adapter provided by HP or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP On off cancel operations To turn on To cancel
505. ut you can change the order of the items in history This is explained in Manipulating the stack on page 51 There are two ways to re use a result in history Method 1 deselects the copied result after copying method 2 keeps the copied item selected Method 1 1 Select the result to be copied You can do this by pressing or until the result is highlighted or by tapping on it 2 Press _ _ The result is copied to the entry line and is deselected Method 2 1 Select the result to be copied You can do this by pressing or until the result is highlighted or by tapping on it 2 Tap and select ECHO The result is copied to the entry line and remains selected Note that while you can copy an item from the CAS history to use in a Home calculation and copy an item from the Home history to use in a CAS calculation you cannot copy items from or to the RPN history You can however use CAS commands and functions when working in RPN mode Sample calculations The general philosophy behind RPN is that arguments are placed before operators The arguments can be on the entry line each separated by a space or they can be in history For example to multiply z by 3 you could enter ena JL 3 on the entry line and then enter the operator J Thus your entry line would look like this before entering the operator 13 Reverse Polish Notation RPN 49 However you could also have en
506. uted the values in the x column for x in the 116 Function app To go directly to a value To access the zoom options Other options expressions selected in Symbolic view 1 x and x 1 3 You can also scroll through the columns of the dependant variables labeled F1 and F2 in the illustration above You can also scroll the table vertically or horizontally using tap and drag gestures Place the cursor in the Einciion Nimeriaiend X F1 F2 X column and type 5 5 4 1 0025E1 9 02515723 7 845346E1 the desired value For 1 0050 1 9 05031447 7 890819E1 H 1 0075e1 9 07547170 7 936419E1 anil el 1 0101 1 9 10062893 7 982145e1 traight to the row 1 0126 1 9 12578616 8 027997E1 sra g 7 ETO 1 015161 9 15094340 8 073977E1 where x 10 1 017661 9 17610063 8 120082E1 1 0201 1 9 20125786 8 166315e1 E 1 0 10 zoom T T size nefn column Numerous zoom options are available by tapping EZ These are explained in Zoom on page 100 A quick way to zoom in or zoom out is to press or J This zooms in or out by the Num Zoom value set in the Numeric Setup view see page 115 The default value is 4 Thus if the current increment that is the Num Step value is 0 4 zooming in on the row whose x value is 10 will further divide that interval into four smaller intervals So instead of x values of 10 10 4 10 8 11 2 etc the x values will be 10 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4
507. utes the probability density at the value x given numerator n and denominator d degrees of freedom FISHER n d x Example FISHER 5 5 2 returns 0 158080231095 Functions and commands 319 Binomial Poisson Cumulative Normal Binomial probability density function Computes the probability of k successes out of n trials each with a probability of success of p Returns Comb n k if there is no third argument Note that n and k are integers with k lt n BINOMIAL n k p Example Suppose you want to know the probability that just 6 heads would appear during 20 tosses of a fair coin BINOMIAL 20 6 0 5 returns 0 0369644165039 Poisson probability mass function Computes the probability of k occurrences of an event during a future interval given p the mean of the occurrences of that event during that interval in the past For this function k is a non negative integer and wis a real number POISSON u k Example Suppose that on average you get 20 emails a day What is the probability that tomorrow you will get 15 POISSON 20 15 returns 0 0516488535318 Cumulative normal distribution function Returns the lower tail probability of the normal probability density function for the value x given the mean u and standard deviation of a normal distribution If only one argument is supplied it is taken as x and the assumption is that u 0 and o 1 NORMALD_ CDF u 0 x Example NORMALD CDF 0
508. value marked The corresponding X value is also shown Tap to see the critical Zvalue With the alpha level showing you can press or to decrease or increase the a level P 172021922639 Test Z 946205374811 The graph of the distribution is a 242 Inference app Importing statistics Open the Statistics 1Var app Clear unwanted data Enter data The Inference app can calculate confidence intervals and test hypotheses based on data in the Statistics 1 Var and Statistics 2Var apps The following example illustrates the process A series of six experiments gives the following values as the boiling point of a liquid 82 5 83 1 82 6 83 7 82 4 and 83 0 Based on this sample we want to estimate the true boiling point at the 90 confidence level 1 Open the Statistics Statistics 1Var Numeric View eee 1Var app Select Statistics 1Var nn Enter value or expression Peat ins size Make stars 2 If there is unwanted data in the app clear it All columns 3 In column D1 enter the boiling points found during the experiments 82L2_ 5 Le 83C ee 822 J Enter value or expression Edit Ins E Size a Stats 83l 7 eP BK Kel a ond fk 8 gt 822 J4 83 Inference app 243 Calculate 4 Calculate statistics eab Crate statis
509. vanced app You can also press amp i2 Graphing only 5 Advanced Graphing only p Parametric only Polar only Sequence only ve only Enters an Y in the Advanced Graphing app Enters the independent variable in the Parametric app You can also press i Enters the independent variable in the Polar app You can also press amp Enters the independent variable in the xtOn Sequence app You can also press Qi Enters the equals sign in the Solve app A shortcut equivalent to pressing Cz Displays the selected definition in full screen mode See Large results on page 40 for more information Evaluates dependent definitions See Evaluate a dependent definition on page 84 86 An introduction to HP apps Common operations in Symbolic Setup view Scope all apps Function Symbolic Setup Number Format System The Symbolic Setup view is the same for all apps lts primary purpose is to allow you to override three of the system wide settings specitied on the Home Settings window Press to open Symbolic Setup view Complex System Choose Angle Measure Override system wide settings 1 Tap once on the setting you want to change You can tap on the field name or the field 2 Tap again on the setting A menu of options appears 3 Select the new setting Note that selecting the Fixed Scientific or Engineering option on the Number Forma
510. variable U2 The result is that U2 N is no longer drawn in Plot view and has no column of values in the Numeric view of the Sequence app With another app as the current app you would have to enter Sequence UNCHECK 2 Test for check Tests whether a Symbolic view variable is checked Returns 1 if the variable is checked and 0 if it is not checked ISCHECK Digit Example With the Function app as the current app ISCHECK 3 checks to see if F3 X is checked in the Symbolic view of the Function app The Catlg menu brings Statistics 1Var together all the functions and commands available on the HP Prime However this section describes the functions and commands that can only be found on the Catlg menu The Math cas App Reg functions and commands that are also on the Math menu are 378 Functions and commands CHANGE TOTAL described in Keyboard functions on page 309 Those that are also on the CAS menu are described in CAS menu on page 324 The functions and commands specific to the Geometry app are described in Geometry functions and commands on page 165 and those specific to programming are described in Program commands on page 527 The matrix functions are described in Matrix functions on page 475and the list functions are described in List functions on page 457 Some of the options on the Catlg menu can also be chosen from the
511. variable f x and an interval for that variable as arguments Draws the polar plot r x for x in the interval specified plotpolar Expr Var Interval Example plotpolar n 2 x mn 1 plots a partial spiral Used in the Geometry app Symbolic view Given an expression in x and a vector containing three values draws the line y x the plot of the function defined by the expression over the domain defined by the interval between the last two values and draws the cobweb plot for the first n terms of the sequence defined recursively by the expression starting at the first value plotseq f Var Var Start Xmin Xmax Integern Example plotseq 1 x 2 x 3 1 6 5 plots y x y 1 x 2 from x 1 to x 6 then draws the first 5 terms of the cobweb plot for u n 1 u n 1 2 starting at u 0 3 Given the radius and angle of a point in polar form returns the point with rectangular coordinates in complex form polar point Radius Angle Example polar point 2 m 3 returns point 2 5 LS Functions and commands 405 pole POLYCOEF POLYEVAL polygon polygonplot Given a circle and a line returns the point for which the line is polar with respect to the circle pole Crcle Line Example pole circle 0 1 line 1 i 2 returns point 1 2 1 2 Returns the coefficients of a polynomial with roots given in the vector or list argument POLYCOEF Vector or POLYCOEF List Example POLYC
512. ve point on the entry line Between the parentheses add abscissa GB slope GC You can enter the commands by hand or choose them from one of two Toolbox menus App gt Measure or Catlg 20 Tap Geometry Symbolic View V GA plotfunc 3 sin x ee The definition of your V GB element GA 7 70265434582 A V GC tangent GA GB display green new point is added to Veeman Symbolic view When you return to Plot view you will see a point named D and it will have the same x coordinate as point B 21 Press BB 7 If you can t see point D B pan until it comes into 7 view The y coordinate f of D will be the i 2 derivative of the curve at L L 4 point B 8 6 4 Pointer 4 79 3 68 frst v_ New 11 Delete Since its difficult to read coordinates off the screen we ll add a calculation that will give the exact derivative to three decimal places and which we can display in Plot view 22 Press Gig Numeric view is where you enter calculations 23 Tap EEB 24 Tap and choose Measure gt slope 25 Between parentheses add the name of the tangent namely GC and tap GB Notice that the current slope is calculated and displayed The value here is dynamic that is if the slope of the 139 27 Press to return to tangent changes in Plot view the value of the slope is automatically updated in Numeric view top CS
513. ves 4 y 4 x 1 2 2 x 0 0 1 0 0 Performs integration by parts of the expression f x u x v x with f x as the first argument and u x or 0 as the second argument Specifically returns a vector whose first element is u x v x and whose second element is v x u x With the optional third fourth and fifth arguments you can specify a variable of integration and bounds of the integration If no variable of integration is provided it is taken as x ibpu f Var u Var Var Reall Real2 Example ibpu x ln x x returns x 2 1n x x ln x x Performs integration by parts of the expression f x u x v x with f x as the first argument and v x or O as the second argument Specifically returns a vector whose first element is u x v x and whose second element is v x u x With the optional third fourth and fifth arguments you can specify a variable of integration and bounds of the integration If no variable of integration is provided it is taken as x ibpdv f Var v Var Var Reall Real2 Example ibpdv 1n x x gives x ln x 1 328 Functions and commands F b F a Limits Riemann Sum Taylor Taylor of Quotient Transform Laplace Returns F b F a preval Expr F var Real a Real b Var Example preval x 2 2 2 3 gives 5 Returns in the neighborhood of n c an equivalent of the sum of Xpr var1 var2 for var2 from var2 1 to va
514. view Summary of menu buttons on page 104 The Trace option in the Advanced Graphing app works differently than in other apps and is described in detail in this chapter In this chapter we will explore the rotated conic defined by 2 2 x Txy 3y x yp EI IE a E A gt i 2 ms 126 Advanced Graphing app Open the app Define the open sentence Open the Adva nced Advanced Graphing Symbolic View 18 Graphing app Ev E v Select Advanced E vz Graphing H va E vs The app opens in the E vs Symbolic view mv Enter an open sentence edit v_ x_ _y_ show Eval_ Define the open sentence Advanced Graphing Symbolic View 125 2 2 Vivi X _7 XY 3Y XY og 2 10 4 105 woo E v E va E vs ve Enter an open sentence Note that displays the relations palette trom which relational operators can be easily selected This is the same palette that appears if you press eG Decide if you want to give an open sentence a custom color when it is plotted evaluate a dependent function deselect a definition that you don t want to explore incorporate variables math commands and CAS commands in a definition For the sake of simplicity we can ignore these operations in this example However they can be useful and are described in detail in Common operations in Symbolic view on page 81 Advanced Graphing app 127 Set up the
515. want the result to automatically update as the values it is dependent on change Without an equals sign you will be entering just the current value 210 Spreadsheet 10 Statistics 1Var app The Statistics 1 Var app can store up to ten data sets at one time It can perform one variable statistical analysis of one or more sets of data The Statistics 1 Var app starts with the Numeric view which is used to enter data The Symbolic view is used to specify which columns contain data and which column contains frequencies You can also compute statistics in Home and recall the values of specific statistics variables The values computed in the Statistics 1 Var app are saved in variables and can be re used in Home view and in other apps Getting started with the Statistics 1Var app Suppose that you are measuring the heights of students in a classroom to find the mean height The first five students have the following measurements 160 cm 165 cm 170 cm 175 cm and180 cm 1 Open the Statistics Statistics 1Var Numeric View D1 D2 D3 D4 1Var app 1 2 Select S i 5 Statistics 1Var f 7 8 2 10 Enter value or expression Pest ins size Make stats Statistics 1Var app 211 2 Enter the measurement data in column D1 160 165 Thre 2 165 170 370 4 175 175 IS 180 6 180 9 3 Find the mean of the m i Enter value or expression sample Tap to see x HI ts gi n IS
516. when you have finished Definitional building blocks The components that make up a symbolic definition can come from a number of sources From the keyboard You can enter components directly from the keyboard To enter 2X2 3 just press 2ABSX J lux J3 From user variables If for example you have created a variable called cost you could incorporate that into a definition either by typing it or choosing it from the User menu one of the sub menus of the Variables menu Thus you could have a definition that reads F1 X X COST To select a user variable press 25 tap WEIS select User Variables and then select the variable of interest 82 An introduction to HP apps From Home variables Some Home variables can be incorporated into a symbolic definition To access a Home variable press 23 tap UAN select a category of variable and select the variable of interest Thus you could have a definition that reads F1 X X2 Q Q is on the Real sub menu of the Home menu Home variables are discussed in detail in chapter 28 Troubleshooting beginning on page 507 From app variables All settings definitions and results for all apps are stored as variables Many of these variables can be incorporated into a symbolic definition To access app variables press ws tap EEE select the app select the category of variable and then select the variable of interest You could for instance have
517. wlett Packard Company except as allowed under the copyright laws Printing History Edition 1 July 2013 Contents Preface Manual conventions casccsseecavdecacas iarukic costanesay goes sesaannsteediaanthens 9 PHS sons aA ae eeu ea Ra AA E AAAA ERES IE ARAA e E EAE a ETA 10 1 Getting started Before starting te cit vet Gear al ee sh aver es cia cdne ea inna ae 11 On off cancel Sperations sacviatecta sens caaces series svatidnsdicuetacviaseuee 12 Thedisplay cnnan a e curse e E Ra 13 Sections of the display 4y acaieiave wera tieveedivcerande noice telotoregehts 14 Navigation sincsen a a a a Deceeteaes 16 Touch g stures sirar recne rane e ee 17 The keyboard arenaer ar aee et a ae 18 Context sensitive MENU eeeceee cece cece eeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeneeeeeeeees 19 Entry and edit Keysa t costae cdtvenitearaturaitovs wins EA 20 SHIP REVS rosarina a are iowa as A 22 Adding text ocsiarenitosatarareerahtinaiteraeeenacmae nee arcen aes 23 Math Keys iener gerrier nua ewan euaun aN ENSA 24 MENUS Prsi sure seuss dav TETA EEE ETENA EEE EEEE 28 Toolbox men sort a ES 29 IPUR OTS cars nsien odande xa EEE EEEa aG 29 SYStSi WIdES SEMIOS pujasnvieseagussnga sougs scene digs sckjupdevarcnlecy arenes 30 Home SEMIN GS stiis iess na E weeds E EERE 30 Specifying a Home setting sssneosnoneeoeeenoeesseeerseeesseeerreee 35 Mathematical coleulatiGnsiiy ss 2ujasiats seciesdreucnancrvaccnmucusteones 36 Choosing an entry ty pe ssags seas iv ssc rudy re
518. ws you to redefine the app s views and how a user will interact with those views This is done with a dedicated program functions with special names and b by redefining the views in the View menu 520 Programming in HP PPL Using There are nine dedicated program function names as dedicated shown in the table below These functions are called when program the corresponding keys shown in the table are pressed functions These functions are designed to be written into a program that controls an app and used in the context of that app Program Name Equivalent Keystrokes Symb Symbolic view SymbSetup Symbolic Setup Plot Plot view PlotSetup Plot Setup Num Numeric view NumSetup Numeric Setup Info Info view START Starts an app Start RESET Resets or initializes an app Redefining The View menu allows any app to define views in addition the View to the standard seven views shown in the table above By menu default each HP app has its own set of additional views contained in this menu The VIEW command allows you to redefine these views to run programs you have created for an app The syntax for the VIEW command is VIEW text function By adding VIEW text function before the declaration of a function you will override the list of views for the app For example if your app program defines three views SetSides RollDice and PlotResults when you press you will see SetSides
519. x 2 x 2 x returns 11 Reverses the order of the elements in a list or vector revlist List or revlist Vector Example revlist 1 2 3 returns 3 2 1 Uses Romberg s method to return the approximate value of a definite integral romberg Expr Var Vall Val2 Example romberg exp x 2 x 0 1 gives 1 46265174591 Given a matrix and an integer n returns the row n of the matrix Given a matrix and an interval returns a vector containing the rows of the matrix indicated by the interval row Matrix Integer or row Matrix Interval Example 123 row 4 5 6 2 returns 4 5 6 789 Functions and commands 413 rowAdd rowDim rowSwap rsolve Given a matrix and two integers returns the matrix obtained from the given matrix after the row indicated by the second integer is replaced by the sum of the rows indicated by the two integers rowAdd Matrix Integerl Integer2 Example 1 2 12 rowAdd 3 4 1 2 returns 4 6 5 6 56 Returns the number of rows of a matrix rowDim Matrix Example rowbin kz 3 gives 2 456 Given a matrix and two integers returns the matrix obtained from the given matrix after swapping the two rows indicated by the two integers rowSwap Matrix Integerl Integer2 Example T2 34 rowSwap 3 4 1 2 returns 2 56 56 Given an expression defining a recurrence relation a variable and an initial condition returns the closed form solution
520. xes provide a handy way of entering large or small numbers For example the speed of light is approximately 300 000 m s If you wanted to use that in a calculation you could enter it as 300_km s with the prefix k selected from the prefix palette Select the prefix you want before selecting the unit Unit calculations A number plus a unit is a measurement You can perform calculations with multiple measurements providing that the units of each measurement are from the same category For example you can add two measurements of length even lengths of different units as illustrated in the following example But you cannot add say a length measurement to a volume measurement 444 Units and constants Example Suppose you want to add 20 centimeters and 5 inches and have the result displayed in centimeters l If you want the result in cm enter the centimeter measurement first Select Length Select cm Now add 5 inches 5 Select Length Select in The result is shown as 32 7 cm If you had wanted the result in inches then you would have entered the 5 inches first To continue the example let s divide the result by 4 seconds 4 Select Time Select s The result is shown as 8 175 cm s7 Function Function Function 32 7_cm 8 175_ crn s Units and constants 445 Unit tools CONVERT MKSA 4 Now convert
521. y key key Py K_Div KS_Div KA_Div KSA_Div CE K_Dot KS_Dot KA_Dot KSA_Dot K_Down KS_Down KA_Down KSA_Down K_Enter KS_Enter KA_Enter KSA_Enter EJ K_Home KS_Home KA Home KSA_Home K Left KS_ Left KA Left KSA Left Oo K Right KS_Right KA_Right KSA_Right E K_Ln KS_ln KAn KSA_Ln 95 K_log KS_log KA_log KSA_log Bas K_Minus KS_Minus KA Minus KSA_Minus EA K Neg KS_Neg KA_Neg KSA_Neg K Num KS Num KA Num KSA_Num A K_On KA_On KSA_On K Plot KS_Plot KA Plot KSA Plot batt K_Plus KS_Plus KA Plus KSA_Plus v a F K_Power KS_Power KA_Power KSA_Power SIN K_Sin KS_Sin KA_Sin KSA_Sin EA K_Sq KS_Sq KA_Sq KSA_Sq K_Symb KS_Symb KA_Symb KSA_Symb TAN K Tan KS_Tan KA_Tan KSA_Tan K_Up KS_Up KA_Up KSA_Up Yes K Vars KS_Vars KA_Vars KSA_Vars K View KS View _KA_View KSA_View aa K_Xttn KS_Xttn KA_Xttn KSA_Xttn Programming in HP PPL 519 Internal name of keys and key states Continued Continued Continued Key Name cm m en key key key tes K_Help z KA_Help KSA_Help Ee K_Menu KS_Menu KA_Menu KSA_Menu K_Esc KS_Esc KA_Esc KSA_Esc K_Cas KS_Cas KA Cas KSA_Cas a K_Math KS_Math KA_Math KSA_Math K_Templ KS_Templ KA_Templ KSA_Templ K_Paren KS_Paren KA_Paren KSA_Paren K_Eex KS_Eex KA_Eex KSA_Eex K_Mul KS_Mul KA_Mul KSA_Mul em 3 gt S CE K_Space KS_Space KA_Space KSA_Space App programs An app is a unified collection of views programs notes and associated data Creating an app program allo
522. y y a y b such that y x0 y0 and where y x0 y x0 1 is the best approximation of the line formed by the elements in the list L logistic _regression Lst L Real x0 Real y0 Example logistic _regression 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 0 0 1 0 gives 17 77 1 exp 0 496893925384 x 2 82232341488 3 14159265359 i 2 48542227469 1 cosh 0 496893925384 x 2 82232341488 3 14159265359 i Returns a list of variables used in an expression lvar Expr Example lvar exp x 2 sin y gives exp x sin y Used in the Symbolic view of the Geometry app In the definition of a geometric object including the statement display magenta specifies that the object defined will be drawn in magenta Applies a function to the elements of the list map List Function Example map 1 2 3 x x 3 gives 1 8 27 Returns a list containing the elements of a matrix mat2list Matrix Example mat2list 1 8 4 9 gives 1 8 4 9 Given a matrix and an integer n returns the nth power of the matrix by jordanization matpow Matrix Integer 400 Functions and commands MAXREAL mean median member MINREAL Example matpow 1 2 3 4 n gives sqrt 33 3 sqrt 33 5 2 n 6 ee sqrt 33 3 sqrt 33 5 2 n 6 12 sqrt 33 sqrt 33 3 on 2 n sqrt 33 3 mee alae mg ah 3 sqrt 33 3 sqrt 33 5 2 sqrt 33
523. you have created To delete a configuration l If the Exam Mode screen is not showing press ETA EM top ond top CEA Select the configuration you want to delete from the Configuration list 3 Tap and choose Delete When asked to confirm the deletion tap or press _Fier_ Exam Mode 67 68 Exam Mode An introduction to HP apps Much of the functionality of the HP Prime is provided in packages called HP apps The HP Prime comes with 18 HP apps 10 dedicated to mathematical topics or tasks three specialized Solvers three function Explorers a spreadsheet and an app for recording data streamed to the calculator from an external sensing device You launch an app by first pressing which displays the Application Library screen and tapping on the icon for the app you want What each app enables you to do is outlined in the following where the apps are listed in alphabetical order App name Use this app to Advanced Explore the graphs of symbolic open Graphing sentences in x and y Example 2 2 x y 64 DataStreamer Collect real world data from scientific sensors and export it to a statistics app for analysis Finance Solve time value of money TVM problems and amortization problems Function Explore real valued rectangular functions of y in terms of x Example y 2x7 3x 5 Geometry Explore geometric constructions and perform geometric calculations Inference Explore confiden
524. you are currently tracing and another graph You need to have at least two selected expressions in Symbolic view Finds the intersection closest to the tracing cursor Displays the coordinate values and moves the cursor to the intersection The resulting x value is saved in a variable named Isect 124 Function app Advanced Graphing app The Advanced Graphing app enables you to define and explore the graphs of symbolic open sentences in x y both or neither You can plot conic sections polynomials in standard or general form inequalities and functions The following are examples of the sorts of open sentences you can plot l x 3 y 5 1 2x 3y lt 6 mod x 3 X 4x 4 6 1 gt 0 2 3 4 sin x y 5 gt sin 8 atan 5 The illustrations below show what these open sentences look like when plotted Example 1 Example 2 X 15 9 X 15 9 0 Advanced Graphing app 125 Example 3 Example 4 Example 5 Example 6 X 715 9 0 Menu X 715 9 0 Menu Getting started with the Advanced Graphing app The Advanced Graphing app uses the customary app views Symbolic Plot and Numeric described in chapter 5 For a description of the menu buttons available in this app see Symbolic view Summary of menu buttons on page 86 Plot view Summary of menu buttons on page 96 and Numeric
525. zero press mA RJ 6 Solve for the unknown variable A Move the cursor to the A field and tap E Therefore the acceleration Solve Numeric View V 27 78 U 16 67 A 2 4691975 D 100 needed to increase the speed of a car from 16 67 m s 60 kph to 27 78 m s 100 kph over a distance of 100 m is approximately 2 4692 m s Enter value or press SOLVE DEEN SOLVE The equation is linear with respect to the variable A Hence we can conclude that there are no further solutions for A We can also see this if we plot the equation Solve app 261 Plot the The Plot view shows one graph for each side of the solved equation equation You can choose any of the variables to be the independent variable by selecting it in Numeric view So in this example make sure that A is highlighted The current equation is V U 2AD The plot view will plot two equations one for each side of the equation One of these is Y V2 with V 27 78 making Y 771 7284 This graph will be a horizontal line The other graph will be Y U 2AD with U 16 67and D 100 making Y 200A 277 8889 This graph is also a line The desired solution is the value of A where these two lines intersect Plot the equation for variable A Select Auto Scale Select Both sides of En where n is the number of the selected equation E1 771 7284 By default the tracer is active Using the cursor

HP NW280AAABA User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents